Archive of Our Own ^beta

Chapter Text

As always, Mai was the first one to the room. As the least experienced of the Lu Ten’s lieutenants, she always made sure to show up early and get the room prepared, ensuring that all of the maps and visual aids were ready and that the collected intelligence was ready for review. She learned a lot every time she sat down with Lu Ten’s team. Someday she would join their ranks.

“Mai, you lovely blade maiden, are you prepared to share the secrets of the realm with our esteemed group?” Kin Hai asked as he entered the room. Just shorter than Mai with dark brown hair, Kin Hai was born in the Fire Colony of mixed parents. He was a genial, if longwinded, compatriot. But he was a skilled investigator.

“We had a lot of new information come in, and Lu Ten wants to make sure everyone is on the same page. Fresh sets of eyes looking at the data may be useful too.” Mai responded in her usual monotone.

Kin Hai was about to respond when the remaining members of the team arrived. Crown Prince Lu Ten was the first in line. She gave him a small smile, which earned a big grin from him. She had started working for him soon after his miraculous recovery. He was a great boss and a great prince. Rifa, Naazu and Korvyn came in right on Lu Ten’s heels.

“Hello, Mai. I see that everything is ready to go. I don’t know what I’d do without you.” Lu Ten said with a grin, causing Mai to roll her eyes. It was a running joke that he’d be incompetent and out of touch without her.

“I have all the packets ready and the maps laid out.” Mai answered. Everyone made their way to their seats.

“Alright, let’s get started.” Lu Ten said, shifting into intelligence gathering chief mode. “The big issue is the government flux in Ba Sing Se seems to have come to a stop. For now, at least. The last three governments since the overthrow and execution of Long Feng have been a disaster for the Earth Kingdom. But at least the new government has stopped putting people to the Spike, so we’re hoping that civil unrest will end. The refugees flooding the Fire Colony and Alokhai have caused security issues.”

“The few sources that we have left inside Ba Sing Se say that the new rulers are a group of religious zealots from a sect called the Hirythracastin Ascension of Glorious Illumination,” Korvyn added. “They have created a ruling body called the Supreme Committee to administer the Earth Kingdom. They are considered honest but frightfully ignorant of political, economic and military matters.”

“Well, all that we can hope for is that they can at least stabilize the economy enough to forestall another governmental collapse. Please let me know if your sources get any additional information about the new leadership group.” Lu Ten said. “The next item is the Northwest Colony. The Freedom Guard has become the face of the resistance movement against the Fire Nation. Steel production has dropped precipitously and could become a national security threat if production levels can’t be restored. What can you tell us of the current situation, Naazu?”

Naazu had possibly the most intimidating look of the group. She was short and had impressive musculature, and she was widely renowned as one of the strongest firebenders in the colonies. As usual, her long black hair was pulled back into a bun, highlighting the long scar going from just above her right eyebrow over to the edge of her hairline by her partially missing left ear. She was focused and had a no-nonsense attitude. Mai liked her.

“Their internal security measures are tight and they have the support of nearly the entire population of the Northwest Colony, making infiltration extremely difficult. Yu Dao seems to be the hot spot for their most aggressive politicking; we did manage to find and destroy two illicit printing operations for their propaganda. Not that it mattered; there was barely a slowdown in pamphlet production. Their sabotage operations have become more sophisticated and precise. They now favor targeting primary exchange points in the rail system as well as hitting key chokepoints in the steel production facilities.” Naazu answered, pointing out the relevant exchange points on the railroad map.

“Have the new security protocols helped?” Lu Ten asked with a sigh. Everyone already knew the answer.

“No, sir. We believe that collaborators inside the military are sharing security information. Nearly half of the leadership and a third of the security forces are of mixed descent or married to a local. There are simply too many security leaks to plug with our current personnel.” Naazu answered.

Lu Ten pinched the bridge of his nose. They were all thinking the same thing. The Northwest Colony was going to be the match that sets the Fire Nation ablaze. “Continue investigating and do the best that you can to identify any members of the Freedom Guard. Turning members of the group may be the only way to break this group. Kin Hai, what of the Fire Colony?”

“The situation is very different there, sir. The economy is booming and both manufacturing and agricultural output is strong; it is indeed the engine driving the Fire Nation economy. Much of the credit goes to Minister Horzun; he’s got a great touch with the people and his economic plans are both popular and profitable. Tax revenue is up substantially, even after he reduced rates for most people.” Kin Hai stated.

But then his look turned more serious. “But the big issue is the rise of the purity movements. Instead of mixing, people of fire and earth descent are segregating more than ever, with animosity between the groups becoming more prevalent. We haven’t seen the creation of bending gangs like in Vi Yan Zo, but there is growing social strife. If you look at the census map that dear Mai posted for us, you can see that the fire nationals tend to self-locate towards the southwest region towards the coast while the earth nationals tend to go to more inland areas to the east and north.”

Everyone looked over the areas Kin Hai referenced on the map. It was concerning because the earth national areas abutted the western reaches of the Earth Kingdom. The threat of succession could become an issue if the purity movements gain more power and the leaders of the Earth Kingdom become competent.

“We need to begin actions to alleviate the allure of the purity movements. We need to up the investigation into the leaders of the groups and start working on new messages to promote peace and interconnectivity.” Lu Ten responded. “What about the southern Fire Islands and Alokhai?”

“The Fire Islands have been doing very well economically. As members of the Southern Coastal Economic Region, they are doing a booming business as the main ports for trade between the Fire Nation and the SDC. Whaletail Island hosts two of the five most active ports in that economic region. They’ve even begun creating their own manufacturing sites to support the vigorous trade between the Fire Nation and the other economies. No real social problems have emerged and relations between the earth, fire and water nationals living in the islands seem to be very cordial.” Rifa said.

Several inches shorter than Mai, she had dark brown hair and rather plain features. Not ugly, but definitely not someone who stood out in a crowd. Which worked great for spywork. She had taught Mai so much when she had first been recruited into the Royal Intelligence service.

“The story for Alokhai is much the same. They are deeply tied into the Northern Economic Region. Tax revenues are up and the relationship between the earth, water and fire nationals are excellent.” Rifa continued. “They also have a thriving economic relationship with the SDC.”

“It’s great to get have some good news.” Lu Ten said, a small smile on his face. “And what of the SDC?”

The Southern Defense Coalition. Tired of being at the mercy of the larger nations, many of the regions in the southern part of the earth continent banded together with Kyoshi Island and the Southern Water Tribe for protection. What was once a ragtag agglomeration of nations has become a political, economic and military force.

“The SDC economies are booming, and they have made absolutely astounding strides in technology, especially in the engineering and manufacturing sectors. Our sources indicate that they have created a technologically advanced fleet of military naval vessels. Omashu continues to be a manufacturing powerhouse, and most of the other nations have started developing their own manufacturing bases.” Korvyn said. Short and stocky, with a black beard going gray, Korvyn was a man of great intelligence and diligence. “Their cohesion has grown strong and we estimate that if you take them as a whole, the economy of the SDC is about two-thirds that of the Fire Nation, including all of our colonies.”

Lu Ten looked pensive. Mai knew that look. He was thinking about Azula. She had been the one to oversee the talks between these nations after the treaty summit between the Earth Kingdom and Fire Nation three years ago. She may not have created the SDC, but she helped plant the seeds. And then she disappeared from the face of Atla days later.

Lu Ten still hasn’t recovered from it. “Well, as was mentioned earlier, the Fire Nation has good relations with the SDC through the Fire Islands and Alokhai. We will obviously continue monitoring their progress. Anything of interest about the Northern Water Tribe?”

“No, sir.” Mai answered. “They have become more active in trade, but they don’t interact with the other regions beyond that, as far as we can tell. Alokhai is their biggest trade partner in the region.”

“Considering that the Fire Lady is the daughter of Chief Arnook, it isn’t unexpected that relations between our nations are cordial.” Lu Ten responded. “Let’s follow up on the regions of interest and do what we can to protect the Fire Nation’s interests.”

The group spent another two hours going over action plans and making decisions about how to deal with some of the more difficult groups in the colonies. There was a lot of work to be done.

Chapter Text

Naazu walked amongst the horde of people listening the protesters spreading their propaganda. The Freedom Guard had become louder and more aggressive over the past three years, but also wilier in their methods. Secret printing presses, no official public members, tight organizational structure, and near fanatical followers. They were a thorn in Fire Nation’s side. But this latest propaganda, if it was true, could be the match that ignites the bonfire.

“The People’s Princess, she understood what makes the world go round. The People’s Princess traveled the nations to share her vision of a future based on economic cooperation and honest trade alliances. The People’s Princess was the lone voice of reason in the Fire Nation, a woman of intelligence and subtlety in a nation of aggression and belligerence. Is it any wonder that the voice of the People’s Princess was silenced?” The short, stocky man railed, his face red and his mannerisms exaggerated as he got the crowd more and more excited. No one needed to ask who the People’s Princess was.

“We now know exactly why she was cast aside, hidden from view, possibly murdered. A child who saw beyond the limitations of her people, a girl who rose above the petty nature of her nation, a woman who had a vision for not just the Fire Nation, no, but for the world at large!” The man brandished a series of papers in his hands, holding them up as if they were holy and sacred texts.

“Here, in my hands, are the People’s Princess’s personal papers, the very papers where she wrote of the plan that she endorsed for the Northwest Colony. Let me read you the very words of the young prophet Azula, for she could indeed see the future!” Naazu felt herself freeze. If they had gotten their hands on actual writings of the princess, writings that supported their cause, it would be a terrible blow for the Fire Nation.

“Here is her plan in her own words. Whoever holds the Northwest Colony, whether it be the Fire Nation or reconstituted Earth Kingdom, holds a poisonous viper-rat to their chest. The people are strong and honest, but their hearts have turned bitter against the Fire Nation for its history of exploitation and tyranny. All that they have asked for is more freedom to guide their own affairs, to gain just a bit more of the rewards for their toils, to be appreciated for what they have contributed to the Fire Nation’s cause. They have asked politely, but for naught. And now, their hearts have been hardened and they will continue to chafe under our bit if we do not correct our course. I propose that the only truly viable way to keep the hearts and affections of these industrious and valuable people is to help them create their own nation. This paper will put forth a plan to help them create an independent nation that will remain a steady partner to the Fire Nation and a valuable asset to the world at large. We ignore their cries for freedom at our own peril.”

The man paused, to let the words that he had spoken settle into the hearts and minds of our listeners. “This was not an academic writing papers for her learned colleagues. This was not a firebrand seeking the destruction of social order and advocating anarchy. This was the prodigal princess of the Fire Nation, who by the age of fourteen was known throughout the world as the leading architect of the Regional Economic Committees, which now stands as the most important international agency of our age. Were her words heeded? No! She disappears without a trace shortly after these words are shared with her government!”

The crowd roars its disapproval and grows wild and agitated. Naazu begins to pull back. These rallies can get heated, and violence is not uncommon. The words of the man are trouble. She knew for a fact that the princess had indeed argued this position to then Prince Zuko before the treaty negotiations with the Earth Kingdom. And that the princess disappeared without a trace the night she left Omashu.

Naazu saw that the document, or at least excerpts of it, were being handed out by boys to anyone that was interested. And everyone was interested. She fought and elbowed her way up to a boy and got her own copy. She would take this and pass it up through the chain of command. If they were lucky, there was a way to prove this was an obvious fake. If not, things may well get a lot worse.

The town of Ho Kun was relatively small, but it was the administrative hub for nearly two thirds of the Central Earth Kingdom. Central was a misnomer, since this was the westernmost holding of the Earth Kingdom, but they still considered the entire western region their territory, so they stuck with this term.

But it was the place where the government of Ba Sing Se agreed to meet with the separatists of the Central Earth Kingdom. A massive civil war was in the offing, with other dissatisfied regions in the Earth Kingdom watching closely. Which is why Ivaku was assisting Successor Rajeen in trying to negotiate a peaceful settlement between the two parties. The Southern Defense Coalition was recognized as a nonpartisan bystander in this disagreement, and their offer to facilitate talks was accepted by both sides.

The situation was very tense. King Kuei’s government had been ineffectual, to say the least. Two years after signing the treaty with the Fire Nation that reestablished the Earth Kingdom, King Kuei had been overthrown and executed by Long Feng, his highest advisor. No one was particularly shocked by this. What shocked everyone was that seven months ago, after only ruling as Supreme Counselor for four months, Long Feng was in turn overthrown and executed.

A purge followed that saw thousands of nobles, political leaders and military commanders put to the Spike. Three successive waves of ruling councils had been formed only to immediately disband. And among this turmoil the Central Earth Kingdom had declared that it was seceding to form a new self-ruling nation.

“The hall appears to be satisfactory for the delegation sizes. The Earth Stewardship Grand Committee delegation has chosen to stay at the Wayfair Inn, while the Westland Freedom delegation that aren’t local will be staying at the StoneArm Bed & Breakfast.” Ivaku updated Rajeen. Ivaku had been tasked with scouting out the physical layouts and creating a functional action plan and itinerary.

Successor Rajeen had met with the lead delegates to ensure that there weren’t any last-minute changes they needed to be aware of. It was shocking how many times last minute requests and objections had nearly ruined a conference. Next in line to become the Matron of Rokishe, Rajeen was of medium height with long brown hair that she normally wore in a braid. Pretty with striking green eyes and freckles, she just oozed charisma.

Rajeen smiled. That had to be a good sign. “Both sides are ready to start tomorrow. As far as I can tell, both sides are coming in with reasonable expectations. Hopefully, we can find that happy middle ground that probably won’t satisfy either party but will give them enough breathing room to coexist.”

“I certainly hope so. The entire earth continent seems ready to burn if a match is struck. Let’s do our part and make sure it doesn’t happen here.” Ivaku said. She and Rajeen had been working together for two years brokering deals, although these were the highest stakes. But Ivaku didn’t think it was too prideful to say that she and Rajeen were the best negotiating duo this side of Aang and Katara.

“Agreed. I think we’ve done what we can for tonight. Let’s go grab a bite to eat and then relax. It might be our last chance to kick back for a while.” Rajeen stretched her arms up over her head and arched her back. When she was done, she turned a predatory smile on Ivaku. “So, heard from Hun Ro lately?”

Ivaku blushed ever so slightly. Her relationship wasn’t a secret or anything, but she still felt a little uncomfortable talking about it. “He sent a letter a few days ago. He was heading up to assist the Fire Nation negotiate with the purity movements. He’s meeting up with delegates from Lenth and Gerva to try and promote the virtues of cultural diversity and acceptance.”

Rajeen just laughed. “Hun Ro definitely has the gift of gab. But he’s a good guy and he’s gotten pretty skilled at the whole political thing. He’s going to be a mover and a shaker, especially if he can keep a catch like you on his arm.”

“Yes, he definitely is a talker. And he’s been patient with me, and I really appreciate that. And, well, I think it is time that we became more serious. I really do think he’s the one.” Ivaku looked down and hugged herself. It had taken her a long time to be comfortable around men in that way. But Hun Ro was just so sweet and good-hearted that she couldn’t help but love him.

Rajeen put her hand on Ivaku’s arm and gave a gentle squeeze. “You deserve someone great. And he deserves someone great like you. You two really are the cutest thing. I’m happy for both of you.”

“Thank you, Rajeen. But let’s go get that food.” Ivaku gave her friend a predatory smile of her own. “Maybe we can find a suitable man for you while we’re here too.”

Rajeen laughed out loud. “It never hurts to see what they have in stock while traveling.”

Zuko smiled as he watched Izumi toddle around the Royal Gardens. The turtleducks all knew to scatter when she came their way. She was far grabbier than they were comfortable with. But they would always approach when Yue sat with Izumi and showed her how to gently toss the bread. Yue was truly remarkable with Izumi. She never needed to raise her voice to get Izumi to mind. Well, at least as long as Yue was looking. She became her normal hyperactive terror of a self once mommy’s back was turned.

He sighed as he turned to make his way back to the royal study. Things weren’t going well and he needed to get them under control soon or disaster might befall the four nations. He saw that Lord Waihu waiting respectfully outside the study doors as he approached. No one was allowed inside the study without the Fire Lord present.

“Good morning, Lord Waihu. Is there anything significant to report this morning?” Zuko was a busy man and he didn’t have time for small talk. People knew his style by now and were ready for his approach. This is the respect a Fire Lord deserves.

“Yes, my Lord. We have gotten our hands on potent propaganda being circulated by the Freedom Guard. They are circulating what they claim are the personal papers of Azula. The papers delineate a plan that called for helping the Northwest Colony establish their own independent nation and political system in return for favorable trade status with the Fire Nation. It called for a three-year establishment period, followed by a two-year plan for complete withdrawal of Fire Nation troops. We have not established the authenticity of the papers yet, my Lord, but there is a good chance that they are legitimate.”

Zuko felt his blood run cold. “Let me see the papers.” Lord Waihu handed them over and Zuko quickly skimmed through the document. He sighed and set them down. “I can’t guarantee that this is her exact plan, but it was very similar to the proposal she made to me after the Phoenix Sage Insurrection, just before we negotiated the peace with the Earth Kingdom.”

“I see.” Lord Waihu looked uncomfortable. “Do you believe that she is helping them, my Lord?”

Zuko pondered that question. It had been over three years since Azula had disappeared off the face of Atla. Mother had talked to bounty hunters, informants, mystics, fortune tellers. Anyone and everyone that claimed to have any natural or supernatural ability to find missing persons had been consulted. And absolutely nothing. No confirmed sightings. No writings that could credibly be attributed to her; some hacks had tried to write in her name, but it was obvious in an instant that they were fakes. Her ideas were so well articulated and her writings so distinct that it was nearly impossible to fake.

“No, I believe that someone in the Fire Nation who is sympathetic to the Freedom Guard leaked these papers. Azula had been adamant that the Northwest Colony was a poisoned holding. That it would tie down our resources by way of constant rebellions and insurrections while the extraction of resources would be sabotaged and otherwise hindered.”

Zuko saw it on the face of Lord Waihu. The man was loyal to the Fire Nation and the Fire Lord, so he would never utter a word against the official policies. But Lord Waihu knew that Azula had been proven right. Zuko gritted his teeth. Even after being gone for three years, he was still living in her shadow. Her legend had grown. She had become the People’s Princess, with peasants from all the nations proclaiming that she had been the voice of reason. With all the strife and discontent around the globe, the Regional Economic Committees were probably the most respected institutions in the four nations.

A group called Agni’s Harmonious Accord had even begun advocating for the removal of the requirement that the Fire Lord be a firebender, citing that the most capable princess in recorded history was ineligible for the throne because she couldn’t light a candle by flicking her fingers. And there was a good bit of resentment at the Fire Nation because of all the rumors that Zuko had her killed or imprisoned because she was a threat to his rule.

Damn that fire witch.

Zuko calmed himself. “Have the propaganda department start issuing counterpoints claiming that it is a fake and obviously flawed. Find the printers involved with this and destroy them. We may need to ban the mechanical printing of all pamphlets and books in the Fire Colonies.”

Lord Waihu looked like he was about to speak, but then decided to keep his thoughts to himself. Good. Zuko had already made up his mind. “Of course, my Lord. There are several other correspondences from Prince Lu Ten also.”

“Thank you, Waihu. You’re dismissed.” Lord Waihu bowed and made his way out. Zuko reviewed the documents and found that they were full of more bad news. He sat down at his desk and got to work figuring out how to dig his nation out of this hole.

Having just arrived in Yu Dao, Aang had been unaware of the exact words of the writings. But he couldn’t help but sigh as he read through the propaganda that was reported to be the personal papers of Azula which detailed her proposal for creating an independent nation of the Northwest Colony. Had this plan been enacted, the region would probably be calm and the people happy and productive, perhaps even celebrating the formation of their government as he sits here. But alas, that is not the way the world went.

“You knew her better than I did. Do you think that she wrote this?” Aang asked Katara. His negotiation partner and sometime girlfriend gave a sigh very similar to the one he had just released.

“Yes, I do. She loved the Fire Nation, and if beating the Northwest Colony into submission had been the way to keep it strong, she might have supported it. But Azula always seemed to be five steps ahead of everyone else, finding solutions to problems that the rest of us hadn’t even seen yet. As she was fond of saying about herself, she wasn’t nice or sentimental, but she was innovative and solution oriented. And I think she saw this trainwreck coming, but she couldn’t convince Zuko and Iroh to buy into her vision.”

Aang pondered her words. But in the end, he decided that it didn’t really matter if Azula did or didn’t write the words, what mattered was that virtually everyone in the Northwest Colony believes that she did. “How has the Fire Nation response played out? How are people taking the shutting down of their mechanical printers?”

“Just like every other heavy-handed remedy, all that was done is inflame the separatists even more.” She sat in the chair across from him, wringing her hands as she continued speaking. “I like Zuko and the other royals, I really do, but they are all blinded by their vision of a greater Fire Nation. They refuse to accept that the Northwest Colony is all but lost to them.”

“I fear that you are right. But let’s go meet with Governor Jian Ru. He proposed that we have a forum with the community leaders to see if we can identify a non-violent path forward.” Aang answered, getting to his feet. But they both knew the Azula papers were a problem.

They made their way out of their guest house and walked towards the civic building. As requested, the Fire Nation guards stayed back so as not to create an intimidating presence around him and Katara. It was a short walk, but Aang made time to stop and talk to some of the shopkeepers and their patrons. He was here to help both sides come to an amicable agreement, not be the Fire Nation’s enforcer.

He had just accepted an apple from the grocer when an explosion shook the civic building. Aang turned in horror as the building collapsed. But he was even more worried by what he felt through the ground. Earthbending. Somebody had used explosions and earthbending together. He was already moving towards the disaster. He used an airburst to propel himself over the defensive walls and land in the courtyard, where he saw the Fire Nation guards fighting earthbenders in brown and green uniforms.

He was in the fray before either side could register. Quick air blasts knocked the earthbenders over and out. But he didn’t wait, he ran towards the building. If there were survivors, he had to get them out quickly. But he feared what he would find. He stomped his foot and his seismic sense gave him a mental image of the destruction. Yes, there were pockets of survivors that weren’t crushed.

He stomped his foot to create a path and then swept his arms to clear the way, creating a small tunnel from the surface to the nearest occupied chamber. “Come towards the sound of my voice, this is the Avatar and I’ve created a tunnel!” He felt them start clambering up and moved on to the next site. At each location he evaluated the situation and found the best solution. Sometimes it was tunnels, other times it was lifting heavy beams off survivors.

After about a half hour of continuous struggle, there were no more survivors to unbury. He turned to the makeshift medical area where Katara was already leading the healing efforts. He was on his way to join her when a Fire Nation guard approached him.

“Avatar, sir. I thought that you should know that Governor Jian Ru died in the attack. Lady Kona is seriously injured but will probably survive.” The guard said, fatigue evident in his voice.

“Thank you. Who is in command?” Aang asked.

“Lieutenant Naazu has taken command since this is being treated as an act of war.” The guard answered. And Aang had to agree. That was exactly what this was. An act of war. And Aang feared that this was only the first salvo.

These were undoubtedly the strangest negotiations that Ivaku had ever been involved in. It had been over three years since Azula had left everyone behind to fight her epic battle. And Ivaku still dreamed that she might one day return. But she would be surprised at what she would find. The People’s Princess was negotiating a peace treaty while off world.

Both earth delegations had gotten hold of a copy of Azula’s personal papers; and Ivaku had absolutely no doubt that they were authentic, since she had helped proofread them and act as a sounding board for many of Azula’s ideas. And seeing the absolute disaster that the Northwest Colony had become, the delegates from both sides were using her ideas as the foundation for their negotiations. And knowing that Ivaku had been Azula’s traveling companion and assistant, her voice carried a great deal of weight when questions arose about Azula’s ideas.

In less than two weeks, they had put together a plan calling for a confederation, with the former Central Earth Kingdom getting administrative independence but still tied economically and militarily to the greater Earth Kingdom. Things got heated on a few of the specific points, but overall, it was going smoothly and the big issues seemed to have been hammered out.

The focus of the two delegations had actually improved when they heard about the attack on the civic center in the Northwest Colony. Neither side wanted to repeat the mistakes of the Fire Nation. There was still posturing to be done by both sides so that they could claim victory, but both Ivaku and Rajeen thought that an agreement was very nearly signed. If this became the model for the other Earth Kingdom regions looking for more autonomy, it would be a magnificent precedent.

“Will the Stewardship delegates please refer to section 9, item 3 for the specific clause.” Rajeen said, waiting as the Earth Stewardship Grand Committee delegates opened their documents to the correct page. “You’ll see…”

Her words were cut off as the door to the proceedings burst open and a regally dressed military officer entered, followed by about a dozen troops.

“This session is hereby dissolved under the direction of the Supreme Committee’s Chairman. The Westland Freedom delegates are hereby ordered to disband and return to their normal duties. Martial law has been declared for the entirety of the Central Earth Kingdom.” Three junior officers handed scrolls to the two delegations and also to Rajeen, who was just staring in shock at the unopened scroll in her hand.

“But sir,” Rajeen said, finally coming to her senses. “We are only days away from having a mutually agreed upon deal.”

The officer sighed. He spoke loudly so that all could hear. “I’m sorry, Successor. The Fire Nation has decreed that since several Earth Kingdom citizens were involved in the attack that killed their governor in the Northwest Colony, the Earth Kingdom must pay reparations in the form of territory concessions. They are demanding that the Central Earth Kingdom be made a client state of the Fire Nation and that Yun Zhi be returned to Fire Nation control. The Supreme Committee will not allow this.”

Ivaku was absolutely dumbstruck. The Fire Nation couldn’t handle what it has, why the fuck would they try to take more. They had to know that these were things that the Earth Kingdom would never give. They were looking for a provocation. She exchanged a glance with Rajeen, who seemed to be thinking the same thing.

“I have been asked to thank the two of you for your service. The fact that the negotiations were so near completion is a testament to your skill, but it would be safer for you to return to your own nation while this situation plays out. The Earth Kingdom will provide transport for you to travel through our lands to return to your people.” The officer bowed to them.

“Thank you, sir. It looks like we’ll be taking you up on your offer.” Rajeen said, with a deep sigh. Ivaku’s heart was heavy. A peaceful solution was so near.

Zuko, what are you doing?

“Zuko, what are you doing?” Aang asked. Minutes aga, Appa had landed in the courtyard, uninvited, and now an angry Avatar was in his throne room.

“I don’t answer to you, Aang. The Earth Kingdom has meddled in our affairs, and now they must be shown that there is a cost to their actions.” Zuko replied, smoothly. Ursa subtly nods from her position to his right. They had worked out this strategy with the generals and intelligence officers.

“You have no evidence of that, Zuko. Just because they are Earth Kingdom citizens doesn’t mean that they were directed to take these actions by the Earth Kingdom government. What you’ve done is reckless and foolhardy, and you could ignite a war that could engulf the world just like your great grandfather did.”

“It’s unfortunate that it came to this, but it was clear that the Earth Kingdom was ran by fools three years ago and that they are ran by fools now. They have been trying to subvert our rule in the Fire Colonies ever since we so graciously allowed them to reform their country. They can fight if their cause is just.”

Zuko had little regard for the Earth Kingdom military. He wasn’t even sure why they called themselves the Earth Kingdom; they committed regicide months ago and were now ran by some kind of committee of peasants and such. Then they sent thousands of their own people to the Spike, executed for not having the right political and spiritual beliefs. Barbarians. Spies inside the Earth Kingdom told of a military with no real leadership. Now was the time to reclaim what rightfully belonged to the Fire Nation.

“We understand that you are shocked and angry by the attack, but this is the wrong way to restore balance. You risk tipping the world into war and disaster.” Katara inserted.

“We will not allow you to upset the balance, Zuko. You are the aggressor here, and you will be dealt with accordingly.” Aang looked more serious than Zuko thinks that he’s ever seen him.

“Are you threatening me, Aang? I am the Fire Lord and my word is law here!” Zuko feels his temper getting the best of him, but how dare the Avatar come here and challenge his rule.

“And I am the Avatar! And I will do what I must to maintain balance!” Aang shouts back, his eyes and tattoos turning a bright white for just an instant. “Don’t start something that you can’t finish.”

And with that, Aang and Katara turn and leave. He thought about having the archers take him down, but he couldn’t bring himself to do it. Not yet. But if the Avatar kept pushing, he would do what must be done to restore the glory of the Fire Nation.

Chapter Text

Zin Tee had to suppress yet another sigh as he listened to the racist diatribes of the two purity movement leaders. He saw the same forlorn look on the faces of Senji and Hun Ro. There would be no negotiating with these zealots. Being a nonbender, the two groups didn’t hold much antipathy for him, but Senji being a firebender and Hun Ro being an earthbender immediately set off the rival groups.

Of course, he knew of their other prejudices too. No doubt that if they knew the meaning of his jevalda, they would turn against him too. Hayan didn’t want to travel to the heart of the Fire Colonies. It looks like his husband had more sense than Zin Tee did. A gay waterbender in the most conservative region of the Fire Colonies may cause a riot if they figure it out.

“We understand your visions for purity, but that dream is not achievable in the Fire Colonies. There are too many people with connections to the other cultures and bending types to easily set up ‘Purity Zones’. We advise you to negotiate an emigration to the Earth Kingdom or Fire Nation proper if you wish for a more homogenous lifestyle.” Hun Ro said, sounding very firm in his statement. Considering he was dating a high profile waterbender and had briefly been the brother-in-law to the Crown Prince of the Fire Nation, Zin Tee knew that Hun Ro had no sympathy for the purity movements.

Both movements began ranting and raving, but the three delegates gave each other knowing glances, signaling that their job here was done. They gracefully extracted themselves from the meeting and made their way back to the Southern Defense Coalition embassy. Alokhai wasn’t part of the SDC, but when Princess Azula told Fo Yang about the live and let live city of Lenth in the south, many in Gerva felt that they had found a cultural sibling. And they had been right. The two cities had exchanged numerous delegations and had even set up a formal educational exchange program.

And Rokishe and Savan had been just as welcoming. And with the huge number of former Gerva residents that had emigrated to the Southern Water Tribe, Gerva had much stronger diplomatic ties to the south than it did the north. The strong cultural conservatism of the Northern Water Tribe had profoundly affected the dispositions of most of the other northern coastal cities. So, despite the great distances between their peoples, a firm alliance had been established between the SDC and the northern city.

Back at the embassy, all three were shocked to see a collective invitation to dine with Crown Prince Lu Ten. It was an oddity but not an unpleasant turn of events. Zin Tee had never had the opportunity to meet the Crown Prince, and he was pretty sure that Senji hadn’t either, but Hun Ro described him as a good man with a dry sense of humor, so they sent word that they would gladly accept.

That evening they found themselves entering the dining hall of Kantou’s civic administration building, where they were met by the Crown Prince and an attractive dark haired young woman with her hair in a distinctive style with two buns on the side.

“Welcome, gentlemen, please come in. I am Prince Lu Ten, and this beautiful and talented young woman is my assistant, Mai. My betrothed, Sinlao, will be joining us momentarily.” Lu Ten said with a smile.

“It is a pleasure to see you again, Hun Ro.” Mai said in a monotone voice. “And it is an honor to meet your companions. We appreciate your help in speaking with the purity movements.”

“The pleasure is all mine, Mai! It has been so long. Your beauty has only continued to blossom as you march towards womanhood.” Hun Ro gushed. Zin Tee did his best to hide his smirk, and he saw Senji doing the same. Hun Ro just couldn’t contain his overabundance of enthusiasm.

“You flatter me, Hun Ro. But don’t get too carried away or Ivaku will become jealous, and I have no desire to tangle with an angry waterbender of her skill.” Mai replied.

Hun Ro gave a hearty laugh. “Fear not, my good woman, Ivaku knows of my verbose ways. But enough about me, let me introduce you to Senji, the ambassador for Lenth, and Zin Tee, the representative for Alokhai. Two wonderful companions that I have been honored to serve with.”

“I echo Mai’s sentiment that it is an honor to meet you. Please, come and be seated.” Lu Ten gestured to the chairs around the table. They started to make their way to the chairs when the door opened and everyone turned to see an attractive young woman with medium brown, shoulder length hair enter the room. She was a little shorter than Mai and was wearing a neo-traditional Earth Kingdom robe that had become popular amongst the earth folks living in the Fire Colonies. Probably in her mid-twenties, she had very strong earth nation features and was more handsome than pretty. But she had a beautiful smile that radiated warmth and charisma.

“Ah, let me introduce you to Lady Sinlao, the light of my life.” The woman blushed a little as she took the hand that Lu Ten held out to her.

“It is a great honor to meet you. Lu Ten has told me of the help that you have offered my people by trying to reason with the purity movement leaders. Allow me to thank you for your service.” She nodded and smiled pleasantly. Zin Tee found himself instinctively liking her.

“We are interested in creating a world of peace, comradery and acceptance, so we are happy to do our part where we can.” Hun Ro bowed as he spoke, much less boisterous than usual. “And allow me to congratulate you on your betrothment to the Crown Prince. He is a good man, and I can see that he still has excellent taste in women.”

The face of Sinlao dropped a little bit. “Thank you, Hun Ro. I…I know that this must be a bit awkward, but I appreciate your kind words.”

And then Hun Ro’s smile went to full incandescence. “Let this not be awkward. My sister was a great woman, and she was happy with Lu Ten, but unfortunately, she was taken from us too soon. Now I see that another beautiful and talented woman has gained his favor. I meant it when I said that Lu Ten is a good man, and I am truly glad that he has found someone to share his life with. I wish you both nothing but happiness.”

“Thank you, Hun Ro. We appreciate that. You are still like family to me.” Lu Ten said. Then he again waved at the chairs. “Let us sit and enjoy dinner.”

Lu Ten sat at one end of the table while Sinlao sat at the other. Senji and Hun Ro sat next to Lu Ten while Zin Tee and Mai took the spots next to Sinlao. It was as they were getting settled in and placing their napkins on their laps that Zin Tee noticed that Mai was missing her left hand. But considering the grace and dexterity she moved with, it certainly didn’t seem to hinder her much.

He turned to Sinlao as she spoke. “It is a pleasure to meet you, Zin Tee. And my thanks for your help dealing with the purity movement was sincere. I don’t understand why bending status need be such an issue to people.”

“I understand, Lady Sinlao. In Gerva, we are much more liberal than most other regions regarding marriage and culture. We have been a melting pot for waterbenders, earthbenders and firebenders for the past century. And of course, nonbenders such as myself.” Zin Tee replied easily.

“That is wonderful to hear. I have heard this about Gerva, as well as about many places in the Southern Defense Coalition. It warms my heart to hear of such acceptance.” Sinlao blessed him with a smile.

“It is indeed. Far too many people here are only interested in division, not inclusion.” Mai said. “And if I may ask, is there a significance to your jevalda? The only others that I’ve seen wear them are Azula and Hun Ro’s sister Li Nu. They mentioned that they picked up the fashion in Gerva.”

Ah, here we go. “My husband and I exchanged them at our wedding ceremony to show that our commitment is strong and that we are proud to display our love to the world.” And now he waited.

“Oh, by Gnolos the Benevolent, that is such a wonderful gesture! Mai, don’t you think that is romantic?” Sinlao exclaimed, a wide beaming smile on her face.

“Actually, I do think it’s romantic. It gives me hope that all marriages aren’t just a joyless, slow and lifelong obliteration of the soul.” Mai answered, her lips curling upwards ever so slightly.

Zin Tee felt the weight being lifted off his shoulders. It was accepted in Gerva, but he had been advised not to wear it abroad. He was glad that he did.

“Mai, we are going to find you a gorgeous and carefree young man who will write you poetry and sing songs of your beauty until your icy heart is melted.” Sinlao said, laughing. “It will become my personal mission.”

“I second that, Mai. Maybe we’ll ask Li Nu’s jevalda maker up in Gerva to make you and your beau something special.” Lu Ten chimed in. Mai rolled her eyes, but the slight smirk remained on her face.

“It caused quite the stir when Princess Azula and Li Nu began wearing their jevaldas. Master Holru’s shop was nearly overrun when everyone heard that he had made their jevaldas. And poor Hilna became a local legend for having actually put her fingers on the princess’s head. It was almost like she had touched a holy artifact and been blessed.” Zin Tee laughed, remembering the craze that had followed the princess’s visit to his city. “Princess Azula was definitely a forceful but charming young lady.”

“You met her?” Lu Ten asked.

Everyone was listening intently. “Just briefly when she visited Gerva. I was an aide to Councilman Fo Yang, so I was part of the Gerva delegation that had lunch with her group. That was also the first time I met Hun Ro. It was this meeting where the idea of a cultural exchange between Gerva and Lenth had its roots.”

And the topics bounced around for the remainder of the dinner, as they discussed various trivial topics and the conversation was lively and fast paced. Zin Tee was enjoying himself. But eventually, the conversation came to the real reason for Lu Ten’s invitation.

“The Fire Nation has issued a proclamation that the Earth Kingdom must forfeit control of their western territories and the port city of Yun Zi. King Bumi has once again generously offered up his city as a location to hold negotiations between our two nations. Due to the tenseness of relations, I’m asking all visiting delegates and officials to return to their own nations. If things were to escalate to war, we don’t want any outside guests to be caught up in our issues.”

“Hun Ro, I’m offering you the opportunity to travel with my delegation to Omashu, unless you’d like to make your own arrangements. Senji and Zin Tee are welcome to stay as long as they need to as they make travel arrangements. I sincerely thank you for your help and hopefully we can deescalate the situation, but it would be better if you make your way back to your own regions for now.”

Zin Tee hoped things were deescalated also. Three nations had their eye on controlling Gerva. He worried what would happen to his beloved city if things went to war.

Izuka let the warm breeze tickle her skin as it blew in off the water. The smell of the brine brought a smile to her face. Her stint in the navy gave her a new appreciation for the ocean and the area’s adjacent to it. That’s why the Eastern Sea region had been such an inviting location to stay when she had been banished from the Fire Nation.

Sitting here, under the shade of a tall tree, just twenty yards from the rolling surf, she realizes that it had been the best thing that ever happened to her. The Fire Nation had fallen back into its wicked ways, bemoaning what it had lost rather than working to optimize what it had gained. Gained through aggression and genocide, that is.

Savan had opened her eyes. Training with Father had made her strong. It had made her fast. But it had regimented the joy and wonder of firebending to the point where it was a chore, not a blessing. Studying with the Sages of Joyful Sorrow had entirely changed her outlook. What had been a drive to be faster, stronger, more ferocious instead became a drive to be wiser, more adaptable and more centered. And paradoxically, her fire had grown by leaps and bounds.

And she had become more in tune with her spirituality. She was studying ways to grow her chi through meditation and the practicing of other bending forms. Oddly enough, the airbending scrolls that she had been shown were the ones that seemed to fit her outlook most closely. Her style had evolved so that she was light and fast but could still unleash incredible power in a heartbeat.

But she knew now that duty was calling. When Zuko cast her out for disagreeing with his handling of the Northwest Colony, she understood that he was conspiring with Ursa and her pet cabal of generals to push aside any potential challenges to his rule. But now she had found a new home, a home that needed Izuka’s expertise to help defend themselves from the wolves.

What made the whole situation so ironic was the condition set for her to return to the Fire Nation. Capture Azula and bring her home in chains. Izuka smiled every time she thought about it. She didn’t know exactly how Zuko had made his way to the throne, but rumors circulated that he made a secret deal with the Order of the White Lotus to hand Azula over. And that her big sister had kicked the everlasting shit out of whatever sad sack group of losers had been sent to take her down.

Her sister was no longer here, but her influence remained. The Azulinati had grown into a force to be reckoned with. Ivaku and Hun Ro were well respected figures internationally, as well as being a damn cute couple. Novae and Li Nu had revolutionized the Southern Defense Coalition with their outpouring of new technologies, while Si Har had improved and optimized the system for engraving the augmentors. And the auxiliary members such as herself and Toph were two of the strongest benders of their age.

But more than bending, the SDC needed her military knowledge. They had completely revamped their military fleet over the past three years. With augmentors upgrading their manufacturing capabilities as well as contributing to their offensive firepower, the Southern Defense Fleet was the most formidable fighting force on the water. And Izuka had been the brains behind the military plan to utilize the fleet’s capabilities if it came to war against any of the big three.

And Zuko’s Folly, as everyone was calling his challenge to the Earth Kingdom, was likely to be the match that set the whole continent ablaze. But the SDC was ready for whatever may come its way. Woe to the invaders who dared to cross into Izuka’s adopted waters.

Min Kai followed Mavong as he made his way to the negotiation table. Her short, stocky legs had to take unnaturally long strides to match the brisk pace set by the significantly taller Mavong. Thankfully, he slowed as they approached the table. Min Kai set the scrolls and reference material next to her seat on the provided table.

The Supreme Committee had only sent two delegates to the negotiation. Minister Mavong was the spokesperson for the Earth Kingdom, while Min Kai was the record keeper and scholar assigned to provide him with the relevant information needed for technical aspects of the negotiation. Which had her worried. She had graduated from the Political Studies Program at Ba Sing Se University, so she was one of the few people left in the Earth Kingdom government that had any formal training in politics. It was only through luck and the zealotry of her parents that she had survived the purges.

And now she was sitting across the negotiating table from the Fire Nation. She had wanted to move to a smaller city and help build infrastructure and improve the lives of her people. It was a series of unfortunate events that had brought her here. Shur Zi had been one of her classmates, having graduated a year behind Min Kai. They hadn’t been close friends, but they had shared lunch and visits to each other’s homes a few times when they had worked on a project together. She had been a princess with charm, beauty and intelligence; it was no wonder that she had been selected to marry the heir to the Fire Lord. With her by the Crown Prince’s side, a lot of good could have been done to help the people of Ba Sing Se and the surrounding lands. It should have been her, not Min Kai, that had to deal with the Crown Prince to bolster the future of the Earth Kingdom. But her bright future had been snuffed out by rebels.

And now Min Kai was trying to help put the pieces of her broken country back together. But she was worried. Minister Mavong was a good and decent man, but he had basically no real-world experience with diplomacy. He was selected because he was devout believer in the new state religion, the Hirythracastin Ascension of Glorious Illumination.

It was the belief that by following strict religious guidelines for food, drink, sleep, sex, and numerous other practices, adherents would be illuminated and ascend to a higher state of consciousness. A higher state where food, drink, sleep and sex could be enjoyed with wicked abandon. The stories she had heard about the deviant practices of some of the Ascended, as they were called, had caused her stomach to churn with disgust. For all her parent’s faults, most of which emerged after joining this sect, they had never allowed being Ascended to corrupt them. And they had shielded Min Kai as best they could. She loved her parents, and they loved her, but she hated the Hirythracastin Ascension of Glorious Illumination.

But that hate was only in the privacy of her mind. Rumor has it that they had some mysterious method for reprogramming the minds of their enemies and bend their will to the Supreme Committee’s favor. The mystery woman who told her this said to beware of anyone named Ju Di or Ju Lee or something like that. She had been raving and said that she had barely escaped their control. Min Kai had given her some food and sent her on her way. She had never heard anything of the woman again.

But since Mavong was one of the oldest Ascended, his communion with Hirythracase, intermediary of Gnolos and Protector of Mountains and Valley, would give him enhanced knowledge. Or so the bullshit spewed by the Supreme Committee had said. Min Kai sighed. She truly worried about the future of her people.

She was pulled out of her thoughts as the door across the way opened and the Fire Nation delegation entered. She easily recognized Crown Prince Lu Ten. His picture had been displayed everywhere around Ba Sing Se when he was supposed to move there and integrate the city into the Fire Nation. Next to him was a dour looking young woman wearing a traditional Fire Nation hanfu. Apparently, the Fire Nation had sent only two delegates also.

Min Kai saw them look at her, so she gave a respectful nod of greeting which they both returned. That was a good sign. Mavong simple stared at a point on the wall behind them, refusing to acknowledge their existence. And that was not a good sign.

The main door to the hall opened and a bald young man with blue arrow tattoos on his head entered. This would be Avatar Aang. And next to him walked an attractive young waterbender in a simple yet elegant blue dress. This would be the famous Katara. She stood, as did all of the others in the room. Thankfully, even Mavong stood.

“Good afternoon. I am Avatar Aang, and I will be overseeing the negotiations between the Fire Nation and the Earth Kingdom. Assisting me is Master Katara. The primary issue of contention is the involvement of Earth Kingdom citizens in the attack on the Fire Nation civic administration building in the Northwest Colony that resulted in the death of Governor Jian Ru, as well as sixteen others.”

Aang paused for a moment, probably to let the gravity of what he just said sink into the people watching. After a few moments, he continued. “Six Earth Kingdom citizens were captured at the site of the attack and admitted their involvement. The Fire Nation has signed affidavits from each Earth Kingdom citizen that they were acting as part of a group called the EverFree Guardians, a group whose goal is the removal of all Fire Nationals from the earth continent.”

“Does the Fire Nation delegation agree with the summary that I just provided?” The Avatar looked to Lu Ten.

“It does, Avatar.” Lu Ten answered.

“The Fire Nation also claims that the EverFree Guardians are funded by the Earth Kingdom government. As such, the Earth Kingdom should be held responsible for the actions of the members of the EverFree Guardians. The Fire Nation proposes that the Earth Kingdom relinquish control of the territory known as the Central Earth Kingdom to the Fire Nation. In addition, the Earth Kingdom is to withdraw from the port city of Yun Zhi and allow Fire Nation control of that city as well.” Aang paused, then turned to Lu Ten again. “Is this correct?”

“It is, Avatar.” Lu Ten once again answered.

“Does the Earth Kingdom agree to the conditions requested by the Fire Nation?” Avatar Aang asked, looking at Mavong.

“It does not,” Mavong answered, his face devoid of all expression.

“Let it hereby be noted that the Earth Kingdom does not agree to the Fire Nation demands. Minister Mavong, do you wish to present the case for the Earth Kingdom, with regards to the accusations being made by the Fire Nation.” All right, here we go. Min Kai had presented him with several lines of defense. He hadn’t committed to one before the session, but she sincerely hoped he went with her preferred defense.

“No, I do not. The accusations are absurd and baseless, and I will no longer be involved in these proceedings.” Mavong stood up. Everyone was in shock, but none more than Min Kai. What the absolute fuck was this idiot doing. “I am leaving. Counselor Min Kai, if you wish to be part of this charade, you may, but you must get my buy in before a deal is struck.”

And the absolute fucking idiot turned and walked out the door, leaving the entire room in silence. Min Kai was absolutely dumbfounded. How could he do this to her? To his country?

She sighed as she realized that the entire room was now staring at her. Well, if she was going to go down, she would go down swinging her sword with all her might. She stood and faced the Avatar.

“I am ready to present the Earth Kingdom’s case, Avatar, if I may be permitted to speak in place of Minister Mavong.” Building her credibility by being polite and articulate was item number one.

“Of course, Counselor.” She thinks that she sees a little sympathy in his eyes.

She walks around the table and takes the center of the floor. Exude command and competence. That had been the mantra that her debate instructor, Sifu Insa Barou, had expounded. “The attack on the civic administration building in the Northwest Colony was a tragedy; this is something that all caring and compassionate people can agree upon. And yes, people from my nation were involved in this terrible event. But the EverFree Guardians is a terrorist group that has been disavowed by my nation’s government, going back several years. And the Fire Nation delegation has provided no evidence, direct or indirect, that my government is linked to the EverFree Guardians, other than baseless speculation.”

She walked over to the Avatar and looked up to catch his eye as he sat above her on the dais. “And why is that? The answer is simple and as old as time itself. Because they are trying to draw attention away from their own missteps. Let’s look at what led up to this terrible event.” Min Kai holds up a finger. “First mistake, abusing the hard working and valuable people of the Northwest Colony, pushing them ever harder and treating them ever more cruelly in order to increase the gains from their exploitation.”

She holds up a second finger. “Second mistake, perpetuating a cycle of violence in the colony. Every act of dissension leads to suppression, which leads to an act of aggression which is followed by an ever more violent counterassault, until violence is the only meaningful interaction left between the oppressors and the oppressed.”

She displays the third finger. “Third mistake, allowing the pen of a dead girl to push the Fire Lord to lash out like a spoiled and recalcitrant child. We’ve all read the writings of the People’s Princess, who was perhaps the only good thing to come out of the Fire Nation over the past one hundred years. She gave the Fire Nation a path to make the Northwest Colony a valuable ally, but it wasn’t the Fire Nation way, so it, and her, were cast aside like trash. The Fire Lord had to move against the writings of this great woman to show that he is in charge, not a dead girl. And his actions only instilled more hatred in the hearts of the people of the Northwest Colony.”

“These three mistakes led to the unfortunate incident that brought us here to the negotiation table today. But those mistakes aside, what is the Fire Nation bringing to the table today besides speculation and wishful thinking? Where is the evidence that the Earth Kingdom is supporting the EverFree Guardians? Where is the evidence, direct or even indirect, that the attacks occurred with Earth Kingdom approval? Hell, where is the evidence the Earth Kingdom had any prior knowledge that the attack was going to happen? This is a pretext for more aggression, more subjugation and ever more chaos and strife. Rally the troops to fight a made-up war to distract their people from the ineptitude and incompetence of their leaders.”

She walked over to the Fire Nation delegation and placed her hands on the table as she leaned over and looked into the Crown Prince’s gold eyes, making sure she had his full attention before she continued speaking. “The Fire Nation is seeking an excuse to justify their thirst for blood and destruction. The People’s Princess would be ashamed to see the sad state her once proud country has devolved into.” She turned and faced the Avatar. “I rest my case, Avatar.”

You could have heard a pin drop as she turned and walked back to her table and sat down. She organized her papers and straightened up her books as she waited for the rebuttal.

“Thank you for your presentation, Counselor.” The Avatar said, nodding to Min Kai in acknowledgement. “Crown Prince, do you wish to present the Fire Nation’s case?”

“Yes, I would, Avatar.” Lu Ten, made his way around the table. “The Earth Kingdom has been attempting to drive the Fire Nation from our rightful possessions on the mainland ever since the signing of our treaty three years ago. A treaty, I might add, that none of the original negotiators are alive to bear witness to.”

So far, Min Kai was unimpressed. Surely, he’s got something better than this.

“The Fire Nation has upheld our end of the deal. We have not attempted to interfere with any of the Earth Kingdom’s affairs, as violent and unsavory as they may be. Yet, again and again, the Earth Kingdom citizens have attempted to undermine our right to govern our colonies. They have attempted to interfere with the lawful running of our government. Time and time again, Earth Kingdom citizens have been involved in violence against the lawful government of our nation. And we will stand for it no more.” Lu Ten turned to the crowd. “In the past three years, since the signing of the treaty, we have caught four hundred and thirty-seven Earth Kingdom citizens involved in violent activity against the Fire Nation. That is a rather large number to be a coincidence.”

He turned back to Aang. “I rest my case, Avatar.”

That’s it? She could have refuted that weak ass argument during her first year in the Political Studies Program.

“Counselor Min Kai, would you like to respond?” The Avatar asked her politely.

“Yes, please.” Once again, she stood and walked around the table. “Four hundred and thirty-seven Earth Kingdom citizens. That sounds like a lot, doesn’t it?” She looked around at the crowd.

“Four hundred and thirty-seven. Avatar Aang, would you or your esteemed colleague happen to know the number of Earth Kingdom citizens counted in our census two years ago?” She turned and looked at the two.

“Just over fifteen million, if I recall correctly.” Katara answered.

“Your recall is excellent, Ambassador Katara. That is indeed correct.” Min Kai turned back to the Fire Nation delegation. “Fifteen million. That’s a good, round number to work with. Let’s do math. If one percent of the Earth Kingdom citizens infiltrated the Fire Nation, what would we have? One hundred and fifty thousand of my nation’s citizens in your lands. One percent.”

“Let’s go a little lower. Zero point one percent. What if one out of every thousand Earth Kingdom citizen visited your people? That would still be fifteen thousand people. Hmmmm. That still seems a bit high. It turns out if you do the math, only thirty out of every million Earth Kingdom citizens have been caught doing violence in your nation. That’s not exactly an invasion.” She turned to the Avatar.

“Avatar Aang, I’m growing weary of this sideshow. Please ask the Fire Nation to provide evidence, any evidence at all, that my government is linked to the attack of the civic center in the Northwest Colony. The Crown Prince and the Fire Nation are asking for outrageous concessions without providing any evidence of wrongdoing. If we’re going to do that, I’d be happy to bring out some unresolved incidents from the Fire Nation withdrawal of the Central Earth Kingdom to rehash. And there were far more than eighteen deaths involved. To the Fire Nation, I say, put up or shut up. The People’s Princess is getting tired of rolling over in her grave at your audacity and unmitigated gall.”

And Min Kai made her way back to her seat. She sat and looked up to gauge the reaction of her arguments. If looks could kill, she would be in Gnolos’s amphitheater right now, based on the looks of pure anger and hatred oozing from both Lu Ten and the dark-haired girl.

“Counselor Min Kai brings up an excellent point, Crown Prince. You have provided no evidence directly linking the attack on the civic administration building to the Earth Kingdom. Do you have any evidence supporting your claim?” Avatar Aang’s words finally got the Fire Nation delegates to turn their hateful gazes away from her.

“We currently don’t have any concrete evidence showing the connection. But we are still looking, and I have no doubt that we will find it.” Lu Ten said.

“You admit your own inadequacy in this matter, before the Avatar and all these witnesses.” Min Kai said, standing up. “And seeing the hate and anger in your eyes and face, no one will trust any evidence that you find. Your blatant land grab has been made evident for the entire world to see. I don’t believe that there is anything left to say here.” She turned to the Avatar and Ambassador Katara and gave a respectful bow. “My nation thanks both of you for your fair and evenhanded oversight of this negotiation, but the Earth Nation is done here. Minister Mavong was right to leave rather than deal with the load of drivel that the Fire Nation has brought forth.”

And with that, Min Kai gathered her items and turned and walked out the door.

Mai was absolutely irate. It had taken every ounce of restraint not to turn that bitch into a pincushion. She could tell that Lu Ten wasn’t doing much better. This was Zuko’s fault. He sent them into this fucking predicament with no viable ammunition, hoping that they would be able to bully the opposition into submission.

And when Minister Mavong got up and walked out, they thought that the strategy might pay off. But the short dark-haired girl took their arguments and made them look like fools. That was a bad look, but they could deal with a little embarrassment. It was the constant references to Azula and how disappointed she would be in the Fire Nation that had stung. And she hated the girl even more because it was clear that she was absolutely right. Azula would hate everything about how the Fire Nation was handling this.

They had both calmed down some by the time they made it back to their private meeting chamber. Neither had said a word since walking away from that debacle. Mai finally spoke. “That didn’t play out like Zuko expected. That girl was armed with a counter to everything we had.”

“Yes, indeed she was. Not that we had much to begin with. But all of our intelligence said that Mavong was not a great public speaker and that he was known for his lack of preparation.” Lu Ten answered. “I’m worried about how Zuko will handle this. He wants those resources.”

There was a knock on the door. The looked at each other and then Mai went to answer it. “Excuse me. The Earth Kingdom delegation has informed King Bumi of their intention of returning to the Earth Kingdom tomorrow, so King Bumi is inviting both delegations to a small dinner tonight as a token of good will to both parties. He is inviting you, Crown Prince, the Lady Sinlao and Lady Mai to join in the festivities.”

Lu Ten sighed. “We will be happy to accept.”

Maybe Mai would have a chance to stab the little wench after all. They both took some time to calm down and collect themselves. Mai knew that the Azula talk had just been a negotiating ploy. And she shouldn’t really blame Min Kai for doing the best she could to protect the interests of her nation. Because deep down, Min Kai had been right. Zuko was doing this to take attention away from his own flailing tenure as Fire Lord.

Soon enough, the appointed hour had arrived. Mai went out a little early to wait for Lu Ten and Sinlao. She was happy that he had found somebody new after Shur Zi. Mai knew that he had been very fond of Shur Zi, and even Mai had to admit that she had been an impressive person, but he hadn’t quite fallen in love with her yet when she passed. But Mai had watched him fall for Sinlao. She was a good woman with a good heart and good head on her shoulders. They were a great match.

They both appeared at the appointed hour and the three of them made their way down to the dining hall. It only took a few moments to find Toph and Hun Ro chumming around with Bumi. Toph, of course, knew that they were there before anyone else.

“Come on in, guys. The gang is almost all here. We’re just waiting for the little dynamo and the TwinkleQueen pair, and we’ll be set to go.” Toph bellowed.

“Will Minister Mavong not be joining us?” Sinlao asked.

“Alas, no. But Counselor Min Kai agreed to come. She is a most interesting young woman.” Bumi said with a snort. “No offense, but she was quite the force in their today.”

“Yes, she was.” Mai couldn’t help agree.

“Well then, the wait is over. She’s coming now.” Toph said, turning to look towards the door. And moments later they were rewarded with Min Kai making her dramatic entrance. Mai had to admit that she was pretty little thing, despite being exceptionally short. Her round face and wide set eyes gave her a slightly exotic look for an earth national, and her hair was pulled back into some sort of half braid that disappeared behind her back.

She smiled at everyone as she walked in, giving a bow to King Bumi. “King Bumi, thank you for your dinner invitation and for hosting these talks between our nations. I know that these things can be somewhat contentious, but I hope that we can all enjoy a nice meal together as we get to know each other better. This can only help future relations between our people.”

She sounded much more pleasant when she wasn’t beating the stuffing out of the Fire Nation. King Bumi was the first to chime in, of course.

“That is precisely the purpose of this evening, Counselor Min Kai. I am very glad that you are coming in with the proper mindset. Please let me introduce you to our guests.” Bumi turned to Mai first. “You met Lady Mai, earlier, as well as Crown Prince Lu Ten. But this beautiful woman on his arm is his betrothed, Lady Sinlao.”

“I’m honored to meet you, Lady Sinlao. And congratulations on your upcoming marriage.” Min Kai said with a small bow.

“And this feisty young woman is Toph, the second finest earthbender in all the lands.” Bumi snorted at Toph’s indignation.

“Dream on, your Buminess, I’m the best there ever was and probably the best there ever will be.”

“It’s an honor to meet you, Toph. The bending prowess of both you and King Bumi is legendary, even within the walls of Ba Sing Se.”

“And this tall gentleman is Hun Ro.” Bumi pointed to the six-foot nine-inch lad. Mai wasn’t convinced he was done growing either.

“It’s an honor to meet you, Counselor Min Kai.” Hun Ro gave a nice bow.

“I was afraid that you wouldn’t remember me. It’s been about six years since we last met. I was a year ahead of Shur Zi in the Policial Studies program, and I met you a couple of times when I came over to your house to work on our team project.” Min Kai said, giving a small smile.

Hun Ro looked embarrassed and then his face lit up. “You’re the Little Hammer! Now I know why you looked so familiar.”

Min Kai gave a sheepish grin. “Nobody’s called me that since I graduated.”

“Were you friends with Shur Zi?” Mai asked. By Agni she hoped that this conversation didn’t get awkward.

“We were friendly, but other than a few lunches and visits to each other’s houses to work on group projects, we didn’t really socialize. I was a year ahead and I had my group of friends and she had hers. But she was a lovely and talented girl, and I was greatly saddened at her passing.” And Mai could see that she was genuinely sad.

“Thank you for that, Min Kai.” Hun Ro answered, a sad smile on his face also.

Further conversation was halted as the door opened again and their final guest appeared. Aang was wearing his formal Air Nomad robes while Katara was stunning in a beautiful blue evening gown of water tribe design.

“Good evening, everyone! I hope that you didn’t start the party without us.” Aang said, a wide beaming smile on his face. Katara just rolled her eyes, but she had a wide smile on her face too.

“No party is ever truly started until you arrive, Aang. I was just introducing Counselor Min Kai to everyone.” Bumi snorted and waved everyone towards the table. Bumi sat at the head of the table with Aang taking the other end. Min Kai was seated to Aang’s right, with Toph next to her. Mai sat to Aang’s left, directly across from Min Kai. Perfect knife throwing position. Hun Ro was seated next to her.

Once everyone was situated, Aang was the first to get the conversation rolling. “So, Min Kai, is this your first trip to Omashu?”

Min Kai smiled and nodded. “It’s my first time leaving the Earth Kingdom. I did get to spend a lot of time traveling around the Earth Kingdom though, visiting the small towns and trying to work out plans for regional trade alliances. The Regional Economics Councils worked so well for much of the world that I hoped to institute a smaller, more local iteration. It’s been going well, so far.”

“That’s great. I’m glad to hear that things are working out. We don’t get a lot of information about the workings of the Earth Kingdom since the new regime set up.” Aang’s smile wasn’t nearly as broad as usual.

“Well, the Supreme Committee is still relatively new, and they are trying to figure out exactly the best way to reconfigure the country to best meet their vision.” Min Kai said, her smile not nearly as broad either. Mai guessed that she wasn’t totally buying into this new vision.

“I see,” Aang said. “Do you think that they would be open to a visit from the Avatar?”

“I can pose the question to Minister Mavong, and then he can pass the request on the Supreme Committee. A junior official like me doesn’t get to interact with the Supreme Committee.”

“Yet a junior official like you is allowed to negotiate on behalf of the Earth Kingdom.” Mai couldn’t help but jump in.

“Yes, because Minister Mavong and the Supreme Committee both recognized your ploy for what it was. I don’t want to bring bad blood from our negotiations to the dinner table, but every word I said today was true, and every person at this table knows it.” Min Kai said, matching Mai’s stare.

“Today’s negotiations are done, and it is time for both sides to move on.” Hun Ro said, surprising Mai with how serious he sounded. “That door has closed. Both sides will have to figure out where to go from here.”

“Things will go better if the Earth Kingdom quit interfering in Fire Nation affairs.” Mai couldn’t help but answer.

“Did you know that Successor Rajeen and Ambassador Ivaku were only days away from completing negotiations for the Central Earth Kingdom to join with the larger Earth Kingdom in a confederation? They would be administratively separate, but still exist under the umbrella of the greater Earth Kingdom economically, culturally, and militarily? Would you like to guess where the basis of the negotiations came from?” Min Kai stared Mai down, waiting for an answer.

“I don’t know. Why don’t you enlighten us.” Mai finally responded.

“The Azula papers. They were building the entire negotiation off the plan that Azula had for the Northwest Colony.” Min Kai looked to Hun Ro. “You can ask Ambassador Ivaku if you like. The reason that negotiations were called off was to administer martial law in order to fend off a potential invasion of their Central Earth Kingdom lands by the Fire Nation. Both sides were excited because it was a good plan. But now we have to wait to see how the Fire Nation plays its cards before we decide how to move forward.”

Mai had to bite her tongue at that. That was a bitter pill to swallow. The Fire Nation refused to allow Azula to implement her plan at home, and now they will potentially block other nations from using it as well. She decided to swallow a bit of her pride.

“I sincerely hope that things work out peacefully and that you are able to implement Azula’s plan for your region.” Mai said, even though it caused her a little physical pain to do it.

Min Kai’s expression softened. “I know that most of you knew Princess Azula. And for what it’s worth, I’m sorry I needed to use her legacy as a weapon today. But I have absolutely nothing but respect and admiration for her. She is the ideal that I model myself after, which is difficult knowing that I’ve only got a small fraction of the talent and intelligence that she had.”

“Well, as much as it pains me to say it, I’m sure that she would have liked you. You do have a bit of her in you.” Mai admitted. “Although you’ll really have to up your snark game if you truly want to be more like her.”

“For the love of Agni’s Flaming Whiskers, let’s not encourage anyone to strive for that level of snark.” Lu Ten said from the other end of the table. “From what I hear, she nearly gave Aang a stroke the first time he had to work with her.”

Everyone laughed and began sharing Azula stories with Min Kai. The evening went on and Mai had to admit that the girl wasn’t that bad. She was no Azula. But who was? But she was definitely someone that they would need to keep an eye on.

Chapter Text

“Negotiations were halted and martial law has been declared throughout the Central Earth Kingdom. Our sources inside the Earth Kingdom indicate that the agreement was only days away from being completed. The Earth Kingdom delegate in Omashu admitted as much after the negotiations.” Lord Waihu said.

Zuko sat and pondered the response. They hadn’t expected the Earth Kingdom to essentially walk away without negotiating. Given their weak position, this was foolish. He needed to consider the pros and cons again.

“General Liao, what is the estimated timeline for securing the strategic points in the Central Earth Kingdom, given our current state of deployment?” Zuko wanted to start with the basics.

“It is estimated that we will need six weeks to take the three primary administration centers and an additional two weeks to capture the four main military strongpoints.” General Liao responded. But Zuko could tell he looked uneasy. “May I have permission to speak freely, Lord Zuko.”

“Yes,” Zuko answered. He wanted the real thoughts of the general and his staff.

“Our best estimates are that this will work, but the situation may become untenable if we can’t achieve our goals within twelve weeks. The supply chains will become distant, and we will need to be able to forage and resupply from local sources to maintain our occupation. In addition, this will leave the Fire Colonies with limited military support. If things don’t go exactly to plan, it may embolden insurrectionist groups within the colonies to strike while we’re temporarily overextended.”

“Given all of the information, you’ve told us time and time again that this plan will most likely work, haven’t you, General?” Ursa interjected. She was surveying the map and seemingly calculating the probabilities.

“Yes, Lady Ursa. But even if the probability is low, the results of a stalled invasion could be disastrous. It is important to understand the hazards and have contingency plans in place to deal with them. These plans have been in the works since Long Feng took over the Earth Kingdom, but our own political situation has changed since then.” General Liao responded. “And also, there is the response of the Northern Water Tribe and the Southern Defense Coalition to consider.”

“We have a strong alliance with the Northern Water Tribe. Chief Arnook’s granddaughter will one day be Fire Lord. And the Southern Defense Coalition is a ragtag collection of second and third-rate powers.” Zuko answered. “And I truly don’t believe our intelligence that they now have a modern military navy. Two renegade Fire Nation ships wrecked their entire fleet during the Phoenix Sage Insurrection. They couldn’t have upgraded enough in three years to become a challenge.”

General Liao looked like he wanted to speak again, but Ursa beat him to the punch. “General, it is imperative that we expand our lands and gain resources. It would have been better to gain assets and agreements through negotiation, but I believe that the risk is worth the reward. We have prepared and our pieces are in place to take what we need. Creating purity zones in the newly conquered areas will also give us some breathing room to quell some of the discontent in the Fire Colony.”

“I agree with Lady Ursa.” Zuko said, effectively bringing the debate to a halt. “Initiate the assault based on logistical needs. But it should be underway in less than a week, given what you’ve shared. Is that correct?”

“Yes, Lord Zuko. If I send word now, everything should be ready in five days.” General Liao answered.

“Then set the wheels in motion.” Zuko nodded in dismissal. The General and his staff left the room, leaving only Zuko and Ursa behind.

“This is the best way, Zuko. The Earth Kingdom fools will run their people into the ground. We are doing the world a favor.”

“I know, Mother. But we had better hope that we are correct about the Avatar.” Was Zuko’s only reply.

Ivaku smiled as she walked down the gangplank at Kyoshi Island and saw the big lunk standing there waiting for her. She swears he’s grown another inch or two. Or maybe it’s just seems that way because he’s standing next to Toph. They both run to each other and embrace. Then he gently leans down and gives her a kiss, which is always awkward since he’s at least a foot and a half taller than her.

“I’ve missed you so much, WaterBear! I’m glad you got out of the Earth Kingdom before things went south.” Hun Ro said, pulling her in for a second hug, catching her by surprise.

“What do you mean, before things went south?” Ivaku asked, once she was able to pull herself out of his embrace. She noticed that the others on shore had stopped smiling. Suki, Toph, Sokka and Yinqu were all there, looking solemn.

Suki was the first to speak. “We just got word that Fire Nation forces have swarmed across the border from the Fire Colony into the Central Earth Kingdom. Zuko just sent out an official declaration of war.”

“But why? The negotiations just ended. Surely there was another option. I thought it sounded like their case was weak?” Ivaku spluttered. She felt tears forming in her eyes. They had been so close to peace in the Central Earth Kingdom. And now it was gone.

“Frankly, their case was astoundingly bad. I felt secondhand embarrassment for them when the Little Hammer pounded them into oblivion.” Toph said, trying to sound upbeat, but not really succeeding.

“Little Hammer?” Izuka asked. Senji and Rajeen walked next to Izuka as she came ashore.

“One of Shur Zi’s classmates at Ba Sing Se University, Min Kai, was the junior delegate for the Earth Kingdom. The main delegate got up and walked out five minutes into the negotiation, leaving Min Kai in charge. And she showed the Fire Nation why her nickname was the Little Hammer in school. She’s petite in stature but a powerhouse in terms of ability and verbal ferocity. She’s supposedly a skilled earthbender too.” Hun Ro said, looking around at the crowd.

“Well, let’s get you guys ashore and we’ll share everything we know. But we have to be ready if things escalate.” Yinqu said.

Everyone took Yinqu’s advice and made their way into the negotiation pavilion. Everyone relaxed and caught up on events from their lives. Yinqu had accepted a betrothal necklace from Hakoda. Senji and Hun Ro told of their trip to the Fire Colony while Rajeen and Ivaku talked about how close the negotiations had been to completion in the Central Earth Kingdom. But soon enough it was time to get to the business at hand.

“The hawks just reached Omashu about four hours ago. Bumi sent word through the Distance Printers a short while after that. We’ve received confirmation of receipt from the other administration centers.” Hun Ro began.

The Distance Printers were one of the most useful augmentors that Novae and Li Nu had developed. A message could be input into a Distance Printer, and it would send the message through some kind of wireless wave to any other Distance Printer in range to be printed out. The range was limited, but thanks to the chain of augmented relay stations, every nation in the SDC was part of the network.

This was one of the greatest secrets of the SDC. Outside of the technical team that created it, only the people in this room and the highest-ranking officials and specially selected operators knew of its existence. This resource was far too valuable to share with the other nations. Perhaps after a time of extended peace, but not yet.

“Based on the negotiations and the current domestic issues in the Fire Nation colonies, I would guess that the Fire Nation is attempting to gain access to the iron and coal resources in the Instou Mountains. The Fire Nation had attempted to hold onto this territory after the Phoenix Sage Insurrection, but they realized that they would be overextended.” Izuka said, pointing out the area on the map. The mines in question are on the far eastern frontier of the Central Earth Kingdom.

“But as I see it, other than the indignation of the Fire Nation invading the Earth Kingdom, the SDC isn’t really affected by this. The Earth Kingdom unilaterally dissolved all of the treaties with us when they overthrew Long Feng. None of our territories are even remotely threatened.” Rajeen followed up. And what she said was true. The Earth Kingdom intentionally isolated itself.

“What of the Northern Water Tribe? Do we believe that they will become involved?” Toph asked.

“I doubt it,” Ivaku said. “They stayed out of the Hundred Years War, which was far larger in scale than this. Plus, Chief Arnook’s daughter is married to the Fire Lord and his granddaughter is heir to the throne. And I don’t see what they have to gain, except perhaps take control of Alokhai and a few cities along the northern coast.”

“There is a lot of anti-Fire Nation sentiment in the Northern Water Tribe, though. Chief Arnook is under a lot of pressure. Many of the younger generations view him as little more than a puppet to the Fire Nation and consider Princess Yue to be a traitor to her people.” Sokka chimed in. “I just returned from a diplomatic visit a few weeks ago. I don’t think it would be enough to push them into the war, though.”

“I agree with that if the Fire Nation wins decisively.” Izuka interjected. “But what if the invasion stalls? Then the colonies would probably revolt. And are we to allow the Fire Nation to strengthen its position by an aggressive attack against a neighbor with no repercussions? What message does that send?”

“It sends the message that if you’re strong enough, you can do as you like.” Suki said. “This has been the Fire Nation’s mantra for years. We thought that Zuko was different, but after five years of peace, the Fire Nation is again the aggressor. When will the cycle stop?”

“When someone teaches the Fire Nation to respect others. Now may be the best chance that we have to bring them to their knees. The threat of the SDC intervening may be enough to force them back.” Hun Ro said.

“I think that is the right course.” Yinqu commented. “We’ve seen what they did to the Air Nomads and tried to do the Southern Water Tribe. They didn’t halt their warlike ways, they just rested to catch their breath.”

“Do we agree on our recommendation?” Rajeen said, taking control. “All in favor of recommending that the SDC intervene on behalf of the Earth Kingdom’s defense, say aye.”

“Aye!!” Came the unanimous response.

“Those against, say nay.” Silence met Rajeen’s announcement. She sighed. “Suki, could you please send our recommendations to our respective leaders with the Distance Printer?”

“Right away, Successor.” Suki replied with a sigh of her own.

“Now let’s see if our leaders agree with our verdict.” Rajeen intoned. And everyone took a moment to brace themselves for the coming storm.

Ivaku and Hun Ro walked along the beach on Kyoshi Island, basking in the sunlight of the sun as its edge nearly touches the horizon. Her hand feels safe and warm being engulfed in his giant right hand. He was able to get a lot of the function back in his left arm, but she could tell that he was still a little self-conscious about it.

“It’s sad that it took a world disaster for me to see you today, but I really am happy that you’re here. I really love spending time with you.” Hun Ro smiled down at her, looking handsome and kind of roguish with the eyepatch covering his left eye.

“That’s something that I wanted to talk to you about.” Ivaku was feeling a little nervous about this conversation.

“Oh, what about?” She could feel him tensing up.

“It’s nothing bad. At least I hope not. Can we sit down for a minute?” She nodded towards a collection of rocks.

“Yeah, sure.” Hun Ro answered, still a little wary. They made their way over to the rocks and found a couple of seats. She was happy because she got a slightly higher perch and didn’t seem so much shorter than him.

She took his right hand in both of hers. Here goes. “I am happiest when I’m with you Hun Ro. I love my diplomatic work. I love healing. But I love you more than anything. I’ve talked it over with the Matron Asitva, and she’s agreed to allow me to handle my duties from Omashu. If you’d allow me to come there to be with you. I…I want to take our relationship to the next level. I want us to share our life together.”

She was worried when he didn’t say anything, but she was suddenly engulfed in a huge hug that threatened to crack a few ribs. And she loved every moment of it.

“You don’t know how long I’ve waited to hear you say those words.” Tears were in both their eyes as he finally let go of her. “I’ve been worried that you’d grow tired of me or that you’d meet someone else while you traveled. I…”

He stopped speaking as she stood and leaned in for a kiss. After a few moments, she leaned back, holding his face in her hands. “I could never grow tired of you. You’ve been so gentle and patient with me. I love you, Hun Ro. And I meant what I said. I just want to be with you.”

“And I want to be with you too, Ivaku. I would love nothing more than for you to come back to Omashu with me. Bumi and Toph would love to have you. Everybody would love to have you!” She giggled as his voice became louder the more he talked.

“Yes, yes, you don’t need to alert the whole island. Li Nu talked me into bringing all of my stuff with me.” Ivaku gave him another quick kiss. “Let’s head back and tell everyone the good news. I think everyone could use a little pick me up.”

Ivaku hasn’t been this happy since the Avatar ended her enslavement.

Once again, Zuko was facing an angry Avatar in his throne room. He sighed as he explained the situation again. “The Earth Kingdom has been interfering with the running of our colonies. The presence of so many Earth Kingdom citizens directly involved in violence against Fire Nation interests makes this perfectly clear. For that, they need to make concessions. They refused to bargain at the negotiation table, which reinforces their guilt, so we were left with no viable alternatives.”

“That is pure unadulterated nonsense. The Earth Kingdom delegates made it perfectly clear that the number of people involved from their nation is miniscule and your delegates did not present a single fact to support your case. This is a flagrant land grab, just as the Earth Kingdom said it would be. Pull back your forces or be prepared to pay the penalty.”

Zuko signaled as he spoke. “You don’t get to threaten me, Aang. You’ve interfered in Fire Nation business for the last time. This is your only warning.”

“Or what, Zuko? The four Yuyan archers you have stationed around the courtyard are going to fire?” Aang said, no sign of distress in his voice or on his face. “I’ve learned a lot of cool things from Toph and Azula. Seismic sense is one. I can feel the arrows pointed at me. And I thought that Azula was being a paranoid Fire National when she told Toph and I to keep our special techniques secret. But once again, she’s proven herself to be wiser than any of us. So, tell them to shoot, Zuko. And when they fail, I will raze this palace to the ground, killing anyone and everyone I need to in order to remove the threat to my person and the world. And I will ensure that Lu Ten will become the new Fire Lord, not Izumi. So what will it be, Zuko?”

Zuko studied both Aang and Katara. Neither of them showed the slightest bit of concern. And there were indeed four archers, just as Aang claimed. “Get out. You are banished from the Fire Nation and may never step foot here again.”

Aang just shook his head. “I thought that you were a good person and that the Fire Nation was making amends for its errors. I was grossly mistaken. You have one week to withdraw your troops from the Central Earth Kingdom or I will deal with the situation.”

Aang turned and started walking for the door, Katara falling in step next to him. The door opened and Aang was nearly to it when everyone was startled to hear someone calling out to the Avatar. Of course, Zuko recognized that voice. Ambassador Juvel.

“Hello, Ambassador. Now is not a good time, I am leaving the Fire Nation to prevent a war.” Zuko heard Aang say.

“And that’s why I’m here, Avatar Aang. The Southern Defense Coalition is issuing an official proclamation to the Fire Nation; pull all Fire Nation forces out of the Central Earth Kingdom in five days or the SDC will declare war on the House of Agni.” Juvel’s voice rang loud and strong through the throne room even though she was still out in the hall.

Zuko could feel his blood boil. “Who the hell are you third rate nobodies to interfere in Fire Nation affairs? I should have you thrown in prison for daring to propose such an outrageous action.”

“Ambassador Juvel, are there any other staff working with you?” Aang asked, remarkably calm.

“My assistant, Minvu.” She answered, barely audible to Zuko.

“Juvel, Minvu, please go and collect whatever the absolute essentials are that you need on your person. You are leaving the Fire Nation with me, as soon as you gather your belongings. I will not leave you to the mercy of these barbarians.”

Zuko stood and began to step forward. He only made it two steps before his mother’s voice stopped him. “No, Zuko. Let them go. Don’t lose the high ground!”

Zuko clenched his jaw as he stared at Aang, who calmly stared back. “Take the SDC peasants and get the hell off my archipelago.”

Aang and Katara said nothing. They just stared at him with those sad eyes. “Close the door. I’m tired of looking at these interferers.” The guards promptly closed the door, blocking off Aang and Katara from view. Let them run back to the SDC. Those backward fools would rue the day that they fought the Fire Nation.

Min Kai had run out of tears to shed. She knew that it wasn’t really her fault, but she couldn’t help feeling guilty for the invasion that was ravaging her country. Mavong just shrugged when she had asked him whether there was anything else that could have been done to stop the invasion. Dear Gnolos, how was this man allowed to be in charge of anything. Literally anything.

The Earth Kingdom defenders were being overrun. She had no military training, so she didn’t know the specifics of why they were being overrun. The problem was, the three previous regimes had put nearly every veteran commander from the Hundred Years War to the Spike, so she didn’t think anyone in the upper echelon of the entire fucking government knew why the hell they were being overrun.

Her musings were interrupted when a courier came running into the meeting room where the war council was being held. “Generals and Ministers, we’ve just received an official decree from the Southern Defense Council.”

Everyone stood stock still. Min Kai knew that if the SDC decided to strike at the eastern portions of the Earth Kingdom, they were doomed.

Finally, Mavong replied. “Well, what does it say?”

The courier opened the scroll and began reading. “The Southern Defense Council has issued a proclamation of intent to declare war on the Fire Nation for their illegal invasion of the sovereign lands of the Earth Kingdom. They have been given five days from today to withdraw their forces from all Earth Kingdom territory or war will be officially declared against the House of Agni.”

Min Kai was happy that she had no more tears to shed, because she would broken down right then and there from relief. With a second front, the Earth Kingdom might be able to hold back the Fire Nation onslaught. She knew that Omashu had performed well in the Hundred Years War, but most of the other nations of the coalition had been neutral.

But she would be happy to accept any aid that they could get. A catastrophic defeat to the Fire Nation may provoke yet another regime change, when there weren’t any good alternatives left. She was not a spiritual person, but perhaps this one time the Great Spirits were looking out for her people.

“Lord Zuko, we have to withdraw our forces from the Earth Kingdom. Omashu has a strong and capable military force. Our southern flank is weak. We don’t have enough manpower available to invade the Earth Kingdom, defend our southern border, fight off the SDC navy and deal with any insurrections in our colonies.” General Liao said, pointing to the offending locations on the map.

“Not alone. We must call upon the mutual defense treaty we signed with the Northern Water Tribe. Our rights as a sovereign nation are being impugned upon by the SDC.” Zuko said, reviewing the map.

General Liao and his staff just stared at him. Finally, the general found his words. “My Lord, even if they agreed, they will be little help in a land war unless they mobilize immediately. And their navy is powerful because of their waterbending prowess but I’m doubtful that they could stand against the SDC fleet.”

Zuko sighed, wondering at the stupidity of his military. “I’ve told you, the intelligence about the SDC navy is wrong. There’s no way they upgraded that quickly. If the Northern Water Tribe will not answer our call when our sovereign will is being thwarted, what good are they.”

“My Lord, having allies is good, but I don’t believe that they will answer the call to arms.” General Liao insisted.

“Your doubts are noted. We are requesting they fulfill their part of the pact. If not, we will deal with them next.”

“Of course, Lord Zuko. We will continue the invasion as planned.” General Liao answered.

The idiots will be the end of all balance in the world, Pakku thought as he made his way to the meeting hall. The incompetent buffoons can’t handle what they’ve already stolen, yet they hope and dream of taking more. He just shook his head.

If only the damn fools had listened to him and Jeong Jeong. Azula wasn’t the problem with the Fire Nation. She was literally in opposition to every stupid decision they made. But that superstitious fool Ursa was able to get enough superstitious fools in the White Lotus to buy into her belief of that fire witch nonsense. And they had woefully underestimated Azula. The Night of the Wilting Lotus was what one of the survivors had called it. Had he lived, Jeong Jeong probably would have agreed with that sentiment.

But now they had to deal with that immature warmonger Zuko. He had seemed like an honorable and respectful youth, and his marriage to Yue had seemed to dampen some of that Fire Nation aggression that they all seem to have from birth. And up until now, he was doing well. With one exception. One gigantic exception. The Northwest Colony. Every response only made the situation worse. After reading the Azula Papers, his regrets over the actions of the White Lotus were even worse. Even if the Fire Nation didn’t accept her proposal, he felt confident that she would have had a defter touch in dealing with the insurrections.

But he had no more time to dwell on past mistakes. His job now was to keep the Northern Water Tribe from making any further mistakes. And answering Zuko’s call to arms would be a colossal error. But he knew that his people felt that they were falling behind, especially with the ascension of the Southern Defense Coalition.

“This meeting is now called to order! Silence for the Chief!” The Sargeant-At-Arms proclaimed, tapping his spear on the ground to call for attention. Soon enough, the attendees were all quiet.

Chief Arnook stood, looking out over the assembled crowd. There were many new, and younger, faces staring back at Pakku. The unrest of the people had brought many new people to the committee. “We have been called upon by the Fire Nation to honor our pledge of mutual defense, as they have been threatened with war by the Southern Defense Council.”

“A response they provoked by invading the Earth Kingdom,” a young man yelled.

“The Fire Nation claims it was protecting its colonies from Earth Kingdom saboteurs. The affairs between the Earth Kingdom and the Fire Nation are of no concern to the SDC. The Earth Kingdom unilaterally broke all treaties with foreign powers when Long Feng was executed. They have no legal authority to attack the Fire Nation.” Chief Arnook continued.

But chaos erupted as most of the younger crowd began yelling in anger. Pakku remain dignified, but he agreed with their assessment. Why would Arnook use this line of reasoning?

“Order! Order!” The Sargeant-At-Arms yelled, tapping his spear vigorously. After another thirty seconds or so of noise, the crowd finally settled down.

“We have been kept out of the world and behind our walls for too long. The Earth Kingdom are fools who don’t know how to run their lands. Especially the northern coastal lands. Look at what the south has done with their territory. In three years, they forged a mighty confederation! Even our southern brethren have seen their stock rise. The Fire Nation will allow us to take Alokhai and keep whatever Earth Kingdom coastal lands we can claim as our own. Now is the time for us to retake our rightful position in the world!” Arnook’s voice rang through the hall.

Everyone looked at him in shock, including Pakku. Did he just say that we should try to become like the south by conquering lands? The Southern Defense Coalition was exactly that, a group of like-minded nations that banded together to promote the safety and interests of the group. They conquered no one.

Pakku could stand for this no more. “This is wrong and is against everything that we’ve always stood for. You wish to become like the Fire Nation, small-minded egoists who believe that you are due more than you’ve earned. The Southern Defense Coalition was forged from a need to protect themselves from just the sort of aggression that you’re promoting!”

The hall erupted into loud yelling once again. Pakku had many supporters in this argument, but probably not enough. The debates continued on for two hours, both sides speaking passionately for the merits of their cause. But Pakku saw the carving in the ice. The march towards the New Northern Water Empire was about to be initiated.

“We have had enough arguing and debate. Now is the time to vote!” Arnook stated, his powerful voice carrying through the hall. “We will take a standard anonymous vote.” And for the next twenty minutes, the assemblyman went forth and drop their voting chips into the boxes, black for war and white for neutrality.

The votes were tallied by two of the elder woman who knew nothing of the voting matter. The tally was read for all to hear. Yutua declared, “26 black chips, 15 white chips.”

A cheer erupted from many of the men. Pakku was not one of them. His nation, the tribe that he has loved and cared for all his life, has forsaken the righteous path in pursuit of material gain. At the expense of a foolish nation, yes, but by force, nonetheless. He stood and began to make his way to the door. Arnook caught his eye, a nod of respect to try and appease Pakku. But he just turned away from his chief and the celebration. He feared what was about to come.

Li Nu was aboard the SDC warship “Southern Whirlwind” as it sailed out of the Southern Sea and towards Whaletail Island. Group One of the SDC fleet was six strong, but the Whirlwind was the ace in the hole. This had been her baby, her one foray into offensive weaponry. It hurt to need it, but she feared what the Big Three Powers would do if they ever turned their aggression towards her adopted people.

And they would learn to fear and respect the SDC if she had to sink every ship in the Fire Nation and Northern Water Tribe fleets to do it. After learning that Ivaku had been held in slavery by the Northern Water Tribe for the sins of her father, Li Nu had developed a burning hatred for them. She now understood why Azula had always hated them.

It was early evening when the fleet approached Nurbao Harbor at Whaletail Island. War had been officially declared eight hours ago. And now the Fire Nation would learn what it meant to wage war against the SDC.

“Master Li Nu, five enemy vessels sighted. Joral reading will be initiated at your mark.” Ginva said. He was the augmented spotter. He would use the joral, an enhanced version of the jevalda that was built into the ship below the water line. It used sound to sense ships on the open water up to five clicks away and give accurate locations, speed and travel directions to the disc launcher guide. Which, in the case, was Li Nu.

Li Nu’s team loaded the first disc into the launcher. The disc was a metal ring with an augmentor that allowed the guide to configure the blades and fins to very specific configurations. These fins and blades allowed the disc to be aimed very precisely. And Li Nu had mastered the mathematics of this deadly art. Like a kid throwing little toy discs, she could hit a moving vessel with 85% accuracy from three clicks.

“Guide ready for coordinates. Mark!” Li Nu announced. She had been practicing this drill.

“2.72 clicks, 18.12° sighting, 123.56° transit, 17.21 knots,” the spotter called out. She typed them into the thinker-guide and listened as the new configuration set. The whole process took exactly seven seconds. Just as planned.

“Disc away!” Li Nu shouted as the complicated launcher flung the disc into the air towards the enemy vessels. At just over nine feet across, they were designed with sharp, specially hardened edges that would allow them to cut into the hull of a metal ship. The metal disc contained a glass core that would break on impact with the metal ship. Once broken, the two chemicals would mix and the reaction would detonate with an incredible explosive force. Another disc was loaded as they awaited the impact.

“Guide ready for coordinates. Mark.” Li Nu announced again, but everyone was distracted by the explosion from across the water.

“Target hit and sinking.” The spotter cheered. “2.48 clicks, 15.79° sighting, 157.55° transit, 16.49 knots.”

The second disc was configured and ready for launch in the proscribed time. “Disc away!” She waited for feedback as the third disc was loaded. And it came quickly.

“Target hit, rear port. Appears to be afloat but no propulsion.” Li Nu smiled. This was getting to be fun.

“Guide ready for coordinates. Mark!” And the process continued. All five vessels were sunk or incapacitated with only eight discs fired and less than ten minutes of combat time. Three ships were sunk or incapacitated with one hit, while two more ships needed two discs to put them out of their misery. And unfortunately, Li Nu had one miss. The fleet paused to collect the crews of the sinking or incapacitated ship. The survivors were transported to Narbao harbor, along with a warning. Any Fire Nation warship they meet will suffer the same fate.

Li Nu joined her spotter on the platform above the disc launcher and gazed out across the open waters. They headed north towards the waters between the Fire Nation and their colonies. For as long as she could remember, the Fire Nation had ruled the waters.

But now the hunters will learn what it means to be the hunted.

Chapter Text

This was an absolute disaster. Lu Ten was cursing his father for ever making that stupid arrangement with the Northern Water Tribe and the White Lotus. The Fire Nation has made misstep after misstep, and everything was about to come crashing down around them.

The offensive into the Central Earth Kingdom had started well. General Liao had made excellent progress against the Earth Kingdom objectives. And for the first few days, they had overrun more territory than they had expected. The Earth Kingdom soldiers were disorganized and in complete disarray. And then the SDC had intervened. Zuko’s Folly, as many had called the Fire Lord’s challenge to the Earth Kingdom, turned out to be only the first mistake. Underestimating the SDC was actually the true folly.

Omashu’s troops smashed into the southern regions of the Fire Colony and made significant progress before the Fire Nation troops had been able to establish a solid defensive perimeter. But this perimeter drew soldiers and supplies away from the army invading the Central Earth Kingdom. And then there was the naval situation.

An absolute debacle was the best term that Lu Ten could find to describe the situation. Three small SDC fleets had sailed into Fire Nation waters and run amok. In particular, they had some sort of disc weapon that could damage or sink ships from significant distances. And to make matters worse, the ships were faster than anything in the Fire Nation navy. One third of the Fire Nation fleet was out of commission and the rest had been ordered to avoid conflicts with the SDC fleets if possible.

A water tribe fleet was making its way down to reinforce the Fire Nation, but who knows what good that would do. The Northwest Colony had launched widescale insurrections against the Fire Nation, pinning even more troops down. Everything hadn’t gone to shit, though. With the Northern Water Tribe taking control of Alokhai, more of the Fire Nation troops and some water tribe reinforcements could be moved into the Central Earth Kingdom. And so far, the Fire Colony had held firm in its loyalty to the Fire Nation. The Northern Water Tribe attacks against the northern coastal cities should distract the Earth Kingdom somewhat.

But Lu Ten’s biggest concern was the Avatar. Zuko had declared him an enemy of the Fire Nation. If he intervened on behalf of the SDC in one of the large battles, the Fire Colony could be overrun. No one knew exactly where he was or what his plan was. This was going to end badly for the Fire Nation.

It was his job to run counterintelligence to the Earth Kingdom and the SDC. And it was basically a worthless task. The SDC plans were pretty obvious. Force the Fire Nation to defend its territory instead of continuing its march into the Central Earth Kingdom. And to cut off trade from the Fire Nation to its colonies. The Earth Kingdom plan was just as simple. Hunker down and pray that they could hold out long enough for the SDC to break the will of the Fire Nation.

The door opened and Mai entered. To an untrained observer, she probably appeared calm and stoic. But Lu Ten knew her well enough to recognize the concern in her features.

“We just received word from the naval command.” She paused, swallowed, and then continued. “The Northern Water Tribe reinforcement fleet was caught on the open water by the SDC. All thirty-six ships were sunk. The Fire Navy was able to pull about one hundred and fifty sailors from the water, of the estimated seven hundred.”

Lu Ten’s heart sank. They were counting on the combined fleets to at least slow the SDC down. Now, he feared that nothing could stop the relentless juggernaut that ruled the waters. “What of the SDC fleet?”

Mai just looked at him. “It sailed north towards the northern coastal waters. Hawks have already been sent to the Northern Water Tribe to warn them of what was coming. For all the good that I believe it will do them.”

Lu Ten just hung his head. Zuko, what have you gotten us into.

Of all the stupid things that the Supreme Council could have done, sending Mavong to take command of the Central Earth Kingdom defense was probably the worst thing that anyone in the Earth Kingdom could have done. She liked Mavong, she really did, but the man was barely competent at the things that he had been trained to do his whole life. And leading a military force was most definitely outside his miniscule circle of competency.

And of course, Min Kai had to follow him. She thinks that the Supreme Committee is setting them up to be scapegoat-sheep if things go to hell. But so far, they had actually stopped the Fire Nation invasion. Of course, much of the credit should probably go to the SDC, which by all accounts was kicking the crap out of the Fire Nation.

But the entry of the Northern Water Tribe on the side of the Fire Nation was an unexpected turn. They promptly proceeded to raid the northern coast of the Earth Kingdom, taking control of the four most important port cities. But that wasn’t her problem. She had to help devise the military defense strategy for the Central Earth Kingdom. The thought of an untrained hack like herself having any say in military matters made her stomach churn.

But she looked over the map and listened to what the officers had to say. Colonel Laolung was speaking. “They are targeting our administration centers and key military posts. I believe that we should pull back into the forts and wait out the invaders. They can’t push far enough to take our eastern bases. Let them occupy the land; it will tie down even more of their dwindling manpower.”

Min Kai thought that the plan had merit. This wasn’t a slash and burn campaign. The Fire Nation needed to be able to resupply locally. But she knew that Mavong wouldn’t like it.

“We need to meet them in the field and drive them from our country.” Mavong retorted. Min Kai held her sigh in. He was treating this like a political endeavor. Win for glory and morale. But the earth forces hadn’t won in direct conflict and likely wouldn’t. But Min Kai had an idea.

“Perhaps we could blend the two ideas. We have good intel on their targets, so we should be able to predict their marching paths. We can’t meet them in the open, but what if we funnel them towards the tactical points that give us a bit of a defensive advantage. If we destroy the bridges here, here and here, we can redirect their two main field armies towards the narrower passes to the northeast. We set up defensive positions in this area and harass and delay them as much as possible. No open field combat, but we thwart and retreat as necessary.” Min Kai explained, pointing out the relevant positions on the map.

Laolung reviewed her suggestions. Finally, he spoke. “The idea has merit, although the positions you picked out aren’t the most favorable. But I believe that we could make this idea work.” He looked to Mavong.

“Hmmm, I would prefer open field combat with a decisive victory, but I will let you try this plan. But if it doesn’t work, we will be taking the fight to the enemy.” Mavong said. “Come to me with the plan when it is completed. I have other duties to attend to now, so good night.”

Mavong walked away and Min Kai gave a soft sigh. The man was exhausting. But perhaps this wouldn’t end in catastrophic failure. Her internal monologue was interrupted by Loalung. “Thank you, Little Hammer, for your intervention. This is a respectable plan. Not as good as fully pulling back to our fortified position, but it is a viable option for dealing with the Fire Nation.”

“Thank you, Colonel. But pulling back to the fortified positions was never going to be a politically acceptable position for Mavong. I’m sure that he was sent with a directive to drive the interlopers off our lands. This is probably the best compromise you were going to get.”

She spent the next two hours going over the new operation plan, figuring out logistics and determining the best spots for defensive positions. It was actually really interesting to see how the military types approached the endeavor. It was a lot like the legal arguments that she was used to dealing with in politics. Where will the opponents attack? What will their response to our response be? By the time she made her way to bed, she thought that they had a good plan.

The next morning, they showed the plan to Mavong. He didn’t like it but he approved it anyway. Min Kai hid her relief from him though; she didn’t need to antagonize Mavong or he might double down on his bad ideas the next time he was challenged.

Then it was time for earthbending combat training. She had always been a skilled bender, fast and precise. Her training had been done by a retired Dai Li agent who was also an Ascended. He had trained her in a light and fast attack style, with the occasional heavy attack to throw off the opponents timing and expectations. This was far different than most of the benders that she’d encountered here in the army. Slow and ponderous, it was no wonder that they were being outmatched by enemy firebenders.

Which is why Colonel Laolung had asked her to be a special instructor for the younger earthbenders that had been drafted into the army. Somehow, he had even found out about her old nickname. All the soldiers referred to her as the Little Hammer, at least when Mavong wasn’t around.

“Alright, ladies and gentlemen, it’s like I’ve been telling you. Speed kills. Throwing a giant rock has its uses, but it will be worthless if the target isn’t there if it arrives. All you need to do is hit the enemy with enough force to kill or incapacitate them. Smashing them beyond recognition doesn’t earn you any extra credit. Now, create a projectile three times the size of your fist.” Min Kai watched as the fifteen troops did as she asked.

“Now, at my mark, strike the target as quickly as possible.” She paused for a moment. “Mark!”

And the rocks were launched at varying speeds. Three were launched with impressive velocity. About ten were adequate. But two looked like they were being delivered by sloth-snails. She sighed but didn’t call them out. She could tell they were trying.

They repeated the process a few times and then she started running them threw speed drills. Even the slower ones started doing better. Then she passed them back to their normal instructors to work on defensive drills.

She made her way back to the command tent. Mavong and Laolung were already there, looking over the map. They both looked up as she entered.

“How are the new earthbenders looking?” Laolung asked.

“You’ve got a few strong ones with a bunch in the middle, along with a couple of weak ones that need more coaching before they’re ready for combat. But they’ll all get there.” She replied honestly.

“Slackers need to be encouraged to do better.” Mavong said. “We need everyone giving their best effort.”

Min Kai sighed. “It’s not a lack of effort, it’s simply a lack of skill and training.”

“Hmmm.” Was Mavong’s only response. “That is interesting, but I’ve decided that you need to see real combat in order to improve your training abilities.”

Min Kai felt her entire body stiffen. Combat? “I live to serve the Earth Kingdom, sir, but I’m a political consultant, not a soldier. I’d be more of a liability than an asset in a battle.”

“I agree with Min Kai’s assessment, General Mavong. She is a talented earthbender, but she’s not a soldier. If you are looking to give her field experience, I recommend that she accompany the troops establishing the defensive position at the Omhai pass. As an observer.”

Mavong looked between the two. “Fine, but I expect you to perform your duties and ensure that the pass is defended.”

“Of course, sir.” Min Kai held in her sigh. It looks like she was going out into the field.

Zin Tee was concerned. The takeover of Gerva by the Northern Water Tribe was not a welcome occurrence to the citizens of this fair city. And for those that choose to live their lives outside the bounds of the conservative viewpoint favored by their new overlords, life was even more nerve-wracking.

Hayan had left the Northern Water Tribe upon reaching his majority, when he found that he no longer desired to live a lie. He had traveled to Gerva, where he had met Zin Tee. And they had clicked the instant they met. For Zin Tee, it had been like finding a missing piece of his soul. They just completed each other. And now there was a chance they could lose it.

Zin Tee had been ready for them to leave and make their way to the SDC. Zin Tee had many friends there, friends who could help them build a new life. But Hayan didn’t want to leave the home that he had found. He wanted to stay and fight.

Zin Tee was not a violent man, but if his husband wanted to defend Gerva, Zin Tee would stand by him. Which is why they were at a meeting of the Gervan Unity meeting. The three cultures that had stood united for so long under Fire Nation rule, remained united under Northern Water Tribe rule. These people wanted life to remain as it was. People of the three cultures working together, living together, eating together and just enjoying life together.

They wanted Gerva to remain a place where Zin Tee and Hayan could hold each other’s hands when they went out for dinner. They wanted to keep the small temples and pagodas for the people that practice rituals for Tui and La that aren’t done in the Northern Water tribes. They wanted harmony and acceptance.

And so far, the Northern Water Tribe hadn’t forced any radical changes. There was a curfew as they established a new civil government. Fo Yang’s role had been reduced, but he was still the main spokesman for the Gervan people. People were hopeful that the changes would be cosmetic. After all, the Fire Nation wasn’t known for being tolerant, but they had allowed Gerva to do its own thing. In return, Gerva had never had so much as a single organized protest against their overlord in over twenty years. They were productive and law-abiding citizens. And this is what Fo Yang has been trying to convey to the Northern Water Tribe.

“We must remain calm and compliant. If we show them why were so productive for the Fire Nation, then perhaps they will allow the status quo to continue. If we protest and fight before an offense has been committed, we will encourage them to crack down on us.” Zin Tee was explaining to the group. If he was going to participate, he was going to do it on his terms.

“And how far are we supposed to let things go before we stand up for ourselves? Perhaps they raise taxes? That’s not so bad, right? Maybe people have to pay a little extra fee to marry someone of a different culture? Surely, if you love someone, you’ll be willing to pay for the right. We need to decide where the line in the sand will be.” Miyun said. She was a firebending baker, known for her sweet rolls and calm demeanor.

“That is a fine question, Miyun. I wish that nothing changes. I am happy here. I love Gerva and the people in it. But some things have already changed. I feel that more will. But we have to remain calm and approach the situation rationally, or we may contribute to a situation that spirals out of control. This is what happened in the Northwest Colony and the Fire Nation, isn’t it?” Zin Tee replied.

The debate continued on until curfew was approaching. No one wanted to push the issue just yet, so they all made their way back towards their homes at the appointed hour. Zin Tee and Hayan, along with a few friends, walked back towards their apartment building. Laughing and joking, they were only a block away when they heard someone call out to them.

“Hey, what are you people doing out? It’s almost curfew!” Zin Tee turned to see two water tribe constables making their way towards them. Zin Tee decided to be the spokesperson for the group.

“We were just making our way home from a small celebration. We all live in the building one block over. We’ll be inside and off the street in three minutes, officers.” Zin Tee smiled and gave a small bow of respect.

The two officers just looked at him, and then at Hayan. Shit. The jevaldas. Did they know?

“Well, look what we have here, Holmuk. A pair of hemraffers. Aren’t they just the cutest thing?” The officer said.

Zin Tee felt Hayan tense next to him, but Zin Tee had already grabbed his shirt and held him in place. He couldn’t stop him if he tried to do something stupid, but Zin Tee prayed that he would show self-restraint.

“Excuse us, officers, but we really would like to comply with the curfew order. May we make our way to our building?” Yin Lu asked, taking the attention off of Zin Tee and Hayan.

The officers looked at Yin Lu, then back at Zin Tee. “Yeah, get going. But don’t cut it so close next time or it may be necessary to show you what comes with stepping out of line. Things aren’t going to be like they were before. We’re going to make sure that you’re good little colonials.”

And the two officers continued on their way. The tension in the group eased and they all walked quickly back to their building. But Zin Tee could read the writing on the wall. There were a lot of people that wouldn’t be welcome in Gerva anymore.

Li Nu wasn’t sure what kind of reception they would get in Gerva. They obviously didn’t expect the Northern Water Tribe soldiers to accept them with open arms. But it was the citizens of Gerva that were the issue. Gerva was almost considered an auxiliary member of the SDC. If the people took up arms against the SDC when they attempted to liberate them from their new overlords, the SDC was to back off and let them go their own way.

No SDC vessel would fire on the people of Gerva. They were free to make their own choice. The Gervans were friends and the SDC would accept whatever decision that they made. But the SDC was going to at least try and offer them independence and sovereignty.

Li Nu had fond memories of the city. She still had the jevalda that Azula had bought for her all those years ago. These were good people that accepted everyone and had shown themselves to be good friends to the SDC. They had never sought independence from the Fire Nation, so the SDC had never tried to set them free.

Even with the Fire Nation as their enemy, the SDC hadn’t sought to bring Gerva into the fight. But when the Fire Nation cast them aside for the Northern Water Tribe to rule, well, that was something that the SDC wouldn’t let slide.

They had changed their disc thrower set up to fight the smaller, more nimble water tribe vessels. Smaller discs with less explosives. Switching to a closer range, more rapid-fire targeting system. It had worked magnificently against the water tribe fleet in just off the coast of the Northwest Colony, and Li Nu expected it to work just as well here.

But first, a small team of operatives were going to make their way into the city and try to meet up with Fo Yang and some of the other known locals. Yinqu and a few of the others that had emigrated from Gerva had taken a small water dingy to a smuggler’s cove a few miles outside the city and would make their way across land to the city. They would have forty-eight hours to get intelligence about the state of the city and decide how to respond to the Northern Water Tribe.

It was a sign of trouble when even Fo Yang’s eternal good cheer was starting to fade. Zin Tee knew him well enough to see that many troubles were weighing upon Fo Yang’s mind. He had tried to get him to share some of the burden, but Fo Yang kept repeating one phrase. ‘It is a burden for the old, not the young.’

Zin Tee just sighed as he carried his groceries home. He was so lost in his thoughts that he almost didn’t notice the woman falling into step alongside him. And he nearly dropped his bags when she spoke. It wasn’t the words, but the speaker. Yinqu. “Hello, Zin Tee, do you have time for a chat? I’d love to pick your brain about what’s been happening in Gerva.”

It took a few moments for his brain to reset. “Yes, of course, Yinqu. Uhm, well, you just caught me by surprise. Come on up. Hayan won’t be home for a little while yet.”

They walked together in silence, Yinqu simply looking around and taking in the city while Zin Tee just didn’t know what to say. He had met up with her once about a year ago at an SDC economic meeting, representing Gerva as an unofficial member of the group. She had been dating the chief of the Southern Water Tribe and father of Katara, and things seemed to be going great down south. Another six hundred or so immigrants had gone to the Southern Water Tribe when they had last talked, many choosing to escape the conservative nature of the Northern Water Tribe. He could definitely empathize.

Soon enough, they were back at his apartment building. He let them into the little flat he shared with Hayan. She finally spoke again. “I’m sorry to show up unannounced, but the SDC is worried about how Gerva, and all of Alokhai, is faring. Your city has become a good friend of our people.”

She looked at him expectantly. “So far, the changes have been minor. But we believe that more changes are coming. None for the better. Two nights ago, the water tribe constables used a homophobic slur against Hayan and me as we walked back from a meeting. Many of us are worried.”

“We feared as much. The SDC is willing to commit resources to free you and your people from Northern Water Tribe control, if you want our help. If your people are content, we will not interfere. Under no circumstance will the SDC take any kind of military action against the people of Gerva.” She explained. “Our people are friends, and whether you are part of the Fire Nation or Northern Water Tribe, we want that to continue.”

Zin Tee felt his heart lift. Alone, Gerva and Alokhai couldn’t stand against the Norther Water Tribe. But with the SDC’s help, they had a chance. “I believe that the majority of people would prefer to be separated from the Northern Water Tribe. What would become of us if we through off the yokes of our overlords?”

“The SDC wants to see you create an independent state, free to make its own choices. We would offer you membership in the SDC, if you were so inclined. We may have to rename our coalition then, but that’s a small thing.” Yinqu smiled.

They both turned as the door opened. Hayan and Yin Lu walked in, continuing whatever conversation that they had been having. They were both inside and the door closed before they noticed the woman with Zin Tee. They both just stopped and gawked.

“Hello, Hayan, Yin Lu. It’s nice to see you both again.” Yinqu said, smiling at the pair. They finally found their bearings.

“It’s wonderful to see you too, Yinqu. But this is a big surprise. Uhmm, I thought you were down south?” Hayan asked, clearly unsure about what is going on.

“I was, but I wanted to see how the citizens of Gerva were doing. The SDC is concerned about our northern friends. And from what Zin Tee has told me, the city isn’t happy under Northern Water Tribe rule.”

“That is true. Many of us want to fight. We’ve been biding our time to see if the Northern Water Tribe would be hands off like the Fire Nation, but it’s clear that they won’t be.” Yin Lu said, anger in her voice.

“Well, several of my associates and I are gauging the feelings of the town. If it is as you say, then the SDC is willing to fight with you to gain your independence.” Yinqu said, causing both Hayan and Yin Lu to smile broadly. Their smiles faded a bit as Yinqu but up a hand. “But I can’t just take the word of the three of you. As I said, my associates are talking to others. And I’d like to talk to Fo Yang, if possible. He’s more high profile, so we’re avoiding approaching him directly. It would be nice if one of you could bring him to us.”

“I can handle that,” Zin Tee answered. “There’s a budget review this evening. I don’t have to be there, but it won’t be strange if I show up. I’ll try to get ahold of him there.”

“That sounds great, Zin Tee.” Yinqu smiled. “But I’d also like to hear about my old friends. Tell me what you guys have been up to.” And the four of them talked about their jobs and lovers and life, the worries of the city forgotten for a few moments.

As always, the hermitage was quiet. Night had fallen, and all was dark until the eyes of the Yotforbu’s statue began to glow with a golden light, illuminating the small room. It was a nice statue. Yotforbu was a nice name. Perhaps someday they would make statues of OrkaHaalu like that. But they didn’t want a new name. Both of her liked their name. The larger room began to glow too as a nebulous cloud of light formed, the soft light barely penetrating the darkness. Both of OrkaHaalu’s faces smiled. They enjoyed these humans.

Two figures walked out of the cloud and looked around. They were both dressed in black robes with gold trim along the edges. The shorter of the two held up her hand and a bright gold light burst forth, showing the features of the two figures. The orb rose and floated near the ceiling.

Navisi set the large travel pack that she had been carrying on the ground as she looked to her mistress. Azula stood back and surveyed the room, the light from the orb reflecting off her gold eyes. She too set down her pack and removed the giant bow from her back.

A smile adorned her face as she recognized her surroundings. “This is the hermitage that I stayed at during the Phoenix Sage Insurrection.” Azula said.

“Yes, indeed it is, my little dear ones.” Orka said. Of course, Haalu had to chime in, for taking turns is how they got along so well. “Welcome home! Your world has been waiting for Azula and Navisi to return.”

Azula stood there stunned for a moment, before tears started falling from her eyes and she pulled Navisi in for a big hug.

Both of OrkaHaalu smiled at the humans. They had been asked to do so much, but now they were home. They were truly marvelous humans.

“Yes, yes, your travels have come to an end. But let us tell you what you’ve missed.” “You are back just in time to see the excitement! Your world needs the Order of the Arts Esoteric!”

And Orkahaalu began waving their six arms around, laughing and dancing around the two figures, her three boobs jiggling erotically.

“All right, OrkaHaalu, the two of you can tell us what is going on.” Azula said, as she wiped her eyes dry and watched Orkahaalu with a look of discomfort. “But for the love of Agni, stop flittering around like you’re having a seizure. Seeing your boobs flop around is giving me a headache.”

But Orkahaalu just laughed louder and danced even more energetically. Azula and Navisi just sighed again.

Chapter Text

Pakku worried for his people. They had received the news that the fleet they sent to reinforce the Fire Nation was completely and utterly wiped out in a single battle. All ships lost without so much as a direct hit on the enemy in retaliation. And this fleet of killer ships was headed towards the north, into the very heart of the people that Pakku loved.

But they weren’t the same people that they used to be. The Northern Water Tribe of ten years ago wouldn’t have sided with the Fire Nation’s blatant land grab. And they sure as hell wouldn’t have raided the Earth Kingdom to make a blatant land grab of their own. It was disgraceful.

If it weren’t for the numerous young people that rallied behind him, encouraging him to oppose the imperialist nature that Chief Arnook’s regime was taking, Pakku would have retired from public life. Retiring and moving to the Southern Water Tribe actually sounded nice. They were young and vibrant, with hundreds from the north moving there. But he knew he wouldn’t be welcome there. The youth of the north had fled to escape those with conservative views like himself.

Pakku stood by his views. He believed that separation of the sexes in bending was the proper course of action. He believed in the old ways. But the south was forging their own way and he had no place there. So, he would stay and try to temper the deeds of the north. As he hoped to do now. He was on his way to the war council to discuss the arrival of the SDC fleet in the northern waters.

As usual, he was one of the first ones to enter the council room. Promptness was an attribute that he firmly believed in. Seeing Pakku enter, Chief Arnook approached him. “Greetings, Pakku. I trust you are well, old friend. These are trying times and we will need all of our wits about us to fight back these invaders and protect our tribe.”

Pakku just stared at him. Invaders? “You can’t actually believe that they are the invaders, can you? You were a fool to back the Fire Nation. You were a fool to accept Alokhai; you know of their strong bond to the SDC. As Azula warned the Fire Nation about the Northwest Colony, I warn you about Alokai. Set them free and pull our forces back to defend the Northern Water Tribe. Anything else and I fear what will befall us.”

Chief Arnook’s face turned red in anger. “You dare speak to your chief like this? You have become soft and feebleminded ever since Azula humiliated you and your precious White Lotus friends. You are a disgrace to the north, and it pains me to see what you’ve become.”

“Perhaps I did need to learn humility at the hands of a child to see the mistakes of our people. Because looking back, I see now that she really was the People’s Princess. Her Regional Economic councils are the only thing holding most of the world together. The SDC was forged from the group of allies she helped bring together. The Fire Nation failed to heed her warning about the Northwest Colony and now they’re paying the price.”

“You’re a fool and a disgrace, Pakku. We are on the cusp of expanding the holding of our people and forging a better world for the Northern Water Tribe.” Chief Arnook looked like he wanted to continue arguing, but he finally noticed that everyone in the room was staring at them.

He took a deep breath and looked back to Pakku. “You are either for the Northern Water Tribe, or against it, Pakku.”

Pakku took his seat as Arnook made his way to his ceremonial seat at the focal point of the round table. Everyone sat quietly, waiting for him to speak. He took a deep breath and then began speaking. “As you know, the SDC defeated our fleet off the coast of the Northwest Colony and the small fleet of SDC ships has entered our waters. We believe that they will attempt to take Gerva. The SDC and Gerva have strong diplomatic and cultural ties.”

He looked around to let his message sink in. “All of Alokhai is under our control now. I propose that we reinforce Gerva with both land and sea forces. If we can draw the SDC fleet into combat near Gerva’s harbor, we can perhaps pin them between the land batteries on one side and our fleet’s firepower on the other.”

Pakku said nothing. He knew that this was perhaps the best strategy that they had. From what they knew from survivors of the battles with the SDC fleets, they had some sort of disc launcher which could fire heavy projectiles that could sink steel Fire Nation vessels from a great distance. Or they could fire smaller discs with great frequency and accuracy to hit the smaller, more nimble water tribe ships. Spreading out the fleet and striking from multiple directions was probably the best counter to their weapon.

He didn’t like the war, but he wanted his people to win if they were involved, so he spoke up. “I agree with this plan. I also suggest that we man a number of smaller attack boats powered by waterbenders to strike at the ships. Intelligence seems to think that only one vessel of the fleet has the disc launchers that have wreaked so much havoc. If we could strike and take out the weapon, the fleet becomes much less of a threat.”

“That is an excellent recommendation, Master Pakku. Let’s discuss the specifics of how to take down these disc launchers.” Chief Arnook suggested. And the committee got to work figuring out how to combat this deadly new threat.

Riding atop Appa gave Aang a good vantage point to survey the scene below. The largest of the Fire Nation field armies had assembled in the southern Fire Colony to defend the southern flank from the SDC army that had moved northward from Omashu. It outnumbered the Omashu army, and while they had been able to stop the progression of the invaders, they hadn’t been able to drive them from Fire Colony territory.

And when Aang was finished with them, they wouldn’t be able to do much of anything. It was with great sorrow that he prepared to deal with the Fire Nation army, but he had warned Zuko what would happen. He even gave them extra time, thinking that maybe the intervention of the SDC would force Zuko to come to his senses. But instead, the Northern Water Tribe had decided to become imperialists too.

“Go back to Katara, old buddy. I have to deal with this problem myself.” Aang said to Appa. He’d already made sure that Momo stayed with Katara. There was no need for the others to be involved in what he had to do.

He jumped off of Appa, opened his glider and made his way to the ground behind the Fire Nation forces. A few soldiers spotted him as he landed and began calling out, whether to Aang or to their superiors, he didn’t know. Neither did he care.

He took a deep breath and closed his eyes. The wind began to whirl around him and the earth shook as his tattoos glowed and the Avatar opened his eyes, their bright white glow a terrifying site. He spoke in voice that sounded like a multitude and used an airbending trick of a previous Avatar to project his voice to the enemy before him.

“Fire Nation soldiers, you defiled the sanctity of the peace between nations and brought the world to war. You will now pay the price for the willful abuse of power used by your Fire Lord to justify his warmongering ways. Tremble and despair, for I am the Avatar, Balancer of Worlds.”

Aang stomped the ground and thrust his arms forward, causing the entire ground to swell and buckle as a giant earthen wave tore through the terrain. Any soldier caught in its path was flung into the air like a ragdoll. Earth wave after earth wave assaulted the troops. The soldiers panicked and fled, some tried to hide in their armored vehicles, while others yet tried to outrun the wave on their attack animals.

But in the end, it mattered little. No one on foot could outrun the colossal power of the Avatar. The metal contraptions offered little protection, as they too were overturned and tossed about like children’s toys. A few of the mongoose-lizards made it to the enemy lines, who in turn allowed them through in order to escape the devastation that the Avatar had unleashed upon the Fire Nation.

Of the 36,000 soldiers that had started the day for the Fire Nation, nearly two thousand were killed or seriously injured by Aang, mainly by falling on something sharp or hitting their heads as they were tossed around. All of the survivors surrendered to the SDC, the will to fight gone. Each and every soldier realized that they lived because of the mercy of the Avatar and for no other reason.

The SDC army parted as Aang made his way back to the tent he had been given. He saw Katara standing outside the tent, looking at him with tears in her eyes. She hugged him as he got close and walked into the tent with him. And she held him as he cried, guilt for the terrible action he had been forced to take eating at his very soul.

The burn on Min Kai’s stomach and leg hurt like hell, but she didn’t have any time to worry about it. She ducked under the fireball that had been aimed at her head and tossed four fist sized rocks at the two firebenders coming out from behind the outcropping. The soldier on the left took two rocks to the chest and instantly crumpled to the ground.

The second soldier had impressive reflexes and was able to knock the other rocks aside with a hastily formed fire fist and instantly went into a spinning kick which launched a wicked stream of fire at the short earthbender. But she was cartwheeling to the side and launched three rocks at her opponents left shoulder.

He gracefully dodged to the right and set himself to counterattack. Which is exactly what Min Kai predicted he would do. She had already stomped the ground and a rock spike flew out of the dirt in front of the firebender and connected with his right shin, upsetting his balance. He fell to one knee and braced himself with his right hand, which Min Kai immediately pinned to the ground with a rock hand as she ran forward.

A huge fireball erupted from his hand as he used his firebending to break the stone, but it was the distraction she needed to hit him in the temple with a second stone hand, knocking him unconscious. She paused for a moment to catch her breath and survey the battle around her. And she was pleased with what she saw. The Fire Nation army was being pushed down the hill.

She turned back to the soldiers she had beaten and bound her second opponent with rock restraints that pinned his wrists and ankles firmly to the ground. But her heart clenched when she went to the first soldier she’d hit.

She knew in a moment that he wasn’t going to make it. His chest was pushed in and blood was bubbling from his mouth every time he breathed. She knelt beside him. “I’m sorry, young man. I didn’t want this war.”

“I…I didn’t either. Please s..stay. I d..don’t want to die a..alone.” His words were soft, but she understood. She held his hand and gave it a gentle squeeze. He didn’t try to talk anymore; it was obvious that he was in great pain. But it was only a minute or so before his grip on her hand loosened and his eyes went blank. She reached up and closed his eyelids.

She had helped defend her lands from the invaders. But at the cost of a little bit of her innocence.

The crackdown of Gerva came sooner and harder than the inhabitants had expected. All nonessential businesses had been shut down. Everyone was to stay at home unless they had officially sanctioned business to attend to. And soldiers came for those they considered to be their enemies.

The soldiers had burst into Zin Tee’s apartment in the early evening. No warning, no chance to surrender. Hayan had attempted to fight back but he didn’t have combat training like their attackers. Zin Tee begged them to stop as they beat and kicked Hayan unconscious. They put Zin Tee in chains and dragged both him and Hayan out of the apartment.

Yin Lu came out, looking ready for a fight. One of the soldiers addressed her. “Step back inside, miss. This doesn’t pertain to you. Unless you want to be detained for being an enemy of the state.”

She was about to speak when Zin Tee yelled. “Yin Lu, go back inside. Please.” He couldn’t bear to watch another person beaten down in front of him. She paused for a second and he truly thought she was going to start a fight. But then she stomped back inside her apartment and slammed the door.

Zin Tee was put in the back of an armored police wagon, joining four others, two men and two women. He recognized all of them. Two of them were water tribe members that had moved to Gerva to escape the conservative grip of their former home. Like himself and Hayan, they were in same sex relationships. And like him, they had been arrested with their partners. From the looks of them, they had been subjected to only minor violence, much like Zin Tee himself had been. But his heart broke as he looked at poor Hayan.

His face was covered with bruises and blood, mainly from his nose. He was unconscious and thankfully Zin Tee had enough range of movement to hold him up. The wagon started moving and they made their way.

Thankfully, no one else was tossed into the wagon with them before they reached their destination. The city jail. They were being pulled out of the wagon when Zin Tee heard a familiar voice, none of his normal good cheer evident.

“What is the meaning of this outrage!” Fo Yang bellowed. This might be the first time Zin Tee had truly seen the man angry. “These are law abiding citizens! Zin Tee is a member of my team and has been nothing but a proper and upstanding man.”

“He has engaged in an inappropriate relationship with a Northern Water Tribe citizen. Said citizen resisted arrest and was taught to mind the law.” The head of the water tribe constables said. “Be careful how you speak to me, Councilman, or you may be joining them in their cell. The unnatural partners will be in separate cells, of course, since we don’t trust them to control themselves.”

“You have no right to treat them like this…” Fo Yang started, but the constable was in motion, swinging his fist at the councilman’s face. And everyone stopped in confusion as a black tentacle came out of the darkness and grabbed the constable’s arm. And with a quick yank, the constable was pulled off his feet and flung into the side of the wagon that the prisoners were just unloaded from, where he collapsed to the ground and didn’t move.

“I believe that I’ve seen enough to decide how this story is going to play out. I can see that the Northern Water Tribe is still full of chauvinistic asslickers. And you have overstayed your welcome in Gerva.” A woman’s voice said. And Zin Tee’s heart jumped into his throat. He only met her the one time, but he remembered her well.

No one forgets Princess Azula.

Yinqu and a few others had returned to the ship under the cover of darkness in the early morning hours. And the tale they told said that it was much as they feared. The Northern Water Tribe were cracking down on Gerva and slowly starting to impose their will. A will that was very much unwelcome, according to every person the expeditionary force had spoken with.

So now the SDC fleet was sailing towards Gerva. As per the plan, Yinqu had negotiated with the Gervan resistance to launch riots and rise against their overlords starting at 9pm of this very night. The SDC would invade from the sea while the Gervans and about a dozen of the SDC elite combat operatives would harass the Northern Water Tribe forces from the land side.

Li Nu had triple checked her disc launcher and guidance system that she had worked with Master Novae to create. The joral used sound waves carried through the water to locate enemy ships and would then feed coordinates of enemy vessels directly to her jevalda, creating an image that she could then use to track and target the enemies. The vision was much like the aardvark-bat sensing that Azula had used, except that the apparatus was much larger and more complicated so that a person with only normal chi training could use it.

And Li Nu was an expert with this particular device. She had felt a little guilt at demolishing the Northern Water Tribe fleet in the previous battle, but they had selected this course of action. But she doubted that she would have any guilt about today’s battle; her enemies were oppressing good and honest people in a way that even the Fire Nation hadn’t done.

And now they would pay for their folly. They were entering the coastal waters just outside of Gerva, the six ships rapidly cutting their way through the water. With the electric engines working in conjunction with the conventional steam powered ones, no other navy had ships that could match their speed. And as Azula had always said, speed kills.

Which is why she had to smile as the Northern Water Tribe prepared to close the ‘trap’ they thought they were setting with their slow little ships. Waterbending made them move better than most, but they were far too slow to evade their impending doom. She wasn’t a military strategist, but she knew enough to recognize that the water tribe ships were coming for her. They had to know that the disc launcher was the most potent weapon on the water this side of the Avatar.

She took her position and prepared for the liberation of Gerva. The Northern Water Tribe was about to learn that the cost of imperialism would have to be paid with blood.

“I can see that the Northern Water Tribe is still full of chauvinistic asslickers. And you have overstayed your welcome in Gerva.” Mistress Azula had told the idiots before her.

Navisi flung her hands out and struck the four constables with her psion bolts before they had made it even halfway through their waterbending movements. She watched dispassionately as their bodies went limp and collapsed to the ground and stopped moving. Their chi pathways would reset in a few minutes. But they were harmless until then.

“It is nice to see you again, Fo Yang. You are looking well.” Mistress Azula said to the older man there. It might be a while before he answers though. It appears that her mistress’s appearance startled him and may or may not be causing him to have an aneurism.

“P…Princess Azula! We thought, well, we thought…” Fo Yang didn’t seem to want to finish the statement.

“That I had died? Not for lack of trying by a great many people.” Mistress Azula said.

“Spirits and evil alien technology made valiant efforts also, Mistress.” Navisi chimed in helpfully.

“Exactly so, Navisi. But where are my manners. Everyone, I would like to introduce you to my apprentice in the study of the Arts Esoteric, Disciple Navisi. As you can see, she is a very talented young woman.” Navisi couldn’t help the big smile that spread across her face. She enjoyed hearing praise from her mistress.

“It is an honor to meet you, Fo Yang. Mistress Azula has told me of you and your wonderful city.” Navisi said with a respectful bow. She had been practicing and was getting pretty good at it, if she does say so herself.

“Uhm, it is an honor to meet you, Disciple Navisi.” Fo Yang responded, seemingly getting his sea legs back under him.

“Well, this is all wonderful, but I believe that we should free your comrades and make a plan for driving the asslickers from your fair city.” Mistress Azula said.

“Mistress Azula, may I heal the watertribe gentleman?” Navisi could sense his pain as he was now starting to wake up.

“Of course, Navisi.” And she hurriedly made her way over to the man.

Navisi turned to the man that was holding the injured man up. “Can you please lay him down and find the keys to unlock the shackles? I’d like to go ahead and start healing him.”

“Of course, Disciple Navisi.” The man gently laid the injured down and went over the guards and started started finagling with the large keyring on the guy’s waist. But Navisi was already settling into her healing meditation.

She pulled the Healing Stones from the pockets inside her robe and set them on the man’s Air and Fire chakras. Once they were centered and attuned, she opened the chi link to the stones and brought forth the rotating rings of light around her wrist; she manipulated the light sigils of the rings as she channeled chi energy into the stones and then through the man’s chakras. She guided the body’s natural healing response, carefully accelerating it enough to quickly heal the wounds but not so quickly that it would start consuming his chi.

Since it was mostly soft tissue damage, it wasn’t too difficult. Healing the broken cartilage in his broken nose took a little time, since she had to make sure everything was properly aligned. It only took a few minutes, but his wounds were now gone. But he would be tired and hungry.

She severed the chi connection between the stones and the man first, then disconnected herself from the stones. The glow from the light sigils faded and all was normal again. She looked around and noticed that everyone else was unlocked and that the constables had been locked in the wagon. And the assembled group was staring at her like she had two heads. And she knows what that expression looks like, since she had worn it the first time she met OrkaHaalu.

“Excellent work, Navisi.” Mistress Azula said with a smile. Navisi smiled back. Then Azula turned to the others. “You need to get him somewhere to rest and get him lots to eat. He needs to rebuild his strength. He’ll be fine in a day or so.”

“Thank you, Disciple Navisi. We appreciate what you’ve done.” The man who had unlocked everyone said. She watched him hold the injured man close and kiss him.

“My pleasure, sir.” Navisi said, turning back to Mistress Azula. “Did you come up with a plan yet, Mistress?”

“I have the makings of one. But I need you and Omnisae to monitor the city from the sky.”

“Of course, Mistress.” And Navisi thrust her hand out and a blue and green shape took shape before her, causing everyone but Azula to step back in shock. In a moment, a giant blue and green eagle-hawk silently flapped its wings as it rose into the sky.

“Alright. Navisi, since you were healing, let me give you the rundown. The SDC is planning an operation to free the city tonight, with the help of the fine citizens of this city and a few SDC operatives smuggled in. I need you and Omnisae to keep me apprised of the movement of the Northern Water Tribe soldiers and constables.”

“As you command, Mistress.” Navisi answered, already starting to look through the psionic connection with Omnisae to see the city through her eyes. The soldiers were congregated near the military installations to the east and west of the docks, with a substantial grouping of constables and military both in the central plaza. She could see three other armored wagons like the one that they had locked the constables in.

She relayed this information to Azula. “Excellent work. Keep Omnisae watching and have her alert you if any deviations occur.” Navisi nodded in confirmation before Azula continued speaking. “Alright, we need to drive as many of the constables and soldiers to the central plaza as possible. Once there, my final ally will take them out of the fight, one way or another, and then she’ll deal with the military garrisons.”

“Who is your final ally, Princess?” Fo Yang asked.

“I’m not a princess anymore, Fo Yang. But I’m keeping our final ally under wraps for now.” And Azula put a wicked smile on her face, which Navisi couldn’t help but match. This was going to be an epic night.

Azula was impressed with how many of the Gervans had shown up to with arms to defend their city. By Agni, she even saw Hilna with a wicked looking spear. That warranted an atta girl from Azula. So, she walked over to the young lady.

“Hello, Hilna. I’m glad to see you ready to defend your city.” The girl looked at her wide eyed. Azula leapt just in time to catch her before she kowtowed. “I’m not a princess anymore, Hilna and I’m not trying to startle you. I just wanted to say that I’m glad to see you standing up for your city.”

“T..thank you, Princess. I just got married and we want Gerva to be the kind of place where we can raise our family.” The girl said, barely stuttering once she got going. Azula smiled at the young man, an earth national from his appearance, that she pulled close.

“Well, you both have my congratulations. My apprentice is wearing one of the jevaldas you and your father made for me all that time ago. I may be in need of more.” She smiled at the two of them. And of course, they just stared back with open eyes and blank faces. “But that is a discussion for later. First, let’s go kick the interlopers out of Gerva.”

Azula patted Hilna on the shoulder and made her way back over to the command group. They paused as they watched her come over. Navisi had that distant look in her eyes, showing that she was communing with Omnisae.

“What’s the situation, Navisi?”

“The military installations have maintained constant manpower and are preparing trebuchets to launch burning pitch bombs at the incoming vessels. We’ve pushed the majority of the constables and soldiers into the target positions. The remainder are locked down in fortified locations and it’s doubtful we’ll push them out without significant effort.”

“Well then, I guess it’s showtime. Send Omnisae out towards the SDC fleet and monitor their process while we retake the city.” Azula couldn’t help but grin. And she noticed that Navisi was matching her. They both knew this was going to be a moment to enjoy.

“Fo Yang, I’m preparing to call my final ally. Signal to the other groups to be ready to strike at the designated targets when they see the signal.” Azula commanded.

“Of course, Mistress Azula. What is the signal?” Fo Yang asked, eyeing her curiously.

“Blue fire,” Azula answered. She held her hands out and shouted. “Kivathryskan!”

And everyone stepped back in shock as a huge black and gold shape shimmered into existence and began to take shape. They all watched in awe as the black dragon with the glowing gold eyes took form, the glowing gold outline of the wings and back wriggling in the dark as the mighty beast flapped its wings and ascended into the air. Forty feet long with a thirty-foot wingspan, it silently rose over the buildings of the city and flew towards the harbor and the central plaza.

“All right, people! We can’t let Kiva have all the fun. Prepare to storm the defensive positions once the enemy has been softened up.” Azula shouted, her chi enhanced voice readily audible to all.

“You do enjoy the spectacle, don’t you, Mistress?” Navisi asked, a smirk on her face. Azula just smiled and pulled FarStrike off her back. The two turned their attention towards the city center. And they started forward when the blue flames erupted from the dragon in the night sky, illuminating the city center in its deadly glow.

Twenty-three discs fired, twenty-one hits. Only a few of the larger water tribe vessels were still afloat. But she sensed the small vessels approaching rapidly. Waterbending. Ginva would notify the crew of the incoming attacks. She focused on taking out the remaining big vessels. But they weren’t nearly as brave as they were before. They were staying outside her range, but they had to come closer sometime if they hoped to stop the fleet.

Unless there was a way for the smaller vessels propelled by waterbending to do it. She would have to count on her crewmates to defend the ships. She was focused on the territory ahead of them. They would be approaching the harbor of Gerva soon, so she ordered the reconfiguration of the disc launcher. She wanted the heavy batteries to bombard the military installations.

“By Gnolos’s Overloaded Testicles, what the hell is that?” Li Nu turned to see what Ginva was shouting about. And she knew in an instant. They could all see blue flames being shot from the sky, gradually changing to orange as the source moved on. Gnolos’s Overloaded Testicles indeed!

They all watched in awe. No one knew what to make of the scene. Someone with a seeing glass said that they could see a gold outline in the sky, but they didn’t know what it was. But then the watcher started yelling because the shape stopping raining fire on the city and flew out over the water. Not towards the ship, but off the aft bow. They watched it climb into the sky as it left the city, and then it suddenly dived.

It again released blue fire over the water; it was going after the little waterbender vessels. She could sense them panic and scatter. They weren’t being hit by the fire, but it sure as hell seemed to terrify them, because Li Nu could sense them fleeing away from the SDC ships. The shape circled the fleet as it pursued the would-be attackers and sent them scurrying away.

But the blue fire was bright and the sailors and Li Nu could all finally see what had terrified the waterbenders. And everyone on the ships were more than a little intimidated too when they saw two gold eyes turn towards them. The black dragon with the gold eyes and trim was a terrifying sight to behold as it breathed its blue fire.

Everyone released the collective breath they had been holding when the creature headed back towards Gerva and perched upon a building near the dock. The fires in the city were still burning, but they were much smaller and no longer blue.

And the crew cheered when they saw the light from the watchtower give three long flashes, pause, and then give three short flashes. The signal repeated a few more times as the ships approached.

The citizens of Gerva had retaken their city.

Chapter Text

Navisi worked her way through the injured, helping as many as she could. It was nice having so many waterbending healers around; they could handle most of the soft tissue damage, freeing Navisi up to handle broken bones and such.

All of the major injuries had been handled by around two in the morning, allowing Navisi to take a break. They had finally put out the fires near the docks and the Gervans could finally meet up with the SDC fleet, which had anchored out in the harbor to watch for any Northern Water Tribe sneak attacks.

“How goes the healing, Navisi?” Azula asked as she made her way over. Azula could help with minor injuries, but her real talents lay elsewhere.

“All the heavy stuff is done. I was hoping to take a break for a few minutes, Mistress.” Navisi answered honestly.

“Then come with me and meet the fine folks from the SDC. It sounds like I should know a few and I want everyone to meet my awesome new apprentice.” Navisi blushed as Azula gave her a side hug. Azula was being especially demonstrative tonight.

“I would be honored to meet your friends, Mistress.” Azula flashed her a smile as they made their way towards the docks. She could sense the boats approaching the docks, thanks to her jevalda. Apparently, Azula could sense them too, because she grabbed Navisi’s hand and started pulling her towards the new arrivals.

“Come on, Navisi, there’s someone I’m dying to see.” And the two of them all but ran to the docks.

“Li Nu! Li Nu!” Azula started yelling. And it clicked for Navisi. One of the founding members of the Azulinati. Shur Zi’s sister. No wonder Azula was so excited.

Navisi laughed as she watched the aura shift of the one she presumed was Li Nu. She let go of Azula so she could run to her friend that much faster. She would wait back a minute and let them have their reunion. After all that Azula had been through during her long trip home, she deserved this little piece of happiness.

“Azula! Is…is that really you?” The woman asked, looking dumbstruck. But a wide smile spread across her face as she saw the human projectile coming for her and she braced for impact. The two women shared a long hug, joy and happiness flooding the auras of both of them. Navisi felt tears coming to her eyes also. She was so happy for Azula; her mistress had given so much to so many. The universe owed her this bit of joy and a lot more. Navisi had a sense of nostalgia too; Li Nu really did look a lot like Shur Zi.

A loud howling sound filled the air, causing Navisi to laugh; a little at the indignation from Kiva that Azula was giving so much attention to someone besides her, and more at the absolute panic of the poor people around her.

“It’s alright, everyone!” Navisi announced, projecting her voice with a little chi. “Azula’s dragon is just a little jealous.”

“Your…your dragon?” Li Nu asked, wiping the tears from her eyes as she and Azula finally released their hug.

“Well, she’s not a normal dragon, but she is my dragon. And what a beautiful and majestic dragon she is!” Azula projected that last bit with chi, making sure the Kiva and everyone else could hear. Kiva’s gold eyes flashed for a second and then she settled back down onto the building she was perched on.

Li Nu just stared up wide eyed. Navisi could only imagine her reaction when she found out the full extent of Kiva’s awesomeness.

“And I would like to introduce my traveling companion and apprentice, Disciple Navisi. She’s been my rock through many of my trials and tribulations.” Azula said, gesturing to Navisi.

Navisi bowed. “It is a pleasure to meet you, Li Nu. Mistress Azula has told me many wonderful tales of you and the rest of the Azulinati.”

Li Nu’s smile got even wider. “And it is an honor to meet you, Disciple Navisi. I’m glad that Azula was able to find another of her order.”

“We will have time to catch up in a bit, but first we need to make sure that Gerva is set up and protected from any further attacks from the Northern Water Tribe.” Azula turned to Navisi. “Has Omnisae observed any further incursions?”

“No. All of the small vessels retreated as quickly as possible to the few remaining warships, which are now sailing away from Gerva at what I’m guessing is their maximum speed. It certainly seems that Kiva put the fear of the Great Spirits in them!”

Azula grabbed Li Nu with one arm and Navisi with the other. “Alright, ladies. Let’s get this town cleaned up so that we can enjoy our reunion.”

Zuko couldn’t understand how this had happened. The Earth Kingdom was a weakened giant, barely holding the fragments of its people together into a cohesive whole. The Fire Nation had the most powerful military on the planet. They had the largest navy. With the Northern Water Tribe at their side, the war should have gone quickly and easily.

But the SDC had stuck their noses in where it did not belong, as did the Avatar. And their water tribe allies were worthless; their entry into the war only caused the Fire Nation to lose Alokhai with no tangible return. And the Avatar had dismantled the army holding the southern Omashu army at bay. Without them to protect the southern flank, the SDC had marched north and smashed into the rear of the Fire Nation forces invading the Central Earth Kingdom.

That coward General Liao had surrendered. Zuko had burned the map table in the war room to ashes upon hearing the news. The SDC had offered the Fire Nation terms for a ceasefire. The shame of it all was eating him alive. This wasn’t how his rule was supposed to go.

But he knew that he had to go to the negotiating table. With Alokhai under SDC control, their fleet in the northern waters was headed to the Northern Water Tribe. And there were unsubstantiated rumors of a black dragon that breathed blue fire serving with the SDC. He didn’t believe it. If they had this weapon, why hadn’t they used it against the Fire Nation?

He sent word to the SDC that he would negotiate. He notified Lu Ten that he would be negotiating on behalf of the Fire Nation. Hopefully his cousin did a better job here than he did with the previous negotiation. If he had done his job right, the Fire Nation would have extracted the resources they needed from the Earth Kingdom without having to invade.

A knock at the door drew his attention away from the maps. The door opened and Yue entered. He couldn’t help but smile. Their relationship had been rocky since the buildup to the war, but seeing her round belly filled his heart with joy. Their second child would be arriving in just a few short months. One mistake that he vowed to never repeat was isolating the children from their parents and siblings. No futile competitions to drive a wedge between members of his family.

“It’s a pleasure to see you, dear. Are you feeling okay?” He couldn’t help but feel protective. It was his job to make sure that she was safe.

“I’m fine, Zuko. I wanted to see if you needed anything. You’ve locked yourself away so long people fear that you’re becoming a hermit.” She gave a gentle smile, the kind that always warms his heart. “You need…”

The sound of shouting from outside the room cut her words off. He quickly pulled her behind his desk and helped her to the floor. “Hide here. I won’t let anyone harm you.”

And with her safe, he strode forward, intent on making sure that everyone knew who they were dealing with. He was a far stronger bender now than he had been even a year ago. Nearly as strong as Izuka had been when he had been forced to banish her. There was only room for one voice in the Fire Nation, and that voice was his.

The doors were blasted off their hinges and Zuko could feel the attackers approaching. They fired their weak flames as they entered but Zuko’s power overwhelmed them so quickly that they didn’t even have time to scream. More followed, but his guards had been reinforced and the attackers couldn’t just focus on him. And those that did weren’t nearly enough to slow the Fire Lord down.

He batted aside flames as he spun low and kicked a powerful burst of flames at the legs of the three attackers trying to get through the door. It was partially blocked by the assailant in the front, but it stopped the forward progression of the group. He allowed his spinning momentum to carry him forward and quickly unleashed a staccato burst of fire punches, which came far too quickly for his enemies to counter.

They stumbled back from his onslaught only to be caught in the crossfire of his guards; they must have finally dealt with other attackers. The three fell to the ground, badly burned. He didn’t know if they would live, and didn’t really care, except that he wanted information.

Once he was sure that no more attackers would be coming his way, he ran back to Yue and helped her up.

“We need to check on Izumi!” Were the first and only words out of her mouth as she headed towards the door. Even the sight of the scorched bodies and the horrible smell of cooked flesh didn’t slow her down as she moved as quickly as her physical state would allow. He followed after her, surveying the halls for any threat as they moved. But he found nothing until they reached the royal nursery area.

His heart leapt to his throat as he saw the doors knocked off their hinges. He sprinted ahead, even as he heard Yue’s cries behind him as she wasn’t able to keep up. Inside he found his worst fears. The entire room was charred and blackened. He looked to the nursemaids that were lying on the floor burnt and being treated by the servants as best as they could.

“Izumi?!” He yelled. “Izumi?” He could hear Yue calling her name too.

“She’s in here, my Lord. She was injured but she is alive.” Jinfua called out from the closet. Zuko and Yue both rushed over to look inside.

His daughter was there, crying from the terrible burns on her arm and back. But she was alive.

“Where is the princess?” Zuko recognized the voice of the Royal Healer.

“She’s in here!” Yue yelled, dragging Zuko back so that the healer could go in.

All that Zuko and Yue could do is watch as the healer examined Izumi and pray to Agni that she would be okay. A nurse assisted the healer as he checked her over and applied burn salve to Izumi. After a few minutes, one of the nurses carried her down to the infirmary as the healer spoke with Izumi’s parents.

“Her wounds aren’t extensive, but they are severe. We’ll need to keep her under medical supervision for the next couple of days to make sure there aren’t any infections or complications. Most of the burns are to her left shoulder and upper back. There will be a little scarring on her left cheek also.” The healer informed Zuko and Yue. “You are welcome to stay with her if you like, but I also understand that there is a lot going on right now.”

Zuko looked to Yue. “You go be with her. I need to find the savages that did this and ensure that they are punished to the utmost.”

Zuko could feel his anger flaring as Yue and the healer scurried out of the nursery to be with Izumi. He was going to find who did this and make them pay. Any coward that would target a child has no honor and will not be given the luxury of mercy. Of that, Zuko had never been surer of anything in his life.

News of the disaster at Gerva spread through Agna Qel’a like a wildfire. The destruction of yet another fleet along with the appearance of a mysterious dragon that breathed blue flames. The tribe had pulled every possible ship it could back to the city in preparation. But now it was time to face their fear.

Because they could see the six ships in the distance, sailing straight for Agna Qel’a.

Pakku had heard the tales of how the SDC ships could sink the largest and most heavily armored Fire Nation battleships in a matter of minutes, long before the ships could be touched by any other naval attacks. He feared how the mighty ice gates of his beloved city would fare against the coming onslaught.

He heard the gasp of the men around him and he looked to see what had caused the alarm. He had to raise his eyes upward to follow their gazes, and his heart froze as he saw the black shape growing larger. It was high in the sky, and he could see the black shape with the gold trim along the wings. Just as the tales had said. If it breathed blue fire too, then he truly feared for his people.

As he watched the beast get closer, the cry of an eagle-hawk attracted his attention. And again he was shocked; a large blue and green eagle-hawk landed atop the walkway on the great ice wall. It was huge, at least five feet tall as it stood on the ice, looking at the men surrounding it. Then in held out its leg.

Pakku saw that there was a scroll tied to the unnatural beast’s leg. He signaled to one of the soldiers to get it. The man slowly made his way up to the bird and bent down to get the message. He carefully untied the scroll and then stepped back, putting as much distance between himself and the abomination as possible. And like that the bird was back in the air and flying towards the oncoming fleet.

The soldier quickly trotted over to Pakku and handed the message to him. He took a deep breath to center himself before unrolling the scroll to read the contents.

To Whom It May Concern,

This is an official offering of terms for a ceasefire. The Fire Nation has already accepted the terms and will be attending a meeting to negotiate the end of the war. You, as a co-combatant, are offered the same terms and conditions. All active hostilities are to end. You are required to withdraw your troops from any land that was not officially recognized as Northern Water Tribe territory according to the official boundaries established by the Treaty of Omashu at the end of the Great War. Failure to comply will result in an assault upon your city.

You have 24 hours to respond. The great bird that delivered this message will return for your answer at the annointed hour.

Captain Hembu, Leader of the Northern Expeditionary Force

Pakku hoped that Arnook and his band of warmongers would take this opportunity to pull back from their imperialist agenda and agree to negotiate. He warily watched the black and gold dragon circle lazily high overhead and then begin drifting back towards the fleet. The flight was a warning. The Northern Water Tribe would have the SDC fleet and a dragon to contend with if they choose the path of violence.

He turned to the soldier who had retrieved the message and handed the scroll back to him. “Take this to Chief Arnook immediately.”

“Yes, Master Pakku.” And the young man turned and was quickly on his way.

Pakku continued to watch the dragon as it flew back to towards the fleet, his mind trying to work out the oddities of the dragon and the eagle-hawk. The eagle-hawk radiated intelligence; they way that it held its leg out and accepted the removal of the scroll went beyond just training. He was going to need time to think about this issue.

But for now, he needed to focus on the issue at hand. What to do about the offer to negotiate? Of course, Pakku knew that his people should accept it. But would they? The people were split about entering the war, and many were frightened and angry about how the war had played out.

His people were torn in two. Had the war progressed according to plan, perhaps the naysayers would have come around. More land, increased revenue, new ports. It is an unfortunate truth that this would have changed the minds of many who were lukewarm to the idea of war.

But reality had been a harsh mistress to the people of the Northern Water Tribe. Two fleets utterly wrecked, the state of Alokhai wrenched from their hands after only a few short weeks, and now a fearsome fleet sporting a war dragon had shown up at the gates of their city. To resist the new reality would bring ruin on his people, both from the enemies outside the city walls and the angry and betrayed citizens inside.

He was nearly to the bottom of the stairs of the wall when the great gong sounded, letting the council members know that an emergency meeting was being called. Pakku steadily made his way to the council room; he was too damn old to scurry about. But he easily made it before the meeting had started.

Chief Arnook caught his eye and Pakku gave a nod of respect. Now was not the time to be petulant and combative. He needed to persuade the council to renounce their folly and accept responsibility for their error in judgement. Bitter recriminations could come later, but now was the time for level-headed practicality. Soon enough all the members were present at it was time to start.

“This meeting is now called to order! Silence for the Chief!” The Sargeant-At-Arms proclaimed, tapping his spear on the ground to call for attention. The response was near instantaneous; everyone wanted to know why the emergency meeting had been called.

“We have just received a message from the SDC fleet, offering terms for a cease fire and the opportunity to negotiate for peace. The Fire Nation has already agreed to the cease fire.” A howl of protests arose from those that had supported the war; the allies that called upon the Northern Water Tribe to aid their cause have already given up the fight.

“What are the conditions for the cease fire?” Master Hanrou asked. Pakku knew that he had opposed the war.

“We are to withdraw all of our forces from any lands that were not part of our established territory as demarcated in the Treaty of Omashu.” Arnook answered, looking sad and pained.

The pro-war members of the council howled in outrage. “Then all the lives we lost would be in vain! We can’t accept this!” One of the young warmongers yelled.

“We have 24 hours to decide. If we do not accept the cease fire, the SDC fleet outside stated that it will attack our city.” Arnook answered, huffing. This was a bitter pill to swallow.

But now was the right time to fully inform the council of the situation. Pakku wanted to make sure they truly understood the situation. “And I presume that they mean to use the black dragon in their assault. We saw it flying just outside the city as the message was being relayed to us. We were told the stories of the survivors of Gerva, how the black dragon breathed unnaturally hot blue fire. This monster, in combination with the disc launcher of the enemy fleet, could do significant damage to our city.”

“That small fleet and their pet dragon is not threat to Agna Qel’a!” Minister Haurn yelled, his face red with rage. “To turn back now is to say that the lives we lost to expand the lands of our people were a waste. I can’t live with this outrage!”

“And will the dragon burning our civilians alive help our cause? Will the disc launcher destroying our city gates and possibly hitting targets inside the city help expand our people? The discs can sink moving Fire Nation ships at three clicks; how hard do you think it will be to launch discs over the gates and into a stationary city?” Pakku asked, silencing the entire room. “The war is lost. Throwing more lives into the SDC meatgrinder won’t change that.”

The arguments for and against the complying with the SDC cease-fire went well into the night. The discussion ebbed and flowed but soon Pakku could read the writing on the wall. The pride of the Northern Water Tribe would not allow its losses to be in vain. Pakku’s heart was heavy. He truly feared the SDC disc launcher. He feared the dragon. If the battle was brought inside Agna Qel’a, would the city endure?

The deadline was approaching and everyone was waiting on pins and needles. Well, everyone except Azula and Navisi. They were meditiating on rings of light that were hovering about eight inches above the deck of the ship. It should be a testimony to how crazy the past few days have been that this didn’t even turn a single head nowadays.

Li Nu’s had been ecstatic to see Azula back, with a seemingly talented apprentice. But Li Nu could see that Azula was different. Not just physically, although the physical changes were profound. The scar that started just below her left eye and curled down her cheek and went back across her jawline. She had also spotted a few other scars on her arms and shoulders when Azula had changed clothing. And she didn’t doubt that there were more.

But Azula was more mature and more grounded now. She was still snarky, but it was more subtle and not as aggressive in nature. Everything about her seemed calmer now, like she knew everything would work out and that nothing could truly stop her.

And her apprentice was just as fascinating. Despite looking and acting older, she was only twelve years old. She was extremely intelligent and skilled, but her talents seem to be in different areas than Azula. She seemed to be able to use light sigils to do incredible things pertaining to healing and telekinesis. And of course, she was funny and witty, but her humor was much softer than Azula’s.

Li Nu finished her final check of the disc launcher. It was geared for ship to land use; the angle of the mount was raised to get better elevation and the joral tracking system was disengaged. Normally, that meant that they would only be able to fire based on mathematics. But Navisi had worked with her the past two days to use Omnisae as her spotter. Omnisae would fly over the city and relay targeting information for the disc strikes. Apparently, Navisi could interpolate the visual feedback from Omnisae and provide approximate distances and elevations. And she would be able to provide feedback regarding the disc impacts, enabling Li Nu to adjust the trajectory of follow-up strikes.

But Li Nu sincerely hoped that she wouldn’t have to fire on Agna Qel’a. It was one thing to wreck soldiers and sailors actively engaged in war. It was another thing entirely to rain death and destruction down on a civilian population. But she would do what was needed to bring this war to an end.

“It is time, Disciple Navisi. Can you send Omnisae to retrieve the answer?” Captain Hembu asked, approaching Azula and her apprentice. Li Nu could tell that the man was nervous to talk to them. Azula had become something of a legend in the years since her disappearance.

“Of course, Captain.” Navisi stood and extended her arm. Everyone watched in silence as the green and blue form took shape and landed on the deck. Captain Hembu slowly approached and Omnisae held out its leg so that he could attach his message for the Northern Water Tribe. Instructions for how to proceed if they agree to the ceasefire, and if they chose to fight, methods of surrender once the disc launcher has battered their city into submission.

After the message was attached, Captain Hembu nodded to Navisi. Suddenly, the eagle-hawk took to the air and quickly climbed into the sky and made its way to Agna Qel’a. Navisi took her seat again, but Azula stood and made her way to the Li Nu.

“Hey, how are you holding up?” Azula quietly asked her.

“I’m nervous. I don’t want to wreck their city, but I will do whatever is necessary to bring this war and the aggression of the Fire Nation and the Northern Water Tribe to an end.” Li Nu answered honestly. Azula smiled and nodded.

“I understand. I truly wish that Zuko would have listened to my advice and set the Northwest Colony free. The world would probably be at peace, with the economies thriving and trade flourishing. Although, I’m not sure what could have been done about the Earth Kingdom.” Azula sighed. “King Kuei was a childish fool and Long Feng wasn’t as smart as he liked to believe.”

“Omnisae has reached the rendezvous point.” Navisi said. Everyone waited with bated breath to see what the answer would be. “They have accepted the terms of the cease fire!”

Everyone cheered at the news. Relief filled Li Nu at the words. Hopefully they’d be able to put this whole war behind them and rebuild a world of peace. Somehow, having Azula home made that seem more likely.

Pakku eyed the SDC vessel as his ferry approached it. Once again, he was going to Omashu to represent the Northern Water Tribe in a treaty negotiation. But the stakes for his people were much higher this time around. But things could have been much worse.

Arnook and his warmonger cronies had wanted to continue the war, even in the face of the SDC’s firepower. The war in general had been unpopular among the masses, but they had gone along since they had trusted their chief. But when news had been leaked that Arnook had wanted to continue fighting with the safety of Agna Qel’a itself in peril, the rebel faction decided that it had had enough.

Three units of warriors had been recruited by the rebels, and they swarmed the council meeting as the actual voting had been taking place. The rebellion had been led by a senior soldier named Turille. He was a skilled warrior and highly respected for his calm demeanor and no-nonsense attitude.

Afterwards, Turille had approached Pakku and offered him the opportunity to become the new chief. Everyone knew that he was the strongest waterbender in the Northern Water Tribe and that he had opposed the war.

But Pakku declined the offer to become chief. He knew that his time had passed and that he was a relic of the old ways. The world was quickly changing, and his people needed someone younger, more flexible and more in tune with modern politics.

Turille agreed to head the process for selecting a new chief. Arnook had failed so miserably that he could never be allowed to again rule the tribe. Pakku feared what this would do to relations with the Fire Nation, but there was no guarantee that Zuko and Yue would still be Fire Lord and Fire Lady when all was said and done.

And now, Pakku and Master Hanrou, as well as two junior members of the council, were about to board the SDC ship that would take them to Omashu. The SDC ships were faster than anything else on the water and would be able to get them there more quickly than a water tribe ship.

The water tribe delegation soon boarded the flag ship of the SDC fleet and was met with a formal procession. And Pakku damn near passed out when he saw the woman in a black robe with gold trim standing next to the SDC captain. Azula.

She eyed him dispassionately. He didn’t detect any outward hostility, but he most certainly didn’t find any cordiality. Not that he would have expected any. The two of them didn’t get along before the Night of the Wilting Lotus, and that evening did nothing to improve their relationship.

Pakku was distracted from Azula’s return from her presumed death by the words of the captain. “Welcome aboard the Southern Whirlwind. I am Captain Hembu and I’ll be your host for the trip to Omashu. We have made quarters available for your delegation and we will do all that we can to meet your needs during this trip.”

“Thank you for your hospitality. I am Master Pakku, the Northern Water Tribe representative for the interim government that now controls Agna Qel’a. I will also be the lead negotiator.” He noticed the eyes of everyone in the SDC procession raise except for Azula’s. She continued to watch and say nothing.

“I don’t mean to pry into the affairs of your people before the negotiations, but could you clarify what you mean by the interim government?” Captain Hembu asked.

“Chief Arnook and his followers on the council wished to continue the war against the will of the people, so last evening an uprising removed him from office. An interim government is in place until a new chief can be selected. As the leader of the council members in opposition to the war, I was asked to be the interim government’s liaison with the SDC and the lead negotiator. I am being ably assisted by Master Hanrou, Councilman Tiakka, and Councilman Unitukk.”

The remaining members of his delegation bowed respectfully as they were announced. Pakku had not dealt with the SDC before, but he had heard that they were generally accepting and polite.

“Thank you for this information, Master Pakku. Sergeant Yuoung will show you to your quarters; he will be your primary liaison during your stay, but of course you’re welcome to contact anyone aboard if an issue arises.” Captain Hembu nodded respectfully.

Pakku and the rest of the delegation followed the sergeant below decks and to their quarters. Functional, if not exactly spacious and luxurious. But they would do. He would need time to process what he’d seen. But he was certain of one thing.

If Azula had gotten her hands on a dragon, then he felt even more confident in his opposition to continuing the war.

Chapter Text

“Aang, it is a pleasure to have you back in Omashu. Have you been working on your earthbending? Toph is going to want to test your respect for our element. Hahahahaha!” Bumi thundered, following up his statement with a very unroyal snort.

“I’m glad to be back, Bumi. And my earthbending is okay. I know! I know! It’s not where it should be but I’m getting there. I’ve been kind of busy lately.” Aang retorted. And they both became more serious at that announcement.

“Yes, indeed, you have. Once again, you will be in my fair city to broker peace and reestablish balance. But I believe that this negotiation may be more contentious than the last one. The Fire Nation doesn’t have Azula’s calming hand this time, and the Earth Kingdom is unpredictable, to say the least. And I have no idea what the Northern Water Tribe will bring to the table.” Bumi said, sighing.

“That is all true. And there are many issues regarding the colonies and conquered territories to deal with. But I have Katara to help us sort out these issues.” Aang gave a sigh of his own. “I wish that I could have brought Rajeen and Ivaku in on this, but that might be seen as favoritism.”

“Yes, it very well might.” Bumi agreed. “But do you have any thoughts about what to do here?”

“Yes, Katara and I have brainstormed some ideas, but I’d like to hear the other parties out before I share them with anyone, even you, old friend.”

“No problem, Aang. I know that you are the Avatar first and my oldest friend second. But at the very least, we can both agree that the odds of anyone showing up with a bear in their entourage are greatly reduced.” And they both laughed.

Azula had her stuff ready to go. Of course, she didn’t have much to take. Multiversal cloud jumping kind of made traveling light a necessity. Navisi was packed up also. If this trip panned out, they would soon have their own home and base of operations to rebuild the order from. She was praying to all of the intermediaries that they found what they were looking for.

But there was a conversation to be had before she left. And she felt him approaching, so apparently he wanted to have it also.

“Greetings, Master Pakku. I was glad to hear that you were opposed to the war.” Azula said, continuing to look out over the water as Pakku came to stand next to her.

“Greetings, Princess. I know that you may not believe me, but I’m glad to see that you’ve returned.”

She could tell that he was telling the truth, which was a bit surprising. “Thank you, Master Pakku. But I stopped being a princess minutes after our last meeting. I am now Mistress Azula of the Arts Esoteric.”

She heard him sigh. “It probably doesn’t change anything, but Jeong Jeong and I voted against taking action against you. Unfortunately, your superstitious fool of a mother convinced enough superstitious fools of my order that you were dangerous. The world has been worse off because of your absence. I’m sorry for my part in it.”

For the first time, she looked over at him. Azula could tell that he held real remorse for his actions. “I forgive you, Master Pakku. You are least man enough to admit your errors, and I respect that. For my part, I’m sorry that took down so many of your order with daggers and arrows. I probably should have ran as soon as I figured out that you had me surrounded, but I wanted information.”

“We were arrogant and woefully underestimated your combat skills. Four of my order, including Jeong Jeong, died because of our hubris.”

“I’m sorry for that, Master Pakku. I wasn’t trying to kill anyone, I just wanted information and to escape.” She gave a sigh. “The saddest part is, if you had waited another two weeks, I would have disappeared anyway. All you did was accelerate my timeline.”

For the first time, Pakku turned and looked at her. “You willingly abandoned your people?”

She laughed at that. “I didn’t abandon anyone. I had a higher calling that surpassed any of the petty and insignificant squabbles that happen on our little piece of dirt and water. But the world shouldn’t have relied on a fourteen-year-old nearly as much as it did. It’s a little embarrassing, when you think about it.”

Pakku actually chuckled at that. “Yes, it is a little embarrassing. You were the voice of reason and progress. You truly were the People’s Princess.”

“Well, Master Pakku, I hope that you and your people find their way in the new world. I won’t lie, I’m still angry at what you did to Ivaku, but I don’t want to see your tribe destroyed. May your new leadership bring you peace and prosperity.”

“Thank you, Mistress Azula. May I ask what your next move is? Reactions to your return will be mixed, to put it politely.”

Azula gave him a wide smile. “I’m going to rebuild my order into the world changing entity it was meant to be. I’ve learned a great many things in my travels and there are many things I hope to accomplish now that I’m back. The world will have to spin without me for a little while longer.”

“Well, I wish you luck with all of your endeavors. I know that our relationship is not friendly, but it can be respectful.”

“I hope you mean that. I had a similar agreement with my mother just weeks before she betrayed me to the Order of the White Lotus.” Azula paused, wondering if he would answer this next question. “I understand if you don’t wish to answer, but I have one more question for you. Did the Order of the White Lotus heal Lu Ten in return for my betrayal?”

Pakku looked at her for a few moments before answering. “Your betrayal wasn’t the only concession we asked of Fire Lord Iroh, but yes.”

“Thank you for answering, Master Pakku. You may very well have just saved Iroh’s life.” And with that she straightened up and began making her way towards the door to the lower decks. “I appreciate the talk, but it’s time for me to collect my protégé and begin our new journey.”

And Azula proceeded down the stairs to go below decks, leaving Pakku at the railing, looking off into the distance. Navisi wasn’t hard to find. Her chi was powerful and her aura quite distinctive. Azula stepped into the galley where Navisi was packing a few supplies.

“Are we ready to ride, Mistress?” Navisi asked as Azula entered. “Having gotten used to traveling by magic dragon, being afloat in a metal box isn’t terribly exciting.”

Azula couldn’t help but laugh. “You’re definitely right about that. Let’s go start our new adventure.”

They made their way back up above deck, where Li Nu was waiting for them. Navisi was the first to speak. “So, Li Nu, you ready to delve into the wild and wonderful world of the Arts Esoteric?”

“I would be a lot readier if you two would stop being so cryptic and tell me what this is all about.” Li Nu said with a put-upon look.

“Not yet, my dear Li Nu. You need to have some excitement in your life. I just reconnected with you and I want to share an adventure, and I truly think that you’ll enjoy what we hope to show you. And you can fill me in on all the gossip I’ve missed.”

“And will you finally tell me about your off-world adventure?” Li Nu asked.

Azula sighed. “I promise to tell you a little, but I’d rather tell the whole Azulinati together. But there is only so much that I can share, because the Great Spirits and their intermediaries are concerned about cross contamination of the multiverse. It required me cashing in a favor for Navisi to travel with me.”

“She’s telling the truth, Li Nu. Believe me, these stories are awesome and we’d love to share them in great detail. But we made a deal.” Navisi chimed in.

“But enough talk, let’s go for a ride.” Azula said, smiling at the nervous expression on Li Nu’s face.

Azula unfurled and extended her tentacles and activated the light sigil anchor at the end; she then pulled on the light sigil anchor to hoist herself high into the air and repeated the process until she was well clear of the ship. Once she had a wide open space, she silently called Kivathryskan. The dragon formed beneath her, with Azula’s legs straddling the back of the dragon just behind the neck. She smiled as she turned back to see Navisi kinetically pulling herself and Li Nu in the air on a light platform. Li Nu’s aura radiated terror, but Azula knew that she’d get used to it soon enough.

She directed Kiva back towards the two as they were moving away from her, making sure to match speed with them as Kiva came up from below and the two additional riders took their place behind Azula thanks to Navisi’s skillful use of telekinesis. Li Nu was in the middle, seated on the ridge behind Azula, with Navisi in the back.

Azula directed Kiva to weave in between the SDC ships as they sailed west, waving to the crew below before they changed course and headed due south. As luck would have it, the closest Arts Esoteric Temple was only about an hour away as the dragon flies.

Today was the day the march to rebuild her order begins.

Ursa had decided that she needed to be involved in the negotiation process. Lu Ten rolled his eyes as they argued over the strategy yet again.

“The Fire Nation is not giving up any territory. We need the raw materials and manufacturing bases that have been built in the colonies. This is not negotiable.” Ursa said for what felt like the thirty-seventh time.

“And the Fire Nation doesn’t have the negotiating strength to make that claim. Just because you keep saying something, doesn’t make it a fact. We will not be able to keep the Northwest Colony, the best that we can do is try to establish favorable trade terms. I’m much more confident in the loyalty of the Fire Colony, though.” Lu Ten retorted. For such an intelligent woman, Ursa has become a victim of her own hysteria. First her aggressive promotion of Zuko, then her rabid pursuit of Azula, and now her absolute failure to come to grips with the new reality of the Fire Nation.

“These were only temporary setbacks, Lu Ten. Just because you lack the vision necessary to see the future, doesn’t make it any less real.” Ursa retorted. Lu Ten saw Mai roll her eyes. He wanted to do the same, but he wanted to get Ursa on the same page as him.

“The Fire Nation lost the war, a war that should have never been started. We are cut off from our colonies by the SDC fleet and the Omashu army is fortified in the southern portion of the Fire Colony. The Earth Kingdom has reinforced their western front. We gave Alokhai away and it was lost weeks later. And our southern territories are aligned far more closely with the SDC than the Fire Nation through the Southern Coastal Regional Economic committee. These are the facts that we have to work with.” Lu Ten growled. He was losing his patience with this meddling woman.

“We would have lost everything if you had become Fire Lord. You were never fit to rule.” Ursa snarled in retaliation.

“The only reason that we are on this course is because you turned against your own daughter. Had we followed her guidance, the Fire Nation would be strong, and the world would probably be at peace. You and your machinations caused the destruction of the Fire Nation, Ursa. You and your pathetic superstitions.” Lu Ten was pissed and he’d had enough of this shortsighted buffoon.

“How dare you speak to me like that!” Ursa stood, her face red with rage. “Zuko is a far greater Fire Lord than you would have ever been.”

“Believe whatever you want to believe, you obnoxious harpy. But you are no longer welcome to be part of the negotiation team. Get out.” Lu Ten stood too. The guards were all frozen in place. He knew they were terrified of the prospect of throwing the Fire Lord’s mother out of the meeting.

“Lady Ursa, Lu Ten is the official master negotiator for the Fire Nation, as decreed by Fire Lord Zuko. As you arrived with no official proclamations declaring you a member of the delegation, you have no standing with us. Please leave so that we may carry out the will of the Fire Lord.” Mai said, more than a hint of steel in her voice.

Ursa stared at Mai with a baleful glare before she finally turned and stormed out of the meeting room. Every person in the room relaxed a bit once she was gone. Lu Ten feared for the future of his nation.

Navisi held on to Li Nu as Azula directed Kiva down to the rocky plateau hidden deep in the Pin Vao mountain range. Apparently, this was called the Northwest Colony on this world. On foot, it would have taken nearly a week of hiking to reach the temple, but it was but a brief sojourn for a magical dragon.

They landed just outside the unused courtyard. It was overgrown and in the process of being reclaimed by nature and would have been nearly impossible to spot if not for the chi sense guiding Azula and Navisi. They easily found the markers. The three girls quickly dismounted and Azula led the way through the courtyard and towards the spots where the entrance should be.

There! Navisi could feel the tingle of excitement. They knew it should be here, but with how crazy things can be sometimes, there was always a chance that this world was different. Gnolos knows it felt so different here. Especially compared to her world. She didn’t like to think of the nightmare world she came from. Thank Agni, Gnolos and every other Great Spirit that Azula came to her when she did.

“Here’s the chi lock.” Azula said, dusting off a ceramic plate built into the face of the wall. “You’re up, Navisi. Make me proud.”

Navisi sighed. She really hated chi locks, but she knew it was for her own good to get better at them. “Yes, Mistress. I would love the opportunity to work with a chi lock.” Azula laughed while Li Nu just looked at her. Probably trying to figure out if she was being sincere or not. Navisi was most definitely not being sincere.

She pushed some chi into the plate and began guiding it through the pathways. She was working two chi paths; that was enough before and hopefully it was enough here too. Again and again, she weaved through different paths, hit dead ends and was forced to redirect her flows. Ping. She got one! That didn’t unlock it. She kept searching and soon enough she felt a second ping. Now it was just a matter of completing both paths at the same time. She had been practicing the spatial mnemonics from the scroll Azula had her read, so it was just a matter of timing. Ping ping. Just a little off. Ping! She got it.

“I got it, Mistress! I believe that a ‘You are awesome, oh great disciple of mine’ is in order.” Navisi said, beaming at Azula. Li Nu’s aura was amused, as was her smile.

“You are awesome, oh great disciple of mine,” Azula dutifully said, with a smile. “And I guess I get to move the stone?”

“That only sounds fair, oh great mistress of mine.” Navisi’s smile said just how much she was enjoying this.

Azula chuckled as she assumed her telekinetic stance. Navisi watched as she activated the light sigils on her augmented bracelets and rotated them to the appropriate configuration and began moving the stone. The stone slowly easily moved as Azula pumped chi into the augmentor.

“That was well done, Mistress. You’re getting better with the light sigils.” Navisi cheered. Azula really had gotten better. Azula could wield the standard augmentors like a fiend, but she still needed some work on the sigils. Just like Navisi needed to improve her skills with the standard augmentors. They were pushing each other to greater heights. Although Azula was so good at so many things it didn’t seem fair sometimes.

Azula gave Navisi a quick side hug as they prepared to enter the temple. “I had a great teacher. Enough self-congratulations! Let’s see if this temple has what we’re looking for.”

Azula created a light orb and it levitated into the temple ahead of the group. The sun was low in the sky and wouldn’t be able to really illuminate the inside of the temple until they opened all the portals and windows.

“And what exactly are we looking for?” Li Nu asked. “I like to think that I’ve been pretty patient, but I really would like to know what’s going on.”

“This, my dear Li Nu, is one of the ancient temples used by many philosophical and mystical orders, including the Order of the Arts Esoteric, dating back to about four thousand years ago. Once upon a time, the Arts Esoteric was a well-known mental discipline, used by benders and nonbenders alike. But as bending became more widespread and the focus of society changed, the Arts Esoteric fell out of favor.” Azula answered as they looked around.

“About two thousand years ago, a terrible purge was launched against the nonbending sects, including the Arts Esoteric.” Navisi chimed in. “They survived but their numbers were greatly reduced and they slowly descended into irrelevance. Progress was still made in the techniques, but with so few people innovating and disseminating the information, the order stagnated until it was barely alive.”

“But we are determined to rebuild our ranks and reclaiming and revitalizing the ancient temples is a primary objective. This is the second biggest of the old temples; we’ve been to this one on another world, but we’ve never been to the largest one.” Azula said, looking solemn. She always did when she talked of refounding the Order of the Arts Esoteric.

“There should be old records stored here from thousands of years ago; this is how we learned of the history of our order. But it should also hold the clues to the other great temple. The Mistresses of the order liked to encrypt their information to make sure it couldn’t be raided by those outside the order.” Navisi said as they followed Azula to the Wall of Knowledge.

And both Navisi and Azula smiled when they saw the wall. The clues were still there. The hunt begins!

Ivaku gave Rajeen a hug as she entered the greeting hall. It had only been a few weeks, but she admitted that she missed her friend. “It’s great to see you, Rajeen. How is everything in Rokishe?”

“All is well. Everyone is happy that the hostilities with the Fire Nation have ended. We just need to see how things work out with Alokhai and the Northern Water Tribe.” Rajeen answered.

“Oh, we just got the word yesterday! The SDC and Gervans retook control of their city and sent the Northern Water Tribe packing.” Ivaku couldn’t help but smile as a wide grin spread across her friend’s face. “But the message was vague about exactly how it happened. Rumors are that a dragon was involved.”

“A dragon! I thought they were all extinct?”

“I don’t know. But the SDC was sailing to Agna Qel’a to deliver the terms of a ceasefire. They should be there by now.”

“Well, let’s hope that they accept the terms. I hate them for what they did to you, but I don’t want to see their city destroyed.” Rajeen answered, putting a hand Ivaku’s arm.

“I hate them too, but not everyone there is evil. I don’t want to see the city destroyed either.” Ivaku shivered a little at the memories of her life there. “But I wouldn’t mind seeing them knocked down a peg or two.”

“Agreed.” Rajeen said. “Be that as it may, let’s go and formally declare ourselves as the chief negotiators for the SDC.”

The two made their way into the formal halls and requested a meeting with the Avatar. The steward relayed their message, and soon they were invited into the royal antechamber where the Avatar was talking with King Bumi and Hun Ro, while Katara was quietly reading through some documents at a small table. By the way the Avatar was waving his hands and smiling, he was telling some wild tale, probably about some poor animal that he decided to ride. The kid really loved harassing wild animals.

Ivaku felt a feeling of warmth fill her when she saw Hun Ro smile at her. She had been there a few weeks now, but she still wasn’t used to him being in her life so much. It was a wonderful feeling. King Bumi was the first to speak.

“Successor Rajeen, it is wonderful to see you again. I feel confident that the interests of the SDC, and the world, will be protected with you as our chief negotiator.”

“Thank you for your kind words, King Bumi. I sincerely hope that we can get bring all of the parties together to a universally acceptable agreement. The world is tired of strife.” Rajeen answered, smiling at the group before her. “And Avatar Aang, I’ve come to formally declare myself as the chief negotiator for the Southen Defense Coalition, with Ivaku as my recognized second.”

Both Rajeen and Ivaku bowed to the Avatar as a show of respect. Aang replied solemnly, “And I, Avatar Aang, formally recognize the claims of Successor Rajeen and Ambassador Ivaku to speak on behalf of the Southern Defense Coalition.” And then shared his goofiest grin. “I really hope that all of the negotiators are as easy to work with as you two.”

“Don’t get your hopes up, Aang. Lu Ten and Mai are representing the Fire Nation, but Ambassador Mavong is again representing the Earth Kingdom, along with Counselor Min Kai. We might be okay if he lets her do all the talking again, but I wouldn’t count on it.” Katara chimed in as she came to stand by Aang. “And we don’t know if the Northern Water Tribe will even participate.”

“Do we have any estimates for when the other delegates will arrive?” Rajeen asked.

“Both the Fire Nation and Earth Kingdom delegations are expected arrive tomorrow. We will begin with preliminary talks while we wait to see what happens in the north.” Aang said, sighing.

Any further discussion halted as a courier entered the room and quickly approached King Bumi. “Sir, an urgent dispatch was sent to your attention by the SDC fleet at Agna Qel’a.” The courier bowed and extended the scroll to King Bumi, who quickly snatched it and opened it. The crowed waited while he reviewed the contents.

A wide grin spread across his face. “The Northern Water Tribe has accepted the ceasefire. The government of Chief Arnook has been overthrown and an interim regime has taken over while a new chief is selected. The delegation is traveling south with part of the SDC fleet and should arrive at the port of Ifna in about three days.”

Ivaku hugged Hun Ro as everyone cheered the news. But the news wasn’t done. “And apparently, there is a second message from Li Nu to be given to Hun Ro.” The courier extended a second scroll to Hun Ro, who quickly unsealed and read it.

Ivaku became concerned when he stumbled a bit and put his hand on Bumi’s desk to support himself, tears in his eyes. He handed the letter to Katara and then pulled Ivaku in for a giant hug.

“By Tui and La!” Katara exclaimed, her hand going to her mouth as she read the letter.

“Will someone please read the letter before we all die of suspense?” Bumi requested.

“Of course, Bumi. My apologies. This is from Li Nu.” Katara said and began reading the letter aloud. “Dear Hun Ro, I hope that you and Ivaku are doing well because I have wonderful news. Princess Azula, or as she prefers to be called now, Mistress Azula, has returned from her adventures and helped free the city of Gerva from the Northern Water Tribe, with the help of her new friends. She has an exceptionally talented young apprentice, Disciple Navisi, and is also in possession of a magical black and gold dragon that breathes blue fire, while Navisi has a magical bird companion. I am traveling with them on the dragon as they begin a new adventure. Azula is being very mysterious, but she’s promised to share more with the Azulinati when it is reassembled. She won’t commit to a time frame but promises the reunions won’t be delayed longer than absolutely necessary. I love you and I can’t wait to see you and Ivaku again. Li Nu.”

Ivaku hugged Hun Ro tighter as the tears streamed down her face. She had waited and waited, and while she didn’t want to admit that she was losing hope, she couldn’t help but have feelings of sadness thinking that Azula would never return.

“This is wonderful news!” King Bumi cheered, a wild and crazed smile on his face. “The world is in sore need of her wisdom and guiding hand.”

“What did Li Nu mean by Azula’s adventures?” Aang asked, looking around. Ivaku could blearily see the confused looks on Bumi, Rajeen and Katara’s faces. They all seemed to be looking at Ivaku for answers. She wiped her eyes and gathered herself before she spoke.

“Azula was recruited to assist in a matter of great importance, a matter that was far greater in scope than the petty squabbles of our nations. It’s not our place to say more, but you were all good friends to Azula, so she might be willing to tell you of her travels.” Ivaku finally said.

“You knew where she was and never said anything?” Rajeen said, anger clearly evident in her voice.

“I will tell you the same thing I told everyone else; Azula entrusted me with this knowledge and gave me very specific instructions on who to tell and when. You can take it up with her if you don’t like it.” Ivaku answered.

“Let’s all calm down,” Aang said, holding his hands up. “I’m sure Azula had her reasons for doing what she did. But let’s just celebrate the fact that she’s returned.”

“You’re right, Aang.” Rajeen said, closing her eyes and taking a deep breath. “I apologize, Ivaku. I shouldn’t have snapped at you. It’s just that, well, we all just assumed the worst when she just disappeared.”

Ivaku stepped in and gave her a big hug. “I wanted to tell the world of the sacrifice that Azula was making, but she didn’t want me to. And frankly, it hasn’t been any better knowing where she was, because she truly didn’t know if she would ever be able to return. But it sounds like not only has she returned, but she also now has an apprentice and a dragon.”

Everyone was smiles and in good cheer. And word spread quickly throughout the palace and into the city. The People’s Princess had returned.

Lu Ten didn’t have to accept her as an official member of the delegation, but he couldn’t stop her from traveling to Omashu. So far, she had been on good behavior, but he didn’t expect that to last once things got contentious. But that was a worry for another time. Right now though, he was making his way to greet King Bumi. He certainly hoped that this negotiation went better than the previous one.

He entered the main hall with his three advisors at his side. Mai, of course, was his right-hand woman and would be the juniormost of his crew. Ambassador Rovath was a good man and highly regarded both in the Fire Nation and among the other parties involved. Counselor Horzun’s stock had risen in the years since Azula’s departure, as he had done wonders for the Fire Colony economy.

The main welcoming committee was waiting for him in the throne room. Aang and Katara stood to the right of King Bumi, while Toph took a position to his left. He smiled at Lu Ten and the others as they entered the room.

“Welcome, Crown Prince Lu Ten. It is a pleasure to see you again. I hope that we are able to work out a deal that will bring peace and prosperity to our lands.” Bumi said, giving a royal nod to Lu Ten, who returned the nod.

“Thank you for once again hosting the negotiations. I too hope that a fair and equitable arrangement can be worked out for all parties.” Lu Ten said, with all his sincerity. “And it is good to see you again, Avatar Aang and Ambassador Katara.”

“It’s always a pleasure to see you, Crown Prince.” Aang said with a wide smile.

“Thank you for representing the Fire Nation during the negotiation.” Katara said, a small smile on her face. She was never as accepting of the Fire Nation as Aang.

“And please, let me introduce the rest of the Fire Nation delegation. This is Ambassador Rovath. And this is Counselor Horzun.” Lu Ten said, gesturing to the two men. They both gave respectful bows. “And of course, you already know that this lovely and talented young woman is Lady Mai.” Mai gave a very respectful bow.

“Welcome to Omashu, one and all.” King Bumi said, his loud voice echoing through the halls.

“It’s almost like a reunion of the first Southern Coastal Regional Economic negotiation. I’m pretty sure I saw, and heard, Sentha earlier.” Katara said, smiling at Lu Ten’s companions.

“Well, it would be if we weren’t missing the most notable participant of that meeting.” Mai said, monotone as usual.

But Lu Ten didn’t miss the way that Aang, Katara and Bumi looked at each other. The hackles on his neck were raised. Something was going on.

“Actually, there is news on that front that we would like to share with you.” Katara said, a smile spreading across her face. “We just received a letter from Li Nu. Azula has returned with, uhm, some new companions. She now has an apprentice and well, uhm, a dragon.”

Lu Ten felt himself go stock still. He wanted to believe this with all his heart, but he was terribly afraid of getting his hopes up. He never wanted to give up hope, but he despaired that he would never see her again.

“Please don’t take this as an assault on your character, but this is shocking news and is hard to believe. Are you sure?” Lu Ten finally answered. “I very much want to believe you, but I’m afraid that it will just end in more heartbreak.”

“We also have verification from the captain of the SDC flagship in the North Sea and from Fo Yang of Gerva. Both have spoken to Azula and her apprentice and they have both confirmed that Azula does indeed have a black and gold dragon.” King Bumi said. “Li Nu is traveling with Azula’s group as they embark on a new adventure, whatever that means. Azula says that there will be reunions whenever she’s done.”

“Thank you for this news.” Lu Ten said, trying to hold back the tears of relief and joy threatening to burst forth. “This is a lot to take in. May we retire to our rooms to come to terms with what you just told us?”

“Of course, Crown Prince.” Bumi said, smiling. “The stewards will show you the way.”

Chapter Text

“Here is the problem that we’re faced with.” Azula said, laying out the scroll with the work that she and Navisi have been doing. We’ve analyzed the code and come out with eight pairs of numbers. We’ve laid them out in their sets.”

85.321, 327.821
286.119, 142.503
286.863, 284.194
244.391, 490.487
292.831, 36.358
55.321, 739.431
341.110, 78.993
158.389, 565.448

Li Nu looked at the numbers and went to work. The fact that there were eight numbers suggested a cartographic problem right off the bat, so she checked the first number of each pair first. Just as she suspected, none were greater than 360. Three of the eight second numbers were greater than 360. That was a great place to start.

“I think these are the coordinates and central distance measurements for a Khimb-Ru chart.” Li Nu said. “We need to figure out which of the five numbers are the Marks and then we can easily find the Destination.”

Hearing nothing, she looked up to see Azula and Navisi just staring at her. Finally, Azula spoke. “Would you like to say that again so that we of the unwashed masses can understand?”

“This is probably a cartographic system used in the olden days exactly for this purpose; to hide the clues to a location. It was actually used mostly by pirates. At least, that’s where I learned it from.” Li Nu laughed at the incredulous looks on their faces.

She decided to start from the beginning. “Let me explain the logic. Every position on Atla can be assigned a longitude and latitude, from 0° to 360°; Khimb-Ru charts are designate latitude then longitude. In a Khimb-Ru chart, the locations are called Marks; any pair with a number greater than 360 can’t be a Mark. It has to be a Pointer. The final location is called the Destination.”

“And before you ask, a Pointer is the direction and distance to reach the Destination. We’re lucky, with three of the numbers are already established as Pointers, it will be relatively easy to figure out the final Mark by looking at a map.” Li Nu continued. “Like the one on the wall over there.”

Li Nu pointed to the map carved into the far wall and laughed as the heads of both Azula and Navisi snapped around so hard Li Nu thought they might hurt themselves. Li Nu grabbed the scroll as the other two scurried over to the map. It was a large wall map with latitude and longitude lines carved in at 10° intervals.

“In this style of map, the 0° lines originate on the island of Humpo, here in Full Moon Bay. We can easily map the five Marks on the map. The Mark at 85.321, 327.821 would be about here.” Li Nu pointed to a spot in the Northwest Colony.

“I think that is the location of this temple!” Azula exclaimed.

“That’s a good sign, but let’s keep going and note the other four.” Li Nu said as they marked the other four spots on the map. “Well, three of them match up with points on the land while this last one is out to sea to the west of the Fire Nation. My guess is that is the final Pointer.”

“So how do the Pointers work?” Navisi asked, looking between the scroll and the map.

“The two numbers of the Pointer are the direction and the distance. Looking at the Marks, the Destination is probably somewhere in the central or south Earth Kingdom.” Li Nu looked at the map and then the numbers on the scroll. “For the point here in the Northwest Colony, the Pointer is probably 158.389°, 565.448, meaning that we go 158.389° clockwise and then travel 565.448 clicks.”

They marked the point. “For the Mark on the island off the east coast of the Earth Kingdom, it should be 244.391°, 490.487clicks. Let’s map it.”

Li Nu couldn’t help but chuckle at the huge grins that appeared on both their faces when the point matched up almost exactly with the original point; they didn’t have the precise cartological tools needed to be more accurate. But this was a damn good indication. From there they matched up the other two Pointers and Marks and they all came to the same spot.

The Destination was in the southern reaches of the Senskal mountains, very near the coast of the South Sea, only about 60 clicks due west of Lenth and 155 clicks due east of Kyoshi Island.

“That would be a great location to have an Arts Esoteric temple,” Azula said, looking at the map. “It’s nice and close to all my SDC friends. And looking a little closer, this Mark might be the temple at Ji Ha.”

“If two of the Marks are related to Art Esoteric locations, perhaps the other two are as well.” Navisi said, an enthusiastic grin on her face.

“That would be a dream come true.” Azula’s smile threatened to split her head in half. “But let’s worry about the Destination first. That should be the largest temple.”

“I recommend that we take this information and go to one of the great libraries that have much more detailed maps. With the specificity of these coordinates and distances, we should be able to give you a much tighter range to search.” Li Nu suggested. “I’m assuming it will be like this temple, hard to find visually, even with an awesome dragon to ride.”

“Probably. This one has chi markers that we can sense if we get close enough, but there isn’t any guarantee that one will.” Azula answered. “Where do you suggest we go for a map?”

“Once upon a time, Ba Sing Se University, but Rokishe also has an excellent library of antiquity. I’ve never been in it, but I’ve heard it mentioned.” Li Nu answered. “Besides, I know a lot of people there would be excited to see you again.”

“You make a lot of good points, Li Nu. Rokishe it is.” Azula said. “It will be good to see some of my old friends.”

Azula was excited to be going to see her friends in Rokishe. Of all the places she traveled, it was the city that called to her the most. Ba Sing Se was more functional when she had been a princess, and Lenth and Savan had their charms, but Rokishe just seemed to resonate with her soul.

They had decided to get a late afternoon start and break the trip up into two segments. It was almost ten hours by dragon, which was a long time to sit, so they decided to stop for the evening in Vi Yan Zo. Azula had good memories there too, but the city was still Fire Nation and she didn’t really want to be recognized there. But with no royal hairpiece, the scar on her cheek and the fact that she was a couple of years older meant that she should be okay. But if the weather holds, they would still sleep under the stars.

They spent the rest of their time going through the temple with Li Nu, making sure there weren’t any other math puzzles hidden in plain sight. The main room of the temple of course had the statue of Yotforbu in all her obscene glory. Four eyes, four arms, four boobs and an extraordinarily large penis were on display, just like every other statue of her that she’s ever seen. She certainly wasn’t the Goddess of Modesty.

The main chamber was circular, with a diameter of forty feet and a high domed ceiling of twenty-five feet. The walls were covered in engravings of various types. The map they had reviewed covered part of the wall, while others showed various scenes that she had recognized from ancient scrolls she had studied. And she had seen several of the engravings at the temple in Ji Ha also.

Two smaller chambers were located through doorways off the east and west side of the room. The east room was a meditation hall, about fifteen feet wide by twenty-five feet long. There were four engraved meditation stations built into raised blocks; Azula recognized them as being ancient chi reservoirs, although she sensed that their stores of chi had long since been depleted.

But the second chamber was the one that really interested them. It was slightly larger than the meditation hall, being around twenty feet wide and thirty feet long. It was a library that still had thousands upon thousands of documents. Everything was written in an ancient version of Lincum Arca, the language of scholars for untold thousands of years. It had fallen out of favor during the past century, but Azula and Navisi had both been trained to read it. It had taken a little time to get used to the slightly different syntax and vocabulary of the older version, but they were expert in it now.

The main chamber also had doors that led to monastic living quarters carved into the mountain. For a short stay like this, it wasn’t worth the effort to unseal them. Someday, Azula wished to return with enough followers to make it worth the effort.

But soon enough, it was time for the small group to begin their journey to Rokishe. They all packed their supplies and began loading Kiva. Since Kiva was basically magic, she could easily conform her shape to comfortably accommodate three passengers, even creating saddle bags for them to store their gear. The road she had walked after leaving Atla had been hard, and she had been forced to make many sacrifices, but she would glady do it five times over if it meant finding Navisi, Kiva and Omnisae.

And traveling with a magic dragon had other perks also. Besides speed and altitude, Kiva could also change color to match the scheme of the sky above her, making herself virtually invisible to watchers on the ground when she got to cruising altitude. Not that much could follow her if she didn’t want them to. With a normal cruising speed of seventy clicks per hour, with speeds greater than one hundred clicks per hour possible for shorter trips, there was nothing short of an ancient dragon on Atla that could hope to keep pace.

They were in the air and on their way in late afternoon. Vi Yan Zo turned out to be just about halfway between the temple and Rokishe, so it would take about five hours to get there, so they should arrive around dusk. The flight was easy enough; Azula and Navisi were used to flying dragonback, but poor Li Nu would probably be sore. Just as the bottom edge of the sun was sinking below the horizon, Kiva landed in an isolated clearing in the woods. The camp was set up and a small fire was roaring by the time the sun was truly below the horizon.

“I certainly hope that Ivaku thought to inform the SDC about your return.” Li Nu said, looking into the fire. “Otherwise, Kiva is probably going to cause a panic.”

“Fear not, Li Nu, we can circle overhead to get attention and then land at a convenient point outside the city. But we can warn them ahead of time. One of the things that we haven’t shared with you yet is that Omnisae can teleport.” Azula said, also looking into the fire.

“What exactly does teleport mean?” Li Nu asks.

“It means that she can instantaneously jump from one point to another in space without traveling through the points in between. We can have her jump to Rokishe in the morning and deliver a letter informing them of our arrival. It will cause a lot less stress.” Navisi answered, laying on her back a little distance from the fire, staring up at the stars.

“That might be a good idea.” Li Nu agreed. “Your companions are truly amazing.”

Azula and Navisi both laughed as Azula answered for the both of them. “That they are.”

Once again Min Kai was struggling to keep up with Ambassador Mavong. Why the hell does he have such long legs? The finally reached a table much like the last one that she had sat at during a negotiation here at Omashu. However, Min Kai had Mavong’s word that he wasn’t going to bolt and leave her holding the bag like the last time. That didn’t make her feel much better though.

The Supreme Committee seems to think that Mavong was the golden child of the Earth Kingdom or something. He represented them at the last meeting, at least as far as they know. He ran the Earth Kingdom defenses on the western front. Sort of. So now it was just him and Min Kai handling the entire negotiation again.

She sighed thinking of it. There were so many complicated issues regarding territory occupation and treaty conditions and borders and numerous other things. And Mavong couldn’t be bothered to learn more than the most basic and superficial information on any of them. Which means that Min Kai had devoted nearly every waking hour of every day for the past week deep diving into all the wants of the Supreme Committee. Which were a lot of requests that, frankly, were stupid and counterproductive.

Mavong had decided that she needed experience and would handle the opening statements. Thank Gnolos for that. She was reviewing her notes when the door opened and another party entered. Min Kai looked up to see two women enter. They were both of medium height, meaning that they towered over Min Kai, and had long dark hair. But that’s where the similarities ended. One was wearing the sophisticated version of the traditional garb of the southern earth regions, which gave her a rather majestic look. The outfit went well with her brown hair, dark green eyes and lightly tanned complexion. That must be Successor Rajeen.

The other woman was wearing a formal water tribe outfit, the blue dress having a geometric pattern that somehow suggested a snowflake. Her bright blue eyes and dark complexion completed the water tribe look. This would be Ambassador Ivaku.

They had done great work in nearly completing a confederation treaty between the Earth Kingdom and the Central Earth Kingdom region that had been looking for more autonomy. Had the Fire Nation waited just a few weeks to make their asinine demands, it would have been in place.

And just after they entered, the Fire Nation delegation entered. Min Kai recognized the Crown Prince and Lady Mai, but the other two were strangers to her. While she despised the Fire Nation on general principle, Lu Ten and Mai hadn’t been that bad as people. But this got her to thinking of Azula. More specifically, the rumors of her triumphant return atop a dragon. It was hard to believe, but Min Kai sincerely hoped it was true.

As before, she gave the other delegates respectful nods and received one in return. And as always, Mavong stared into the middle distance. How did this man get to be in charge of anything? Her musings were halted as Avatar Aang and Ambassador Katara entered the room, looking much as they did the last time they officiated over negotiations here in this hall.

Everyone stood, even Mavong, as the two made their way to the dais with their table. Aang wore his simple monk robes while Katara wore an elegant blue dress that suggested water tribe but wasn’t as overt as Ivaku’s. They turned to the crowd after they reached the table.

“Welcome, everyone. I am Avatar Aang and I will be overseeing the negotiations, with the help of Ambassador Katara,” Aang proclaimed. Katara gave a small bow when introduced. “I hope that we can come to an agreement among the parties that lead to peace and prosperity for the world. The delegates from Alokhai and the Northern Water Tribes are scheduled to arrive tomorrow, but there are many issues to discuss that do not concern them, so we can begin the proceedings.”

Aang and Katara took seats at their table and looked around before Katara spoke. “Since the initial conflict was between the Earth Kingdom and Fire Nation, we believe that it would be appropriate for the negotiations to begin there. Counselor Min Kai, are you prepared to give an opening statement?”

“Yes, Ambassador Katara, I am.” Min Kai answered, getting to her feet. “The events that led to today started with an unfortunate event in the Northwest Colony. Seeing how the Fire Nation has proven itself to be incapable of handling the administration of this territory, the Earth Kingdom believes that now is the time for these hardworking and industrious people to return to their roots and rejoin the Earth Kingdom, where they will be treated with the respect they deserve. As a matter of fact, the Fire Nation has shown that it can’t handle any of the territories that it has taken from the Earth Kingdom.”

Min Kai paused to look around the crowd. They were against the Fire Nation but weren’t buying what she was selling. But she would sell it as best she could. “Alokhai, despite being a peaceful and productive people, were given away without so much as a second thought in order to buy the mercenaries of the Northern Water Tribe. And the Fire Colony has been exploited for decades by the Fire Nation, its people forced to provide coal and steel and manufactured goods for the Fire Nation war machine.”

“But the Earth Kingdom believes that it is time for these regions to be returned to the people they were stolen, that now is the time for the Fire Nation to make whole what it tore asunder. We do not seek the destruction of the Fire Nation, but we wish to return them to where they belong, which is on the archipelago that they have ruled for recorded history. We seek only to return the world to balance, where the people of Fire, Water and Earth live in harmony and can aid with the reestablishment of the Air Nomad people. We seek only to bring order from chaos and to recreate the world where peace, balance, and mutually beneficial interactions between our nations was the norm. Most of history is the precedent for our claim. Thank you for listening to our petition.”

Min Kai bowed and sat down. Aang and Katara looked at each other before Katara spoke. “That would be a lot of territory to return to the Earth Kingdom at once. How do you propose to rule it? Do you have the capability to manage such a large territory?”

Min Kai was ready for this. “Successor Rajeen and Ambassador Ivaku had nearly completed negotiations between the central Earth Kingdom government and the Central Earth Kingdom when the Fire Nation made their illegal demands of my people. They used the Azula Papers as the model for the negotiation and had nearly created an agreement to create a confederation between the regions, keeping the Earth Kingdom whole but granting the Central Earth Kingdom more control over their affairs. We would establish the same type of arrangements with the other states being brought into the Earth Kingdom fold.”

Once it was clear that Min Kai was finished, Aang spoke again. “Thank you, Counselor, for your opening remarks.” Aang then turned his attention to the Fire Nation delegates. “Crown Prince Lu Ten, would you care to give opening remarks on behalf of the Fire Nation?”

“Yes, Avatar, I would.” Lu Ten got to his feet and walked to the center of the meeting room. “Much like the last time the Fire Nation and Earth Kingdom delegates negotiated a peace treaty in this hall, the Earth Kingdom is hoping to rule by hopes and wishes and dreams. The Earth Kingdom has shown itself to be woefully incapable of ruling what it has. They are barely able to feed and shelter the millions of people that they already contain within their borders. They’ve made no investments to improve their infrastructure or to modernize in any sense of the word.”

“The Fire Colony, Northwest Colony, and the state of Alokhai are all part of the Fire Nation and will remain part of the Fire Nation. To hand them over to the Earth Kingdom would be to condemn them to political and economic incompetence that would undoubtedly lead to governmental collapse, famine and civil war. The Fire Nation has built these regions up, invested in improving their manufacturing base and worked to make them functioning states. It would be doing these fine people a massive disservice to saddle them with a third-rate overlord like the Earth Kingdom. Thank you for listening to my opening statement, Avatar.”

Lu Ten returned to his seat. Min Kai had to admit that this was better than his amateurish performance at the last negotiations. But there were still a lot of holes in their arguments to poke at. It was the SDC opening that had Min Kai worried. Would they choose a side? Would they walk their own path? Would they make their own land grab?

“Crown Prince, given that you transferred Alokhai to the Northern Water Tribe, do you still believe that it should be returned to Fire Nation control?” Aang asked. “It would seem that you relinquished all claims to ownership by agreeing to the transfer.”

“Alokhai has been a loyal part of the Fire Nation for decades and is a valuable partner. The Northern Water Tribe was unable to hold onto the territory for even a month, therefore it should be returned to the Fire Nation.” Lu Ten answered. Min Kai knew that was a crock of shit. Alokhai was going to be used as a bargaining chip, nothing more.

“Thank you, Crown Prince.” Aang responded before turning his attention to the third party at the negotiation. “Successor Rajeen, would you like to give an opening statement of behalf of the Southern Defense Coalition?”

“Yes, Avatar Aang, if I may.” She stood and elegantly took the center spot like Min Kai and Lu Ten before her. This was what Min Kai had been waiting for. The position of the SDC would be a big driver in these negotiations. They were the actual winners of the war. The Earth Kingdom was merely a survivor.

“The SDC empathizes with all of the parties in this negotiation. Managing large swathes of territory comprising diverse people is a difficult task. But the main point that both parties have neglected is the will of the people being ruled. We have heard talk from the Fire Nation and talk from the Earth Kingdom. Who belongs to them and who will rule them the best. But what of the people in those regions?”

“The Northwest Colony has chafed under the rule of the Fire Nation for years; they have made their thoughts on independence and self-rule well known. The Fire Colony, while overall more closely aligned with the culture of the Fire Nation, has regional issues with the purity movements. Even states that have been loyal and valuable allies to the Fire Nation, such as Alokhai and the Fire Islands, may wish to explore other options. It is the position of the SDC that each of these regions, and any other occupied region, be given the option to vote on their nation’s status.” Rajeen stated, looking around.

“If the people of a region wish to stay with the Fire Nation, the SDC will not object. But the voting process would have to be fair and equitable. The SDC would be willing to assist any region that wishes to have an election, with participation of the other governments, of course.” Min Kai was very concerned about this development. The Supreme Committee wanted territory and had no interest in the wishes of the occupants.

“That is a very interesting proposal, Successor. We would need to have representation from the regions to have that discussion.” Aang responded.

“Of course, Avatar. The SDC has already sent representatives to each of the regions to gauge interest. The Fire Islands, the Northwest Colony and Alokhai have already accepted the offer to have a popular vote to determine the destiny of their people.” Rajeen said, to the outrage of both Mavong and Lu Ten.

“This is outrageous! Those are Fire Nation regions and do not answer to you!” Lu Ten said, his voice angry and his demeanor threatening.

“For once, I agree with the Fire Nation. You do not have the authority to do this.” Mavong said, actually participating for once.

“For years the Fire Nation and Earth Kingdom have used might as a means to control others, with the Northern Water Tribe deciding to join in on the land grab as of late also. Now the SDC will use its might to ensure that the smaller nations are given a choice. Alokhai and the Fire Islands have a strong relationship with the SDC and we will give them their say. If they choose to stay with the Fire Nation or join the Earth Kingdom, we will gladly let them do so. But if they choose independence, then we will stand up and help them defend it.” Rajeen said, steel in her voice.

The room descended into chaos as both Lu Ten and Mavong argued and blustered and tried to erect procedural objections and traditional boundaries and the like. But Min Kai stayed quiet; she was very worried about what this would do to the government in Ba Sing Se. The Supreme Committee demanded significant territorial concessions and the political situation could become untenable if those goals are not achieved. But she watched Successor Rajeen and she saw a strong negotiator with the backing of a powerful coalition that had just demolished two major nations in a short war.

Once again, Min Kai feared what these negotiations would bring to her country.

Chapter Text

Novae watched the black and gold dragon circling Rokishe for the second time. They were too high up to clearly see, but according to the note that arrived on the magic bird, Azula had returned with an apprentice. And it would be good to see Li Nu again; the two of them had worked side by side for the past several years to create the augmentors that had helped forge the Southern Defense Coalition into a formidable world power.

Novae had a hard time coming to terms with the wild tale that Ivaku had shared with them about Azula’s disappearance. But if anyone was going to have a wild off-world adventure fighting evil superpowered enemies, it was going to be Azula. But all that mattered to Novae was that Azula was back.

Azula had been the first person with power and influence to truly grasp the scope of what Novae was trying to do. If anything, her vision for the Mechanical Thinker, and now the Engraved Thinker, was even more far reaching than Novae’s. But more important than that, Azula was someone that Novae truly liked and respected. The world had truly become a darker place in her absence.

But Novae had been thankful that even though the Fire Nation wouldn’t fund her work, Azula had found someone that would. The Matrons of Rokishe were talented and forward-thinking women in their own right. Matron Jannir had granted the first funding and Matron Asitva had continued supporting Novae’s work when she had taken over.

Novae was entranced as she watched the black and gold dragon land in the large space at the airship port that had been cleared for precisely that purpose. It had slowly circled down, losing speed and altitude until it softly touched down on the designated patch of dirt, its wing beats tossing up some dust.

Three figures descended from the dragon and made their way towards the watching crowd. Matron Asitva headed the greeting party of course, with Vinda and Successor candidate Gin Su standing by her side. Novae, Si Har and Hanru had been asked to join them since they had worked closely with the princess before her disappearance.

Novae couldn’t help but smile as she saw Azula and Li Nu approaching. And she had no doubt that the apprentice was intelligent and talented too; Azula wouldn’t waste her time on an unworthy sidekick. She saw that Azula had grown a bit taller and more mature looking, but it pained her to see the scar marring her face.

Matron Asitva addressed the ladies as they approached. “Mistress Azula, it warms my heart to see you again after all this time. You are as beautiful as ever. And rumor has it that you have an exceptionally talented apprentice in tow.”

The smile on Azula’s face widened even more. “And it is good to see you again, Matron Asitva. And yes indeed, I do have a brilliant and talented apprentice.” Azula stopped and gestured to the brown-haired girl to her right. “It is my great honor to introduce the wonderful citizens of Rokishe to Disciple Navisi of the Arts Esoteric. She has been a wonderful traveling companion and I count my lucky stars every day that I found someone as exceptional as her to help carry our sect into the future.”

The girl gave a fluid bow to Matron Asitva. “It is a pleasure to finally visit your great city, Matron. Azula has told many wonderful tales of her time here. She’s even been making me practice dancing so that I don’t, as she puts it, bring shame on our sect with subpar dancing during the Night of Tianokk.”

Everyone laughed, even Novae. Everyone in Rokishe took the Night of Tianokk seriously. Novae wasn’t much of a dancer but even she had to admit it was a great party. She felt energized for weeks afterwards.

“If Mistress Azula is your dance instructor, I have no doubt that you will set the hearts of all the youths aflame with your sensuous moves.” Asitva said with a laugh. “But you are not the only one with a young disciple. I would like to introduce you to Successor candidate Gin Su. She is a gifted young woman and will one day set the world ablaze.”

Gin Su bowed and spoke to the guests. “It is an honor to meet both of you, Mistress Azula and Disciple Navisi. It is very exciting to have you visiting our city.”

“It is a pleasure to meet you, Successor Gin Su. You must be an extraordinary woman to be selected as a Successor candidate.” Azula said with a small bow.

“Enough with formalities. It is time for reunions!” Asitva exclaims. “The Azulinati have been waiting very impatiently to greet you.”

“And I’ve been waiting a long time to greet them. It is good to see all of you.” Azula said as she came and gave Novae and Si Har hugs. Hanru went for a bow; he had always been terrified of Azula and the thought of a hug would probably make him wet himself. And Azula also gave a rather vigorous hug to Vinda. Novae didn’t realize that they knew each other.

“Li Nu has told me of the many wonderous things that you’ve made. I’m glad that the Matron’s were more visionary than the Fire Nation. The thought of your incredible devices in the hands of those warmongers makes my skin crawl.” Azula said, shocking Novae with the venom in her voice. Apparently, she wasn’t the only one surprised by this. Everyone had gone quiet at her announcement.

“In case you were wondering, I renounced my princess status before I left on my adventure. The Fire Nation turned its back on me and, from what I’ve seen and heard upon my return, returned to its vile ways of violence and aggression. I’m glad that the SDC was able to prevent the Fire Nation and Northern Water Tribe from carrying out their illegal and outlandish war aims.” Azula said, addressing the group with a small smile. “But enough with the serious talk, I want to hear about what my friends have been up to.”

“Come then,” Asitva said. “Let us go and catch up.”

Lu Ten is irate at the turn of events here at the negotiations. When the SDC called for the lands to decide for themselves how to move forward, he considered it a ploy to gain concessions. But then Alokhai and Fire Island representatives came and announced that the votes had already occurred and that the two groups were leaving the Fire Nation and aligning with the SDC.

“There is no precedent for this in international law. These are unsanctioned elections that may well have been staged.” Lu Ten snarled.

“Your nation has invaded or tried to invade nearly the entirety of the earth continent. You committed genocide of the Air Nomads and tried to wipe out the entire bending population of the Southern Water Tribe. You gave Alokhai, a state that had been loyal to your people for decades, to the Northern Water Tribe without so much as a single thought for their concerns.” Rajeen answered back. “The SDC doesn’t care for your wishes. If you have an issue with this, sail your ships back out into the ocean and change our minds.”

“You claim to be righteous and fair when all that you really are is jealous of what the Fire Nation has. Your third-rate nations got lucky with a few inventions and now you think that you are a world power. You’re pathetic wannabes.” Lu Ten responded, his own voice loud and angry.

“Inventions that could have been yours had you not turned your back on the most brilliant and forward-thinking person your horrible nation has ever produced. According to the rumors, your dipshit father and your jackass cousin sold out their entire country just to get you healed. How does it feel to know that you’re the reason the Fire Nation has become a colossal failure?” Rajeen yelled, on her feet and gesturing at Lu Ten. Ivaku was grabbing her and pulling her back.

Lu Ten stands and begins to retort when he feels hands on him also. “Get your hands off me!” He shouts and shrugs out of their grip.

“Enough!” And Lu Ten pauses as he feels a chill go down his spine as the Avatar speaks with his inhuman voice, his eyes and tattoos glowing menacingly. “I will listen to your childish and petulant braying no longer.”

The room goes silent as the Avatar looks around, disgust evident on his face. “I am calling for a recess. All parties will take a two-hour break. I recommend that you find somewhere relaxing to calm your nerves, because I will not tolerate this behavior any longer. You are representing the most powerful political entities on the planet, and your actions and speech should reflect your station.”

“You are correct, Avatar. I apologize for my words and actions.” Rajeen bows to Aang. Ivaku still has a light grip on her arm.

“I apologize also, Avatar.” Lu Ten begrudgingly says, giving a slight bow. None of his party is actually touching him any longer.

“I accept your apologies, but I stand by my words. I will not tolerate this behavior. Use the two-hour recess wisely.” Aang says, his face stern. Katara stands next to him, watching the group with a disapproving scowl of her own.

Lu Ten watches as Ivaku practically drags Rajeen out of the room. None of the Fire Nation delegates dare put another hand on him. He sighs as he watches the Earth Kingdom and Northern Water Tribe delegates go. But what really irks him is that he can see Sentha and Zin Tee watching him. They don’t have an official standing in the negotiations, but they are now hiding under the umbrella of the SDC.

Traitors. That was what they are. They stood with the Fire Nation until they get their first chance to bolt. And then they run as fast as their backstabbing little feet will take them. He was brought out of his ruminations by Mai speaking quietly behind him.

“Crown Prince, let’s use the recess to reevaluate our arguments and define the best path forward.” He turned to look at her. Her face was smooth and nearly emotionless, but not quite. Worry. He can see worry on her face.

He sighs and begins moving towards the door. “You’re right, Mai. Let’s go.”

Navisi has spent so much time smiling in Rokishe that her face is starting to hurt. She had led a uncertain life during the early years on her home world, living on the streets of Ba Sing Se and earning money to support herself as a street performer. Learning from Mistress Lista during her later childhood had been fulfilling, but she would say that she had been content rather than happy. But now she understood what true happiness was. Mistress Azula had returned to her people, and they accepted and welcomed Navisi too. So many people here loved and cared for Azula. Navisi now understood why she was willing to leave her world and fight an unimaginable power to protect it.

So Navisi had asked Azula if she could research the main temple and try to find it as her own personal project while Azula reconnected with her friends. And Azula agreed. She received a crash course in cartology from the curator of the Rokishe Library of Antiquity. Using the most accurate map that the curator knew of, Navisi carefully mapped out the coordinates for the Marks and systematically measured the angles and distances for the Pointers to find the Destination.

She then mapped out the lines of uncertainty using the formulas and techniques she had been taught by the curator. The resulting area where the Destination should be, with about an 80% probability, was within a nine square click area. Going on the assumption that the temple would be elevated, she cross referenced the area she selected with the best topological maps she could find. There are seven peaks in the designated area, so those will be the ones she looks at first.

Mistress Azula had graciously allowed Navisi to take Kiva as transport to the designated area. And now they were approaching the target area. Navisi flew just just above the highest peak, slowly circling in order to visually scan the mountains for any signs of buildings or markings that would only be visible from the air. Not seeing anything from a general scan, she decided to evaluate each mountain individually.

She decided to land and send Omnisae for this mission; her eyesight was spectacular, and the range of vision was better for close searches. She picked a nice rocky ledge that had enough room for Kiva to land and enough shelter to make a viable camp. Navisi settled herself into a comfortable meditation position and then summoned Omnisae.

The magical eagle-hawk flew to the top of the mountain Navisi was set up on and slowly cirled down, scanning the mountainside with her incredible vision. And thanks to their connection, whatever Omnisae saw, Navisi saw too. She settled in for the long haul. It would take about fourteen hours of flight time to scan each of the mountains from top to bottom with the care that Navisi desired.

The morning became afternoon, and the afternoon was beginning to fade into evening when she finally found something of interest. It was about a third of the way down the fifth mountain she was checking. Looking through Omnisae’s eyes, she spotted what looked like it could have been an ancient courtyard. Having Omnisae review the areas around the possible courtyard, she spotted an opening that looked just a little too symmetrical to be natural. It could be some fluke of nature, but she was starting to get excited.

She had Omnisae land and transform into a panther and approach the opening. Vegetation had overgrown part of the it, but she could see a barrier behind some of the plants. And she nearly shouted for joy when she saw the engravings; they were old and nearly worn away, but she recognized some of the symbols. Lincum Arca. Thank Gnolos that Mistress Lista had taught her the language of the ancient scholars.

Navisi had Omnisae wait there as she jumped up and pounced onto Kiva’s back. Moments later they were in the air and on their way to Omnisae. The courtyard had just seemed like many other flat rocky areas from dragonback, but she could see the geometric pattern of the area once she got closer and began looking for the designs of a man-made structure.

There was plenty of room for Kiva to land, and Navisi was off like a shot as soon as the great dragon landed. She extended her chi sense and she knew that she was there. The structure was shielded by a chi blocking field! She activated her augmented gauntlets and brought up the telekinetic light sigils; the vegetation and brush were cleared out in less than a minute and she could examine the door.

Most of the etchings were worn down and hard to read, but that was okay. They had techniques for recovering those so long as they weren’t completed abraded away. But the important point was to find the chi lock. She searched the standard positions until she found it. Yes, this was definitely of Arts Esoteric design. Tears fell down her face as she thought of what might be waiting for them. But she dared not go any further. She needed to bring Azula here.

She recalled Omnisae, making sure to note the position of the courtyard in Omnisae’s directional memory. She climbed aboard Kiva and they made their way back to Rokishe. Azula would be so excited!

These negotiations were turning out to be an unmitigated disaster for the Earth Kingdom. And for once, it wasn’t even Mavong’s fault. The problem was that the Earth Kingdom had exactly zero leverage to negotiate with. The Central Earth Kingdom had taken the brunt of the assault from the Fire Nation, and they were angry and pushing for secession. The incompetence of the military response by the Supreme Committee had alienated them. The plan they were oh so close to finalizing before the Fire Nation attack was now off the table.

And the SDC was pushing for the disputed regions to vote for what they wanted their future to look like. Alokhai and the Fire Islands had already decided to join the SDC. The Supreme Committee didn’t care about the Fire Islands but did have their eyes on Alokhai. Which was stupid in Min Kai’s opinion; they were practically a member of the SDC before the war. The SDC was never going to allow the Earth Kingdom to annex them against their will.

The Northwest Colony and Fire Colonies were still up in the air, but she doubted that either would choose to join the Earth Kingdom, especially with the Central Earth Kingdom damn near in active revolt. Min Kai predicted that the Northwest Colony would decide to become an independent nation and that the Fire Colony would either remain with the Fire Nation or split into two or more smaller nations. None of which would join the Earth Kingdom.

This was going to be a disaster for the Supreme Committee. Reparations was probably the only viable win for the Earth Kingdom in these negotiations. But that probably wouldn’t be enough to save the Supreme Committee. She feared what this treaty would mean for the government and people of her country.

She couldn’t even enjoy the vociferous arguments between the SDC and the Fire Nation. By all accounts, Successor Rajeen and Crown Prince Lu Ten were actually decent people, but this negotiation had brought out the worst in them. They now seemed to hate each other with a burning passion. Luckily, Ivaku and Mai seemed to be doing a good job of moderating the intensity of their boss’s animosity.

But the SDC had all the power and was wielding it to their benefit. But it would mean even more heartbreak for her country and probably bad things for the Fire Nation government. The Northern Water Tribe had already thrown their warmongering leaders out and were probably the most even handed of the delegations. They were contrite and willing to atone for their mistakes.

The Earth Kingdom survived the war, but Min Kai doesn’t believe that it would survive the peace.

Azula was ecstatic with the incredible work that the Azulinati had done for the Matrons in her absence. The disc launchers, electrical motors and the Distance Printers were the three items that had the most immediate practicality, but Azula was duly impressed with their other advances too.

Using the Engraved Thinker, Li Nu and Novae had printed out the most accurate book of engineering tables ever assembled. But that was only the beginning. It turns out that they actually used an Engraved Thinker to simulate and help test potential solutions to relatively complex engineering problems. Li Nu had become an absolute master at taking complex engineering information and reducing them to mathematical inputs that the Engraved Thinker would then use to test potential solutions.

The disc launchers, electric motors, and Distance Printers had all three been optimized using this process. But nearly another dozen upgrades had been developed using the Engraved Thinker. Problems with metallurgy, agriculture, architecture and ship design had all been solved with the help of the Engraved Thinker. And the SDC was thriving, in part, thanks to these developments.

Having seen what truly advanced computers and such had done for other societies, Azula knew that they were on the right track. It warmed her heart to see this technology in the hands of truly forward-thinking people like the Matrons and the SDC.

“We’ve expanded on the mathematical language that Novae had developed to create something with more power and flexibility. The big issue is that we may actually have to create smaller, more specific sublanguages for some applications.” Li Nu said, her face glowing with excitement. Azula mused that the girl had picked up some of Novae’s mannerisms and single-minded determination.

“This is truly wonderful, and I couldn’t be prouder of what you’ve accomplished. And I’m glad to see that the techniques you’ve learned are being applied to a wide range of problems. Becoming hyper focused on using your progress for only select parts of society will lead to imbalances that will cause problems later.” Azula warned. Again, she thinks of what the Fire Nation would have done with this technology. More weapons. Maybe better equipment to carry more weapons too. That was probably about it.

“The Matrons were worried about the gains being limited to only one part of society. They wanted improvements that could help raise everyone up. I see now why you always spoke so well of the Matrons. They are like less snarky and much less deadly versions of you.” Li Nu answered with a wide smile.

Azula laughed. “I am flattered. But I would like to see this technology applied to economics and government as well. If you used it monitor trade patterns and help identify ways to improve commerce, it would be helpful. It may also be helpful identifying what areas need help. Education, finances, crop production, trade are all things that could be quantified and evaluated using the Engraved Thinker. Even looking at them with a critical eye without the Engraved Thinker would probably help.”

Li Nu laughed again. “Those are good ideas. Now that you are back and cracking the whip on the world, I think that things are going to improve.”

Azula smiled but didn’t like the idea as much as Li Nu did. “We need to provide the nations of the world with tools to help themselves and their people. No one, whether it be me or the Avatar, should be responsible for solving all the world’s problems. The ways of the past won’t take us into the future.”

Li Nu was about to speak when the door to the lab opened and one of Li Nu’s assistants entered. “Pardon my interruption, but Disciple Navisi just landed and is urgently looking for you, Mistress Azula.”

Azula frowned. She had only left this morning. Did something go wrong? She didn’t find it already, did she? Navisi was good but she wasn’t that good. Was she?

“Let’s not keep my apprentice waiting.” Azula said as she made her way to the door, Li Nu in tow. They strode out of the research building that housed the main laboratories and workshops. And they saw Navisi sprinting towards her.

Azula smiled when she saw the wide grin on her apprentice’s face. She had found it! She braced herself as Navisi launched herself into Azula, embracing her in a big hug.

“I found a courtyard on a mountain in the target area. The walls are protected by a chi blocking field and the ancient door has Lincum Arca engraved on it. I found the chi lock but I didn’t try to unlock it.” Navisi spoke with the high energy, clipped speech that she used when she was excited.

Azula’s heart sang with joy. This could be the breakthrough that they needed. A base from which to rebuild the Order of the Arts Esoteric. She smiled back at her apprentice. Navisi truly was a remarkable young woman.

“That’s wonderful, Navisi! Once again, you’ve exceeded my already lofty expectations. Let’s go talk to the Matron and we’ll head back first thing in the morning.” Azula pulled Navisi in for another hug. She knew that Navisi had been a bit touch starved due to the unfortunate occurrences of her home world, so she tried to express her appreciation for Navisi physically when possible.

“I’m happy for both of you. This must be very exciting for you!” Li Nu exclaimed. She then hugged Azula and Navisi.

“Yes, it is. And when the three of us enter it tomorrow, it will be the beginning of a new era.” Azula proclaimed.

“You want me to go to? This is something that you and Navisi should do together.” Li Nu answered.

“Nonsense, Li Nu. Who knows how long it would have taken us to figure out the key. You did it in like two minutes. You belong there with us.” Navisi answered. Azula smiled at her apprentice. She was a good person.

“I will, if you’re sure that you want me.”

“Of course we want you, Li Nu. This is the start of a new era!” Azula said, pulling both her girls in for yet another hug.

Chapter Text

Li Nu was excited to see the rediscovered temple. She still feels a little bit like an interloper, but Azula and Navisi insisted that she join them. So now she was once again riding a magic dragon through the skies on their way to a hidden mountainside temple.

The mountains were beautiful in the morning sun, the light and shadows creating an almost artistic display. With dozens of peaks, it was truly a breathtaking sight. Li Nu was enjoying life and appreciating the view when Kiva began her slow descent towards one of the peaks. It wasn’t the tallest peak in the range, but it was one of the broadest. Li Nu searched for a sign of a temple.

There! She could see the outline of a courtyard. And that was precisely where Kiva landed. It was wide and broad. There was a lot of low-level vegetation covering much of the ancient yard, but Li Nu could still see much of the stones used to pave the area. The courtyard was on the south side of the mountain and the view extended out to the not-so-distant South Sea.

They descended from Kiva and followed Navisi to the door. Azula walked up to the door and examined it. “This will need to be handled carefully to read the engravings, but I think that they can be salvaged. Where did you say the chi lock was?”

“Over here, Mistress.” Navisi said, pointing to one of the maybe three hundred stones that formed the bottom of the arch just outside the door. The stones weren’t visible until you stepped inside the arch.

“Well, I’m going to try and unlock it. Hopefully there aren’t any side quests that we have to complete to open the door.” Azula closed her eyes, and a look of intense concentration came over her face. About three minutes went by before they heard a distinctive click. Azula opened her eyes.

“It is unlocked. Would you like to do the honors of opening the door, oh great disciple of mine?” Azula asked, a wide grin plastered on her face.

“I would be honored, oh great mistress of mine.” Navisi activated her light sigils and began manipulating them. Li Nu held her breath as the door rolled open, revealing a dark interior.

“Shall we go see what wonders the ancient temple of our order holds?” Azula asked, summoning a glowing gold ball of light.

“I would love to.” Navisi summoned two balls of light, one of which floated over to Li Nu.

Li Nu couldn’t help but smile. She had known that Azula was special ever since that day nearly four years ago when they had first met in Ba Sing Se. But to see what Azula had become was extraordinary. She couldn’t imagine what the world would look like in fifty years if Azula kept pushing the boundaries of the possible.

Azula led the way as they slowly walked in, the glowing orbs of light illuminating everything within about sixty feet or so of the group. But that wasn’t enough to see anything but a bit of the walls to their sides. Suddenly, Navisi began creating new lights, making twelve in all, and then the lights began to rise and grew many times brighter, illuminating the entire chamber.

All three of them looked around the chamber. It was a large circular entryway, maybe eighty feet across, with a high dome ceiling that was about sixty feet high at its apex. There were numerous etchings and carvings and reliefs upon the walls. It was truly spectacular to see.

And of course, there was an eight-foot statue of Yotforbu; apparently she left this statue nearly everywhere she went.

Along the edges of the room were two large doors that led to other parts of the temple. Li Nu was still looking around the temple when Azula spoke. “I feel a calling to head through the door on the left.”

“I feel it too, Mistress. It’s a summons without words.” Navisi answered. Li Nu just looked between them, because she didn’t feel any sort of calling. But then she did, a tickling sensation, an itch that could only be scratched by going through that door.

“I feel it too.” Li Nu said, shivering a little bit. She wasn’t really attuned to the spiritual side of the world. Azula and Navisi just smiled at her.

“I’ve been thinking about asking you to join our order and create a new branch based on your mastery of engraving designs. You getting a spiritual side just reinforces my notion.” Azula’s smile was a bit predatory. “But we can have that discussion later. Let’s go see who is calling us.”

Navisi created three more light orbs as the Li Nu and the others made their way to the beckoning door. She left the other twelve lights behind to keep the main entryway illuminated. Li Nu was both nervous and excited as she walked through the door.

Pakku is getting worried about the progression of the negotiations. He had expected things to get contentious. The SDC and the Fire Nation were at odds about virtually every single issue. This could be to the benefit of the Northern Water Tribe in the short term, but he suspected it was to everyone’s detriment in the long term.

He was also slightly worried about his own role. Based on what he saw, the lead negotiator for each team was actually the weak link in their delegation. Every discussion between Lu Ten and Rajeen seemed to devolve into a childish squabble; at least they weren’t shouting and carrying on like their outrageous display the other day. The main job of Ivaku and Mai seemed to be keeping their lead negotiator from getting a timeout from the Avatar.

And Mavong was inarticulate and didn’t seem to have any coherent thoughts of his own. He was constantly making statements and demands, but upon any pushback or questioning it was always Min Kai who eloquently defended their position or explained why the request was being made, usually with figures and charts and references to international precedents. Not that it really mattered; the Earth Kingdom had next to no negotiating power. Their entire country was on the brink of civil war and collapse. But he couldn’t blame the young woman for bringing every weapon she had at her disposal to the aid of her nation.

“Reparations are needed to repair the infrastructure destroyed during hostilities, to help families who have lost their sources of income, and to cover the losses incurred by our manufacturing base when forced to switch to wartime production needs.” Min Kai was saying.

“The Central Earth Kingdom was so woefully underdeveloped that there wasn’t much to destroy. While we empathize with the loss of life, it is a risk incurred when joining the military. Manufacturing base? What manufacturing base?” Lu Ten responded. Pakku sighed. The earlier tussle with Rajeen had Lu Ten all wound up.

“Here is an itemized breakdown of the destruction of Central Earth Kingdom property, in addition to one for the northern shore sites attacked by the Northern Water Tribe. We also have a tally of the dead our country was forced to endure, as well as the list of manufacturing sites I alluded to earlier.” Min Kai calmly responded, walking to the Avatar’s table and handing copies of the said document to both Aang and Katara.

She then proceeded to deliver the document to the tables of the other delegations. “This is the basis of our requests for reparations. If you have issues with the facts and figures, I am of course happy to discuss how these numbers were generated.”

Pakku looked through the document. He was sure much of it was exaggerated to inflate the reparations request, but the figure for the Northern Water Tribe was significantly smaller than the Fire Nation bill. That was at least something. It would be interesting to see if Alokhai requested reparations through the SDC.

“Master Pakku, would you like to provide any feedback on the reparations request from the Earth Kingdom?” Aang asked, drawing Pakku from his introspection.

“The Northern Water Tribe accepts responsibility for our actions and fully expect reparations to be part of the negotiated settlement. As for the exact numbers provided by Counselor Min Kai, I would need to consult with the leaders of the military expeditions to see if these figures are in line with their experience.” Pakku answered.

“Of course, Master Pakku. The Earth Kingdom doesn’t expect blind obedience. Our delegation will be happy to work with you to finalize an appropriate settlement.” Min Kai answered with a respectful bow of her head, which Pakku returned. The other delegates could learn a lot from Min Kai.

“Crown Prince Lu Ten, is the Fire Nation also willing to accept responsibility for their actions and negotiate with the Earth Kingdom on the subject of reparations?” Katara asked. Pakku detected a small note of disdain in her voice.

“The Fire Nation still holds the position that the war was justified based on the fact that the Earth Kingdom interfered with the operations of the Fire Nation colonies and walked away from the earlier negotiations.” Lu Ten responded.

Pakku swears he heard a collective sigh of disgust resonate through the hall. The Fire Nation was being willfully obstinate in refusing to accept any blame for the war that had brought all four major powers into conflict. This did not bode well for long term relations between the nations.

And Pakku expected the situation to get worse when Rajeen started speaking. “The SDC holds that only the areas that vote to remain with the Fire Nation should be forced to assist with the payment of reparations. Alokhai and the Fire Islands, as well as the Northwest Colony when it too votes to leave the Fire Nation, should not be forced to bear the financial burden of their oppressors.”

And the Fire Nation and SDC delegations again got into yet another heated argument. Min Kai and Pakku happened to exchange a glance, but they both acknowledged the silent message that was shared. This would be trouble in the future.

Navisi didn’t know what to expect when Azula led the small troupe of explorers through the hallway. This room was much smaller than the entry hall, but Navisi still needed to summon five more glow orbs to illuminate the entire room.

It appeared to be meditation hall much like the one in the northwest, but somewhat larger. It looked to be about twenty-five feet wide by forty feet long. Once again, Navisi found chi reservoirs that had been depleted ages ago. The pull had stopped though.

“Perhaps we should…” Azula started speaking when suddenly all of the glow orbs went out for a few moments, only to reappear. And Navisi now knew why they had been drawn to this room. There were five extraordinary figures standing before them now.

Navisi of course knew OrkaHaalu. The women had followed them through all of their trials and tribulations. And she had delivered Kiva and Omnisae to them, so Navisi would forever be in their debt. She had never actually met the other four in the room, but Azula had described them in enough detail that she could recognize them by sight. Four of the intermediaries of the Great Spirits.

Li Nu, on the other hand, had no idea what was going on. Azula felt her distress as well. “It’s alright, Li Nu, these are friends of ours. We are perfectly safe. Aren’t we?” Azula asked that last part with a lot less confidence than Navisi would have preferred.

“Yes, yes, we are happy you found your home.” Orka said. Haalu, of course, had to speak next. “Yes, we have waited for you to come.”

Poor Li Nu looked like she was about to have an aneurism. Navisi could empathize. The first time she met the two-headed, six-armed, three boobed Goddesses of Chaos, she had been rattled too. Seven feet tall and muscular, they were an imposing physical specimen. Orka, the right head, had long yellow hair while Haalu, the left head, had short red hair. Both faces were conventionally beautiful, with large almond shaped eyes and pert noses. And of course, the three boobs were large and perky, as Azula had once described them.

“Greetings, travelers. We have come to welcome you to the grand temple of your order. It was once a lovely place, full of life and vigorous study. They were a bit optimistic with the size when they built it, for they never came close to filling it.” The tall woman in the red and black robe said. At least nine feet tall with flaming blue hair, she carried a rather large and imposing hammer. “Azula, of course, is well acquainted with all of us, but we should introduce ourselves to Navisi and Li Nu. I am Mukaati, intermediary of Agni and the Guardian of Blacksmiths and Hearths.”

“And I am Terrathusi, intermediary of Gnolos and Overseer of Agriculture. It is a pleasure to meet two of my people. It was a great fortune that we were able to send Azula to your world, Navisi. You, along with Azula, are far and away the strongest members of your sect to have walked this world or any other in the multiverse. As with Azula, we don’t understand why your bending never developed, but we were glad to be able to connect you with her.” He was only about seven feet tall with skin that had a sandy texture, but he was broad-shouldered and well-muscled. He held a large, jade scythe in his left hand.

“Thank you, one and all. You have my everlasting gratitude.” Navisi said with a full bow. And she meant it. Not only did she escape the hellscape that was her world, but she now gets to study with the greatest mistress in the history of her sect.

“It was our pleasure, young one. I am Denuskya, intermediary of Invina and the Bringer of Clouds and Giver of Life.” She was the smallest of the bunch, being only about six feet tall, but the fact that she was floating about two feet off the ground meant she still had a bit of a height advantage. She was slender and ethereal, with almost platinum white hair.

“And I am Methus, intermediary of Tui and La and the Protector of the Deep Ocean.” The last of the intermediaries said. At over twelve feet tall, he was well taller than all the others and quite possibly three times heavier than all the others combined. He appeared to by a human-kraken hybrid, with eight shorter tentacles and two longer ones instead of arms. Instead of a human face, he had a rounded head with two exceptionally large eyes and a beak for a mouth.

“Yes, yes, they are good and noble. I am Orka.” The right head of OrkaHaalu said. The two-headed goddess began dancing with joy while Haalu chimed in. “We like them and are glad they came. I am Haalu.”

“It..it is a pleasure to meet all of you.” Li Nu said, looking like she was on the verge of passing out.

Azula stepped over and gave her a hug. “It’s okay, Li Nu. They have been of great help to Navisi and me as we traveled.” Once Li Nu looked to be a little calmer, Azula turned back to the assembled party of deities. “While it is great to see all of you, may I ask why you have come to visit us?”

“You have performed great acts of service for not only your people, but the people of the multiverse. And when we asked you to step up and do even more, you did. Granted, you did grumble a little bit.” Terrathusi said, smiling at his last few words. “But it is safe to say that no other person, of any age, would have been able to accomplish what was asked of you and Navisi. So we have come to show our gratitude.”

“OrkaHaalu and Ashgenarrog showed their gratitude by granting the two of you Kivathryskan and Omnisae. But the Great Spirits have given us permission to show our gratitude a different way.” Methus said. Navisi could hear the smile in his voice.

“And what way would that be?” Azula asked. She sounded wary, but also hopeful.

“We are offering to restore your temple to its former glory, with a few upgrades that we believe will make it even more useful.” Mukaati answered, a wide smile on her face.

Navisi felt her entire body go into shock and it appeared that Azula was stunned too. Denuskya took advantage of the silence. “Before you answer, we would like to share our expectations for this gift. We hope that you will reestablish your order and help restore balance to the world. In particular, I would ask that you help Aang restore the Air Nomads. There is hope that he will spread his seed and create a whole new generation of airbenders. But one teacher, even one as great as Aang, won’t be enough to teach and raise them all. Especially with all of his duties as the Avatar.”

“Li Nu, we are going to share a few details of the multiverse that is not suitable for general knowledge. May we ask that you not divulge the content of this conversation to anyone outside this room, including Avatar Aang himself?” Terrathusi asked. “You are part of Azula and Navisi’s inner circle, so we will give them permission to share their journey with you.”

“Of course, Terrathusi.” Li Nu answered. She looked like she’d rather do anything else than be a part of this situation.

“When the two of you spent time with the waterbender Avatar, you also learned a great deal about airbending and the airbender culture. We would like you to help Aang train air acolytes and any new airbenders that come along. It will also help draw people to your cause if you are seen working closely with the Avatar.” Denuskya explained.

Azula looked deep in thought. Then she nodded. “I accept your offer and I pledge that I will help Aang restore the Air Nomad nation to the best of my abilities.”

“I also pledge to help with the reestablishment of the Air Nomad nation.” Navisi answered as well. Airbenders were needed if true balance was to be restored.

“We had no doubt that you would help. You have both shown yourself to be great friends to both the spirits and the mortal realm. You will both be busy over the next few decades with all that you wish to accomplish, but with intelligent and talented friends like young Li Nu and the other people that you have worked with over the years, we foresee your order accomplishing many great things.” Mukaati said.

“Yes, yes, you will do many great things.” “Like approving a statue of OrkaHaalu.”

“A statue of OrkaHaalu?” Azula asked.

“We will add a few decorations to the site to make it more pleasing to the eye. And we will upgrade the sites on the adjacent mountains as well. Once upon a time there were working farms on the neighboring mountains. Under your tutelage, perhaps there could be again.” Terrathusi said.

Azula gave the two-headed goddess a considering look. “I approve the statue of OrkaHaalu.”

“Then let’s get started!” Methus roared.

“Yes, yes, get started!” “Let the fun begin!”

Chapter Text

Azula became a little concerned as the eyes of all four intermediaries began to glow. The earth trembled beneath their feet and their hair blew in the strong breezed that flowed down through the room. She became even more concerned as fire and water began swirling along the walls, floor and ceiling.

Suddenly she felt herself being pulled into the air; Navisi and Li Nu were rising also. And soon she saw the source of their levitation coming their way. Both of OrkaHaalu were smiling as she came close, a sphere of purple energy surrounding the goddess and her three human companions.

“Much safer inside.” “We’ll keep you warm and dry.”

And Azula and her friends watched in awe as the very shape of the stones were changed throughout the halls that they could see, the fire and water cleaning every surface so that it was pristine and new. The air worked with the stone, etching fine features into the walls and floors and meditation platforms. Holes appeared in the ceiling, allowing air and light to come into the rooms.

Their energy sphere began moving and the small group migrated into the giant hall. Once again, openings had been created in the dome to allow fresh air and light to stream in. The sphere continued moving and they moved into the hall across the way. It was a library!

As with the temple in the Pin Vao mountains, the documents were sealed in waterproof and airtight containers; all of which were being held in an energy sphere much like the one protecting Azula and her companions, but it glowed red instead of the purple for her group. Then she watched as the materials were lowered back onto the cleaned and refurbished floors and wall sconces.

Azula and her compatriots were lowered too. Then the shield lowered and Azula was able to see everything clearly now. It was beautiful. The stone floors and walls were pristine; the grime and dirt and mildew were all gone.

She looked at the hundreds of containers of scrolls and she wanted to weep. There was so much there. And there were still the documents she left in the Pin Vao temple, Ji Ha, and hidden away in the Fire Nation palace. And there were still more libraries hidden away. It was so much.

“This is only the beginning.” “Come let us show you.”

OrkaHaalu led the wide-eyed girls up to the private quarters and kitchen area. Everything was ready to use. There was no furniture, but that could be taken care of easily enough.

“This is but the start.” “More to come if you follow us.”

Azula still hadn’t been able to find her tongue. And what she saw next nearly destroyed her mind.

The room was filled with treasure. Bars of gold sat next to jeweled crowns and numerous other items of extraordinary monetary value. But that wasn’t what really caught Azula’s attention. It was the wall of artifacts that exuded power, much like the chi reservoir that she had found in Ji Ha; but this time there were dozens of items, each occupying its own sconce on the wall.

“The treasure will help restore your order and refurnish your temple.” “The artifacts will help you learn and grow.”

Tears come to Azula’s eyes, and she sees Navisi crying too. “Thank you, you don’t know how much I’ve longed to rebuild my order.”

“You have done so much good.” “You have earned the gratitude of the Great Spirits.”

“Yes, indeed, you have earned the gratitude of the Great Spirits. But come and let us finish the tour.” Denuskya says, floating down the hallway to join them. Then she gives them another smile. “My compatriots are too large and bulky to comfortably join you back here.”

“Of course, Denuskya.” Azula replies, wiping the tears from her eyes. The three humans follow along behind Denuskya and OrkaHaalu as they make their way back to the main entryway. And both Azula and Navisi gasp again.

The entry hall is cleaner and better lit than when they first entered, but it was the other changes that again caused tears to come to their eyes. The statue of Yotforbu was still there, cleaned and refurbished, but it had been slid to the right about twenty feet. And twenty feet to the left of the original statue position was the life-size statue of OrkaHaalu. And, with the same lack of modesty, they wore no clothes, so their three boobs and two yotzus were on full display for all to see.

But it was the center statue that drew the eye. Towering over the other two was Azula as she appeared when channeling the power of Yotforbu, easily fifteen feet tall. Dressed in her Asgard armor, the Amulet of Threnamastu hung around her neck and was nestled in between her four breasts. The Kelestyne Gauntlets were clearly evident on her secondary hands, while she held the Scythe of Ashegenarrog with her two main hands. The statue wore a look of utter resolve and determination, the four eyes glaring ominously into the distance.

She gathered herself and looked around the rest of the room and saw four human sized statues along the wall. And this time she didn’t even try to stop the tears that fell from her eyes as she walked to the first statue. They had captured the likeness and personality of Mistress Corvylyn with uncanny accuracy. It was like they had taken her and simply transformed her to stone.

She looked and saw Navisi weeping in front of another statue. Azula wiped the tears from her eyes and joined her apprentice. She examined the statue as she approached. It was a middle-aged woman in Earth Kingdom attire, looking stern. But then she saw the symbols at the base of the statue. Mistress Lista. Azula hugged Navisi.

“I’m glad that I’m finally able to put a face to the name. I owe her so much for preparing you to be my apprentice.” Azula said softly, holding Navisi.

“She took me in and taught me. She didn’t know as much as you, but she still taught me a lot. And when the Turning came, she sacrificed herself to let me escape.”

“Now she has taken her place in the halls of the Great Temple of the Arts Esoteric. This is where she belonged. The intermediaries told me that she is no longer alive here, but now her memory will persevere.” Azula answered, gazing upon the woman again. She looked sturdy and competent, just like a Mistress should be.

“Is Mistress Corvylyn here?” Navisi asked.

Azula smiled. “Yes, she is. Come and take a look at the woman I called Mistress.” And they both walked back to Mistress Corvylyn’s statue.

“She definitely looks stern.” Navisi said.

“That she was, but she was good to me and gave me just the right balance of discipline and freedom to help me thrive. She was known as the Dragon Tamer for a good reason.” Azula couldn’t help but smile at the stern look the statue presented to the world.

Then Azula noticed that Li Nu was walking around, gazing at one of the other statues. Navisi and Azula joined her. Azula recognized that airbender smirk. It was a wonderful statue of Mistress Sun Klu. She stood strong and tall, looking both wise and playful. Azula thinks that she would have liked Sun Klu.

“I didn’t realize that benders joined the Arts Esoteric.” Li Nu said, as Azula and Navisi came and stood beside her.

“Yes, they used to. Mistress Sun Klu was the last of the Air Nomads that followed the Arts Esoteric teachings. Guru Pathik met her in his youth, and he told me a little bit about her. I think we would have gotten along well.” Azula answered.

Then the three of them walked to the last statue. She was a short and stout woman wearing water tribe clothing. Mistress Pul’a. “She was the Mistress who knew of the artifacts and the documents in the temple at Ji Ha. Apparently, she was something of a hermit and a nomad, so the people who met her didn’t seem to know much about her. But she had met King Bumi, Guru Pathik and Ri, the mayor of Ji Ha during her wanderings.”

“Yes, yes, all great Mistresses of the Arts Esoteric.” “We are proud to bring them here.”

“Thank you so much, OrkaHaalu. And all of you. This is more than I ever dreamed of.” Azula said, bowing to all of the great figures before her. She felt Navisi and Li Nu bowing along with her.

“It is our pleasure to reward you for your great services. But now, we must take our leave. At long last, it is time to say goodbye. You and your order must walk your own path for now. Once again, we will step back and allow the world to turn of its own accord. But remain vigilant, for we may call upon you again should we need your assistance. Be strong, young ones.” Mukaati says, as she and the other intermediaries become transparent and fade away.

“We must go too.” “Our time is also up.”

“We will miss you, OrkaHaalu. Remember us as you find new mortals to torment.” Azula said, causing them to laugh.

“You two are our favorite mortals! Do not forget us! But there is one more thing to share.” “You cannot impregnate a woman with your yotzu in your Yotforbu form, so enjoy yourself when you get the chance.”

The two heads continue laughing as they fade into nothingness and Azula is left in her new temple with her two friends, both of whom seemed a little embarrassed by that last tidbit.

“We need a name for your new temple.” Li Nu said, her voice echoing in the now empty hall.

Azula and Navisi looked at each other. They both sensed it. A calling, almost like a voice.

“Palathia.” They spoke together. And the name felt right.

The three ladies continued to poke around the facility, looking through the common rooms and beginning to think about the function and layout. There was a large gathering room next to the kitchen area and a room that could be used as a study. Wandering up the stairs, the found two more floors with numerous sleeping chambers and two large all-purpose rooms with the same dimensions as the library. There were so many options for what to do.

“We need to get a Distance Printer so that you can keep in contact with the SDC. Everyone is going to want your input.” Li Nu said, eyeing one of the larger sleeping rooms. “But we would need it to be kept somewhat secret even here.”

“It would be useful to have, but you and the SDC have to understand that refounding the Order of the Arts Esoteric is my first priority, with assisting the Avatar rebuilding the Air Nomad culture the next priority. I’ve given enough to our world for now; I need to begin preparing for the future.”

“Of course, Azula. It’s just that Aang, Asitva, and the other leaders are all great people, but none of them inspire the world like you do.” Li Nu responded.

Azula sighed. “Need I remind you that the Fire Nation and the Northern Water Tribe conspired to have me locked away in a hidden castle, and that the Earth King literally called me a whore the last time I saw him. My legend may have grown by my absence, but there is still a lot of fear and animosity towards me.”

“Well, the Earth King is dead and the SDC thinks that you are damn near infallible. Even if you aren’t going to hold everyone’s hands, you can at least share some of your vision with us.”

Azula couldn’t help but chuckle at Li Nu’s optimism. “I will be glad to share my thoughts, opinions and visions. But the Order of the Arts Esoteric is my primary mission.” Azula gave Li Nu a sly look. “Speaking of which, I was serious about creating a branch to focus on the chi engravings and composition. I can’t think of a better candidate than you to be our next member. I bet that there are a lot of new symbols and such to be recovered from the artifacts downstairs.”

Li Nu flushed. “I’m not sure I’m worthy of being in your Order. You and Navisi are so awesome. I’m good at chi composition but I don’t know anything about the spiritual side of things.”

“You’re what, nineteen? You have a lifetime to become more spiritual. But I need good people I can trust to help me rebuild. In addition to your math and engineering abilities, I see a lot of Shur Zi in you. You have grown quite a bit since I left; you have a presence now and people respond well to you.”

Li Nu downright turned bright red. “I’m nothing like Shur Zi. She had such a gift with people.”

“Perhaps you’re not as polished as her yet, but you still have talent. Just think my offer over. And you don’t have to live here full time either, but there will always be room for you.” Azula answered, smiling at Li Nu’s bashfulness. “Which reminds me. We need to gather some of the gold from our treasury and buy furniture. I have no intention of sleeping on cold hard floors for the rest of my life.”

“We are withdrawing from this farce of a negotiation!” Mavong yells, his voice loud with anger. “The Earth Kingdom was the victim of blatant aggression and yet nothing is done to redress these issues! Rather than return what is rightfully ours, you set these peasants loose to build their own little peasant nations!”

It appears that Min Kai had done everything she could to keep Mavong calm, but none of her pleas would sate his anger. The problem was that the Earth Kingdom literally had no bargaining power. But he blustered and bellowed anyway. Pakku did not let his sigh out. This was a bad omen for the future.

“Ambassador Mavong, we understand that you are upset, but yelling is not the solution. The Earth Kingdom is in disarray and none of the regions which have voted so far wish to join your state while it is in flux. We’re sorry the results didn’t go your way, but the people have spoken.” Avatar Aang said, barely keeping his face and voice neutral. He clearly didn’t appreciate Mavong behaving like a child.

“Min Kai! We are leaving! Gather your things!” And Mavong practically ran from the room, leaving a visibly angry and embarrassed Min Kai behind. She turned to the Avatar and bowed.

“Avatar Aang and Ambassador Katara, I wish to apologize for the behavior of Ambassador Mavong. The Earth Kingdom appreciates your service.” She turned towards the general direction of the other ambassadors and bowed again. “May your negotiations continue and bring peace and harmony to your people. I wish all of you luck and good fortune moving forwards.”

She then gathered her papers and briskly walked in the general direction of her fleeing boss. Pakku had a lot of respect for Min Kai; she was on the losing side of this engagement, but she had performed as valiantly and ably as possible to salvage her nation from the terrible position that they were in. But alas, there was nothing to be done.

The mood was somber once she was gone. Things had been going better as of lately, with Rajeen and Lu Ten even interacting in a professional, if not cordial, manner. But the announcement that neither the Northwest Colony nor the Fire Colony would even be putting the option to join the Earth Kingdom on their ballot had pushed Mavong over the edge.

Aang spoke after the silence lasted a few seconds more. “With the Earth Kingdom withdrawing from the negotiations, all of their requests for territory and reparations are hereby removed from consideration. With those issues removed, the status of the Northwest Colony and Fire Colony are the last issues on the docket. Are the delegates from the Fire Nation, Earth Kingdom and Southern Defense Coalition willing to review the provisional document for acceptance?”

“Yes, Avatar.” Came the response from the three remaining delegations. May the peace from this negotiation hold long enough for the votes from the colonies to come in. Pakku very much doubted that the peace would last long after that, no matter how the votes fell.

At long last, Azula decided it was time for more reunions. They sent Omnisae back to Rokishe to inform them that they had indeed found their temple and had received word in return that the provisional agreement between the Fire Nation, SDC and Northern Water Tribe was about to be signed. Azula didn’t want to distract anyone from the negotiations, but she was eager to see her friends now that it was almost done.

They sent Omnisae to Zin Tee to let everyone know that they were coming and that that would arrive late afternoon. They took to the air and began their journey. It was a beautiful day for a flight and Azula was practically vibrating in anticipation of meeting her friends again. And start looking for new furniture for Palathia.

Navisi let her know that the message had been received by Zin Tee. They had made sure that he knew that he could talk to Omnisae and the message would be relayed to Navisi. Azula’s mind wandered to the same types of thoughts she usually had on these flights. How peaceful the land below looks; beautiful mountains and flowing streams and neatly cultivated fields spread out before them. She knew nothing of the individuals who lived here though. Were they content? What were their dreams? Fears?

She would probably never know any of the people she spotted from atop Kiva. That was simply the nature of life. The world was too big to know everyone. All that Azula wanted to do was help people by reestablishing her order and helping the Avatar rebuild the Air Nomads. That was enough for now. She’d sacrificed so much to help everyone else. Now it was time to focus on what she wanted.

Soon enough she spotted the city on the mountainside. Navisi said that everyone was gathered at the airship docks. That seemed to be where everyone thought they should land. They probably didn’t think Kiva was house trained. Azula laughed to herself. Food and excrement were two issues that Azula and Navisi didn’t need to worry about with magical animal companions.

Azula ordered Kiva to drop her camouflage and circle the city a few times to let everyone know that she was coming. It would give Bumi time to get everyone ready for her arrival. The slowly circled down and Kiva gracefully began to decelerate. And Azula’s heart nearly burst with joy when she saw who was waiting for her. Lu Ten and Mai. Ivaku and Hun Ro. Bumi and Toph. Aang and Katara. Rajeen and Sentha.

Kiva landed smoothly and lowered herself to the ground and rumbled contentedly. She wasn’t terribly expressive, but Kiva knew how important this was to Azula. The three women climbed down with ease; Li Nu was getting the hang of this. Azula straightened her robes and smiled as the other two did the same. She had talked Li Nu into joining the order and Azula’s robes fit well enough for now.

They turned and Azula took a breath and used her Mnaimonatic meditation technique to calm herself. She had a reputation to uphold and didn’t want to become a blubbering mess. Then she began walking towards King Bumi, who was at the front of the delegation waiting for them. But Azula couldn’t help but smile as Omnisae descended from the sky and transformed into a panther to walk alongside Navisi.

King Bumi was the first to speak as Azula and the girls approached. “It is great to see you again, Mistress Azula. We have all missed you greatly.”

Azula smiled back. “And I missed all of you terribly. It is great to be back. Sometimes I despaired that I would never return, but at long last I made it.” Azula turned and gestured to Navisi, who stepped forward and bowed. “And it is my great honor to introduce everyone to Disciple Navisi, my traveling companion and fellow practitioner of the Arts Esoteric. I may not have made it without her by my side.”

“It is an honor to meet all of you. Mistress Azula has told me so many wonderful tales of her time with all of you. I can recognize almost all of you just by her descriptions.” Navisi said after she rose from her bow.

“And I’d like to introduce you to the newest person to join my order, Disciple Li Nu.” Azula smiled and then gestured to Omnisae. “And of course, you have already met Navisi’s wonderful traveling companion, Omnisae. But it is also my honor to introduce you to my great companion, Kivathrystan!”

Kiva stood on her back legs and spread her wings to their full span, reared her head back and then unleashed a magnificent plume of bright blue flames into the air. It was quite the impressive sight. Based on the number of open mouths from the people assembled, they would agree.

“Now that introductions have been made, I very much would like to reunite with my friends. I’ve missed you all so much.” Azula said, using every ounce of her discipline to keep from crying. She sees that Ivaku and several others aren’t even trying to hold back their tears.

Lu Ten was the first to rush forward and pull her into a hug. She was so happy that he was whole again. And then she was mobbed by all her friends. She lost track of time as she hugged her friends and family. She saw that even Mai had a few tears in her eyes. It was a magical moment that she wished she could bottle and savor forever.

Ivaku could barely contain her glee. She had to keep her eyes on Azula to make sure she wasn’t an illusion that would disappear as soon as she turned away. Azula was really back, with an apprentice and a dragon. And it even looked like she talked Li Nu into joining the Arts Esoteric. Ivaku couldn’t help but be happy for Azula.

She saw Li Nu, Hun Ro and Navisi talking and decided to join them. Everyone gave her a big smile as she approached. Navisi was the first to speak. “You must be Ivaku. Azula has told me so much about you. She always told me that you would do great things, and now you’re a Master Healer, an ambassador and apparently a Hun Ro wrangler.”

“I can see how you survived traveling with Azula. You are witty as well as talented. Zin Tee told us all the tales of your astounding golden lights.” Ivaku responded, laughing at Navisi’s good natured smile.

“My specialty is different than Mistress Azula’s, but we are both pushing each other to be better. I will be giving a small demonstration in a few minutes; Mistress Azula would like to address the group about a few topics once everyone has been properly greeted.”

“I know that I look forward to seeing what you can do!” Hun Ro practically shouted, causing all the girls to giggle. “And I can’t wait to hear what Azula has to say. It’s got to be awesome!”

“I don’t know that I’d call it awesome, but it is something that needs to be said.” Navisi answered cryptically.

“I see that you have the same love of mystery that Azula has.” Ivaku joked. But she didn’t miss the look that Li Nu and Navisi shared.

“Well, I know that you two are part of the Azulinati, but it’s not my place to share Mistress Azula’s secrets. She will explain everything in short order.” Navisi gave them a big smile. “But I’m so glad to meet all of you. You don’t know how much Azula’s stories about her friends and family gave me strength during the toughest parts of our journey.”

It was said with such sincerity that Ivaku couldn’t help but smile back. She saw Li Nu and Hun Ro doing the same. “May I ask how you met Azula? It’s wonderful that you’re here, but won’t you miss your people?”

The smile disappeared from Navisi’s face. “I’m sorry, but that is something we can’t discuss. Azula will explain.”

Any follow up questions Ivaku might have had were dismissed as Azula herself approached the group, Mai and Toph by her side. “I’m glad to see that my apprentice is being welcomed. But it is time for a general announcement. Navisi, if you would do the honors.”

“Of course, Mistress.” And Ivaku took a step back as rings of golden light appeared around Navisi’s arms; the rings moved and twirled and appeared to be made of little symbols. Ivaku had to suppress a gasp as ring with a complex geometric light pattern formed on the floor about four feet in front of Azula; it was about three feet across. Azula proceeded to go and stand on the ring and turned to face the watching crowed.

The crowd watched in silence as the glowing ring proceeded to float about four feet above the surface of the floor, elevating Azula’s head above everyone else’s. Even Hun Ro’s. Everyone watched with rapt attention as she started to speak, her voice strong and clear.

“It is wonderful to be reunited with all of you. It has been a long and arduous journey back to you, and I know that all of you are curious about where I went and what I did. But I’m afraid that I cannot disclose that information beyond what I’ve already shared in the past. Navisi and I, along with Li Nu to a lesser effect, have been asked not to share the details of our trip with the world at large by the intermediaries of the Great Spirits themselves.”

“What I can say is that I have learned and grown a lot on my journey, and I am so grateful to have the opportunity to gain a wonderful apprentice and our magical companions. Now that I am back, I intend to build the Order of the Arts Esoteric into a sect that will positively influence the world. And I have been asked by the intermediaries to help Aang reestablish the Air Nomads. I cannot say how we attained this knowledge, but Navisi and I have studied the ways of the Air Nomads and we are qualified to help teach young airbenders about their people and culture.”

Ivaku saw Aang’s jaw drop at this news. Frankly, most everyone looked shocked. “With the aid of Li Nu, Navisi discovered the ancient temple of the Arts Esoteric and it will be the base of operation for the reestablishment of my order. There are several people that I am interested in recruiting to join the ranks of my order, but I will approach them individually to plead my case.”

“While I cannot share the details of my journey, I would invite all of you to come and visit our new temple. Just not yet; we still need to buy furniture.” Azula smiled at that last part. “But with that said, Navisi can lower me to the ground and we can again mingle and celebrate!”

Azula was duly lowered to the floor and she stepped forward and began talking to her long lost friends again. Toph decided to interrogate Navisi, probably thinking that she was an easier target. “It sounds like you and Mistress Deathblades had a pretty wild adventure. Are you sure that you can’t share anything with us?”

“Perhaps sometime in the future, but the intermediaries were very adamant about us not sharing certain types of details. Frankly, we’re not sure why and the intermediaries never gave an explanation. But what I can say is that it is good to be here amongst people that love Azula so much. The thought of coming back to see all of you was her primary motivation during our toughest times.” Navisi answered, a small smile on her face.

“Well, you seem like a great kid and we’re glad to have you here too. And your magic parrot-bat is pretty awesome.” Toph said, punching Navisi on the shoulder.

“Thanks, Toph, I appreciate that.” Navisi answered, her hand glowing with a golden light. The resulting shoulder punch sent Toph skidding sideways about twenty feet; she apparently used earthbending to stay upright. “You seem like a great kid too.”

Toph’s loud laughter echoed throughout the hall. Ivaku couldn’t help but smile at their antics; she should have known that Azula wouldn’t take on a wilting flower as an apprentice.

Chapter Text

Aang was excited to see Azula back, especially with an apprentice and her cool magical companions. She had been coy about where she got them and exactly what she meant by magical. But he had been really excited when she said that she had knowledge of airbending teachings. And now she wanted to speak with him about it!

Azula had suggested they meet just before lunch and Aang had readily agreed. She recommended that he include anyone who’s judgement he trusted to be involved in the discussion; she said she wasn’t coming with a solid plan but rather with a host of possibilities with room to discuss and adapt.

Aang had asked Katara and Bumi to join him, while Azula had invited Navisi and Li Nu. He didn’t know the whole story, but according to Azula’s speech last night, Li Nu had helped find the Arts Esoteric temple. Azula really attracted talented people. The Azulinati is truly a force to be reckoned with.

“It seems that you have done well for yourself, Avatar. Your reputation as a diplomat and negotiator is quite positive from what I hear.” Azula said, smiling at Aang. “But I think that it is time to start thinking about how to rebuild the Air Nomads.”

“I have thought about it. But there is always so much to do.” Aang protested, feeling a little attacked.

“I fully understand, which is probably why the intermediaries requested that Navisi and I help you. As I mentioned during my speech yesterday, we have become quite knowledgeable about the basics of airbending and the practices of the Air Nomads. Not as much as you, of course, but enough that we could help train acolytes and young airbenders.” Azula answered.

“Well, there are people claiming to be air acolytes. But they didn’t know as much as they thought they did. Some of them gave themselves actual airbending tattoos without being airbenders.” And Aang was a bit relieved at the shocked looks on the faces of Azula and Navisi.

“That is indeed quite ignorant of them.” Navisi answered, shaking her head.

“At the risk of sounding ignorant myself, may I ask why that is so bad?” Li Nu questioned in a quiet voice.

“To the Air Nomads, you earn tattoos by being recognized as a master airbender. It is a long and difficult journey that requires years of sacrifice and training. To receive tattoos without being an airbender, much less an airbending master, is something of an insult to the culture and traditions of the Air Nomads.” Navisi said, putting a hand of Li Nu’s. “And as Mistress Azula likes to say, it is always acceptable to ask a question in the true hopes of gaining knowledge and wisdom. Had the air acolytes asked these questions of the Avatar beforehand, his answer would have resulted in this issue being avoided.”

“That is very true, Li Nu. I’m not offended by questions about my culture, but I am a little offended by people trying to take from it without understanding the implications.”

“And that is where we can help. Our new temple is something of a miniature air temple. We could help the acolytes get used to communal living and prepare them for the duties that will be required when living at an air temple.” Azula’s smile widened and Aang instinctively smiled too. “Which leads us to our second point. We strongly believe that there are still wild herds of air bison remaining, and we would like to begin searching for them.”

“What! I mean, I hope so, but what makes you think that?” Aang asked, flabbergasted.

He saw the look that Azula and Navisi shared. Azula was the one to answer. “All that we are allowed to say is that we had the opportunity to study with an airbending master and his small community of acolytes. Our training isn’t as thorough as yours, but they knew of wild air bison herds and we believe that there are some here. With Omnisae, we can search huge swathes of land quickly in hopes of finding the wild herds.”

“It might take weeks or even months of searching, but we are willing to look in order to find them.” Navisi chimed in.

“That’s great. Finding air bison is great, but there’s only one airbender and I already have an air bison.” Aang said, feeling a little forlorn at the thought.

“And that is a good segue into our last topic. You need to begin fathering children to repopulate the Air Nomad people.” Azula said, her bluntness catching Aang offguard.

“But I’m well, it’s not that…but I’m not...” Aang couldn’t find the words.

“There are two ways of going about this. I’ve only been back a short time, so I hope that I’m not being indelicate by asking this question, but are the two of you,” Azula pointed between Aang and Katara, “in a committed long term romantic relationship? Or at the very least moving towards one?”

Aang’s face turned even redder than it had been, and he saw that Katara’s face was flushed too. This was a touchy subject. They were fond of each other, but things never seemed to work when it became romantic. They worked together fine and were great friends, but that spark seemed to be missing when their relationship became more intimate in nature.

“I see. So the answer is no.” Azula said, causing Aang and Katara to begin spluttering again. “You’re seventeen and fifteen, so no one is expecting you to be in a long-term monogamous relationship yet. But, in my opinion, the second option is preferred anyway. We need to set up a protocol for you to impregnate as many carefully selected women as feasible to repopulate your people.”

Aang felt like his head was going to explode. How can she just say these things out loud like this? “Think of this logically, Avatar. If a catastrophe happens and you pass without offspring, it may well mean that your culture dies with you. What I propose is that Navisi and I screen nonbending women with airbending chi affinities to be your partners. I propose six to ten women over the next two years. I’m pretty sure that you could handle that.” Azula said with a wink.

Aang was speechless. But King Bumi chimed in while Aang was trying to reattach his soul to his body. “What do you mean by airbending chi affinities?”

“Every nonbender has an affinity for a bending type, even though it didn’t manifest. For instance, I have a firebending affinity and Navisi has an earthbending affinity. Fire Lady Yue has a waterbending affinity while Ty Lee has an airbending affinity.” Azula explained. Then she tapped her jevalda. “With these jevalda, our chi attunement is refined enough of to determine a nonbender’s affinity at a glance.”

“You want him to get Ty Lee pregnant?” Katara all but screeched.

“That is between the Avatar and Ty Lee, although she would be a strong candidate. But I propose that Navisi and I scout the nonbending populations of the SDC; the city of Rokishe has a large number of nonbenders with airbending affinities, including several Successor candidates. We would compile a list, but the uhm, interaction, would have to be mutually agreed upon by the two parties. We are willing to act as intermediaries during negotiations.” Azula explained.

“But by selecting candidates with airbending affinities, the likelihood of getting an airbender offspring is significantly higher than other combinations. And we are willing to train and educate any children produced by this arrangement, whether airbender, nonbender or any other bender variety.” Navisi added.

“And of course, if you don’t like natural insemination, there are artificial insemination methods that have been used in the breeding of komodo-rhinos for centuries. It might take a little practice to perfect the technique for people, but I’m sure it can be done. All we need is a skilled waterbender.” Azula looked to Katara, who looked like she was ready to burst.

“How can you say all this with a straight face?!” Aang all but shouted, nearly dying of embarrassment.

Azula sighed. “Because Aang, the intermediaries are concerned about the future of your culture. I wish there were a thousand airbenders that could repopulate your people naturally. But there isn’t. There is only you. And I don’t want to see airbending lost. I was able to teach Ivaku and Katara waterbending from scrolls, but there are techniques and practices that only bending masters, such as yourself, know. I don’t want that lost. I hope that you live to be two hundred years old. I hope that you find someone special that you want to raise a family with, whether it be Katara or someone else. But all it takes is an accident or an illness or an unlucky arrow in a battle to end the last airbender.”

“We both know that she’s not the first to recommend this plan, Aang.” Bumi said, looking solemn and regal for once. “But it sounds like they have a plan for improving the likelihood of each pregnancy resulting in a new airbender. You don’t have to decide now, but it is something that you should consider.”

“I’ll think about, guys. But it seems wrong to do it this way.” Aang answered. He felt uncomfortable with this discussion.

“That’s all that I ask of you, Avatar. I already have a list of eight women, including Ty Lee, that I believe are good matches. They are young, intelligent, talented and healthy. I doubt every woman that we approach would say yes, but I’m sure that some would.” Azula spoke more softly than she usually did, no bluster or humor in her voice at all. “But in many ways, this is another Avatar task, a way for you to help bring balance back to the world.”

“But no matter what you decide, Avatar, we’ll help you with the air acolytes and the air bison.” Navisi said in a gentle voice. “We will support you no matter what decision you make.”

“Thanks, guys. I know that you’re just trying to look out for me. But this is kind of an uncomfortable subject.” Aang replied, not able to look them in the eye.

“But it is a subject to be discussed, nonetheless. And once we get furniture, you’re welcome to stay at Palathia during your down times, especially if you are able to convince the air acolytes to stay with us for training.” Azula offered. That was a nice gesture.

“Thank you for the invitation; I know that I’d really love to see your temple.” Aang really did want to see Palathia. It sounded like a really cool place.

Mai sat by Lu Ten at the signing ceremony. Everyone had wanted to postpone the signing with Azula’s arrival, but she adamantly rejected the idea, saying that she had not come to disturb the proceedings. Mai was absolutely ecstatic to see Azula back. She loved Azula like a sister and was glad that she was safe at home. And she was glad to see that she had a viable plan to build up the Order of the Arts Esoteric. While not a member, her training with Mistress Corvylyn made her appreciate all the benefits that the order could bring to the world. And Azula was even going to help reestablish the Air Nomads in her spare time. No one can say that girl was unmotivated.

But Mai’s thoughts on the results of the negotiations were not so positive. The loss of Alokhai had been expected but the succession of the southern islands had been a shock to the pride and stability of the Fire Nation. They had rechristened themselves the Freedom Islands. And the Northwest Colony was undoubtedly lost to them. With none of the goodwill that Azula’s plan would have provided.

But it was the fate of the Fire Colony that was up in the air. It might stay with the Fire Nation, secede as a whole, or secede and split into two or more nations. But Zuko was going to be livid and his already weakened position may become untenable. The invasion of the Central Earth Kingdom had indeed been Zuko’s Folly.

She feared for the people of her nation. And the people of the Earth Kingdom. The Fire Nation had destroyed the precarious peace and stability that the Earth Kingdom had found. The Central Earth Kingdom had announced its independence and a civil war was in the offing.

It’s amazing how one decision three years ago switched the course of the Fire Nation and the world. Had Zuko bought into Azula’s vision for the Northwest Territory, it would have maintained good economic relations with the Fire Nation. The Fire Nation wouldn’t have seen its iron and coal production plummet to levels that threatened national security. The Earth Kingdom invasion wouldn’t have been necessary in order to seek additional iron and coal resources. The Central Earth Kingdom would have signed the deal to form a confederation with the Earth Kingdom. Alokhai and the southern islands would still be in the Fire Nation.

Zuko had proven adept in nearly every other aspect of being a Fire Lord. But his refusal to see the light regarding the Northwest Territory had brought the Fire Nation to near ruin. Because of this, one hundred years of territorial gains could potentially be entirely erased three years into Zuko’s reign. Mai no longer coveted the position of Fire Lady; Yue can keep that job. Mai will always love Zuko with a little bit of her heart, but she didn’t want her name attached to the trainwreck that Zuko’s reign had become.

Mai was pulled from her musings by the Avatar. “It has been my honor to preside over these negotiations. All the remaining parties have agreed to the accords, so now the time has come for the official signing of the agreements. Crown Prince Lu Ten, if you are in agreement with the accords, please sign your name on behalf of the Fire Nation.”

Lu Ten took the document and signed where he had been shown. It was a bitter pill for the Fire Nation, but it was done. All that remained was to make the best of the situation.

“Master Pakku, as the representative for the Northern Water Tribe, please sign the document if your government is in agreement.” Pakku took the documents and quickly signed them. Mai was glad to see that the Northern Water Tribe had accepted responsibility for their actions. She wished the Fire Nation had shown that kind of maturity.

And lastly, Aang turned to the SDC. “Successor Rajeen, if you are in agreement with the accords, please sign on behalf of the SDC.” Rajeen quickly signed. And like that, the agreement was in place. The pit in Mai’s stomach loosened a little. At least a restart of the war was unlikely.

The Fire Nation delegates stood and began making their way to the door when Mai heard someone call out to Lu Ten. “Crown Prince, do you have a moment?”

And to Mai’s slight horror, it was Successor Rajeen. They all turned to see her approaching the Fire Nation group with Ivaku walking beside her.

“Yes, Successor?” Lu Ten answered. Not warmly, but at least politely.

“I just wanted to say that although our negotiations became heated, I hope that our nations will be able to work together going forward. It will be for the betterment of the world if our people have amicable relations.” Rajeen said.

Lu Ten paused. “I hope so too, Successor. But the deal signed today will make that very difficult. I wish you and your people success.” And with that Lu Ten turned and walked out.

It could have been worse, Mai thought to herself. But it could have been better too.

“She is a threat and she has to be dealt with. Not only has she returned with her unnatural abilities, but she’s brought another abomination along with her. Not to mention the evil incarnations that serve them.” Ursa all but shouted.

Master Pakku’s head hurt. Ursa had called an emergency meeting of the White Lotus as soon as news arrived that Azula was on her way to Omashu. Eight members had been able to make it. At the last meeting, Ursa and Piandao persuaded the White Lotus to attack and attempt to incarcerate Azula. The result had been the Night of the Wilting Lotus. After that debacle, it would be a much tougher sell.

“Ursa, you ignorant fool, I despise everything that you stand for. Azula was the most progressive beacon of hope this world had before the arrival of the Avatar. Had your nation listened to her, the world would undoubtedly be better off. You went behind my back the first time you challenged her. It will not happen again so long as I’m alive.” King Bumi shouted, his wild eyes full of anger. Everyone flinched; an angry Bumi was a terrifying thing to behold. Age had begun to take its toll, but he was still a mighty titan.

“Bumi is entirely right. The White Lotus foolishly went after Azula based on your fearmongering, to the detriment of our order and the world. Not only am I voting against this, but I will also actively fight against any move made by the White Lotus to threaten her.” Pakku stated. He wasn’t angry like Bumi, but he was thoroughly convinced that it was a foolish move that would further sink the world into chaos.

“They are right, Ursa. The time has passed. Azula is too powerful for the White Lotus to challenge, even if we were all in agreement, which is not the case. The past three years have shown that Azula was indeed a positive influence on the world.” Piandao stated, looking down. Pakku knew that Piandao still feared Azula.

They were all wise to fear Azula. She had humbled them three years ago as a fourteen-year-old girl. But now, she appeared even stronger, not even counting the powerful apprentice and magical creatures that walked by her side. La only knows what she would unleash on the White Lotus if they were foolish enough to try and take her on again.

“She, and her apprentice, are too dangerous to be allowed to continue the vile teachings of her order. They have a temple now! It is only a matter of time before she turns against the entire world.” Ursa continues arguing, not accepting that everyone in the group has turned against her.

“This discussion is over, Ursa. Take your ignorant superstitions and go pander them somewhere else. We will not listen to your babbling any longer.” Bumi said, ice in his voice. “Now get out.”

Ursa looked around the table, but there was no support. They were all of the same mind on this. Once had been foolish. A second attack on Azula would be disastrous.

Ivaku was relieved that the negotiations were over. Tonight, there was going to be a party to celebrate both the signing of the peace treaty and the triumphant return of Azula. Both things were great for the world. She had no doubt that internal strife was coming to the Earth Kingdom, and probably the Fire Nation too. But the SDC was setting the stage for people to establish the order that they wanted, not just the one imposed on them by force.

“Are you ready, WaterBear? It is time to party!” Hun Ro all but shouted, causing Ivaku to giggle. He really was a sweet, loveable goofball. She gave him a hug.

“Yes, I’m ready. Let’s go celebrate all the great things that have been happening.” Ivaku answered, taking his giant right hand with both of hers, dragging him towards the door. “Don’t be such a slowpoke.”

They chatted about random things as they made their way to the dining hall, stopping to greet and talk to some of the other dignitaries and acquaintances as they made their way. One didn’t simply walk through Omashu with Hun Ro; he was popular, and his amiable ways meant that he was willing to talk to nearly anyone at any time.

But eventually, they made their way to the dining hall, where the mixing was already in full swing. They approached Toph and Navisi’s group first. Those two were thick as thieves ever since Azula’s return. They were talking with Sentha and Zin Tee.

“Hun Ro! Ivaku! It is great to see both of you here.” Sentha said, displaying her seemingly two hundred teeth in a wide smile. “This is a great day.”

“Indeed it is. With the help of the SDC, both of our people have been allowed to choose their own way.” Zin Tee said, giving everyone a broad smile.

“We’re happy that things worked out to the satisfaction of your people. If the wishes of the people in more regions had been taken into account, the actions that led us to this situation wouldn’t have happened.” Hun Ro said, with a muted smile.

“These are all true things. But let’s not talk politics, let’s learn about the wonderful young woman who came back with Azula.” Sentha turned her attention to Navisi, who gave a wide smile back. “You have a tall order to fill walking beside Mistress Azula. The first time she came to Kyoshi Island, she stopped an assassin and then terrified the rest of the Southern Water Tribe delegation.” Sentha’s laugh boomed through the room. “It was a glorious time.”

“Mistress Azula told me that tale. I’ve been keeping an eye out for suspicious behavior, but so far no one is biting. I may just have to beat the stuffing out of Toph to grab attention.” Navisi responded, giving Toph a not so gently punch to the shoulder.

“Dream on, Lightshow, you aren’t ready for the likes of me. I’d beat your weak ass into the dirt.” Toph punctuated her point by smacking her fist into her palm.

“Your both undoubtedly fine warriors, but let’s not have a rumble in the middle of the dining hall; King Bumi would want to join in and he’s too old to play with powerhouses like you two.” Hun Ro said, laughing.

Everyone settled down and eventually the group split up to mingle with the other guests. Ivaku happily flitted from group to group, chatting easily with everyone. While not as cheery and outgoing as Hun Ro, she had built a fine career for herself as a healer and negotiator, and her people skills had grown to meet those needs. The only people that Ivaku refused to mingle with were the delegates from the Northern Water Tribe. As Azula would say, they could lick her asshole if they thought she wanted anything to do with them.

Eventually, she was able to join a group with Azula herself. She was talking with Lu Ten, Horzun, Li Nu and Katara. Azula gave her a wide smile as she walked up to the group and stood by Li Nu. Horzun was the one talking.

“It worked much as you said it would! The financing plan allowed for much quicker consumer buy in than would normally be expected. It has truly been a boon!” Horzun’s excited voice showed just how great this boon was.

“That’s wonderful, Horzun. I always knew that you were a brilliant and forward-thinking person. I look forward to discussing what else you’ve done. But maybe I could ask your input? Do you know any good furniture makers? I’m looking to furnish Palathia and I was hoping to get a few pieces in the Fire Nation style for my own use.” Azula was clearly trying to save the rest of the group from the economics talk.

“Well, Zinya handles all of the major purchases. She says I’m great at making and transferring money, but not so great at selecting fashionable styles. But I can give you the name of the furniture maker in Kantou that made our furnishings. It is quite well done. They also make the furnishings for the governor’s mansion, if I’m not mistaken.” Hurzon answered.

“Are you referring to Master Jilnor?” Lu Ten asked, getting a headnod from Horzun. “He is renowned for his skill and fine craftmanship.” Lu Ten said, smiling at Azula.

“Perhaps I’ll make my way up there after I visit Kyoshi Island. I’ve already put feelers out to Lenth and Savan for much of the other furniture, but I’d like to have a few Fire Nation pieces, and perhaps a few water tribe pieces, to round out the aesthetic.” Azula responded with a smile.

“We were going to stop there also as we make our way back to the Southern Water Tribe. When were you planning on going?” Katara asked.

“I just got word that Izuka had docked there and would be on the island for a few days. So I was hoping to leave tomorrow morning.” Azula smiled as she spoke. “We were just becoming like real sisters when I left, and I’d like to rekindle our relationship.”

“That’s wonderful, Azula. I know that she’ll be happy to see you. And I’m sorry about her situation.” Lu Ten said, frowning.

“Yet another reason I won’t be rekindling my relationship with Zuko anytime soon. Although I do miss Yue and I’d like to meet my niece. Perhaps someday.” Azula was wearing a frown of her own.

Suddenly, Azula’s smile widened to the point where it looked like it might break her face in half. Ivaku turned and saw Hun Ro smiling down at her. She instinctively smiled back. But she sensed that something was off. He seemed nervous.

Her nervousness began to grow as he took her hand and pulled her away from the group. She looked up at him as he took her both of her hands in his. Then she felt the tears come to her eyes as he released her hands, stepped back and dropped to one knee. He was still nearly as tall as her.

“Ivaku, ever since I met you, you’ve been someone special and dear to my heart. And I can’t imagine my life without you.” He opened the box to show a beautiful silver necklace with a large blue sapphire as its centerpiece. “Ivaku, will you marry me?”

Tears flooded her eyes and streamed down her face. “Yes!” She shouted, jumping into Hun Ro’s arms as the crowd cheered and clapped. When they finally released their embrace, they both were swarmed with well-wishers. This was the happiest day of her life.

Chapter Text

Izuka smiled as she watched Navisi running down the beach and into the water with the Kyoshi Warrior girls. She smiled even more to see the look of contentment on Azula’s face as she watched her young apprentice frolicking and splashing.

It had been a great reunion. She had been afraid to believe that it was really Azula until she lowered herself down from Appa’s saddle with her magic tentacles. And Izuka had been ecstatic to see that Azula had been happy to see her as well. She had wanted to believe that they were becoming like real sisters before Azula disappeared, but it was nice to know that Azula felt that way too.

And she had returned with an apprentice and magic creatures. They had heard the rumors but seeing is definitely believing. And she couldn’t help but notice the scars that both mistress and apprentice sported. A significant scar marked Azula’s face and many more crisscrossed her body. Her apprentice’s face was unmarred, but her body looked to have been quite a few scars as well. Yet, it sure didn’t stop them from wearing revealing swimwear. Navisi’s body was starting to develop but Azula was muscular and fit while still being feminine.

“Are you ever going to tell us how the great battle went? I assumed that you won?” Izuka asked, now that they were alone and away from prying ears.

“Yes, we won. But it was a costly battle in a costly war. The intermediaries to the Great Spirits don’t want us to tell much of the journey home after that though. Just that it was long and arduous. But it was worth it in the end.”

“Is there a reason why they don’t want you to share your travels?” Izuka felt like she was prying, but curiosity was getting the best of her.

“I’m not sure. During the great war, numerous people from different worlds came together and no care was given to cross-contamination of the worlds. There were multiples of many people there. But even though I don’t understand exactly why they requested us not to share very much, I will comply.”

“I can’t say that I’m not curious, but I won’t try to pry your secrets from you.” Izuka smiled at her. “I’m just glad to have my sister back. Our other sibling is an asshole.”

Izuka grinned as Azula burst out laughing. “I’m glad to be back with my sister too. And I agree with your assessment. Our brother is an asshole.”

Both their smiles dimmed a bit as they saw Katara walking down the beach, a slight frown on her face. Izuka didn’t really know Katara and Aang, but she had heard through the grapevine that she and Aang were an item. But only sometimes. The rumors were vague.

But apparently Azula had approached Aang about going forth and spreading his airbender seed far and wide, and recommended Ty Lee as a suitable candidate. Well, that seemed to convince Aang to ask Azula to consult Ty Lee about the situation. And to the shock of everyone, Ty Lee immediately agreed to the proposition. The look of terror and anticipation on Aang’s face was a sight to behold; Ty Lee was a very bendy girl.

That had been three nights ago, and the procreation efforts were ongoing, with no definitive end date in sight. As much as Katara seemed to agree with the theory of refounding the airbenders, she didn’t seem keen on the practical application of said refounding.

Azula sighed and waved Katara over. Katara also didn’t seem keen on talking to the initiator of said refounding effort, but she was gracious enough to come over anyways.

“Hey, Katara. Better enjoy the warm weather now before you return to the frozen icebox of your people.” Azula said as way of greeting.

“Hey, guys. Yeah, it’s nice to be warm. But I do miss my people. I’ve been away longer than expected.” Katara said, taking a seat next to Azula.

“Well, you know, magic dragons fly pretty fast. I’ve been meaning to send Navisi out to meet more people, and this might be a good opportunity for both of you.” Azula said, smiling at Katara. “She can be introduced to new people by you, and you can lord it over your frozen friends that you have ridden a dragon and they haven’t.”

“Uhm, well, I would like to go home, but I’m not sure dragonback is the way I envisioned getting there.”

“You can take a test flight if you like. Being magic, Kiva can adjust to her ridge pattern to your preferences. And it would really help Navisi out. I’d like her to get out and start interacting with people independently of me. She needs to show everyone that she’s her own person.”

Katara seemed to be thinking the offer over. “You would let her take your dragon?”

“Of course. I trust Navisi with my life. She has proven herself to me many times over. I estimate that it would take less than three hours.”

Katara’s eyes opened wide. “That fast? It takes Appa nearly twice that long!”

“Kiva is more aerodynamic and she doesn’t get tired. And with Navisi creating chi shields to protect you from the wind, it is actually a comfortable ride.” Azula answered. “And she was hoping to study your healing methods with the skills of our order. She is a talented healer in her own right, and we both believe that our techniques might be able to improve the effectiveness of your healing methods.”

Katara seemed to be considering. She looked downcast for a moment. “Well, I don’t want to abandon Aang. Although, it seems he might be busy for a while. And I would like to learn about Navisi’s healing methods also.”

“I can make arrangements for you to say goodbye. And you would be helping Navisi and me out.”

After a few more moments of brooding, Katara relented. “Arriving by dragonback would be pretty cool.”

“Trust me, everyone will be envious. But I do recommend either using the Distance Printer or Omnisae to warn them of your arrival. Announced dragon drop-ins might cause a panic.” Azula said with a smile.

All three girls laughed. “Yeah, I can imagine. You don’t want to visit? You were so instrumental in helping rebuild our tribe. I thought that you might want to see it.”

“I promise that I will come see it. But I would like to visit with my sister for a while longer. And like I said, I want Navisi to start building a presence of her own. She is my apprentice, but she will be a full-fledged mistress in short order.”

They all turned to watch the young girl building sandcastles with her new friends. “She does seem talented and capable. Of course, after having awesome students like me and Ivaku, you would have to have a super talented apprentice to keep pace.” Katara said with a smirk.

“Please, I learned from my failures and wanted to make sure this student actually panned out.” Azula snarked back. And barely dodged the water bent her way. The two sisters ran into the water, fleeing the chasing waterbender. They splashed and giggled and soon were playing water games with the younger girls.

Navisi enjoyed flying on Kiva. They were about halfway to the Southern Water Tribe and making great time. The chi shield she put up protected them from the ever-cooler winds. She looked back to see how Katara was doing.

She had a big smile on her face as she watched the ground rapidly moving below them. No other mode of travel compares with a magic dragon. But Navisi could tell that Katara’s aura wasn’t as mellow as her smile made her appear. She wasn’t as good as Azula or Ty Lee at reading auras, but she’s been getting better.

Katara had said goodbye to Aang after Azula had made sure that the boy was showered and presentable. It was clear that the two were fond of each other, but it seemed like they had a hard time finding that balance between friendship and romance. Navisi had not yet had any romantic feelings towards anyone, but she knew enough to know that these things were touchy and not always logic driven.

Azula had given her permission to tell the bare bones of a few select aspects of their travels with Katara. She decided that now would be a good time to initiate the conversation.

“It’s a thrill being this high and going this fast. It gives me a rush every time.” Navisi said, turning around in her seat. She clacked her heels on Kiva’s scales and two additional footrests appeared. Magic dragons are awesome.

“Yeah, it is exhilarating. I can see why you like this.” Katara responded, giving Navisi a more or less honest smile.

“Yeah, but this is also a great place to have a private conversation. There are a few things that Azula and I think you should know.”

Katara’s face went still, her smile looking more like a grimace. “What sort of things?” She finally asked.

“Why we are pushing Aang to refound the airbenders so quickly. What I’m about to tell you is for your ears only. We will tell Aang if necessary, but it is better if he does things of his own accord.”

Katara was looking quite worried. “I don’t think it’s right to withhold things from Aang.”

Navisi put up her hands in a placating manner. “We’re not withholding things out of spite or to try and manipulate him. Quite the opposite, actually. We want him to make choices because he agrees with them, not because we frightened him into it.”

“Then why are you telling me?”

“Because you’re close to Aang, and we appreciate that your relationship is complicated. We aren’t trying to undermine the two of you. But we want you to understand where we’re coming from.”

“And where are you coming from?” Katara gave her a serious look. “You’re what, twelve? What do you know of relationships?”

“I know very little. But what I’m about to share isn’t about relationships; it’s about consequences.” Katara didn’t speak, so Navisi took that as permission to speak. “Has Aang told you about Azula’s visions?”

Katara’s eyes opened wide. “No, he hasn’t.”

“That’s a good thing, because Azula asked him not to. But months before she disappeared, she encountered an artifact that caused her to have visions of what her life could have been had she been born a firebender.”

Katara’s eyes looked like they were going to pop out of her head. “What did she see?”

“Nothing but terrible things befell her in every vision she saw. They were visions of potential futures in what is called the multiverse. Other worlds like yours, but something is different. Azula was born a firebender. Maybe you and Sokka didn’t find Aang. There are many different worlds based on these differences.”

“I was born in different multiversal world than yours. One where Aang died before he could have children. The Air Nomad culture had no one to reestablish it.”

Katara put her hand over her mouth. Navisi kept talking. “Azula and I traveled to four different multiverses together before we came here. Including mine, Aang died in two of them before he had children.”

Two tears fell down Katara’s face. “The circumstances were different in both worlds. Being the Avatar is a dangerous job, and sometimes bad things just happen. And this is why we fear for the Air Nomad culture of this world. There was nothing for us to do in those worlds. But we can try and make sure that his culture can continue here. With airbenders to work with, Azula and I could pass on enough of the culture for it to restart. We don’t see any of the threats to Aang in this world like the ones he faced in the worlds where he died, but like Azula said at our meeting, all it takes is a bad break.”

“What happened on those worlds after Aang died?” Katara asked softly.

“My world became a hellscape and the world was engulfed in chaos. We don’t know what happened in the other world. We did what we could to help stabilize the situations, but we were only so much that for us to do. But do you understand why we are worried? Those worlds will keep spinning. But they’ve lost something that they may not be able to regain. Maybe our worldview is skewed because nearly every world we visited was in terrible shape. But we don’t want that to happen here.”

Katara sat quietly, wiping away the tears from her eyes. Navisi let her sit with her thoughts. There was a lot to unpack and process. Finally, Katara spoke. “Thank you for sharing this with me. It does help put things in perspective. I guess that I will have to cut him free.”

“We’re not saying that you have to do that. But he needs to rebuild the airbender population faster than any one woman alone could do. Maybe we are paranoid, but we’ve seen truly horrible things that can happen. We will fight to our dying breath to prevent anything like that from happening here. But there are no certainties in life.”

“I understand your motivations better now. You’ve given me a lot to think about. I can see why Azula took you on as an apprentice. You definitely have better people skills than her.”

They both laughed. The remaining ride was quiet as they both stewed in their thoughts.

Hakoda watched as Katara and the young woman approached the gathered crowd. Azula had done so much for the Southern Water Tribe that he decided giving her apprentice a warm welcome was the least that he could do in return. Although, he was going to have to chide Katara; the girl was wearing nothing but a black robe with gold trim. That was fine for the rest of the SDC, but the poor girl would freeze here. But that could wait. He had to greet his visitor properly first.

Katara and the young girl stopped in front of the group. Hakoda’s daughter gestured to her companion and began speaking in a loud voice. “Please allow me to introduce Disciple Navisi of the Arts Esoteric, apprentice to Mistress Azula.” Navisi gave a polite bow.

“Welcome to Agim Ok’an, capital city of the Southern Water Tribe. It is a pleasure to have an associate of Mistress Azula come to visit.” Hakoda responded with a bow of his own.

“Thank you for your warm welcome, Chief Hakoda. And it is a pleasure to see you again, Yinqu. It is an honor to visit your great city. Mistress Azula has always spoken fondly of your people.” Navisi said with a warm smile. “And fear not for my wellbeing; I have techniques for staying warm even in the chilly air of your tribe.”

“Being an apprentice to Mistress Azula, I have no doubt that you have a myriad of useful skills. Please allow me to introduce my son, Sokka.” Hakoda gestured to his son.

“It is an honor to meet you, Disciple Navisi.” Sokka said, giving a nice bow.

“It is an honor to meet you as well. And there is no need for my title; Navisi will be fine. Once I’m a mistress I may want to lord it over people for a while, but there’s no need for formality now.” Navisi gave a wide smile.

“It would be our honor to give you a tour before our gathering tonight. Would you like to see your room and perhaps freshen up? Riding atop a dragon seems like it would be very taxing.” Yinqu answered, smiling at the grinning girl before them.

“Perhaps that would be a good idea. Dragons, even magic ones, tend to smell bad.” Navisi said in a very loud voice.

Everyone gave a slight flinch at the roar of the black and gold dragon sitting on the ice behind the girl. But she just laughed like she had told a funny joke. “Dragons, even magic ones, are quite vain.” She stage-whispered to the assembled group.

Yep, this girl was most definitely Azula’s apprentice.

Navisi had to admit that she was very impressed with the Agim Ok’an. It was a beautiful city and very functional. It sounds like Sokka had made a lot of good suggestions that upgraded the design and operational efficiency of the city. It wasn’t nearly as big as Agna Qel’a, but it seemed friendly and inviting. In the defense of Agna Qel’a, Navisi had never actually visited the place. Probably because Azula said it was full of asslicking misogynists.

“And the layout gives everyone lots of open space for congregating and still maintaining the sense of community. We didn’t want to outgrow that. There’s something special about living in a close-knit community.” Sokka was saying, gesticulating wildly at the courtyard and the walls that could to the larger outdoor area.

Navisi couldn’t help but smile at his enthusiasm. “Mistress Azula always did say that you were an idea man. I’m glad to see them put into operation. And I’m sure that she’ll be impressed when she comes to visit. Perhaps tomorrow, you could show me the behind the scenes designs for your functional architecture. We’re looking for ideas from all our friends on how to improve the operation of our new temple.”

Sokka’s face and aura beamed with pride. He wasn’t a subtle man, but Navisi liked him. He cared about his people and his city. “Thank you, Navisi. I would love to show you more of the functional side. You’re nicer than Azula. She will undoubtedly be mean to me even if she says nice things.”

“Probably.” Navisi said, laughing. “She enjoys trying to get a rise out of you and Katara.”

A gong sounded three times in the main building. “That’s the preparation gong; it is almost time for your welcoming celebration.” He gave Navisi a goofy grin. Which she returned.

“It would be rude of us to be late. Shall we make our way back?”

“That would be great! The hunting and fishing have been going great lately. There’s going to be so much meat!” Navisi laughed at the hearts that seemingly formed in Sokka’s eyes at the thought of the upcoming meal.

They made their way back to the banquet hall, laughing and talking as they went. Two tribesmen opened the doors to the hall and Sokka and Navisi made their way inside.

Hakoda, Yinqu and Katara were there already, along with a few other guests, including a couple that she had met during the northern war effort.

“Welcome back, Navisi. I know that you said you have ways to stay warm, but it makes me a bit cold just looking at you.” Katara said with a laugh.

“Even without my specialized training, the excitement from all the wonderful sights that Sokka has shown me would keep me warm. This is a wonderful city and I’m very much impressed by all that you’ve accomplished in such a short time.” Navisi answered. And she meant it. This was obviously a talented and motivated group of people.

“Thank you, Navisi. We have indeed worked very hard to rebuild after the destruction of our people during the Hundred Year’s War. And we have a great deal of respect for your mistress. She did quite a bit to improve the lot of our people.” Hakoda answered.

“Mistress Azula understood that what the Fire Nation did to your people, and most of the world, was wrong and she wanted to try and make the world a better place. Once upon a time, she believed in the Fire Nation, but now she sees that it has again turned to its wicked ways, and she has completely disavowed it.” Navisi explained, the smile completely gone from her face. “And I will hate them forever for the way they betrayed my mistress before she left.”

The room fell silent at that proclamation. Finally, Hakoda spoke. “We have heard rumors that Iroh conspired with the Order of the White Lotus to take Mistress Azula into custody.”

“Indeed. Iroh and the most profane traitor of all, Ursa, conspired to hold Azula in a gilded cage. But then they encountered the true power of my sect, and Azula inflicted a great defeat upon the White Lotus. It has since been dubbed the Night of the Wilting Lotus.” Navisi could feel her blood pressure rising, so she used her calming mantras to settle her emotions. She was much calmer when she continued speaking. “But that was in the past. Both Mistress Azula and your people have accomplished much since then, so let us celebrate what has been achieved, not mourn what has been lost.”

The rest of the evening went well. Navisi told a little bit of her training and gave a very, very vague description of her travels with Azula, making sure not to share anything that would get her in trouble with the intermediaries. It was a pleasant evening, and she could see why Azula enjoyed the company of these people and why she so wanted them to succeed.

Chapter Text

Once Lu Ten informed her that she was considered a traitor to the Fire Nation and would be arrested if she ever entered Fire Nation territory, Azula realized that she would have to look elsewhere for furniture. And to hell with the Fire Nation and its style; she decided to go water tribe and earth nation in terms of decor. That made her trip to Lenth all the more important.

While Navisi was learning more about healing and developing her own reputation outside of just being Azula’s sidekick, she decided that it was time to follow up on some ideas that she had to bring Palathia up to full functionality.

Which is why she was at the rice-oat plantation in the mountains just to the northwest of Lenth. According to the old traders she had spoken with, this was the main crop grown on the hillsides near Palathia. The area once had a small but vibrant seaside community, but it unfortunately fell victim to a Fire Nation raid about forty years ago. They burned the entire city to the ground and killed the entire population in a fit of rage. What the raiders were so angry about, no one knows.

The farmers tried to rebuild but the Fire Nation returned and repeated the process. This second attack meant the end of the town.

But Azula had dreams of a revival. “The farmlands appear overgrown, but the terraces are still visible. I would be happy to arrange transportation for potential farmers to come and review.”

“Our plantations have grown to near full capacity; there are many families who have excess workers that would love to make a fresh start and create a homestead of their own. Based on the records that we were able to find, there were approximately ninety rice-oat farms on those mountainsides.” Ma Fut, chairman of the Rice-Oat Plantation Council, said after reviewing the pertinent documents.

“And at least thirty other small farms of various varieties.” Another councilman put in. “Our proposal is that the families who were displaced by the attack on Sen Kanth be allowed to reclaim their farms if they have workers willing to reestablish them.”

“That sounds like a fair proposal. What kind of time frame are we looking at?” Azula asked.

“Well, first and foremost is that the city and port would need to be reestablished. The farmers had to leave because there was no way to ship their goods to market.” Ma Fut replied.

“That is on my list of things to accomplish also. I’m hoping to create a new city there to assist with the refounding of my order.” Azula announced. She had plans for the entire region.

“If a town is refounded and adequate supplies and manpower are available, most of the farms could be operational in two to five years, depending on state of the terraces. It will likely be quicker for the other types of farms.” Ma Fut informed Azula.

That was good. That fit within the timeframe that Azula had planned for rebuilding. “Well, I can’t promise anything, but I certainly plan to get a settlement in place within two years.”

“Mistress Azula, I have my finger to the pulse of the people. If you call for settlers to come, you will be flooded with the best the SDC has to offer. You have inspired the people here. If I was sixty years younger, I’d move there myself.” Ma Fut said with a smile.

“I appreciate your vote of confidence, Chairman. I will get the ball rolling and see where to go from there.” Azula smiled at the council. “And I appreciate your help with this venture.”

After the meeting with the plantation council was completed, Azula made her way to the merchant quarter of the town. The head of the Furnituremaker’s Guild herself wanted to discuss the issue with Azula.

“We can handle your request. It is a matter of selecting the exact pieces and style that you wish to purchase. We can handle both water tribe and earth nation styles. Most of the artisans favor the southern styles, but more traditional northern styles are made by a few of the artisans.” Sinja said.

“Southern style is fine. I’m not looking for the pieces to be extravagant, but I am looking for high quality workmanship. My temple is a bit remote, so I’d rather not have to haul a bunch of furniture there more than once.” Azula responded.

“Our craftsmen will be fighting to get your business, Mistress Azula. We look forward to furnishing your wonderful new temple. These are exciting times for the SDC, and you are given much of the credit for bringing our nations together into a mighty confederation and for bringing your augmentors to our people.”

“You give me too much credit, Sinja. I merely introduced a few people and was lucky enough to recruit some very talented people to work by my side.” Modesty was something Azula had more of, now that she’d seen and experienced so much more than she had when she left.

“Your modesty cannot fool us, but I am not here to embarrass you by telling you how great you are. Come, let us go and begin selecting the furniture to bring character and charm to your new temple.”

It was a long day of decision making, but Azula was happy with her choices when it was all said and done. She had been given the name of an airship business that would be able to handle the delivery. Kiva was great, but she wasn’t designed to be a beast of burden.

The airship was docked at the newly installed airship field just outside of town. It was an easy flight for Kiva. She was impressed by the size of the thing. It appeared to be modeled after a Fire Nation airship but was a bit different in design. The balloon was longer and sleeker and the gondola was significantly larger.

They noticed that she was coming and was greeted by a man that she presumed was the captain. “It is an honor to meet you, Mistress Azula. I am Captain Rulap. Guildmaster Sinja sent news of your interest. We are happy to serve you in any capacity that we can. We have heard many interesting stories of your travels from our chief mechanic.”

“Chief mechanic?” Azula extended her chi vision to see if she recognized anyone. She smiled at the pleasant surprise. “I’m sure that Urto embellished a bit to make the tales seem grander.”

Captain Rulap laughed. “He told us that you had mystical powers. Please come and inspect our airship to see if we are worthy of your employ.” The captain waved towards the vessel. The Dreams of Golden Slumber.

“Interesting name.” Azula said as they walked towards the airship.

“Would you believe that it was Urto’s suggestion. You made quite an impression on him.” Rulap answered with a chuckle.

“Well, we had some interesting adventures together in my wild and wooly youth.” Azula answered with a laugh. “Let’s see what the Dreams of Golden Slumber has to offer.”

The tour was quick and Azula was impressed with what she saw. Light yet strong materials were used to fabricate the gondola, and one of the fancy new electric augmentor motors was used in conjunction with the standard steam power. It was a nice design. The passenger seats could be removed to handle larger cargo loads, and Palathia was easily in the airships round trip range. Even fully loaded.

“Well, this looks great but there are only two things to deal with to convince me to hire you. Urto, can you come up here and greet your previous employer.” Azula called out. She waited a few moments before one of the trap doors to the engine room popped open.

“Princess Azula, it is an honor to see you returned safe and sound.” Urto said, giving a deep bow. Tall and bulky with strong Fire Nation features, he seemed very out of place here amongst the more earthen folk of the SDC.

“I’m no longer a princess, Urto. But that is not the point. Do you trust this crew and ship?”

“Yes, Princess, with no reservations. They are good people and will serve you well.” He instantly replied. And Azula knew that he was telling the unvarnished truth.

“Thank you, Urto. I feel better about this whole operation knowing that a good man like you is part of the crew and will vouch for the others. I hope that this trip isn’t as exciting as our previous adventures.”

“I hope not too, Princess. I’ve had my fill of excitement.” Urto responded with sincerity.

“I understand. So now that Urto has spoken on your behalf, all that we have to do is negotiate price.” Azula said to the captain.

“We would be happy to do this at no charge. You are an icon, Princess.” Rulap answered. Great. Now he was calling her princess too.

“First of all, I’m no longer a princess. Secondly, I am quite wealthy and there is no need for me to take food out of the mouths of your family. I will pay the standard rate for services.” Azula answered firmly. Why does everyone want to give her free stuff?

Rulap hemmed and hawed but finally accepted the low end of the standard rate. Azula rolled her eyes at how obstinate people were. But they seemed like good people. Urto was a goodhearted and nonviolent man. He seemed to fit in better here than with the Fire Nation. She was curious why he came here but she wasn’t going to pry into his personal business.

And with that, her chores in Lenth were completed. On to Rokishe.

Navisi watched as Katara used the water to heal the gashes to the muscles around the hunter’s ribs. A wounded animal can be a dangerous animal, as the reindeer-leopard had shown to his attackers. It had just enough spite to get in one good lick before it succumbed to its injuries, according to the hunters that dragged both the carcass and the unfortunate hunter back to Agim Ok’an.

Her jevalda allowed her to actually see how Katara’s chi was interacting with the man’s chi to compel the body to heal. Energy was actually being transferred chi to chi. That was different than how Navisi used her chi to heal. She directed chi through the Healing Stones to the patient’s chakras, directing and enhancing the body’s natural healing ability. But the healing was done by the patient.

This is why patients healed using her method were generally ravenous afterwards; they needed to replenish the body’s supply of nutrients that were used to heal. Her method could heal a wider variety of wounds, but the cost was greater to the patient. But it was less taxing to Navisi, so she could heal for longer. Neither healing method was perfect; but both methods working in tandem could heal an incredible variety of serious injuries.

There was a lot of room for research and development to produce augmentors to supplement a waterbender’s healing abilities. It would take years of effort, but it would undoubtedly be worth it. And the research would undoubtedly help improve the healing of nonbenders like Navisi. She felt honored to be working on such an interesting and worthwhile endeavor.

“If it’s okay with you, I can heal the gouges to your ribs now too.” Navisi informed the man after Katara had finished.

“But I thought healing couldn’t fix bones?” The man asked in confusion.

“Waterbending healing is great for soft tissue damage, but my method is better suited for bone damage. You bone wounds aren’t deep, so it will be easy to fix.” Navisi assured him. “Please lay still and try not to disrupt my Healing Stones.”

She placed the Healing Stones on the Air and Fire chakras. Once they were centered and attuned, she opened the chi link and manipulated her light sigils so that healing energy was distributed to the affected bones in the man’s chest. Navisi then enhanced the healing process so that the gashes were healed. It only took a few minutes. When she was finished, she severed the connection between the man and the stones and then severed her own connection to the Healing Stones.

“Your wounds are healed. You’re going to be tired and quite hungry; for bone injuries, it is recommended that you drink lots of milk products to help with recovery.” Navisi advised.

“You’re right, I am tired and hungry, but I feel like a brand-new man. I would like to thank both of you for your help.” The man gave a slight bow. They reassured him that they were just doing their duty, and he was soon on his way to eat.

“Your Healing Stones are phenomenal. They can do so many wonderful things.” Katara gushed.

“Your healing is wonderful too. Both of our methods have strengths and weaknesses. I hope to make many more strengths and fewer weaknesses for us both in the future.” Navisi answered.

“I’m glad that you’re using the gifts of your order to do more than just make weapons and fancy items. The thought of you doing for healing what the augmentors did for engines and communication devices thrills me. There is so much suffering that could be alleviated with better healing.”

“Yes, there is. And I understand what you mean. Mistress Azula was raised in a militant society, but thankfully she saw how her gifts could be used to help people in other ways. My gifts are different than hers, but I want to help people in my own way.”

“Well, I think that you’re doing a splendid job. Azula certainly attracts talented people, and she clearly knows how to work with others to get wonderful results. Even if she is pretty snarky and annoying about it sometimes.” Katara’s smirk, as well as her aura, let Navisi know that she was kidding.

“Yes, snark is indeed Mistress Azula’s default method of interactions. But she has a great deal of respect for you, even if it sounds like you two didn’t get off on the right foot.”

“And I have a great deal of respect for her. She showed me that being Fire Nation didn’t necessarily mean that you were bad. Although she does seem more the exception than the rule.”

Navisi didn’t respond to that particular comment. She understood exactly where Katara was coming from. She decided that it would be safer to get back to a healing related conversation. “Well, thank you for letting me study with you. I have several ideas for some devices that could help improve your healing power. But I’ll need to talk to Li Nu and Novae about them.”

“I look forward to seeing whatever kind of marvelous devices you’re able to assemble. I have great hopes for you, Navisi. Much like your mistress, I see you changing the world for the better.” Katara said, making Navisi feel warm inside. She wasn’t insecure, but hearing praise from someone as talented as Katara felt good.

Their bonding session was interrupted by when a young woman entered the healing office. “Ambassador Katara, a message was sent to you through the unusual channel.”

That immediately got Navisi’s attention. Unusual channel was code for the Distance Printer. Katara took the document and thanked the woman. Once the woman turned and left, she opened the letter and read the contents. Navisi remained silent and did not pry. Katara would share if she felt it was of interest to her.

Katara sighed and handed the letter to Navisi. She scanned the letter and sighed too.

The Hirythracastin Ascension of Glorious Illumination, rulers of the Ba Sing Se, had been overthrown.

Mavong scurried along the corridor leading to the caverns near Lake Laogai. They had been betrayed. But they knew that the others were untrustworthy. Only the Ascended could be counted upon in these trying times. It was a shame that Min Kai didn’t show the proper enthusiasm necessary to achieve Ascension; she was smart and capable. But she would have to fend for herself. Only the Ascended counted here.

Long Feng had been a horrible monster and his execution was well earned. But the one seed he planted that might grow to produce a wonderful fruit was the Joo Dee initiative. But he was short sighted; using it to create spies and sycophants. No, he was a limited and uninspired man. Power in the political realm was all that he craved. Mavong and the Ascended had only minimal need for this kind of power. They sought spiritual power.

Vi Sa was waiting for him when he arrived. She was the keeper of the Joo Dees. She was the last hope against the secular and materialistic warmongers that had seized power.

“They are ready, Ascended.” Vi Sa said. Tall and thin, her short hair unkempt, she was the most gifted Shaper that they had in the program. With her prompts and steady, rhythmic molding, the most capable vessels had been created.

There were seventeen in all. All were young and strong, from moderately wealthy families. Educated but not the upper elite. They were the perfect vessels for Hirythricase’s divine spark; a bit of his power would flow to them, and the Ascended would unleash them upon their enemies. Now was the time to use this power, to save his fellow Ascended.

“Begin the ritual, Shaper. There is no time to lose. May our enemies feel the power of Hirythricase’s fury.” Mavong declared.

“Or course, Ascended.” Vi Sa turned to the Joo Dees. “Take your assigned locations! Quickly!”

The seventeen men and women walked to their spots. Not as quickly as Mavong would have liked, but they were not whole yet. Soon.

Vi Sa stepped into the middle of the circle. She stomped her foot and the earth beneath her feet assumed a complicated structure, lines and circles and other overlapping geometric shapes. She then proceeded to use a knife to slice small cuts into the palms of her hands. She then dripped the blood into a circle at the center of the structure.

Then she began chanting in an ancient language, her mellifluous voice singing a beautiful yet haunting hymn. She sang another verse and Mavong felt a shiver as another, inhuman voice began singing with her. Then another. And another. Soon there were too many voices for him to count singing together. It was the most beautiful thing that he had ever heard. The divine sound brought him to near ecstasy.

Glowing spheres of light appeared above Vi Sa’s head as she sang, the voices reaching the end of the song. As the final word ended and silence once again filled the chamber, the lights each darted to one of the Joo Dees.

Yes! Hirythricase’s divine spark now inhabited the seventeen. He smiled at Vi Sa, who smiled back. They could now save his people!

He spoke the words he had been taught. “Your spark has been shared with those who are Ascended, for we are the worthy ones who have taken your name and followed your law. We are the Hirythracastin Ascension of Glorious Illumination, and we accept the power you have entrusted us with.”

Seventeen pairs of glowing eyes turned and looked at him and they all spoke at once. “Your words are heard and our thanks are given. But you bumbling children know not of what you summoned. Hirythracase does not answer to the likes of you. I am Telmaha, and I most certainly do not bow down to any mortal. I am the master now.”

Chapter Text

“Yes, there are many good options for setting up the distribution center next to the docks. With a fresh start, you could have the most up to date and efficient layout in the entire world. We’ve been looking into augmented transit systems that would work wonderfully in this environment. This is a wonderful opportunity!” Kimya exclaimed.

Azula and Asitva exchanged bemused smirks. Kimya had been a Successor candidate in her youth. When she wasn’t selected, she devoted herself to the study of urban planning and development. And she looked damn near ready to wet herself in excitement at the prospect of designing a new town from scratch.

“These ideas look wonderful. I have a few more people that I’m hoping to recruit to the endeavor. Please put together a couple of general plans; I would like to have input from the farming guilds and prospective settlers before we commit to a single plan.” Azula said.

“That is wise. I have at least four general plans to work on. This is so exciting!” Kimya said, a wide smile on her face. Azula couldn’t help but smile back. She enjoyed enthusiastic people.

“Thank you, Master Kimya. I very much look forward to seeing the wonderful plans you come up with.” Azula replied.

“Indeed, this could be the beginning of an urban revolution.” Asitva interjected. “Once people see what a thoroughly modern city can do, there might be a push to revitalize other cities or even create more new ones.”

“I certainly hope so, Matron.” Kimya answered.

Azula thanked Kimya for her work and walked with the Matron over to the development area where Li Nu and Novae did their magic. She saw the two women talking with Hanru and Si Har. Azula also noted two people meditating in the corner. If memory serves, that was Hanru’s wife and daughter, Ivi and Isa Bu.

“Azula, Matron. Welcome. We just finished up the device that you and Navisi requested, Azula.” Novae said, her loud voice booming through the room. She seemed particularly wound up and energetic today.

Azula smiled back. “That sounds wonderful. Can I see the design?”

“But of course! Come and check it out. It has the indicator stones, just like you requested. We may need to calibrate it, but since you and Navisi are the only people we know who have your skillset, we need the two of you to test it.”

Azula took the device from Novae. It was rectangular in shape, about ten inches by five inches. There were thumb grooves near each of the long ends of the device for the user to place their thumbs. If it worked correctly, the device should send a small current of the chi through the left thumb to the user. Said chi would make the chakra circuit and exit through the right thumb. The indicator stones should indicate how the chi flowed.

No lights from the indicator stones demonstrate that the user doesn’t have the appropriate chi circuits, for lack of a better term, to effectively manipulate their chi by the known methods of the Arts Esoteric. The orange stone indicates that the chi circuit is suitable for the methods used by Azula, with the green stone indicates that the chi circuit is more suitable for Navisi’s methods. Both may light up, but they speculated that there will be a balance between the two.

Azula placed her thumbs on the grooves and she felt the chi flow from the device. The orange stone glowed brightly with the green stone glowed more dimly. She smiled at the assembled team. “This is very much in alignment with my practical experiences.”

“We’re glad to see that it worked so well for you. We’ve only tried it on the four of us, so far. Li Nu shows a slight orange glow, but it was blank for the rest of us.” Novae answered. Azula smiled and winked at Li Nu, who smiled back.

Azula handed the device to Asitiva, who took it with a grin. “Trying to tempt me to abandon my city and join your ranks? You should be ashamed of yourself, Azula.”

“It appears that you’ve caught on to my dastardly plan.” Azula answered as she watched Asitva place her hands on the grooves. Neither light activated.

“I guess I won’t be abandoning my people after all.” Asitva said with a shrug.

"Hanru, do you think Ivi and Isa Bu would like to try it?” Azula asked, taking the device from Asitva.

“I bet they would like to. Isa Bu is very interested in the augmentors. I’ve already begun her engraving training.” Hanru said. “Ivi, Isa Bu. Would you like to try out to join the Arts Esoteric?”

The little girl was up like a shot and running over to the group. Everyone smiled at her enthusiasm. “Ooo, ooo, me! I wanna try.”

“Easy there, honey.” Hanru said as he took the device from Azula and knelt down. “Hold this with both hands and then put your thumbs on these grooves. You will feel just a little tingle. Then we watch to see if the lights come on.”

“Gimme!” Isa Bu said, grabbing the device and doing as instructed. And the group became silent as the green light glowed at moderate intensity while the orange light glowed lightly. “Can I join? Can I join?”

Azula’s heart jumped into her throat. Did they find someone already? She knelt down in front of the girl. “Well, Isa Bu, it looks like you might have the skills to join my order. But this was just a test. There would be much more to do. Let’s see if you mother can turn on the lights.”

“Mama, you try!” Isa Bu all but shoved the device into Ivi’s hands. She smiled down at Isa Bu as she placed her thumbs on the grooves. And both lights came on, much like they did for her daughter, although both were a bit dimmer.

“Well, it looks like this device is already paying dividends.” Azula said, smiling at the entire group. “I knew that good things would come from recruiting such wonderful and talented people.”

“Oh, Isa honey, this a wonderful thing!” Si Har slowly walked over and hugged the girl. “I’m so proud of my family.”

Suddenly, Azula was feeling a whole lot better about the future of her sect.

The two weeks had gone by fast for Navisi. She really enjoyed the people of Agim Ok’an. Katara and Sokka were awesome, and she’d spent so much time with Hakoda’s family that she started to feel like a distant cousin that had come for a visit. She had never had a real family before Mistress Lista had taken her in off the streets.

She felt like she belonged on this world. She had Azula of course. But everyone had been so welcoming. Navisi had been content with Mistress Lista, and she would love the woman until her dying day, but this was so different.

And now Azula herself was coming to bring her back to Palathia. According to the letter she sent, Azula had bought furniture and made the initial arrangements to refound the town and rebuild the farms near Palathia. But what really excited Navisi was the message that the device they had envisioned for identifying people with the appropriate chi paths to use the Arts Esoteric had been completed. And that she had already identified a little girl that might be suitable to join their ranks.

But Navisi knew that they had a way to go before they were ready to accept new recruits. But that future didn’t seem as distant as it did even a few weeks ago.

She received the notice from Omnisae that she had spotted Kiva and Azula approaching. She turned to the others in the hall. “Mistress Azula and Kiva are approaching. They should be landing outside in a matter of minutes.”

Everyone smiled and cheered as they made their way to the front entrance. Navisi made her way to the front, with Hakoda and his family joining her. She couldn’t help but smile as she watched the Kiva descend from the sky and gracefully land on the packed ice; they landed far enough away that the huge deceleration wing sweeps didn’t pelt them with the ice and snow they dislodged.

Azula quickly dismounted and made her way towards the assembled group. Navisi missed her mistress; this had been the longest that they had been separated since Azula plucked her from her hellscape world all that time ago.

“Well, Navisi, I see that you’ve made yourself quite at home amongst the good people of this fine city. And it is nice to see that you and your family are doing well, Chief Hakoda. Your city looks fabulous from the air, and I can’t wait to see how wonderful it is on the inside.” Azula said, smiling broadly at the group.

“The wonderful people of Agim Ok’an have been most gracious and welcoming, Mistress. I know that they are excited to show their city to you.” Navisi answered with a bow and a smile.

“It is indeed an honor to see you again after all this time, Mistress Azula.” Hakoda gave Azula a large smile. “Navisi has been a gracious guest and is a charming and talented young lady in her own right. I am glad to see that you continue surrounding yourself with good people.”

“That is a lesson I learned early in life; no one person knows everything. Navisi’s gifts are similar to mine but definitely distinct. I have great hopes for her.” Azula smiled at Navisi, who couldn’t help but blush a little from the praise.

“You have done so much to help with the revitalization of our people. Please come inside so that we can show you our city.” Hakoda gestured towards the open gates and the small crowd cheered and waved as Azula approached. And she gracefully waved back and gave everyone an encouraging smile.

Navisi fell in line just to Azula’s right as they entered the city. She was so happy to see the warm welcome that Azula received here. She used the pseudonym Asundra in nearly every other world they traveled to since the name Azula was hated and feared by so many. But at least among the people of the SDC, Azula was revered.

Sokka began explaining all about the layout of the city and gave detailed explanations about the many cool features that they had built into the city. Azula listened intently and asked a lot of questions; like Navisi, she was looking for ideas and suggestions to possibly implement in Palathia.

As Navisi had predicted, Azula was very impressed with the new city that the Southern Water Tribe had built. Apparently, the other four major cities of the Southern Water Tribe had also upgraded their cities. Smaller than Agim Ok’an, they were still significantly larger and more sophisticated than their previous towns.

At the end of the tour, the group made its way to the banquet hall for lunch. A small group of the leaders of the city were awaiting them. Azula took this opportunity to address the crowd. “I must say that I’m very impressed with the progress that you’ve made in such a short time. When I met with the leaders of the Back to the Ice movement years ago, I told them that I was rooting for the Southern Water Tribe to rise again and take their rightful place on the world stage. You’ve progressed faster than I believed possible and I’m proud to see that you are once again a great people who are making great contributions to the new world.”

Navisi smiled as the assembled crowd cheered at her praise. And she agreed wholeheartedly with Azula; these people had overcome so much and are once again influencing the world. They should be proud of what they have accomplished.

Lunch was served and a pleasant conversation was had by all. The Agim Ok’an contingent told of their rapid economic expansion and how they remain committed to be stewards of the resources they’ve been blessed with. They have been careful not to overhunt and overfish. Trade with the rest of the SDC has improved the lives of everyone involved.

And Navisi listened intently as Azula told their hosts about her plans to rebuild the city and harbor near Palathia and restore the farms in the nearby mountainsides. And Navisi couldn’t contain her enthusiasm when Azula told the group how Novae and her crew had finally completed the evaluation device.

“That’s awesome, Mistress. I didn’t expect it to be done so quickly.” Navisi exclaimed.

“I was pleasantly surprised too. I was even more overjoyed when I discovered a candidate with the first person we tested.” Azula said, smiling at Navisi, who was silent with shock. Azula continued. “Hanru’s wife and daughter were close by and agreed to try the device. His daughter, Isa Bu, appears to be very suited to your methods, Navisi. And she’s excited to join our order. Her mother, Ivi, is also a candidate.”

“By Gnolos, that is amazing, Mistress!” Navisi cheered.

“Not only that, but I tested several dozen other children and found two more candidates.” Azula turned to Hakoda. “I was hoping that we could test some of the young people here also. We aren’t going to try and steal anyone out from under you, but it would be great if we identified candidates. Any decisions to join our order would come later.”

“I would need to discuss the request with the council, but I don’t see any reason to not allow it.” Hakoda responded. “How does the test work?”

“Let me show you.” Azula pulled out a rectangular device. “The candidate holds the device in their hands and presses their thumbs on the grooves. The device sends a little bit of chi into the candidate and then evaluates how it is handled by the person. The little stones glow if the person has the chi pathways to properly use our teachings.”

Everyone watched as Azula demonstrated. The orange light glowed brightly while the green light glowed more dimly. “The orange light indicates that the chi pathways are appropriate for my techniques, while the green indicates that the chi pathways are more suited for Navisi’s disciplines.”

Azula handed the device to Navisi, who took it. “Try it out and let’s see if this holds true.”

Navisi put her thumbs on the device and she felt the tingle of the chi. As expected, the green stone glowed brightly while the orange stone glowed more dimly. She smiled at Azula, who was smiling back.

The Southern Water Tribe contingent was smiling too. Yinqu spoke. “If that is the extent of the initial testing, I don’t believe there needs to be much discussion.” She looked around at the group who nodded acceptance. “I propose that anyone who wishes to be tested, may be. I don’t think that anyone should be tested against their will.”

“Of course not, Yinqu. I believe in the coalition of the willing. Our disciplines require years of effort and sacrifice to achieve meaningful results. It isn’t something to be forced on anyone.” Azula answered.

“Hey, let me try that. Maybe I could be a super master of combat like you, Mistress Azula.” Sokka said, striking an exaggerated pose, hands up and ready to chop his foes. Navisi and Azula both smiled at him.

“Of course, Sokka. Have a go.” Navisi passed the device to him and watched as he put his thumbs on the grooves. The green stone shone ever so dimly.

“It glowed!” Sokka exclaimed. He looked dumbfounded.

“Yes, it did. We don’t know the exact correlation between the strength of the glow and the suitability of the candidate. It should be that with more training, your chi will become more attuned with that technique.” Azula explained.

“I’m not sure that I want to abandon my people to join your order.” Sokka said, looking downcast.

“Our hope is that once we have enough members of the order, they will return to their people and help them develop and reach their full potential. We want to give back to all the people, not live in isolation and seclusion. But you are doing so many great things already, Sokka. We would welcome you if you wanted to join, but frankly we aren’t ready for students just yet.” Azula answered.

“Well, having seen what wonderous things that you and your order can do, I hope that you swell your ranks.” Katara said, smirking. “Although Navisi has way better people skills than you, so you should let her do all the recruiting.”

Everyone laughed and the rest of the lunch went well. Navisi was feeling as optimistic about the future as she ever had.

Min Kai was feeling as pessimistic about the future as she ever had. Being locked in the cold, dark windowless cell, chained to the wall for Gnolos knows how many days had definitely dampened her mood.

She hated the Hirythrycastin Ascension of Glorious Illumination, but at least they had stopped putting people to the Spike and restored some semblance of order. But they were dumbasses and buffoons and could not keep what they had held. Considering their incompetence, it was astounding that they had ever managed to hold anything at all.

The new government, the People’s Revival, had decided that yet again the Spike should be the main tool used to coerce cooperation. And Min Kai was going to be one of the first to go. The new leadership blamed her and Mavong for the failure of the Earth Kingdom to gain territory at the negotiations. She had tried to defend their actions at her ‘trial’, but she was shouted down three words into any explanation.

So now she was locked in a cell with no hope. They hadn’t given her a timeframe for her execution, but it had to be coming soon. They hadn’t fed her since yesterday and her water cup was nearly empty. She had decided to accept her fate and try to muster as much dignity as possible for the end. The Spike was a brutal way to go, but at least it was quick.

Maybe a few brave last words to inspire the people. The thought amused her. She doubted that there was anyone left to be inspired; the entire country was beaten down and broken. Helping her people, first under the Fire Nation occupation and then after their independence, had always been the guiding principle in her life. She knew that every little bit helped. But now it appears that she had nothing left to give.

Her musings were interrupted when the door to her cell was opened. The light from the torches hurt her eyes and she turned away. She guessed the end was closer than she had imagined. She heard the guards come closer, but she didn’t struggle. They had beaten her when they first put her in the cell. She doubted they would refrain from harsher punishment now.

“We’re going to unlock you now, Little Hammer. I’m sorry this has happened to you. Do you require medical assistance?” Min Kai’s head snapped to the speaker. Her eyes were still adjusting to the light, but she recognized that voice. Colonel Laolung.

“I’m bruised and battered and weak, but nothing that rest wouldn’t help.” She answered as the shackles were removed from her arms and legs.

“I’m glad to hear that, Little Hammer. The Earth Kingdom has been in turmoil since you were locked away, and yet another regime has taken over. But this one is different. And they wish to recruit you to aid in the rebuilding of our nation.” Laolung said.

She fell over as she tried to get to her feet, but one of the guards caught her and gently helped her stand. Her muscles were cramped and a bit weak, but they were loosening up as she moved about. She leaned against the wall as she slowly regained her balance.

“What do they want of me?” Min Kai asked.

“The Magisters of Jade Transcendence are desperate to recruit every competent person they can into the service of our nation. Pretty much everyone recognized that you are the most capable young person in the government.” Laolung answered. “And I was sure to tell that that you had some potential as a military strategist and that you were a great trainer of recruits.”

“Thank you, Colonel. I appreciate you speaking on my behalf.”

“It’s General now. And your new title, should you accept a position in the new government, is Minister of State.” Her eyes had adjusted enough now to see that he was smiling at her. “Magister Ten Vi would like to speak with you once you’ve had a chance to freshen up and have a meal. So, please, let us take you away from this cell.”

“Of course, General.” And Min Kai followed him out of the jail and up to the main halls of the palace. She was allowed to eat a delicious meal, which made her feel much better very quickly. After that she was off to the communal bath to clean up, with a female servant provided in case she needed assistance after her incarceration. Luckily, she had managed to clean herself without requiring any assistance. She was given new clothes to wear and was able to make herself acceptably presentable.

Once she was ready, General Laolung led her to the meeting room where the Magister wished to speak with her. They were announced shortly after arriving and were led into the room rather quickly. A short and rather young-looking man awaited her, his green eyes studying her as she made her way in. He wore a brown robe with an intricate green design on the front.

“Greetings, you must be Min Kai. Thank you for graciously agreeing to speak with me.” He greeted her once the doors were closed behind her. She didn’t detect any sarcasm. “I am Magister Ten Vi, and I’ve looked forward to meeting with you. I have heard great things about the Little Hammer.”

Min Kai smiled politely and gave an appropriate bow. She hoped. “Thank you for interest in me and my abilities, Magister Ten Vi. I live to serve the Earth Kingdom.”

“And you have served it well from what I have heard. General Laolung spoke well of your abilities and your record, both during your studies and after, have shown you to be a woman of drive and talent. And I was able to review the documents you prepared for the negotiations. Let me say that I am impressed with your intelligence and attention to detail. Unlike the previous administration, I understand that the failings during the negotiation weren’t a matter of skill, but an imbalance of negotiating power.”

“Thank you for your kind words, Magister.” Min Kai answered carefully, not knowing exactly how to deal with this man. He sounded calm and rational, but that could be a ruse.

“You are very welcome. I understand that you have had a traumatic detainment, so you rightfully wonder how you should deal with yet another administration. Unlike the previous regimes, we understand that we need to recruit the best and brightest into the service of our nation. Not eliminate them out of fear and jealousy.”

“We wish to recruit you. But we will not impress you into service or attempt to pressure you in any way. Everyone who spoke on your behalf told us of your drive to help your people. We seek your counsel. We value your opinion and we want your drive and intellect to help us as a Minister of State. You would be one of several high-ranking advisors to the Jade Council. You may take your time to review our offer.”

“Thank you for your offer, but I do not need time to think. I live to serve the Earth Kingdom. This offer grants me the opportunity to help rebuild my nation and I respectfully accept.” Min Kai answered. She needed to make sure that the people’s needs were spoken to the council by someone.

Ten Vi’s face lit up in joy. “Splendid! The others were right about you. You may take as much time as needed to recover from your incarceration; it is a shame that this happened to you, but we are all thankful that we were able to intervene before any further atrocities were carried out.”

“Thank you for your concern. I may need to proceed slowly, but I would very much like to begin reviewing the state of our nation.” Min Kai said. Ten Vi’s smile widened even more. “But may I ask another question? Do you know what became of my parents?”

Ten Vi’s smile lessened but did not entirely disappear. “Your parents were injured during the coup, but they are both expected to recover. You may, of course, go to visit them. We are not seeking any sort of retribution against the Hirythricastan sect that ruled, but they will not be given any seats of power or authority. General, please have the staff show Minister Min Kai to her parents.”

“Of course, Magister.” General Laolung bowed to Ten Vi.

“I live to serve the Earth Kingdom, Magister.” Min Kai bowed to Ten Vi and then followed the General out of the chamber. If this government was even half as competent as Magister Ten Vi appeared to be, the Earth Kingdom may yet be saved.

Chapter Text

Ivaku could barely contain her glee as Appa followed Omnisae way towards the outside courtyard of Palathia. For three months, Ivaku had been waiting to see the glorious new temple of the Arts Esoteric. And they were opening Palathia in style. Navisi was being raised to the rank of Mistress!

She couldn’t help but giggle as Hun Ro started enthusiastically waving to the three young women standing outside a doorway that led into the mountainside. He was such a loveable goofball. She joined in waving as the three girls waved back.

Aang sprang off Appa’s head as two floating platforms of geometric gold light formed at the edge of the saddle. Ivaku grinned as she and Hun Ro stepped on one platform and Katara all but dragged Toph onto the other one.

“For the love of Gnolos’s blistered bunyons, will someone get me to solid ground!” Toph wailed.

Navisi gently lowered the platform and Toph proceeded to flop onto her back to get as much contact with the earthen courtyard as possible.

“Fear not, Toph. Palathia is built inside a mountain, so you will not have to worry about losing contact with your precious earth again anytime soon.” Azula said with a grin.

“You know how to pick a place with style, Mistress Deathblades. I can’t wait to scope out your new digs.” Toph answered, still lying on the ground.

“Then wait no more. Come one, come all! Welcome to Palathia!” Navisi shouted. She seemed to be bursting with joy. Ivaku didn’t doubt that she was excited to join Azula as a Mistress of the Arts Esoteric.

“I’m so excited for you, Navisi!” Katara said, giving the younger girl a hug. And everyone else followed suit to hug Navisi and heap praise on her for all that she’s accomplished.

“You definitely earned your new title, Lightshow. After the ceremony, you’ll be forever known as Mistress Lightshow!” Toph exclaimed.

“We’re all excited to see her raised to Mistress. But we want to show you Palathia too!” Li Nu said, linking arms with both Ivaku and Hun Ro.

“I know that I can’t wait to see it. You ladies have definitely earned it.” Aang said, a wide smile spread across his face.

“Then let’s get this show on the road,” Azula said as she made her way to the door. “Come into the Hall of Statues.”

Ivaku gaped when her eyes adjusted to the slightly dimmer interior. There, directly in front of them and towering over all the other statures, was Azula with four eyes, four arms and four boobs. And she was dressed in intimidating armor and carrying a scary looking scythe. All in all, she looked like an incarnation of a war goddess.

“Azula, what is that statue of you?” Aang asked, mouth agape.

“I will tell the whole story when everyone is assembled, but that is the form I took when I channeled the power of a goddess and wielded divine weapons to defend our home from a terrible enemy. The statues to the right and left are the two goddesses that helped me in my journey. As I said, I would rather wait for everyone to arrive, so I only have to tell the tale once.”

“Are these other statues Mistresses of the Arts Esoteric?” Hun Ro asked, pointed at the more human sized statues.

“Yes, this one was Mistress Corvylyn, the one who trained me in the Arts Esoteric.” Azula pointed to the Fire Priestess’s statue. Then she pointed to the one in Earth Kingdom attire. “And that wonderful lady is Mistress Lista, the one that took in Navisi and set her on the path that led her to me.”

“I bet she would be really proud of you, Navisi.” Ivaku said. Tears started flowing from Navisi’s eyes and Ivaku gave her a big hug.

“Yes, indeed, she would have. And this is Mistress Sun Klu, the last Air Nomad in the Order of the Arts Esoteric. She was known as the Flying Dragon. You can see her wearing the same dragon amulet that I have; Mistress Corvylyn passed it onto me when I joined the order.” Azula said with a smirk as she stood by Aang, who was smiling as he studied the statue. “I plan on recruiting more of your Air Nomads to my cause someday, Avatar.”

“And Ivaku would appreciate this woman. This is Mistress Pul’a; she’s the one who knew of the hidden scrolls in Ji Ha.” Azula said. Ivaku smiled as she thought about the terrifying experience of watching Azula’s eyes glow like little suns for fifteen hours.

“These are all wonderful statues. I’m so happy that you have this place!” Hun Ro said, a wide smile on his face.

“Thank you, Hun Ro. But there’s lots more to see.” Azula said as she took them on the tour. The Meditation Hall was the next stop, where Azula explained that the fully charged chi reservoirs would dramatically expand the meditation techniques that she could teach her students.

Ivaku was astounded by the library; there were thousands of scrolls. Azula told the group that she had recovered the scrolls she had found at Ji Ha. Li Nu was in the process of learning Lincum Arca so she could study the scrolls as well.

“Most of the scrolls appear to deal with the history of the order and some of the techniques used by the earliest sects that would eventually become the Order of the Arts Esoteric. We hope that there will be forgotten techniques that we can relearn.” Azula said.

Then Azula took them through the nicely decorated and furnished gathering room and the adjacent kitchen and study. Ivaku was impressed, this place really was up and running. Then they went upstairs to see the acolyte rooms and the Mistress rooms. Ivaku could only imagine how much Azula paid to have all this furniture made and brought here. And then they visited the all-purpose rooms; one of which Li Nu had converted into an augmentor development studio.

After the tour, everyone went down to the gathering room to relax in comfort.

“We have big plans for filling this temple. I’m hoping that Avatar Aang has some good news about bringing some Air Acolytes to share our temple with us.” Azula side eyed Aang from the couch she was sharing with Li Nu.

Ivaku thought it was a good sign when Aang perked up. “Actually, I do have good news. Six acolytes are willing to come her and train. Four women and two men. They need to settle some of their affairs, but they should all be ready to start training in about a month.”

Azula and Navisi’s grins were wide. “That’s awesome, Avatar. Navisi has some news that she would like to share with you also.”

Navisi’s grin became so wide that Ivaku worried that her face would break. “Based on the information that we gathered as we traveled, Omnisae was able to track two herds of wild air bisons. We’ve spotted about sixty individuals in all.”

“What!?” Aang shouted as he jumped to his feet. Tears came to his eyes. “That’s amazing. I was so worried that Appa was going to die alone.”

“That’s no longer a worry. We will be happy to share the locations of the herds with you. They migrate so it may take a day or two to find them, but we have a good idea where they’re based at.” Navisi answered.

“You guys are totally awesome!” Toph yelled.

“Yeah, we pretty much are.” Navisi agreed. Then she tilted her head and wore a look of concentration.

“The airship from Gir Mirath is approaching. Izuka’s travel group must have arrived.” Navisi said, doing the staring into the middle-distance thing she does when communicating with Omnisae. “They should be landing in about ten minutes.”

“Is Gir Mirath the name of the new city that is being built.” Katara asked. Ivaku noticed how Azula rolled her eyes while Li Nu and Navisi grinned.

“Gir Mirath was the name that Navisi had suggested for the new town being founded on the site that used to be Sen Kanth. Azula tried to naysay it, but the name stuck once Navisi told to everyone what it meant. Gir Mirath means Golden Light in Lincum Arca.” Li Nu explained.

“That’s a great name.” Hun Ro said, smiling at Azula.

“It sounds cool but now everyone will think that I’m even more conceited than before.” Azula grumbled.

But Ivaku just laughed. “Don’t worry, Azula. No one thinks that you can get anymore conceited than you were before.” Everyone laughed as Azula stuck out her tongue at Ivaku. She had really missed Azula.

“Let’s go meet the rest of the group.” Aang said, grinning from ear to ear. Ivaku guessed that his spirits must be rising with all the good news that he’s heard about the Air Acolytes and air bison.

Mai and Ty Lee looked at the statue of Mistress Corvylyn. It was like someone had taken the actual woman and turned her to stone. It absolutely caught the likeness and essence of the woman that had taught them so much. Azula had been her focus, and based on the results, it was absolutely the right choice. But she also taught Mai and Ty Lee a lot.

“We were really lucky to study with her.” Ty Lee said quietly. “She was a great woman who really helped us. And Azula.”

“Yes, she did. And now we get to see the girl that Azula took under her wing take her place among the Mistresses.” Mai said, as they turned their attention to the girl in question. She was standing with Azula in front of the statue of the woman that had been Navisi’s first teacher. Mistress Lista.

Mai thought it was a beautiful sentiment to raise Navisi to Mistress in front of the statue of Mistress Lista.

Azula’s voice rang through the hall, calling everyone to attention. “Everyone, please take your places so we can begin the ceremony.”

Everyone moved to their appointed spots in short order. Azula had drafted Li Nu as her assistant for the raising of the Disciple to Mistress. Once everyone was in place, Azula began to speak.

“Disciple Navisi, it is my honor and privilege to today to acknowledge the hard work you that you have put forth to master the skills of our order and to recognize you in front of all those friends and loved ones that have gathered to celebrate your success.” Azula paused and looked up at the statue behind them.

“You have grown to be a powerful member of the Order of the Arts Esoteric, and were she here today, Mistress Lista would agree when I declare that you have earned your place among the Mistresses of this hall. Disciple Navisi, you have worn the colors of my branch honorably, but now it is time to set them aside. Please take off your robes so that you can receive attire more fitting to your new station.”

Mai watched as the girl took off the black robes with the gold trim and stood there before the assembled group in her plain underrobe. “Mistress Navisi, the first known wielder of the light sigils, you are hereby given these robes to denote your status as a great scholar and practitioner of your own branch of the Arts Esoteric. Please accept these robes and take your place here in Palathia as a Mistress of the Arts Esoteric.”

Everyone clapped and cheered as Li Nu assisted Mistress Navisi with the donning of her new robes. These robes were dark green with navy blue highlights. Just as Azula’s robes reflect the color palette of Kivathrystan, Navisi’s new robes reflect the color palette of Omnisae.

“Mistress Azula, I thank you for your recognition and vow to uphold the standards of the Order of the Arts Esoteric.” Navisi then turned and bowed to the statue. “Mistress Lista, I thank you for all that you have taught me, and I am honored to be recognized as a Mistress of your order.”

And Azula and Navisi shared a big hug as the crowd cheered. Once they separated, the young girl was swarmed by well-wishers. For a little while, Mai felt like all was well with the world.

Azula sat with the rest of the group as Navisi, Katara and Ivaku examined Ty Lee in the medical room. It seems that the tryst between Aang and Ty Lee on Kyoshi Island had resulted in a pregnancy. Given the importance of the offspring to the future of the Air Nomad’s, everyone is very interested in monitoring the well-being of the mother and child during pregnancy.

Aang was looking very nervous. Although he had better get used to it, since he had successfully impregnated two other women from the original list Azula and Navisi had created, with two others tentatively believed to be pregnant. This was a good start for rebuilding the Air Nomads. They had decided that Aang should take a break before the next round; there were only so many babies that could be properly handled at once.

“So, Azula, why don’t you tell us more about the refounding efforts with Gir Mirath while we wait?” Aang suggested. Then he gave a wide grin. “Are you going to be mayor too?”

“Alas, not. I’ve got a lot on my plate. But I was hoping to poach some talent to come and help out. Perhaps someone who’s been helping to run a major city like Omashu would like to come and help administer our fine city.” Azula stared directly at Hun Ro, who seemed taken by surprise.

“You want me?” He asked.

“Yes. We already have sixty-seven farms that are being reestablished by the farmers or their descendants that once worked them. The planning board for Gir Mirath has been flooded with requests by citizens of all types wanting to move there. I’m going to need skilled and talented people to come here and administer things. I’ve already talked my friend Vinda into coming, and I would very much love to have you and Ivaku come too. We can discuss details of the position and you can have time to think.” Azula said. She kept her smile to herself as she observed the thoughtful look on his face.

All of their attention turned to the stairwell as the other four members of the group filed out, all looking rather pleased. Their auras were downright glowing.

Katara began speaking. “Aang, you’ll be happy to know that Ty Lee is in wonderful health. A little morning sickness, but not as much as one would expect.”

All three healers looked to the beaming Ty Lee. “I’m having triplets!”

She clutched her hands together and held them up by her face, looking like the proudest and happiest mother on Atla. Everyone was so focused on Ty Lee that Azula was the only one that moved fast enough to catch Aang before he hit the floor. Her cloth tentacle caught the expectant father as he passed out from the news.

Azula set him down and made sure that he was alright. Then she made her way over to congratulate her dear friend for the wonderful news. Considering that Ty Lee was born as part of septuplets, it wasn’t shocking that she would become pregnant with triplets. This was potentially great news for the future of the Air Nomads.

Once all of the congratulations have been given, and Aang had recovered, Azula decided that it was time to share the basics of her multiversal adventure. She couldn’t tell a lot of details, but she could give them the overview.

She addressed the crowd once everyone had settled down. “I’m very happy with all the wonderful news that has been shared today. But I’d also like to share a little bit about my adventures during my disappearance and how I came across such a wonderful friend and practitioner of the Arts Esoteric like Navisi. And you can learn how we came to have such incredible magic companions as Omnisae and Kivathrystan.”

Navisi and Li Nu smiled at her while everyone else looked on in anticipation; Navisi already knew a lot of it firsthand and Li Nu had heard the general description. Azula felt that her friends and family deserved to hear what was important enough for her to leave Atla.

“When I was thirteen, I had a vision of Yotforbu, the four-armed goddess that is commemorated in the statue in the entry hall. She began guiding me and during my first trip to the southern nations, I found a secret library of the Arts Esoteric in a temple just outside of Savan. It is here that I had a series of visions about what my life would have been like had I been born a firebender.”

Most of the crowd gasped, although some already knew this part of her tale. “These visions were potential futures of what is called the multiverse. Other worlds, much like ours, but things were just a bit different. I was a firebender. Perhaps Katara and Sokka didn’t find Aang. Things such as that.”

“And then during Phoenix Sage Insurrection, I was tested by Yotforbu to see if I was worthy of wielding her power. I was. And it was during the negotiations between the Fire Nation and the Earth Kingdom that Yotforbu recruited me to battle a terrifying evil that was threatening the multiverse.” She turned to Aang. “That evening we discussed how I knew so much of your past; the strange energy you felt then was me talking with Yotforbu.”

Aang looked thoughtful at the news. “Well, after that, the asslickers in the Order of the White Lotus were convinced by my asslicking mother to try and take me into custody. They failed miserably and it was then that I left Atla to join the war.”

“The statue of me downstairs shows what I looked like when I channeled the power of Yotforbu while wielding divine weapons. My allies and I defeated the Scourge, as our enemy was known. But at great cost to me. My body, the one I was born with, was destroyed.”

The entire room erupted into chaos. She let the noise wash over her for a few seconds before she restored order. “Listen! Yotforbu made arrangements to have my body healed, if possible, but the damage was too great. But she transferred my consciousness and chi power into this one while I awaited the fate of my original body.”

Everyone was just looking at her, obviously unsure what to say. “But don’t feel bad for me. This body is nearly indistinguishable from my original, and even has a little upgrade that I’ll show you at the end of the discussion.”

Azula was looking forward to that. “But Yotforbu’s nieces, OrkaHaalu, the two-headed goddesses whose sculpture is also in the entryway, made arrangements for me to travel the multiverse and assist worlds where balance was so misaligned that it threatened not only their world but potentially others. It was on one such world that I met Navisi.”

She smiled at Navisi, who smiled back. “It was a terrible world, but we completed the mission and helped restore balance. But the toll for allowing her to travel with me was that we had to give up our amulets. And you can imagine our shock when they are returned to us at a later time as the holders for our magical companions.”

“That’s incredible!” Hun Ro shouted.

“Yes, it is. Parts of the journey were filled with terror and homesickness, but I would gladly do it again if it meant that I would meet Navisi and gain our magical companions. I met other versions of many of the people in this room and even one of me. I’m not allowed to tell specifics, but it was a wild ride. Needless to say, I’m glad that Navisi and I made it back here to be with you.”

“I think I speak for everyone when I say that we’re glad that you’re back. And that Navisi came with you.” Mai said.

“Thank you for that, Mai. But now it is time for the demonstration.” Azula stood and took off her outer robe. She was wearing the undershirt and pants that were designed especially for this demonstration. “Try not to pass out, Aang.”

She smirked at his eye roll and then concentrated. Her vision doubled and then reset as the extra eyes appeared on her face, allowing her to see the looks of absolute shock and alarm on most of the faces in the audience. Two extra boobs formed and two new arms came out of her side; she pushed them out of the widened armslots so they had full functionality. She felt her yotzu and ballsack take up the designated space in her pants.

“When Yotforbu gave me the extra energy to strengthen this body so that it was as strong as the original, it turns out that it also gave it the ability to transform. I don’t get the size boost like I did when I actually channeled Yotforbu’s power; I grew to be just over eight feet tall then.”

Ivaku was the first to get her feet back under her. She giggled and then spoke to Azula. “Did you get the big yotzu too?”

“Yes, but you’ll have to request a private viewing if you want to see. You’ll never look at Hun Ro the same again.” She winked at Ivaku as most of the crowd chuckled.

“Somehow, Azula, it doesn’t surprise anyone here that you would have the biggest yotzu on the planet.” Hun Ro said, causing the entire room to burst into laughter.

Izuka slept well in the small acolyte room; Palathia wasn’t set up to be a luxurious bed and breakfast but with the ten moderately sized acolyte rooms there was enough space for everyone. The place was cozy but cramped compared to the giant Southern and Eastern Air Temples that Izuka had visited. But she knew there were other smaller buildings for overflow if they were ever needed. And Izuka hoped that her sister’s order grew enough that this place would feel cramped.

She made her way down to the outside courtyard to do her morning training; of course, Azula was already there. Ivaku couldn’t help but marvel at her sister’s skill. But she had her own routine to do. And she felt a thrill in the cool morning air as the sun slowly rose between the mountain peaks. The view was beautiful and just seemed to inspire tranquility. Azula finished before her and was watching as Ivaku completed her routine and went to stretch.

“I’m very impressed with your skill, Sister. Your spiritual training must be paying off; your moves have a lot of airbending style in them. It suits your chi and makes you much lighter on your feet. You’re a dangerous woman.” Azula said with a smile.

“I studied extensively with the Sages of Joyful Sorrow and they made me see that my bending was too linear, too forced. Father taught me to be fast and strong and made me practice the forms until they were perfect. And I was fast and strong. But the Sages taught me that fire is more than just destruction, that bending was more than memorizing the correct forms. I opened my mind and tried new things, studied other bending styles. And that made me more adaptable, and I found methods that better suited my chi flow, making me an even stronger bender. Airbending actually meshed with my style the best.” Izuka explained.

“You have no idea what a special and wonderful person you are, Izuka. Father pushed you to the edge of your abilities and tried to mold you in his image, but you stayed strong and remained a good person through it all. I admire you more than you will ever know.” Azula said and then pulled a surprised Izuka in for a tight hug. “But enough feeding your ego, finish your stretches and come get breakfast.”

Izuka smiled as Azula released her and made her way inside. It was good to be reunited with her sister. She had been out of touch with her family since the banishment, but Lu Ten was really the only one beside Azula she cared to catch up with. Unfortunately, he wasn’t able to get away right now due to the upcoming Fire Colony vote. Mother and Zuko weren’t worth her time and she was never close with Yue. And Izuka never really liked kids, so she didn’t feel a strong desire to see Izumi. She heard another brat was on the way and might be popping out in the not-so-distant future, but that was Zuko’s problem.

Breakfast was good and she was glad to catch up with her friends. But her interest was piqued when the topic of the air bison herd came up. Aang was asking where the herds were. Navisi was going to take him to find them.

“They’re in the central valleys, nestled amongst the Lit Zun peaks on Ming Si island. I can show you their location if you like.” Navisi said with a smile. The girl still looked to be riding high from yesterday’s ceremony.

“That would be awesome. I think it would bring a lot of joy to Appa to see other air bison.” Aang said, grinning like a fool.

“Well, I can’t imagine a more worthwhile endeavor for a newly minted Mistress of the Arts Esoteric.” Azula said with a smile. The group cheered and began deciding amongst themselves who would go see the herd of air bison.

Izuka was happy for Aang and Appa but didn’t really have much interest in making the trip. She looked up to see Azula staring at her, and then proceeded to nod her head over towards the quieter corner of the room. Izuka started walking over and Azula joined her.

“Seeing how you don’t seem to be interested in bison bothering, I thought that this might be a good opportunity to talk to you about the benefits of joining the Order of the Arts Esoteric. You already have a spiritual side; seeing how you’ve incorporated the teachings of other schools of thought into your firebending shows me that you have an open mind.” Azula said, giving Izuka an appraising stare.

“No offense, Azula, but I don’t want to spend my days living in a temple. I’m glad that you found this place, but it’s not for me.”

“It doesn’t need to be. Not everyone needs to be a scholar to join our order. You have practical knowledge and skills that would be a benefit to any group you join. We need members to travel and learn of other sects and cults; you can share some of our teachings with them while also learning about their traditions. Plus, we need people of a practical bent, much as we’ve brought Li Nu into the fold.”

Izuka considered. She did enjoy learning about other traditions. And what Azula has been able to accomplish with her order has been nothing short of astounding.

“I will think about it, Sister. I’m not sure where my path will lead me, but your order is a viable option.”

“That’s all I ask. And whether you join or not, you are always welcome here, both as my sister and a great person who did so much to help the SDC.” Azula smiled and Izuka couldn’t help but return the expression.

“Thanks, Azula. I always knew there was a reason why you are my favorite sibling.” Both girls laughed, since they both knew that their brother was unlikely to win any Sibling of the Year Awards in the near future.

Chapter Text

“I can’t wait to go see the air bison herds! Appa’s going to be so excited!” Aang shouts with glee, with a gigantic, and rather goofy, grin spread across his face.

Mai can appreciate why he’s so excited but frankly, it’s exhausting just looking at him sometimes. That much enthusiasm is setting her teeth on edge. But as fate would have it, Azula was coming to her rescue.

The elections over the fate of the Fire Colony was just over two weeks away, and Mai needed to get back and assist Lu Ten with keeping this whole endeavor from becoming a shitshow. She had worked hard to get things prepared so that she could spend a few days in Palathia, but she needed to return and help her country keep from collapsing.

“I’m happy that Navisi and Omnisae were able to find Appa some friends, Aang. I’m sure it will be great for him to see other air bison.” Azula said, grinning at the bald kid. “Once I get Mai back to the Fire Colony and take care of one other chore, I’ll be back to find out how it went.”

Ah, the other chore. This chore was something that Mai was a little bit worried about. But the consequences for actions very often come due. And Mai was a quite intrigued to see how this chore would pan out.

But first she had to say goodbye to her friends. Ty Lee, of course, had to hug her and cry and be dramatic. Even more dramatic than usual. But carrying three little Aang-spawn gave her the right to be even more erratic than usual. Better her than Mai. And Mai had been a little disappointed when Ty Lee shared that there wasn’t a blue arrow on the airbender’s yotzu; if you’re going to go with a motif, you should carry it to completion.

In short order she had hugged many and said goodbye to all. Mai sighed as she looked up at the black and gold dragon. She swears that it is smirking at her.

Her attention was taken from the magical dragon by her dear friend. “All right, Mai. Let’s get you back to the Fire Colony. After our stop, of course.”

“Of course.” Mai said, with a slight smirk of her own. “I’m really interested to see how this plays out.”

Iroh sighed contentedly as he went through his daily preparation of his teas. Business at the Jasmine Dragon was booming and he vowed that his customers would never have to suffer through the agony of substandard tea.

This life was a far cry from the one that had occupied the first fifty-four years of his life. He had felt a privilege to carry out the will of the Fire Nation, but now he walked a different path. It was sad to see the strife and hardship that many in the colonies were suffering after the Fire Nation’s catastrophic defeat, but the people were strong and would rebuild.

It was now just a matter of whether they would rebuild as part of the Fire Nation or as an independent nation. This one vote could possibly undo the entirety of the Fire Nation’s gains during the Hundred Year’s War. He truly sees now how the actions of the Fire Nation, and those of himself, had done so much damage to the world.

He heard the door open. The shop wasn’t open for business yet, but he almost never turned away an early customer. But his heart skipped a beat as he saw the two young women standing in his door.

Azula and Mai. Individually, they were formidable opponents. Together, he knew that he would have very little chance against them.

“Don’t do anything rash, Iroh. I’ve come to talk, and only talk. But I will not lose a single wink of sleep if I’m forced to kill you in self-defense.” Azula said, staring him straight in the eye.

She was much as he remembered her, except that the scar gave her a rather intimidating look. She had left a girl, granted a dangerous and exceptionally powerful one, but now she was a woman. And if the rumors he had heard about her and her new companions were true, she is the most dangerous person in the world outside the Avatar.

“Of course, Azula. Please come in and enjoy a cup of tea.” Iroh was the Dragon of the West, and he had no intention of being intimidated by a teenage girl.

“Thank you. Your tastes were always cultured and refined; I look forward to seeing what you have prepared.”

Azula approached his table while Mai moved to a table a good bit away, essentially allowing them to have a private conversation. But Iroh didn’t doubt for one second that not only was she armed with those deadly blades of hers, but ready to use them at a moment’s notice.

A heavy silence weighs on them as Iroh pours out the teas. This was special blend that he had been working on for some time. It wasn’t quite perfect, but it was still a wonderful brew. Once the two cups were poured out, in full view of his niece, he gestures for her to pick her cup.

She selects the cup on the left and watches as he takes a seat across from her. She takes a refined sip and looks thoughtful. “Lavender and lillyweed, obviously, with a hint of ironsage, if I’m not mistaken. An excellent brew, as to be expected. I would recommend a dash of orange cyrusleaf to add a touch of richness to the aftertaste.”

Despite the seriousness of the situation he finds himself in, Iroh can’t help but smile. “You always had a refined palette, Azula. For what it’s worth, I’m sorry that things played out so that we didn’t get to have more opportunities to enjoy tea together.”

She eyed him, a neutral expression on her features. “How did the White Lotus approach you? A letter? Through Mother?”

“Chief Arnook came to see me personally, about a week after Lu Ten came home. He offered me a chance to give him back his health and vitality. For what it’s worth, your betrayal was the only part of the deal that disturbed me.”

“I see. Did Mother finally convince you that the Fire Nation was better off without a fire witch in the government?”

“No. Ursa is a good woman, but she was always too superstitious and allowed herself to become obsessed with her own ideas and desires. I’ve never considered you a fire witch, and I never will. You can lay many charges at my feet, but I will not accept that one.”

He shivered a bit as she looked into him, seemingly weighing the very content of his soul. “What did they ask of you to heal Lu Ten?”

“I was to abdicate my throne and lower Lu Ten in the order of succession; Chief Arnook was keen to have Yue be the Fire Lady. And we were to allow the reestablishment of the Earth Kingdom, which you and Zuko handled masterfully. The last condition, which you already know about, was that you were to be taken into custody and held securely, but comfortably, for the rest of your life.”

“Come now, Iroh, did you truly believe that you would ever be able to hold me?” Azula looked at him with a bit irritation.

“Truthfully, no. But you have to understand how I viewed this interaction. Lu Ten, who I love more than anyone or anything else in the world, was blind and crippled. I had already intended to abdicate to care for him, naming Zuko as my successor even before I was approached. And the territory concessions Chief Arnook requested were in line with what we already expected.”

Iroh paused for a second, judging the demeanor of his niece. Finally, he spoke. “All that I truly had to pay was your betrayal. My son would be whole, and you would be held in a gilded cage. And things ebb and flow in world politics; even if you were taken into captivity, circumstances in five or ten years might be different and perhaps you could be freed. Had they asked for a harsh imprisonment or your execution, I would have turned them down.”

Azula sighed, and for a moment, he saw a young girl that had lived too much. “I see. I love Lu Ten too, and there is a great deal that I would have done to help him.”

Iroh sat quietly as Azula looked down at her hands. He sensed that she was still collecting her thoughts, deciding how she felt about the situation.

“I can’t say that I forgive you for what you did, but I do understand. We are no longer family, as far as I’m concerned. But I will not punish a grieving father for doing what he needed to do to save his son.” She said quietly, still looking down.

“But you didn’t do Zuko, or the Fire Nation, any favors with this deal. He wasn’t ready for that level of responsibility without strong guidance. Without you, Lu Ten or myself to help guide him, he made the world a worse place. He even cast Izuka aside for having the audacity to disagree with him. You left him in the care of my bitch mother, and the fault for at least some of the pain and destruction that he has wrought needs to rest on your shoulders.”

Iroh sighed. These thoughts have plagued his mind for much of the past four months. “I cannot disagree with your assessment, Azula. I know it was probably selfish, but I truly felt that he was ready. But alas, I don’t think anyone in the Fire Nation, with the possible exception of the People’s Princess, really knew how to deal with the Northwest Colony.”

He was rewarded with a small smile. “I will tell you the same thing I told Master Pakku; it’s a bit embarrassing how much the world depended on a fourteen-year-old girl.”

Iroh felt a smile coming to his face also. “That is undoubtedly true. But I see now just how far thinking you were. I can’t change the past, but I’m glad to see that you have come back safely to us.”

“Thank you, Iroh. The tea has been lovely.” She stood and signaled to Mai. “I understand that Lu Ten cut off all contact with you when you agreed to allow the White Lotus to apprehend me.”

Iroh sighed bitterly. “Yes.”

Azula began walking towards the door. She turned and faced him just before she exited his shop. “Life is an everchanging puzzle, with new challenges and difficult decisions facing us at every turn. Forever cutting off family for making a single mistake, especially one born from love, is rarely for the best. I will ask Lu Ten to come see you, to discuss matters.”

And with that she turned and strode through the door with Mai close on her heels.

And as Iroh sat alone in his tea shop again, tears fell from his eyes as he dared to hope that he may yet speak with his son again.

“The oversight committees in the northeast districts are being flooded with volunteers. There should be more than enough poll workers at each of the voting sites. The rosters for the armed guards are still being finalized.” Sinlao said, going through the checklist that Mai had left for them.

It was a luxury that Sinlao was such a strong and competent woman. Between her and Mai, the entire election process had been going smoothly. Even the SDC representatives have been cooperating with them; it still galled him that things had ever progressed to this point, but there was nothing to be done but get the vote over with.

“Thank you, Sinlao. Horzun’s done a great job setting up the infrastructure, so there shouldn’t be any problem moving the guards as needed.” Lu Ten answered with a smile.

Any further conversation was forestalled when Jing Ip stepped through the open door of the office. “Sir, Lady Mai has returned. Along with Princess Azula and her dragon. The princess has asked to see you.”

Lu Ten was always happy to see Azula, but this put him in a terrible position. He was supposed to arrest her on sight if she ever stepped foot on Fire Nation territory, but he had no desire to do so and from what he’d seen and heard, he probably couldn’t take her into custody even if he wanted too.

He sighed and responded. “Please show them in, Jing Ip. As quickly and discreetly as possible.”

“I understand, sir.” Lu Ten exchanged a glance with Sinlao. Azula could tilt the entire balance of the elections if she wanted, for or against the Fire Nation. And he knew exactly which way it would go if she interfered.

Azula and Mai were led into the office just a short minute later. Lu Ten couldn’t help but smile as he got up and hugged Azula. “It’s great to see you, Azula, but you really shouldn’t be here.”

Azula laughed as she hugged him back. “I know that you need Mai to hold your hand, so I wanted to make sure that she got her safe and sound. And I had another errand to run up this way.”

“What sort of errand?” Lu Ten wasn’t sure if asking was the right thing to do. He had a feeling he wouldn’t like the answer.

“I went to speak with Iroh.” She answered, her voice and expression neutral.

“Oh.” Was Lu Ten’s articulate response. “You just talked with him, right?”

He felt bad for even considering that she might do something more than talk. He was rewarded with a little smile.

“Of course, Lu Ten. Mai was there as a chaperone and can verify that my interaction with Iroh was only conversation.”

That soothed Lu Ten’s fears. He had cut Father out of his life after he betrayed Azula, but he found that he couldn’t stand the thought of anything bad actually happening to him.

“I would like to talk to you about the discussion I had with him. Mai has already said that she doesn’t wish to be a part of this discussion. I will leave it to you to decide whether your betrothed should be included.” Azula said, glancing between him and Sinlao.

“I would like her to be here. She is the light of my life, and I don’t want to keep anything from her.” He answered immediately. A wide smile spread across Azula’s face.

“I’m glad to hear that. Strong relationships require strong communication.” Azula answered.

“And I’ll leave the three of you to your discussion.” Mai said, sharing a small smile with Lu Ten and Sinlao.

“Please, have a seat.” Lu Ten suggested, gesturing to the chairs next to his desk. He took his seat behind his desk while Azula and Sinlao took their seats in the proffered chairs.

“Thank you, Lu Ten. As you can imagine, I was very interested in finding out why Iroh, the man I counted on the watch over me as I helped the Fire Nation prosper, would suddenly turn against me and actively help the White Lotus try to keep me in captivity.” Azula began, staring at Lu Ten.

“I had heard the rumors that you were captured by the White Lotus, but when you came back, I thought that they were only rumors.” Sinlao said in a quiet voice, looking at Azula.

“Oh, they tried to take me into captivity, but they failed miserably. General Liao himself told me that Iroh had turned against me.”

“Yes, he did. As did Mother and Zuko. Yue and I were the only ones that spoke against it.” Lu Ten had to chuckle a little at the memory. “That’s the maddest that I’ve ever heard Yue.”

Azula looked at him. “I…I didn’t know that she spoke against it. Thank you for telling me that; I hold her in even higher esteem now. But I wanted to hear Iroh’s side of things.”

“What’s the point? What he did was wrong, and I told him so at the time.” Lu Ten said, feeling the anger and outrage rising in him. This topic always got him wound up.

“Because one of the things that I’ve seen in my travels, is that circumstances can drastically change how people live their lives. Good people can go wrong if presented with the wrong situation at just the wrong time. The road to hell is often paved with good intentions. What Iroh did was wrong, but it was understandable.”

“How can you say that? After all that you had done, he cast you aside in a selfish desire to get me healed!” Lu Ten roared. Sinlao flinched a little at his anger, but Azula just sat there and looked at him.

“It was a mistake made out of love. I can’t find it in myself to forgive him just yet, but I do know what it means to care for someone so much that I’d pay a large price to help them if they were in trouble. I would have done a great many things to get you healed. Or Navisi. Or Ivaku.” Her answer caught him off guard.

Azula started speaking again. “A single mistake shouldn’t haunt Iroh forever. He was a good father to you and until he promoted Zuko to the throne without proper assistance, he was also a good Fire Lord. I’m not asking you to forgive him. But talk to him and try to understand why he did it. We don’t have children, so it’s probably hard for us to understand what people will do for the sake of their offspring.”

Lu Ten couldn’t find the words to counter her argument. Her words made sense, but the anger in his heart at Father betraying Azula still burned hot.

“Please consider Azula’s words, Lu Ten.” Sinlao said. “I admit that I never understood the rift between you and your father, but now I do. It was a mistake of love, Lu Ten. Perhaps talking to him can help both of you.”

“I know how much he loves you, Lu Ten. And I know that underneath all of your anger, you love him too. And for what it’s worth, I’m no longer angry at him. I won’t lie; the hurt of what he did to me is still there. But I think that you’ve punished him enough. I’m back now and there’s no need to continue holding onto past injuries.”

Lu Ten thought about the words of the two ladies that he loved. He finally spoke. “I will speak with him after the vote.”

“That’s all that I ask. Life is short and unpredictable, Lu Ten. Don’t throw away a strong relationship because of a single mistake.” Azula smiled and got to her feet. “I’ve very much enjoyed talking with the two of you, but I’d better hop on Kiva and take off before any of your soldiers get the idea that they’d like to take me back to Zuko in chains.”

Lu Ten and Sinlao smiled. Sinlao expressed the thought that they were both sharing. “I sincerely doubt anyone wants to tangle with the People’s Princess and her magic dragon.”

They all laughed as Azula hugged both Lu Ten and Sinlao before she made her way back to her dragon. It was good to have Azula home. And he had to admit his heart ached from missing Father. Perhaps things could be patched up.

“He was so happy. He flew around with them and played with the air bison calves. They accepted him as one of their own!” Aang exclaimed, wildly gesticulating. Navisi couldn’t help but smile at how excited he was for Appa’s meeting with the air bison herd. They had stayed the night there so that Appa could bond with his new friends.

But now he was back in Palathia. As great as the reunion had been, Navisi knew that her guests had to get back to the real world and solve a lot of problems. Aang and Katara going to the Northwest Colony to prepare for the election. Ivaku was going was returning to Omashu with Hun Ro and Toph before making her way to the Central Earth Kingdom; she and Rajeen were going to assist with the soon to be restarted negotiations between the Earth Kingdom and Central Earth Kingdom.

And Izuka was going to continue her work with the SDC navy. Navisi really hoped that she would join forces with her Azula and agree to be part of the Order of the Arts Esoteric. There was so much to do to reestablish the order and every talented member they could recruit would help. Ty Lee had become an honorary member; she was staying with them at Palathia and would learn more about Air Nomad ways when the air acolytes arrived.

“That’s great, Aang. We’re glad that things are going so well; things are looking up for reestablishing the Air Nomads and the Order of the Arts Esoteric.” Azula said, a wide smile on her face.

“It is going great! But, uhm, well there’s something that I wanted to discuss with you, Navisi and Li Nu before I go.” Navisi noticed how he looked like a little kid who got caught with his hand in the cookie jar.

“Of course, Aang. We can all head up to our private study for some privacy.” Azula answered easily.

“And I’d like Ty Lee to join us.” Aang said, looking bashful.

Navisi smiled. She had a good idea where this was going. Being able to read auras felt a bit intrusive sometimes. But it definitely gave her insight to the workings of interpersonal relationships.

“Of course, Aang.” She turned to Izuka, Ivaku, Hun Ro, Katara and Toph. “I hope that you guys don’t mind us leaving you to your own devices for a few minutes.”

“Of course not, Mistress Deathblades. Go and discuss whatever you need to. We’ll be here when you’re done.” Toph answered loudly, sitting sideways in the chair she was occupying.

“Thanks, guys.” Azula answered and after a short walk Navisi was in the private office that she shared with Azula. Aang continued looking uncomfortable. But he was able to continue speaking.

“Well, guys, as you know, I’ve made, uhm, well, made good progress towards repopulating the Air Nomads. But, well, you see, Ty Lee and I have grown close over the months since we spent time together in Kyoshi Island.” Aang said, taking Ty Lee’s hand and smiling at her. “And, well, I was hoping that in the future I would be able to spend my life with her, and only her. I mean, with potentially five pregnancies, especially with Ty Lee having triplets, I was hoping that I wouldn’t have to spend time with other women.”

He paused, looking nervous, but Azula chimed in before he could start speaking again. “Of course, Aang. I for one am happy that you and Ty Lee wish to pursue a monogamous relationship; if even half of the pregnancies result in airbenders, then your people are well on their way to being reestablished.”

It was almost comical how relieved that Aang and Ty Lee both looked. Navisi decided to put her two urvans in. “You two are perfect together, and I’m very happy for both of you.”

“Everyone will be happy for the two of you. Both of you are allowed to enjoy a bit of happiness for yourselves.” Li Nu added.

“You’re both wonderful people and you have our permission to enjoy each other. Not that you needed it.” Azula said.

“Thanks, guys! You don’t know how much this means to us. We want to rebuild the Air Nomads, but we want to be together too.” Ty Lee said, looking down. “I know that he did what he had to do, but I really don’t like the idea of him being with other women.”

“I understand, Ty Lee. You both deserve some happiness.” Azula said as she stepped forward and hugged her friend. It still warmed Navisi’s heart to see that people actually loved and cared for Azula and valued her friendship like Navisi did.

“Thanks, Azula. But we better let Aang and the others go back to the world and do their thing.” Ty Lee said, continuing to squeeze Azula.

“Yeah, I’d love to stay, but we have the big votes coming up. We need to make sure that everything is on the level and that the will of the people is respected.” Aang said with a sigh.

“You guys are doing a great job,” Navisi assured him. “We hope that these votes bring peace to the world. Everyone can go with the system that they believe is right.”

“Thank you, Navisi. I hope that things work out to everyone’s satisfaction. But one thing I’ve learned is that you can’t please all the people all the time.” Aang responded with a huff.

“You’re getting wiser, Aang. Let’s get you back to the others so that you can go do your Avatar thing. The world needs you.” Azula answered with a smile. Everyone was smiling as they went to join the others.

Navisi truly hoped that these votes would help Aang restore balance to the world.

Chapter Text

Aang could barely hear himself think as the crowd roared in approval when the results were announced. The Northwest Colony, held by the Fire Nation for several generations, is now an independent nation. It has christened itself the Republic of Hinva. The name came from the main character from an ancient legend about the founder of the Neiratan Tribe.

He sees that even some of the Fire Nation guards and soldiers are smiling and cheering. This is where things are expected to get contentious. Many of the soldiers and guards were born and raised here, but still consider themselves Fire Nation. Some wish to return to the Fire Nation or at least have dual citizenship. These things still need to be negotiated.

He saw the wide grin on Katara’s face also; she disliked the Fire Nation and was ecstatic to see these people freed from the yoke of their oppressors. But there was something more going on with her though. Things had been different ever since he answered Azula’s call to repopulate the Air Nomads.

He was distracted from his musings as Jiva, the Chairman of the Interim Republic Council, approached Aang. In his mid-fifties with gray beginning to streak his black hair, he was a tall and genial man with exceptional charisma. It wasn’t a surprise that the people elected him to head the transition from being a Fire Nation colony to being an independent republic.

“Avatar Aang and Ambassador Katara, I would like to thank you for all your support in making this wonderful moment possible. And please convey our gratitude to the People’s Princess; her writings were the blueprint for the process of creating our nation and helped galvanize our resolve around a realistic plan.”

“You are most welcome, Chairman Jiva. We had the opportunity to speak with her just a few weeks ago, and she was very excited to see that you had taken her plans to heart. She truly respects your people and wishes you the best going forward.” Aang responded. Jiva’s beaming smile was contagious and both Aang and Katara couldn’t help but grin.

“Do you think that she would be willing to come and speak with us about her plan?” Jiva asked, looking a little nervous. Aang knew that they all considered Azula to be some sort of larger-than-life prophet.

“Azula told us that while she would not interfere in the referendums themselves, she was more than happy to discuss ideas regarding governance and economics with any nation that wished to speak with her after the results were in. Your new republic included.” Katara announced, causing Jiva’s smile to again look like it might break his face in half.

The rest of the afternoon was spent meeting and greeting the transition teams as well as discussing matters with representatives from both the Fire Nation and SDC. And they received a letter via Omnisae telling of the vote in the Fire Colony.

The Fire Colony had voted to split into two parts. The larger part along the coast voted to stay with the Fire Nation, while the northeastern section voted to become independent. Although both he and Katara knew that they would probably merge with one of the three territories bordering them: the newly christened Republic of Hinva, Alokhai, or the Central Earth Kingdom. Although, that decision would probably wait to see what came of the negotiations between the Earth Kingdom and the Central Earth Kingdom.

Rajeen and Ivaku had made their way back to Ho Kun to restart negotiations. The Magisters of the Jade Transcendence seemed to quickly establish a strong and viable government. Aang seriously hoped that they would be able to stabilize the political situation in Ba Sing Se. Min Kai would be the lead negotiator for the Magisters; both Aang and Katara had been happy to see that she had survived the regime change. She had been pretty much the only competent member of the Hirythracastin Ascension of Glorious Illumination that they had met.

After enjoying festivities with the inhabitants of the newly formed republic, Aang and Katara made their way back up to their separate rooms. He noticed that she looked more and more thoughtful as they approached their quarters.

“Can we talk for a few minutes?” Katara asked in a quiet voice.

“Of course.” Aang responded, sensing the nervousness of his negotiating partner. He followed her into her into her room and they took seats on the comfortable chairs next to her desk.

“There’s something that I’ve been wanting to talk to you about.” Katara started, wringing her hands nervously. This is a tic that he’s noticed becomes more pronounced when talking about uncomfortable personal topics. “I greatly enjoy working with you, Aang, and I feel that we’ve accomplished so much together. But I feel that now is a good time for me to step back and help my own people.”

Aang was disappointed, but not entirely surprised. “If that’s what you want, Katara, I won’t try to stop you. I’ve loved working with you too, but I know how much your people mean to you.”

“You mean a lot to me too, Aang. But with Azula’s return and you being with Ty Lee, I feel that you don’t need me to be involved as much. I’m really happy that you and Ty Lee are together; you really do fit together well as a couple. And, let’s face it, triplets are a pretty impressive feat.” Katara said with a sad smile. “I’m sorry that we didn’t work romantically, but I’m glad that you found someone.”

“And you’ll find someone, too. You’re way too awesome to remain single if you don’t want to.” Aang answered, a wide smile on his face. It was true. Katara was awesome; she just wasn’t awesome as Aang’s girlfriend. She needed someone more in tune with her values and needs.

“Thanks, Aang. And with the connections that I’ve made as an ambassador, I’m in a great position to help my people grow and expand even more. You’ve become such a great and respected Avatar that I feel you will do great on your own. And with Azula’s enormous brain helping to solve problems before the rest of us even see them, I feel confident that the world is heading in the right direction.”

Aang had to laugh at that. “It is nice to have Azula back. She won’t be as involved as she used to be, but she definitely has the respect of the people.”

“I still want us to be friends. You will always hold a special place in my heart, Aang.” Tears fell down Katara’s cheeks.

“And you’ll always be special to me, too. We had a great run. Your people should be proud and honored at all that you’ve accomplished. You’ll be great as an ambassador and healer for your people.”

They both cried a little more and then Aang said goodnight and made his way back to his room. He always knew that Katara would want to return to her people eventually. It was one of the things that always kept them a little apart. Aang’s nomadic lifestyle as the Avatar was something that she could deal with in the short term, but long term he knew that she would chafe under his constant traveling, especially when children entered the picture.

Ty Lee wasn’t tied to a people like Katara was. He still worried how his travels would affect their relationship, but Ty Lee already stressed that she understood how it would be. And they shared a drive to rebuild the Air Nomads that he just didn’t believe Katara had. And he knew that was the key difference between the two women.

The results came in like many of them expected. The segregation of the firebending and earthbending populations had resulted in two different nations. But Mai knew that there was going to be trouble. Not everyone had segregated, and the minority benders in both regions had already been the victim of taunting and low scale violence and intimidation leading up to the referendum. She feared that it would only get worse. Unfortunately, the Fire Colony wasn’t nearly as progressive as Alokhai or the Fire Islands had been.

And she worried about the political ramifications for Zuko. Civil unrest in the Fire Nation had already been growing, and she feared that there would be an upswell of support for those in favor of removing Zuko from office. So many people were angry that all the deaths and suffering and sacrifice that the Fire Nation made over the past one hundred years had been for nothing.

But Mai personally didn’t believe that this was a bad thing. The Fire Nation had violently subjugated numerous people and used force to extract what it wanted from those conquered nations, with the Northwest Colony being the prime example. Had Azula’s plans for the Fire Nation and the Earth Colonies been put into action, perhaps the whole could have survived. But it wasn’t the Fire Nation way and now they had lost nearly everything.

But Mai had a duty to look out for the interests of the Fire Nation and the remaining remnant of the Fire Colony. The new, smaller Fire Colony was being called Muzai by the leaders of the Fire Nation supporters; named after the phoenix that helped raise the first Fire Lord in the legends of the Fire Nation’s origins. The colony Muzai would help the Fire Nation rise yet again.

As usual, she was preparing the meeting room for the intelligence update. Now that the referendums were complete, it was time for Lu Ten and his lieutenants to take stock of the situation. She had prepared notes on the expected boundaries between Muzai and whatever the earth portion of the former Fire Colony would be called, as well as projected intelligence gathered from the other regions. It was going to be a full session.

“Good morning, Mai.” Rifa said as she entered the room, giving Mai a friendly smile. “Thank you for compiling everything for the team. You’re the best.”

“Good morning, Rifa. Thank you for your kind words. This definitely going to be a more interesting meeting than usual.”

“You got that right, Mai. But hopefully things will settle down now.” Rifa’s grin suddenly became wider. “If anyone steps out of line now, they have to worry that Mistress Azula and her tentacles of death will fall from the sky on her dragon with great wrath and fury.”

Mai couldn’t help but give a slight smile at the thought. “Yes, she is even more terrifying than she was before she disappeared. Agni knows I never want to be on the receiving end of her wrath and fury.”

Further conversation was halted as Lu Ten and the rest of the crew made their way into the meeting room. As usual, Korvyn, Naazu and Kin Hai came in behind Lu Ten, and everyone quickly took their spot. There was a lot going on and there really wasn’t a lot of time for small talk.

“Kin Hai, why don’t you get us started with an update on what’s left of the Fire Colony.” Lu Ten suggested. Mai could hear the bitterness in his voice. He felt the sting of all the lost territories far more than Mai did.

“By area, two-thirds of the Fire Colony elected to remain with the Fire Nation. But the situation is slightly better than that number indicates. Nearly four-fifths of the colony’s population are located in Muzai, as it is popularly known, as well as more than ninety percent of the manufacturing base. Obviously, all of the ports remain in our control.” Hin Kai stated.

“However, several important mining sites are located in the seceded state. But given the strong economic relationship between the mining and manufacturing regions, there is hope that an amicable partnership can be maintained. Minister Horzun is leading Muzai’s delegation to negotiate economic relations; he is respected and well-liked by both parties, so the situation may not result in any disruptions to the status quo.”

“Yes, Minister Horzun has a deft touch concerning economics. Let’s hope that he can negotiate a viable and productive agreement between the nations.” Lu Ten sighed and turned his attention to another troubled region. “Naazu, what’s the situation with the Republic of Hinva.”

Mai was impressed with the amount of disgust that Lu Ten was able to infuse into the name of the new republic. If she noticed, Naazu wisely made no mention of it. “With the vote to create the Republic of Hinva, preparations are being made for the Fire Nation forces to withdraw from the region in an orderly fashion. The biggest issue is going to be separating the Fire Nation personnel from the Hinva personnel. Many soldiers and civil servants have Fire Nation citizenship but are requesting to stay in Hinva. The Fire Lord has decreed that anyone that stays in Hinva will be stripped of their Fire Nation citizenship.”

Mai struggled to contain her sigh. Zuko was adamantly refusing to do anything that would foster good relations between the Fire Nation and Hinva. Zuko was smart and had showed competency in nearly all other aspects of being Fire Lord, but he refused to learn from his mistakes in the Northwest Colony and now the Republic of Hinva. He had made a similar decree for Fire Nation personnel in the seceded porton of the Fire Colony.

“We will have to follow official policy. Keep us updated on how the process is affecting Hinva’s attitudes towards Muzai.” Lu Ten replied. “What of Alokhai and the Fire Islands?”

Lu Ten refused to use the name Freedom Islands. While Mai agreed that it was a stupid name, she also understood why they had selected it. Rifa spoke up with the regard to the two previous colonies of the Fire Nation.

“Despite their secession, both regions have maintained cordial relations with the Fire Nation. One-half of the Fire Nation military and civilian personnel requested to stay in the Freedom Islands and about three-fifths made the same request in Alokhai.”

The room was quiet as they contemplated those words. If they lose similar numbers in Hinva, the Fire Nation military was going to be dramatically diminished. Lu Ten just sighed and turned to Korvyn. “How are the Magisters of the Jade Transcendence doing in the Earth Kingdom?”

“By all accounts, they have completely stabilized the administration and have brought peace to the regions they control. Unlike the previous administrations, they are actively seeking out and recruiting the best talent they can find. They’ve even recruited administrators from the SDC to come in. Minister Min Kai is heading the delegation to negotiate a settlement with the Central Earth Kingdom.” Korvyn responded.

Mai was happy to hear that Min Kai had been brought into the new administration. The Little Hammer had a bright future ahead of her, especially since it seemed like nearly all of the other competent people in the Earth Kingdom had been purged. The Earth Kingdom needed all the great people they could get.

“That is good to hear. If the Earth Kingdom can be stabilized, that will help with many of the issues with the smaller nations. We’ll have to wait and see how it goes. What of the SDC?”

“The biggest issue seems to be the declining health of King Bumi. He recently contracted a nasty infection, and while he was able to fend it off, he was weakened and has started making preparations for a successor to assume control of the Omashu. His grandson, Buzin, has been groomed to take over. Smart and reliable, there are some concerns that he has a great deal of sympathy for the purity movements in Omashu. There are already rumblings from our sources that he may withdraw Omashu from the SDC and realign with the earthen nations.” Korvyn answered.

That thought saddened Mai. Bumi was a wild character and unorthodox leader, but he was definitely a calming presence in the world. Omashu’s exit from the SDC would have a much smaller affect than before the war, since the combined manufacturing capacity of the Freedom Islands and Alokhai were nearly equivalent to Omashu’s. But a leader in Omashu with earthbending purity beliefs would make life more difficult for Muzai.

“I see. King Bumi is a great man, and I will be sorry to see his reign end on both a personal and professional note, but we have to make plans to deal with the new reality.” Lu Ten turned to Mai. “How is Chief Turnok handling the new world situation in the Northern Water Tribe?”

“He’s opened up their economy and is loosening up many of the conservative restrictions that had caused so many of the younger people to flee their tribe. He has sent delegations to actively improve relations with Alokhai and the Republic of Hinva.” Mai responded. “He appears very keen to pull the Northern Water Tribe out of their isolation and engage more actively with the world.”

“Well, here’s hoping that he succeeds.” Lu Ten said, looking around the room. “Now that we have the general overview, let’s decide how we want to handle the new state of the world.”

Min Kai briskly walked to the table set up in the meeting hall. According to the reports that she had received, this was the same location as the previous negotiations between the Earth Kingdom and the Central Earth Kingdom. Although she guessed that she needed to get used to the Earth Kingdom’s new name, Zenthru. The Magisters had decided that since there was no longer a monarchy, being called the Earth Kingdom was something of a misnomer.

The Magisters had at least provided a small team to conduct the negotiations, with Min Kai as lead. They others were inexperienced, but the Magisters had asked her to help educate them and give them real world experience. Min Kai was happy to oblige. The more competent and experienced people in Zenthru, the better.

She was joined at the negotiation table by Jang, Kiv La and Soon. All were in their late twenties with varied backgrounds. Tall and quiet with a face that looked perpetually bored, Jang was actually quite intelligent and diligent; Min Kai had selected him to be her deputy for these negotiations. Kiv La was short and squat, with long brown hair that she wore back in a braid, much as Min Kai did. She had a very pleasant demeanor and was quite smooth with people. Min Kai had tasked her with mingling with the other delegates and try to build back door interpersonal relationships. Soft diplomacy was an underestimated skill.

Soon was the shortest of the group, excluding Min Kai, but was very knowledgeable about economics and logistics. Unfortunately, she was also abrasive and short-tempered. But she seemed to work well with the team, and Min Kai and Kiv La had been coaching her to be less aggressive in her speech. She was a work in progress, to say the least.

The Central Earth Kingdom was also setting up. Min Kai gave a friendly nod of greeting, which was returned by all the delegates. She noted that the rest of her team had given nods also. Even Soon. This negotiation was already off to a better start than any of the ones she attended with Mavong.

Everyone was seated and ready to go when the main doors opened and Successor Rajeen and Ambassador Ivaku entered. Ivaku headed to their table as Rajeen addressed the two delegations. “It is my honor to preside over these negotiations between your two peoples. For those that don’t already know me, I am Successor Rajeen of Rokishe. I am being ably assisted by Ambassador Ivaku of Omashu.”

She paused for a moment as she smiled and looked around at the assembled group. “Would the Westland Freedom delegation like to give their opening statement?”

“Yes, Successor.” The short, skinny man with black hair said, rising to his feet. Minister Gu Ya. He had a reputation for being able and well-respected, solid if unspectacular.

“The Central Earth Kingdom has seen regime after regime come and go in Ba Sing Se, each incompetent and self-centered. And when disaster had struck, and the Central Earth Kingdom needed assistance, what did we receive? Virtually nothing.” Gu Ya said, looking around at the assembled group. “And I mean no disrespect to Minister Min Kai, for I know that you came to the aid of our people and saw active duty in the war against the invaders. I salute you for your service. But your actions alone cannot redeem an entire people.”

“The Central Earth Kingdom has established our own administration and forged bonds with other nations, including the Northwest Colony, which has just become the Republic of Hinva. We will no longer be pawns of the regime in Ba Sing Se.” Gu Ya concluded. He bowed to Rajeen and Ivaku before returning to his table.

Successor Rajeen turned to Min Kai. “Are you prepared to give your opening statement, Minister Min Kai?”

“Yes, I am.” Min Kai answered, standing and moving to the floor between the tables so that she was better suited to address the assembled parties. “The Earth Kingdom was a failed state from the moment that King Kuei was returned to the throne. And none of the successor regimes were able to halt the not so slow and steady decline of my people. But the Magisters of the Jade Transcendence have halted that slide and have a worthwhile program in place to improve the lot of my nation.”

“But the damage done by the previous regimes has created too much strife for our people to go back to the way that things were. Too many talented and experienced people were lost to the Spike. Relations with other nations were damaged when treaties were abandoned. The Magisters recognize this and are not trying to hold onto the past; instead, they have chosen to look to the future. I have been given permission to allow the Central Earth Kingdom to create their own independent state.” She paused at the eruption of cheers and applause from many of the observers.

“But I have been asked to negotiate a treaty that will allow our people to be good neighbors. We still have cultural and economic ties that the Magisters hope will continue to link our peoples. Our new nation, Zenthru, has no desire to hold your people hostage. We want you to create the nation you deserve, but just as importantly, we want our two nations to remain friends and help each other grow and prosper.” Min Kai bowed to Rajeen and Ivaku and took her seat at the negotiation table.

She suppressed the frown that was trying to make its way onto her face at just how happy the other delegation appeared to be. But she understood why they would wish to be independent. But it still pained her to see her country divided like this. But this was her reality, and she had been asked to achieve a very specific goal. Establish good relations with the new independent Central Earth Kingdom.

And the Little Hammer was determined to get the job done.

Zuko couldn’t believe all that had been lost. The history books would undoubtedly deem him to be a failure. One hundred years of territorial gains lost in five years. Granted, he hadn’t been the Fire Lord when they lost the Earth Kingdom, but he had negotiated the treaty. But the smaller fire colony, Muzai, remained loyal to the Fire Nation and was the most industrialized place on Atla. The Fire Nation was still strong. And Zuko would make sure that it stayed that way.

He heard the boots on the marble floor before they reached his office. And he felt that something was wrong. Perhaps he was being paranoid, but he knew that there might be another attempt on his life.

He signaled the guards and everyone took up positions. Zuko’s heart froze when he heard the voice calling out to him. Lord Waihu’s voice showed none of its usual deference. “Fire Lord Zuko, you are hereby being relieved of your position due to the gross negligence by which you have governed our great nation. Surrender now and you will be treated with dignity and respect; fight and you will be treated as a traitor to your people.”

“It is you that that is a traitor to your people, Waihu! Your dishonor will be known throughout the Fire Nation when I am done with you!” Zuko answered, feeling his inner flame swell. With Izuka in the SDC and Uncle in Muzai, there was no one in the Fire Nation that could even come close to matching his firebending skill.”

The sound of fighting cascaded through the air. Apparently not everyone had betrayed him. But first he had to deal with the threat in front of him and find his family. He had never learned to summon lightning, but he had quite a few other tricks up his sleeve.

He twirled his body thrust his arms forward while twisting his wrists, unleashing a tight column of fire through the door. And when the column had nearly reached group of traitors, he spread his arms and the fire became two dozen daggers of fire that hurtled at his enemies at high speed.

Several of the traitors were able to bend fast enough to deflect the onslaught, but about a half dozen others were cut down where they stood. As Zuko’s guards launched their own attacks at the traitors, Zuko continued his onslaught, driving the traitors back.

More soldiers approached the fray though, and Zuko was barely able to bend their attacks away in time. There were too many to fight, and he felt himself being pushed back.

“Lord Zuko, we have to retreat. The path to the outer courtyard is clear.” He heard his head guard, Omat, say. Zuko knew that he was right, they were being overwhelmed.

“Let’s go.” Zuko ordered as they started marching backwards, deflecting the traitors’ attacks as he went. “Where is my wife and daughter?”

Zuko could barely hear Omat’s reply over the roar of battle. “I don’t know, Lord Zuko. But we are in no position to look for them; we need to get you to safety.”

Zuko unleashed a huge wall of flames at his attackers as he felt himself fill with rage. If they harmed his family, he would kill each and every traitor in the country!

But there was nothing to be done; his group was nearly overwhelmed as they had to quickly retreat to keep from being overrun. They made it to the outside courtyard when a group of soldiers attacked the traitors, cutting off their pursuit of Zuko.

“We have to retreat, Lord Zuko. The palace is being overrun. The royal guardsmen are loyal, but we aren’t enough.” Omat pleaded. “You can’t help your family if they kill you. They will turn the people against them if they harm your family now.”

Zuko gritted his teeth. It tore his heart in two, but there was nothing to be done. This battle was lost and the only way to save his family was to gather his forces and regain control of his country.

“Order your guards to pull back. We need to retreat and figure out who we can trust.” Zuko ordered. Omat and his team immediately started marching Zuko through the courtyard and out of the palace grounds. Hundreds of loyalist guards and soldiers joined him as he retreated.

He looked back and observed the smoke rising from the palace. It broke his heart to leave his family behind, but there was nothing to be done for them now. But he would gather his forces and return for them.

Chapter Text

The letter had been sent to his home with a contingent of fifty armed soldiers; the document politely requested his presence at an emergency meeting of the Muzai Advisory Council. But Lu Ten knew exactly what it was. A summons. But the most disturbing aspect of the situation was the man that had been sent to deliver the letter.

Lieutenant Korvyn.

“What is the meaning of this, Korvyn?” Lu Ten asked, doing everything that he could to keep his voice calm.

“The governor and the council will explain. I was asked to deliver the message and to convey their assurances that you are highly respected by all parties involved and that there is no danger to you or Lady Sinlao.” Korvyn answered, looking Lu Ten in the eye.

This did a good bit to calm Lu Ten down; Korvyn was a good man and could be trusted to speak truly in matters such as these. He glanced at the ladies flanking him; to the right he saw Sinlao eyeing Korvyn warily while Mai stood to his left, looking calm but undoubtedly ready to unleash a hail of blades at a moment’s notice.

“I accept the invitation to speak with Governor Sheng and the council. But they had better have a good explanation for this.” Lu Ten made sure to put a bit of iron in his voice.

“Of course, Crown Prince.” Korvyn responded.

Lu Ten and the two ladies were led out to the awaiting carriage that would take them to the main administration building. They sat quietly until the carriage started moving.

“Do you believe that the Governor is going to declare independence for Muzai?” Mai asked.

Lu Ten considered. That had been his first thought, but upon further inspection it didn’t seem as likely. “I don’t think so. Support for the Fire Nation is strong and the people overwhelmingly voted to remain part of the Fire Nation. I fear that the governor may decide to back the rebels against Zuko.”

That terrible thought occupied their minds for the short ride to the administration building. The small group quickly exited the carriage and were escorted into the main chamber of the council. Where Lu Ten’s heart sank again.

Standing along the wall, behind the council, were Kin Hai, Rifa and Naazu. They had all betrayed him. He was pulled from his thoughts as Governor Sheng spoke.

“Welcome, Crown Prince. We apologize for the suddenness of our request, but we felt that it was in Muzai’s best interest to take strong and immediate action to deal with the civil war engulfing the islands of the Fire Nation.”

“And what strong and immediate action is that, Governor?” Lu Ten asked.

“We are set to announce our neutral status in the civil war. We will honor our trade contracts with all parties of the Fire Nation, but we will not send any troops or other military support to interfere in the conflict.”

Lu Ten was dumbfounded. “Lord Zuko is the duly appointed Fire Lord of the Fire Nation. To not offer assistance is treason.”

Governor Sheng sighed. “Lord Zuko is indeed the duly appointed Fire Lord. And he has done nothing but bring our people to the brink of collapse. He has horribly mismanaged the situation with the Northwest Colony. He launched an unprovoked invasion of our neighbor and proceeded to give away a loyal and productive member of the Fire Nation to buy allies in his war of aggression.”

“Muzai is tired of fighting and conflict. The people want jobs and stability and peace. If Lord Zuko wins this conflict, Muzai will respect his rule and negotiate an agreement of partnership. Should Lord Waihu’s faction win, we will negotiate a working relationship with them also. But Muzai will not send any more of our youth to be slaughtered in yet another senseless conflict.”

Lu Ten was dumbfounded. How could they turn on the Fire Nation like this. “Then why am I here? Am I to be thrown in prison?”

“No, Crown Prince. You are a good man and you have the respect of all of Muzai. Until the civil war is over, however, your royal status is suspended. We humbly ask that you remain in your position of Chief Intelligence Officer, but you will no longer have any authority as the Crown Prince to direct the affairs of Muzai.”

“You expect me to assist your government as it engages in an act of treason?” Lu Ten snarled, his anger growing.

Governor Sheng sighed. “We understand that this is a difficult position for you. But you have to see it from our point of view also. Lord Zuko’s reign has been nothing short of disastrous for the Fire Nation. I have worked with Lord Zuko and I know him to be a good and honorable man, but he has refused to listen to the counsel of his advisors when it goes against his ill-conceived hopes and wishes. Princess Azula and the Northwest Colony. Colonel Liao and the Central Earth Kingdom. Your intelligence regarding the SDC’s improved naval capabilities.”

“Muzai supports the Fire Nation, but we will not continue enabling the poor policy decisions of Fire Lord Zuko.” Governor Sheng paused for a moment as he gestured to one of the officials. Said official stood and handed a scroll to Lu Ten. “For the record, we received an order from Lord Zuko that you were not to be allowed to travel to the Fire Nation. His advisors are concerned that you would side with the rebels and make a play for his throne. You may read the document for yourself.”

Lu Ten opened the scroll and his heart sank as he reviewed the document. It was just as Sheng said. The protocols were all in place; this was an official document issued by Zuko’s government. He made his decision.

“I accept your stipulations, Governor. I will continue in my role as Chief Intelligence Officer.” Lu Ten answered to the assembled group. He looked at his lieutenants as they gazed back, knowing that they recognized the look in his eyes. He would work with them, but he would never fully trust them again.

But at least Sinlao and Mai had stood beside him. And for now, that was enough to give him strength to persevere.

“And that is why the festival schedules rotate between the two sets of air temples; with the Northern and Southern air temples being entirely composed of men and the Eastern and Western temples temples being exclusively occupied by women, these festivals allowed for a mixing of the two populations.” Navisi explained to the air acolytes.

Azula and Ty Lee sat in the back as Navisi conducted her study sessions. Navisi was a natural teacher and had a good rapport with the students; she was kind and patient in a way that was not natural to Azula.

“Uhm, Mistress Navisi, according to the schedule that you’ve taught us, the Festival of Enlightened Detachment is in two months.” Yee-Li said, waving her hand to get Navisi’s attention.

Navisi answered with a smile. “Yes, it is. Do you have a question about the festival?”

“Not exactly. Xing Ying and I were talking and we think it might be a nice idea to celebrate the festival in Gir Mirath. We’ve been studying the performance rituals and we think that it would be a good way to show people that the ways of the Air Nomads aren’t completely gone.” Yee-Li responded, with Xing Ying nodding her tattoed head enthusiastically.

Navisi looked up and locked eyes with Azula. Azula gave a why not shrug. Navisi looked back to the expectant acolytes. “I think that would be a great idea, Yee-Li. We’ll have to run the idea by the City Council, but I don’t expect there to be any opposition to the idea. If they agree, who would take point in making the arrangements?”

“I would love to do it, Mistress Navisi!” Xing Ying exclaimed. Azula couldn’t help but smile at the girl’s enthusiasm. She gave Ty Lee a run for the money in terms of good cheer.

“That sounds great, Xing Ying. You can get started after lunch. According to the schedule, you and Mun Zo are on duty with me. We’re going to be making Hanyou Rif for lunch. It’s one of my personal favorite Air Nomad dishes, so you better be ready to learn.” Navisi answered.

And with that, the three cooks made their way to the kitchen to begin the meal preparation. The other four acolytes made their way to carry out their own specific lists of chores. It had only been two weeks, but the group was beginning to establish a rhythm like the one Azula had followed on Air Temple Island. Once the group was more established and trained, Aang had wanted to begin bonding air bison calves. Navisi had been over the moon when he suggested that she bond the first one, since she had real world experience grooming and caring for them. Aang had tentatively offered one to Azula, but she had declined, as he must have expected. It seemed greedy to have both a magic dragon and an air bison.

She walked with Ty Lee out to the courtyard; Ty Lee wanted to remain active and fit, so she did lots of walking and hiking in between chores. Azula joined her occasionally; she had missed her friend during her travels and enjoyed spending time with her now that they were reunited.

They walked and chatted amicably for a few minutes before Ty Lee brought up an issue that had been weighing heavy on both their minds. “I’m worried about Zuko and the Fire Nation; I know that he’s made mistakes and that our people have done bad things, but I hate seeing them torn apart like this.”

Azula sighed. “I agree, Ty Lee. Everyone but them seems tired of fighting. Even Muzai has said that enough is enough.”

It had been telling that Muzai had refused to support either side in the conflict; they pledged to work with the leadership of the victor but would not send any of their soldiers back to the islands to die in this civil war. Governor Sheng had made it very clear that Muzai was tired of war and strife and violence.

Lu Ten had wanted Muzai to come to Zuko’s aid, but support from the people was tepid at best. Azula thinks that nearly everyone was tired of conflict; the people wanted peace and prosperity instead of war and glory.

“I’m glad that they don’t want to fight. And it breaks my heart that both sides refuse to let Aang help negotiate a peace agreement. Is it just our world, or are the people in the other worlds war mongers too?” Ty Lee asked, staring at Azula.

Azula didn’t think answering that question was breaking any of the rules set up by the intermediaries. “People are much the same in every world I walked. But the biggest difference is that the other Zuko’s had a more varied life experience and a better understanding of the needs of the common folk. That experience made him more empathetic and open-minded.”

That was probably what set this world apart from the others; those little details like Zuko’s banishment and the bonding experience of the Gaang. They didn’t forge those bonds in this Atla like they did in the others. But none of those other worlds heard the voices of people like Hun Ro, Ivaku and the Matrons. If there was one thing that this world had going for it, was that Rokishe and Lenth hadn’t been ravaged during the war like in every other world she visited. A second thing was that Novae had completed the Mechanical Thinker and its successor, the Engraved Thinker.

“Did you meet me in the other worlds?” Ty Lee suddenly asked.

Azula turned to see Ty Lee watching her. Azula smiled. “I met you twice and I’m pleased to say that you were happy in both worlds.”

She was rewarded by a big smile. “Hearing that pinkens my aura. I bet Mai was still a sourpuss though.”

Azula burst out laughing. Mainly because it was at least partially true. But Mai was relatively stoic in all the worlds, just as it seems that Ty Lee was destined to be chipper and outgoing. And Azula wouldn’t change a thing about either of them.

It pained Min Kai to see her fellow countryman go their own way, but she was satisfied that relations between the new nation and Zenthru would remain cordial and productive. The trade discussions had gone smoothly; Soon was very knowledgeable about economic matters and had provided a good framework for discussions.

And Min Kai and Kiv La had established good working relationship with several of the leading delegates. This would hopefully prove beneficial when the two sides needed to smooth out some of the details of the arrangement as conditions changed and evolved. Min Kai knew that these things never worked exactly like they were written on paper.

Jang wasn’t as good with people, but he had built a professional relationship with Minister Gu Ya that boded well for future relations between the two nations. Things had gone about as well as possible. Both sides were content with the new agreement and good will had been established.

But now it was time to begin looking towards the next mission. Mistress Azula had called for the creation of a Pan-Earth Continent council where the earth nations could come together and discuss issues that affected them all. The Jade Ministers had asked her to travel to Hinva with her team to represent the interests of Zenthru.

Successor Rajeen and Ambassador Ivaku were also attending on behalf of Rokishe; the Central Earth Kingdom already had delegates there so Minister Gu Ya was going to remain behind to help his new country establish itself.

Rajeen had invited Min Kai and her crew to fly to Hinva on their airship; Min Kai immediately accepted, of course. On a professional level, she had nothing but respect for the two women. And she liked them on a personal level.

Min Kai had never flown on an airship before, but she could definitely understand why this was a preferred mode of transportation for many world travelers. She decided to see if her hosts would indulge some of her curiosity.

“I hope that I’m not prying, but is it true that you traveled extensively with Princess Azula on an airship such as this? Back before she disappeared?” Min Kai asked the waterbender.

Ivaku smiled. “Yes, I did. It was a wild and eventful journey around the world traveling with Azula. That girl led the most exciting life of any person that I’ve ever met. And I’m including the Avatar in that assessment.”

“We’ve heard a lot of rumors about some of her adventures, but frankly we think that they’ve been embellished. There aren’t any such things as brainbenders.” Soon said, bluntly but not offensively. Min Kai counted that as an improvement.

But Ivaku just laughed. “It happened just before I met her. Combustion bending is a subset of firebending, where explosive chi energy is projected through the Light chakra on the forehead.” Her expression turned more serious. “According to Azula, the combustion bender was seven feet tall and weighed about four hundred pounds. He killed ten people and crippled several others before Azula and her team were able kill him.”

Min Kai just stared at Ivaku, trying to determine if she was telling the truth. And Min Kai’s blood ran cold when she realized that the waterbender was dead serious.

Ivaku continued talking. “About a week after that, she traveled to Agna Qel’a, where she was involved in a fight to the death with the man who held me in slavery. She easily killed him and became my new owner. After that we traveled the world and met wonderful people and had incredible adventures; some of which I still have a hard time believing. We went our separate ways after she convinced the Avatar to emancipate me. And from what she’s told me, she had even wilder adventures before she returned to us.”

Everyone was silent as they digested the words that Ivaku just said. When no one spoke up again, Ivaku continued. “I tell you this so that you don’t try to pry into Mistress Azula’s past. She is a great woman who has done great things for the people of Atla. But she doesn’t like to speak of these things.”

“Of course, Ivaku. We will not pry into her disappearance.” Min Kai answered, even though she, like nearly everyone else on Atla, wondered where Azula had gone when she disappeared. But she guessed that she may never find out. But Min Kai vowed to uphold her word; she wouldn’t pry into Azula’s past. The woman had more than earned the right to privacy.

The two groups chatted amicably for a while longer before Min Kai pulled her group aside to the information that they had received about the other parties attending the talks about the Pan Earth Continent council. Min Kai had met some of them, but there were still a few that she hadn’t encountered yet.

The basic plan was similar to what they had done in Ho Kun. Min Kai and Jang would be the front to discuss policy and international relations, while Kiv La would again launch a charm campaign to build relations with the less visible members of the other delegations. She was also to sit in with Soon at the economics discussions; the intensive personal coaching Soon received had smoothed out many of her rough edges, but Kiv La would be on hand to help if she got worked up.

Min Kai was confident that everyone was on the same page as the airship made its final approach to Pu Nok, the Hinvan town that would be hosting the talks. She was talking with Jang when she heard the frightened voice of Kiv La.

“There’s a dragon outside!” Kiv La exclaimed, pointing out a starboard window. Min Kai felt her intestines tighten as she watched the black and gold dragon match their altitude and general speed. It was about a hundred yards from the airship, but it didn’t appear to be threatening.

“There’s no need to be alarmed. That’s just Kivathrystan, Azula’s magic dragon. She enjoys escorting airships for some reason.” Rajeen said, the smile evident in her voice.

Min Kai had heard the stories of a dragon, but she wasn’t sure that Rajeen meant by magic. Jang got the question out faster than she did. “What is a magic dragon?”

Rajeen sighed before answering. “I don’t have an answer for that. All I know is that it was a gift to her from a very powerful spirit and that she is intelligent and loyal to Azula.”

That explanation didn’t really clear much up for Min Kai and, judging by the looks on the faces of her fellow delegates, they were still confused too. But their eyes were drawn to the dragon as it slowly drifted away from the airship and flew away.

The rest of the descent was smooth and the airship landed without any further incidents. Min Kai’s team followed Rajeen and Ivaku out of the airship, and Min Kai felt herself flush with excitement as she saw who was waiting to greet them at the airship dock.

Mistress Azula.

“Welcome to Hinva, world travelers. It’s good to see you again, ladies.” Azula said as she hugged Rajeen and Ivaku.

“It’s great to be here, Azula.” Ivaku said once she had broken her embrace. “Allow me to introduce the delegates from Zenthru. This is Minister Min Kai, head delegate. She’s ably joined by Jang, Kiv La and Soon.”

Min Kai and the rest of her team bowed to Azula. She could hear the smile in Azula’s voice as she greeted them. “It is an honor to meet all of you. I’ve been hearing tales of the Little Hammer for a while now; it’s nice to be able to finally put a face to the name.”

“The honor is all mine, Mistress Azula.” Min Kai answered, proud that her voice didn’t quiver. “We look forward to working with you to bring the nations of the Earth Continent into harmony.”

“I hope that all the delegates come with that same sort of positive attitude. But come inside and get yourselves situated. Several of the other delegations have arrived and I’d be happy to make introductions to those you haven’t met yet.”

Azula talked with all the members of Min Kai’s delegation as they made their way inside. And to no one’s surprise, she was soon involved in a very technical discussion of tariff policies with Soon. Min Kai thought things were off to a good start here in Hinva.

“Shut the damn imp up or I will do it myself!” Hulan yelled, causing Izumi to cry even louder.

“She’s just a child and you’re frightening her!” Yue yelled back, holding Izumi close, desperately trying to get her to become quiet. She turned so that Izumi wasn’t close enough to be struck by the angry man. But there was nowhere for Yue to go where she was out of the man’s reach.

The openhanded slap was shockingly loud and Yue felt herself lose her balance. She twisted as much as she could to ensure that she didn’t land on Izumi or her unborn child as she fell to the floor. The stinging pain radiated across her face as she looked up at the man.

“No wonder the Zuko was such a piss-poor Fire Lord; he couldn’t even teach his bitch to mind her betters here in the palace.” Hulan said in a deep and menacing voice. Just over six feet tall and well-muscled, he was a cruel and ignorant man. But he had all the power here. “Apologize, or I’ll kick the squawking child of yours to death right in front of you. You’re about to pump another one out anyway; we don’t need any extra mouths to feed.”

“I’m sorry, Hulan.” Yue said in a quiet voice, not daring to meet his eyes.

“Remember this moment. Don’t ever speak to me disrespectfully again.” And to Yue’s relief, the man turned and walked out of the room, presumably to take his spot outside the door.

Three days. They were taking her and Izumi out of the palace and deep into the mountains in the northwest part of the island. Zuko may never be able to find them if they are hidden away there. The extensive cave system made it a haven for criminals and malcontents who never want to be found by the authorities.

She set Izumi down on the floor as she clumsily crawled to the small bed so that she could pull herself to her feet. Izumi threw herself back into Yue’s arms once she was able to sit on the bed. Yue squeezed her baby tight. Tears fell down her cheeks as she contemplated her situation. She knew that many of the palace staff were sympathetic to her plight, but they all feared their overlords.

It hadn’t been so bad at first. Lord Waihu and General Liao had ensured that they were treated well. But then things started to get worse for the rebel forces. General Liao had left to help them drive back Zuko’s army. And then Lord Waihu had become too busy to check on her. She didn’t even know if he was still in the palace.

But without their supervision, the guards had become surlier and meaner as the fortunes of the rebel forces had turned. She truly feared what would happen when they took her from the palace. But she was in no condition to try and escape and she didn’t trust anyone to smuggle Izumi out. All that she could hope is that the loyalists would come for them.

Yue bowed her head and prayed to Tui and La and any other Great Spirit that was listening.

Chapter Text

Her parents were self-centered asskissers, but they had influence and contacts throughout the Fire Nation. And Mai wasn’t ashamed to use them to her own advantage when the need arose. And the information that she had received was disturbing.

Fire Lady Yue and Princess Izumi were being held in the palace, but Zuko’s forces had regrouped and were slowly driving towards the Caldera. It may be days or weeks, but the tide had turned and the loyalists were inexorably pushing the rebels back.

Seeing this, the rebels were apparently making plans to move Zuko’s family deeper into the rebel-controlled territory. And her sources mentioned that more hardline rebels were gaining influence as the cause lost the momentum they had in the early days of the coup. Lord Waihu and General Liao were steadily losing power as hardliners criticized their handling of the rebellion.

It was unclear how long Zuko’s family would be safe in the hands of the rebels.

Mai knew that if things became desperate, Zuko’s family could become bargaining chips; and with Yue eight months pregnant, the rebels would have a third hostage soon.

While she had contacts and sources, she didn’t have any operatives that she could trust to extract Zuko’s family. It appears that security was tight and only the most loyal and hardcore members of the rebel forces were guarding them.

Mai sighed as she went to her desk and collected her thoughts. Soon enough, she knew what she wanted to say and she quickly wrote the letter and posted it. All that she could do now was wait.

“The Earth Continent should be for earth nationals! We have formed our new government with this thought firmly in our minds.” The Central Earth Kingdom delegate, Linvik, exclaimed to the assembled party.

Zin Tee quietly sighed but kept his opinion to himself. He was saddened to hear this, but he knew that it was a common sentiment in many parts of the Earth Continent. The Fire Nation had instilled a great fear of firebenders in many people and waterbenders were considered untrustworthy cowards since the Northern Water Tribe chose to hide behind their ice walls while the rest of the world was ravaged. Many also felt that the southern city-states like Rokishe, Lenth and Kyoshi Island had abandoned their fellow earth citizens when they remained neutral.

“Our history has shown that balance is best achieved when the four nations are held separately, with benders remaining with their own kind.” The Omashu lead delegate, Hung Hu, interjected. “It is not a matter of hate, but a matter of balance through separation. Like with like.”

This was the most disturbing thing part of the council. Hun Ro had been placed in the economics council led by Azula rather than the international relations council led by Aang. Zin Tee’s fears were coming true; with Bumi’s health declining and his grandson taking more responsibility, Omashu was pivoting away from the SDC and towards the greater Earth Continent.

Zin Tee decided that he couldn’t sit and listen to this claptrap in silence. “Alokhai has flourished by leveraging the skills of talented people from all three bending styles. We are proof that people of different backgrounds and bending statuses can live together in harmony.”

“You are a nation of sycophants that allowed the Fire Nation to control you while you obediently toiled under their yoke like goat-sheep. No one wants to hear the opinions of cowards and perverts.” Linvik retorted, causing the entire assembly to roar. Many in defense of Alokhai but a sizeable number in agreement with Linvik.

“You should be ashamed to even voice such backward thoughts in polite company. Harmony and balance are found by cooperation and understanding, not hate and belligerence.” Rajeen bellowed, effectively overriding all of the other chatter.

“Tell that to the Fire Nation!” Linvik retorted.

“You speak of them with contempt, yet you spout words of hate and vitriol that even the Fire Nation itself never used. At no time during their occupation did they try to segregate people based on bending status.” Rajeen pounded the table and rose to her feet. “You shouldn’t invoke the name of your enemy if the behavior you propose is even worse than theirs.”

Linvik rose to his feet also and was about to speak when the Avatar’s voice cut off all thoughts of further argument. “Enough! These proceedings will remain civil. I understand that emotions are high on this subject; strife and conflict have been the main means by which the different benders have interacted. But historically, benders have been segregated by bending status. The Air Nomads, Fire Nation, Earth Kingdom and Water Tribes have their affiliations listed in their names for all to see.”

Zin Tee couldn’t believe the words that just came out of the Avatar’s mouth. Was he actually agreeing with the hatemongers?

“And how has that worked out, Avatar?” Rajeen asked, breaking the suffocating silence. “Again and again, conflicts arise and the Avatar must intercede to restore balance. Chin the Conqueror. The Usurper Saga. The Breathtaker Insurrection. Mistress Azula has been preaching a new message. The ways of the past won’t take us into the future.”

“Mistress Azula is a brilliant woman, but she doesn’t have access to the collective wisdom of hundreds of past lives.” Aang retorted.

“Perhaps not, but none of your past lives have provided any long-term solutions to the world’s problems, despite having untold hundreds of opportunities to do so. Mistress Azula has provided a path to reshaping the world and raising the living standards of everyone, regardless of bending status. I’m in favoring of trying something new rather than rehash the mistakes of the past.” Rajeen answered. She held up her hands and took a deep breath. “I don’t mean to be disrespectful, Avatar, but the balance the Avatars keep preaching sounds more like wishful thinking than an actual way of life.”

“It is thinking like that keeps forcing the world out of balance.” Aang retorts, his face neutral but a little bit of anger seeping into his voice.

“You may be right, but who says that the Avatar should continue pulling the strings of the world? The SDC fought to allow Alokhai, the Freedom Islands and Hinva to have the right to self-determination. Perhaps the world should have a vote whether we should continue bowing to the authority of the Avatar.” Rajeen and the Avatar stared at each other.

“Successor Rajeen makes a good point. Why does the Avatar have the right to rule over us and tell us how to live?” Zin Tee interjects. It pained him to speak against the Avatar, but the words he spoke about separating the nations by bending again stands against everything that he believes in. “Bending status shouldn’t dictate who are.”

“You are childish fools if you believe that I am going to stand aside while the world falls out of balance. The duty of the Avatar is to maintain harmony, both among the nations and with the physical realm and the spirits.” Aang retorted, anger clearly evident in both expression and voice.

“Says who? The people who agreed to allow the Avatar to lord over us have been dead for thousands of years. And you didn’t bring balance to our world; the war was done when you returned.” Rajeen retorted, anger in her voice too. She took a breath to calm herself. “We appreciate what you’ve done, but Mistress Azula is correct when she says that no one person, nor even a small group of people, should be responsible for solving all the world’s problems.”

“I have great respect for Azula, but it is not her duty to bring the world into balance.” Aang responds, visibly making an effort to remain calm.

“And we respect both you and Azula,” Zin Tee chimes in. “But your vision refuses to take into account over half of the population. As a nonbender, I feel like an afterthought in your world evaluation. All you care about is benders. Bending is great, but more than half of the people of every nation are not benders, yet one ever asks about our wishes. Why should our lives be dictated by the bending status of our neighbors?”

Aang opened his mouth, but no words came out. It seemed pretty evident that the argument caught him off guard. That greatly saddened Zin Tee; it was just another piece of evident that nonbenders were considered second-class citizens.

“Benders have been the primary force that moves history; it is only right that our wishes are given higher priority.” Hung Hu answered. “Omashu is a great city because of benders.”

Longah, the representative from Lenth, spoke for the first time. “Bending has held back technology and innovation, and it will continue to do so until we change our way of thinking.” She paused and looked around the room. “Why create a better way to build when you have earthbenders? Why create better ships when you have waterbenders? But we saw that when thinking changed, technology advanced. The Fire Nation and their ships and tanks. The SDC and their disc launcher and electric engines. As Azula said, the ways of the past will not take us into the future.”

“And that technology was used for war and destruction! Don’t you see how these changes are hurting our world?” Aang asked.

But Longah wasn’t dissuaded. “Technology was used to meet the needs of the people, just as bending was. The SDC has used our technology in a multitude of other endeavors, such as improving agriculture and enhancing airship designs. Yes, the Fire Nation used their technology for selfish aims, but the SDC has shown that technology can be used to raise the fortune of an entire people.”

“Technology is soulless and does not contribute to balance.” Aang retorted.

“And I think that your vision is limited by the beliefs and misconceptions of your past lives, Avatar. You are a good person, but you are blinded by your inflexible prejudices. You mistake the discomfort of growth and learning with imbalance. The path encouraged by the People’s Princess should at least be considered.” The assembled group again became loud and boisterous at Longah’s words.

It was clear that two coalitions were being formed; those that favored purity and those that believed in unrestricted mixing. The former group rallied around Aang while the latter called upon the words of Azula. Zin Tee feared for a world where Azula and Aang were on opposing sides of an issue this important.

“I’m very happy with how today’s talks went, and I’m encouraged that we can work out agreements that can be to everyone’s benefit,” Azula said, smiling at the assembled group before her. “I move that we break for tonight and start up again tomorrow.”

She was greeted with smiles by pretty much all of the delegates; she had expected things to go well from the SDC and Muzai sides, since Ivaku, Hun Ro, Senji and Horzun were good friends of hers. But she had been pleasantly surprised with the by-in from many of the other regions.

Hun Ro seconded her motion and there was a lot of excited chatter as the delegates made their way out of the meeting room. She was joined by Ivaku and Hun Ro as she waited for the others to make their way out. She could tell that something was up by their auras; it was a blend of nervous and excited.

“Do you have a few minutes, Azula?” Ivaku asked.

“Of course, guys. Do we need privacy? We can head to my quarters if you do?” Azula inquired. She had a feeling she knew what this discussion would be about.

“That might be for the best.” Hun Ro said, a nervous smile on his face.

They chatted about generalities while they made their way up to Azula’s room. She was given a large and luxurious room, of course. No matter how much she tells people that she doesn’t need such things, they pretty much insist anyway. She decided that it was easier to just go with the flow unless her hosts were totally outrageous.

She directed them to the cushy couch while she pulled a chair over to sit directly across from them. Once everyone was seated, Azula gave them a wide smile and decided to get to the heart of the matter. “So, what did you want to talk to me about?”

“Well, we’ve given a lot of thought to your offer to move to Gir Mirath.” Hun Ro started, reaching over to take Ivaku’s hand in his. “And we’ve decided to accept.”

Azula couldn’t keep the wide grin off her face. “That’s wonderful news! I’m excited to have two wonderful and talented people like you come to Gir Mirath. And on a personal note, I’m ecstatic to have the people I love so close.”

“Thank you, Azula. We love you too and we’re excited to come to your city.” Ivaku said with a big smile, but Azula could see that her aura was still nervous. “But there’s something else that we want to ask you.”

“You can ask me anything. You both know that.” Azula said in a quiet voice.

“Well, King Bumi’s health is failing, and he’s been something of a father figure to me since I moved to Omashu. I was hoping that we could get married in Omashu before his health declines too much.” Hun Ro said. He looked at Ivaku.

“And we were hoping that you would agree to officiate the wedding. Nothing would make us happier than to have you marry us. You brought us together and have been so wonderful to us.” Ivaku said. She looked like she wanted to say more but tears started falling down her face and she choked up.

“I would be honored to officiate your wedding; nothing would make me happier than to be part of your big day. You belong together.” Azula answered, tears coming to her own eyes. She stood up and crossed to them and gave Ivaku a big hug, and they were both in turn engulfed by Hun Ro’s long arms in a group hug.

They held each other for a while before they finally separated. Azula was the first one to find her voice.

“I’m happy for the both of you. I’m sure that you’ll miss Omashu, but I really do believe that Gir Mirath is a great opportunity.”

And Azula immediately took note of the glance that her friends shared. Hun Ro was the one who finally expressed their thoughts.

“We have many great friends there, but Omashu is changing. Buzin is a good man, but his views are very different than Bumi’s, especially in regard to bending purity.” Hun Ro said. “And the people that were quiet under Bumi are starting to make their voices heard. Couples like us aren’t as welcome as they were before. I believe that he is going to pull Omashu out of the SDC and become more aligned with the greater Earth Continent.”

Azula sighed. “I’ve heard some of this. Negotiations are already underway to ensure that the Distance Printer in Omashu is returned to the SDC; Bumi has agreed to return it before he officially hands over power to Buzin.”

“It pains me to see Omashu follow this path; without their help, the SDC probably wouldn’t have become the force that it is. Now that Alokhai and the Freedom Islands are part of the SDC, Omashu leaving won’t be quite as big a blow, but it is still the single most populous and industrialized member of the SDC.” Ivaku interjected. “And Bumi was well respected and did so much after the wars to bring the nations together to resolve their differences.”

“Indeed, but with organizations like a Pan-Earth Continent council, we won’t have to rely on one strong leader in the future to resolve these kinds of issues.” Azula smiled at her two friends as she got to her feet. “But let’s get ready for dinner. I’m eager to see if the meeting of the other council was as productive as ours.

“I bet it was!” Hun Ro exclaimed, his enthusiasm once again getting the better of him. “Aang’s awesome and such a nice guy. They probably have like twenty treaties made up.”

Azula and Ivaku just smiled and laughed at the boy’s optimism. But Azula felt there was a good bit of truth in his viewpoint; Aang was a good guy and he was well respected.

“Let’s go see then!” Ivaku said as she grabbed Hun Ro’s arm and dragged him towards the door. Azula laughed and followed them out the door and door towards the dining hall.

Ivaku talked about her vision for the wedding as they made their way down to the dining hall. “I’m thinking something small and intimate; I want to share this with just my closest friends. I’m not looking for a spectacle.”

“This is your day, Ivaku. I’m happy with whatever the two of you decide.” Azula assured Ivaku. The girl had been through so much that she deserved to have whatever kind of wedding made her happy.

But Azula’s sense of wellbeing decreased as they approached the dining hall; she detected a large amount of auras with negative emotions.

“I don’t want to dampen your good mood, but I’m picking up a lot of negative auras in the dining hall. Something may have happened and we should probably be ready.” Azula warned her companions.

She acknowledged the polite bows from the guards at the door as they entered the dining hall. And noticed that nearly every set of eyes swung to her as most of the conversations either stopped or became more muted.

Shit. This wasn’t a good turn of events. She kept the smile on her face as she separated from her companions and made her way to the main table, where the lead delegates were seated. She had a spot opposite Aang. The entire table watched her approach.

And their auras were of two clear and distinct types. Slightly more than half showed positive emotion towards her while the other half showed negative emotion towards her. But all of the auras showed at least some negativity. What the hell was going on?

She decided to be pleasant and tease out the issue with grace and good humor. “Greetings, everyone. I’m sorry to be a little late, but I was just talking wedding arrangements with Ambassador Ivaku and we lost track of time.”

Weddings almost always bring out good will in people. And it did lighten most of the auras.

“Of course, Azula. They are a wonderful couple.” Aang said with a smile. But his aura showed that not all was well.

“Yes, they are a wonderful couple and great delegates also. They contributed a lot of good ideas to the economics council today. I’m not sure if you’ve had a chance to talk to any of the other participants, but I’d say that today was a smashing success.” Azula said, putting on the widest grin that she could manage.

“That’s good to hear, Azula. I haven’t had a chance to talk to anyone from your committee yet.” Aang answered.

“And I haven’t had a chance to talk to anyone from your committee either.” Azula answered, looking up around the table. She chose her next words carefully. “However, I’m guessing that your discussions were less harmonious than mine.”

“Less harmonious is probably the politest way to describe it.” Min Kai said, a neutral look on her face.

Azula raised an eyebrow as she looked at Aang. “Were there any particular issues that led to the less than harmonious interactions?”

“Well, the most heated discussions centered around the proper allocation of benders in the nations and the role of the Avatar in the future of the Atla.” Aang stared at her with a neutral expression. “Apparently, someone has been saying that the ways of the past will not take us into the future.”

Ah. Now she has a better understanding of the situation. Aang has a bruised ego and there was a disagreement about ‘purity’. “There’s no need to beat around the bush, Avatar; I’ve said that phrase many times to many people. And the topic of the allocation of bending is a complicated and nuanced issue.”

The entire table went still at her admission. She calmly took a sip of her tea as Aang stared at her, obviously choosing his words. Finally, he decided to share his thoughts. “Some people have interpreted that to mean that the Avatar is no longer needed; that technology and innovation are the new path to balance.”

Azula took another sip as she evaluated his words. She set the cup down before she answered. “As Avatar, you have both great physical power and access to hundreds of past lives filled with wise and thoughtful people. But my opinion is that the world’s reliance on the Avatar as the guiding beacon of the world has stunted development by stifling innovation, both philosophical and technological. The position of the Avatar has been like an overprotective parent that never allows their children to grow and mature and learn to solve problems on their own.”

You could have heard a pin drop as the entire table sat and stared at her in stunned silence. She just took another sip of her tea. This was actually a lovely blend.

“And, of course, you’re the right person to lead the world into the future.” Aang said in a flat voice.

Azula sighed at his lack of comprehension. “My point is that no one person should be in charge of solving the world’s problems. Me included. What we need are institutions in place to help resolve issues before they escalate. The Avatar should be a voice, perhaps even the loudest one, but they should be only one voice of many. What the world needs is a system to foster relations and help the people solve their own problems.”

She let that point resonate for a few moments before she continued. “I helped created the Regional Economic Committees so that the people could have agency over their own affairs and have a system in place to work with their neighbors. I would like to see a Pan-Earth Continent council created for the same purpose; a place where the nations can come together and discuss their issues and figure out better ways to move forward. If I didn’t believe that you should be involved, Aang, I would’ve tried to exclude you from the session. Did you notice that you were the first person I approached about the idea? Does that sound like I’m trying to eliminate your relevance?”

She watched as he continued to stare at him; she was trying to be patient with him, since he was only a sixteen-year-old kid. But since that was the same age as her, give or take, he wasn’t getting as much sympathy as he probably should.

“As Avatar, I have a duty to maintain the balance of the world. I don’t appreciate you trying to interfere with that.” Aang finally answered.

“Did the Avatar prevent the One Hundred’s Year War or stop the genocide of the Air Nomads? No, because the Fire Nation struck when Roku was old and toothless and you were a child. These disasters occurred because the world had no infrastructure to deal with a threat like the Fire Nation; the Avatars have systematically nurtured a culture of subservience and complacency in all the nations of the world.” Azula retorted. She felt bad bashing the Avatars, but Aang needed to hear the unvarnished truth.

“How dare you say that!” Aang yelled, getting to his feet.

“I say it because it’s the truth!” Azula shouted back, standing to look Aang in the eye again. “But this is your chance to change and adapt to the new world. Look to the future, Aang. Quit living in the past and help our world grow and change for the better.”

Suddenly, Aang’s eyes and tattoos glowed with an ominous blue light and he spoke with the voice of untold Avatars past. “You are a spoiled child who knows nothing of the workings of the world! The Avatar is the Balancer of Worlds, little girl!”

“Your lightshow doesn’t impress me, boy.” Azula answered, pushing a good deal of chi into her voice as she leaned closer to Aang; his light hurt her eyes, but she refused to show any discomfort. “I’ve seen far more than you and your backward-looking predecessors can imagine. The legacy of the Avatar was a stagnant world afraid to take charge of its own destiny. But I intend to change that.”

She held in her sigh of relief as Aang stopped glowing, but he still looked at her with anger and disgust. “I thought you were a forward-looking person who sought to maintain balance and bring peace to the world.”

“And I thought you were a reasonable and open-minded person who was willing to learn from the mistakes of the past.” Azula answered. “Perhaps we were both wrong.”

It was then that she noticed the looks of absolute terror plastered on the faces of not only the others at their table, but pretty much everyone else in the room. Aang appeared to notice it too.

They locked eyes and made a silent pact; now was neither the time nor the place to continue this discussion. But this topic would be broached again.

The rest of the evening was awkward and uncomfortable for everyone involved. But like every unpleasant event in her life, it too came to an end eventually. At least she achieved a milestone by crowning a new champion in the most awkward dinner party ever category.

She walked up to her room after dinner; the halls were empty since everyone scattered like leaves in a hurricane as soon as they could possibly get away. Well, at least it was done. She was looking forward to a nice Mnaimonatic meditation session tonight. If getting into a yelling match with the Avatar, while he was in the fucking Avatar state, didn’t merit a good meditation session, then she didn’t know what did.

“Excuse me, Mistress Azula.” A young woman in a uniform said as she approached; the poor thing was terrified. “We just received a special correspondence for you.”

“Thank you, miss.” Azula answered and gave her a generous tip. It would be good to show people that she was still nice. Sort of.

She made her way into her room and opened the letter. A frown adorned her face as she read the contents of the missive. Her plans for meditation would have to be cut short; she had a new mission ahead of her.

Chapter Text

Yue was only allowed to pack the bare essentials for her, Izumi, and her unborn child. She tried to keep the tears from her eyes as she had to explain to Izumi why she was only allowed to pick out three toys to take with her. She had to keep their items to a minimum since she had to pack things that she would need to care for an infant. An infant what would probably be born underground and may not see the light of day for days, weeks or maybe even months.

Hulan just watched with sullen and angry eyes as Yue selected the few items that would be hers for the horrible and disgusting future that was her life now. Finally, she had everything put away.

“I’m finished, Hulan,” Yue said, keeping her eyes on the floor. He had become even surlier over the past few days. Apparently, the rebels had suffered a significant defeat recently and Hulan was eager to take his anger out on anyone that he could.

He didn’t say a word as he simply pounded on the wall of her quarters and two men came in and grabbed her meager belongings. Hulan walked to the door after they had taken her luggage outside.

“You will no longer be treated with kid gloves, hussy. You belong to us and you will never step foot in this palace again. I hope you and your stupid brat sleep well tonight.” Hulan said in a growling voice. She didn’t dare look up from the floor until he had closed the door behind him.

She slept fitfully that night; partially because of being extremely pregnant and also because of worry and fear for what was to become of her and her children. But her restless sleep was disturbed when she heard the sound of yelling and soldiers fighting in the palace and the surrounding courtyard.

She hoped with all her heart that the Great Spirits had heard her prayers and that Zuko was coming to rescue her. She held Izumi close and tried to shield her from the awful sounds. The noise was brief and the battle was soon over.

And she quietly wept when the sun rose and no one had come to set them free. The hustle and bustle of the palace could be heard, so she pulled Izumi out of bed and they washed and prepared themselves for their journey.

They were dressed and ready when the guards came for her. They lead Yue and Izumi out of the palace and towards the military encampment just outside the training grounds. But her heart jumped into her throat as they passed the Royal Orchard.

She could see nearly a dozen men hanging from the trees, their arms tied behind their backs; she picked Izumi up and held her face against her shoulder to keep her from seeing this terrible sight. And the tears fell from her eyes as she saw the bodies of Lord Waihu and General Liao hanging from the tallest tree. It took all of her resolve not to weep in despair.

Izumi was allowed to walk on her own again as soon as they were past the terrible sight. Angry glares and menacing stares were aimed at her as her guards led her through the encampment. There were a lot of injured soldiers and it was clear to see that things had not been going well for the rebels. But their misfortune was now to become her misfortune.

“Your illustrious royal carriage awaits to ferry you and the princess to your new palace,” one of the guards sneered as they were led to an armored transport. “The other royals are inside and awaiting your company.”

All the others in earshot laughed as the guard gave a mocking bow. Izumi held onto her leg as the men jeered and said incredibly rude and lewd things to her. She prayed that they didn’t try to actually do any of the nasty and disgusting things they were saying. But her heart sank further as they led her into the hold of armored vehicle.

It was filled with komodo-rhinos. They were going to have to share the hold with the animals. But after hearing the truly awful things the soldiers had said to her, she felt that the komodo-rhinos were the more civilized option.

“Enjoy your time with your new friends, your Fire Ladiness!” The guard said as he closed the door to the hold.

The engine started and the mechanized monstrosity began to rumble forward. The entire thing shook and the Komodo-rhinos rooted and grumbled as they tried to become comfortable. Yue and Izumi followed their lead and tried to get settled too. They sat on some boxes near their luggage.

The noise gave her a headache and the heat and smell became more oppressive as the day wore on. They stopped for lunch and a quick break around noon; both Yue and Izumi took full advantage of the chance to stretch their legs.

But Izumi cried and complained and fought her to not have to go back into the transport. Yue picked her up and forcefully carried her back inside; the men outside appeared belligerent and were looking for any reason to take out their frustration on a helpless child and a pregnant royal.

They had told her that it would take two full days to travel to their initial destination. From there, they would have to ride the animals into the mountains to reach the caves. The caves that would undoubtedly become their tomb in time. Whether the rebels win or lose, she never expected to leave those caves alive.

But for the sake of Izumi and her unborn child, she would do whatever it took to keep them safe. Even the disgusting things the men suggested as they boarded the transport. Anything for her children. But she prayed that it never came to that.

The rest of the day wore on and Yue’s head was throbbing from noise and vibration. She knew that Izumi wasn’t doing any better, but at least she had cried herself to sleep in her mother’s arms. Finally, they stopped for the night. Both Yue and Izumi were starving.

They were given greasy gruel that the soldiers ate, so she choked it down and begged and cajoled Izumi to do the same so that the soldiers didn’t get mad. Luckily, Izumi was hungry enough that she complied with only a moderate amount of whining and complaining.

At least they were able to set up their sleeping blankets outside. They were in the middle of the encampment; she had to guess that there were about two hundred or so soldiers set up around the eight armored vehicles.

She settled Izumi down to sleep as soon as they had finished eating and done their evening ritual to get ready for bed. It was embarrassing to do these things in front of the soldiers, but they insisted that the two couldn’t be left unwatched for a moment or they might make a run for it.

Like a toddler and a woman eight months pregnant were a flight risk.

But after a few minutes the calls and taunts faded away as the men found other activities to occupy their time. Yue fell asleep but woke up a few hours later due to the pressure on her bladder.

She extracted herself from Izumi and spoke in a quiet voice to the guard. “I need to use the restroom.”

He gave her a lascivious stare as his eyes went up and down her body. “I think you need to earn the right to these privileges. I’m sure that you know the kind of thing a man needs. You gotta give a little to get a little in life.”

She felt herself get cold inside. “Please, I don’t want any trouble. I’ll be back in just a few moments.”

“You’re not going anywhere unless I say so. You can sleep in your own piss all night for all I care. You know what I want.” He grinned as he stood up and started to unbutton his trousers.

But they both looked up in a panic as they heard a low, deep growl coming from the top of the armored vehicle.

And it was all that Yue could do to not wet herself right then and there as she saw the green eyes of the large panther reflecting the light of the moon.

Magic companions are wonderful things. While she couldn’t see through Omnisae’s eyes like Navisi could, but she could communicate silently with her. And she had sent her to search the palace for Yue and Izumi. She had never met her niece, but she assumed any little kids toddling around after Yue would be the one and only Izumi.

It had been disheartening to hear what was going on at the palace. Some sort of uprising had occurred and a bunch of people had been hung. Luckily, Yue and Izumi hadn’t been involved; but they were being moved. That was when Azula knew that she could wait no longer.

Aang was still mad at her, but he needed to pull his glowing tattooed head out of his ass and realize that disappearing for a hundred years will make people reevaluate the need for a world guardian. She had asked Horzun to lead the economics council until she returned; the man was great with economics and she had full faith in his abilities.

And now she was watching the camp, trying to judge when the best time to make her move would be. But it appears that the time was now, whether she liked it or not. Omnisae had reported that the guard was going to do something inappropriate to Yue; she had hoped to go in and out without a trace but now she would do whatever it took to get her family out.

The psion bolt struck the asslicker in his chest just moments after he noticed Omnisae. She was dropping in beside the panicked Yue seconds later; Azula used her full chi enhanced speed to reach Yue and put a hand over her mouth before she could alert the camp.

It looked like Yue’s eyes were going to pop out of her eyes when she recognized Azula, so Azula uncovered her mouth and pulled her in for a quick hug. But there wasn’t any time to waste.

“We have to get Izumi and get out of here. Did they hurt either of you?” Azula whispered.

“They…they hit me sometimes but that was all.” Yue answered quietly. “They didn’t touch Izumi.”

That last admission is the only thing that saved the entire camp from being scorched by the blue flames of a pissed mistress’s dragon.

“I’ll carry you guys into the air and then we’ll fly away. Can you carry Izumi?” Azula said as she bent over and carefully scooped up the sleeping child and held her against her chest.

“I can hold Izumi. What do you mean carry us into the air and fly away, Azula?” Yue asked in a confused voice.

“It’ll be far easier to show you rather than explain. But you need to trust me.” Azula said as she handed Izumi to Yue and then unfurled all four of her tentacles. Auzla wrapped a tentacle around Yue alone and then used a second one to bind Izumi and Yue together. She gently lifted them in the air as Yue gave a squeak of surprise.

Azula then created a light anchor and used a tentacle to pull the three of them in the air. She then repeated the process with the other free tentacle and created a rhythm. In a matter of ten seconds, they were about eighty feet in the air.

“Don’t panic when when you see my dragon.” Azula called out to a terrified Yue.

Here warning didn’t keep Yue from screaming as the dragon appeared under them and they settled onto Kiva’s neck ridges. Azula set Yue on Kiva’s neck in a sidesaddle position; she figured that would be more comfortable given her state of profound pregnancy.

“It’s okay, Yue. They can’t reach us up here. I’m going to take you to safety.”

Yue looked too frightened to speak, so Azula let her get adjusted in silence. After a few minutes of flying, Yue finally found her voice.

“I have to pee.” Yue said in a quiet voice. Azula just laughed as she directed Kiva towards a clearing.

Zuko was beside himself and knew that sleep would evade him tonight. How could these monsters have no honor? He had pushed his army as hard as he could but Yue and Izumi were probably already far to the west of the palace by now. None of his agents could get through the rebel security to reach his family. He vowed to kill every last rebel on the archipelago if they harmed his wife and child. He didn’t care how long it took; he would see it done. But he was pulled from his rage filled revenge fantasies when one of his guards called out to him.

“Lord Zuko, we’ve just received a message from Mistress Azula. She has Fire Lady Yue and Princess Izumi and would like to set up a rendezvous to deliver them to us.” The guard called out.

Zuko quickly got dressed and left his tent. “How do you know that this is really from her? It could be a trap.” Why was everyone stupid?

“It was delivered by magic eagle-hawk, Lord Zuko.” The guard said in a firm, no-nonsense voice. Didn’t this man know how stupid that sounds. “And, well, she said that she’d be arriving by dragon. She said that we could send a message back to her by way of the magic eagle-hawk.”

Zuko could feel his jaw clenching. He had heard the tales of the black and gold dragon that breathed blue fire, as well as the magic eagle-hawk that also became a panther. But if she truly had Yue and Izumi, then he would meet with her. Azula had many flaws, but she had always been a good friend to Yue.

“Tell her to land at the clearing to the southwest of our camp. Set up four signal fires at the edges of the clearing to mark the spot.” Zuko ordered after taking a few moments to think.

“Right away, Lork Zuko.” The guard turned and quickly made his way through the camp, presumably back to where the abomination was located.

Thirty minutes later, he was awaiting of the arrival of dragon carrying his family. The sun was just starting to peak over the horizon when he spotted the dark shape making its way towards them. He felt a little anxiety as he began to make out the form of the sinuous dragon.

He felt the nervous energy of the soldiers around him, which set him even more on edge. Despite being branded a traitor, his sister’s reputation had grown in the years since she left, even among the Fire Nation troops sworn to bring her into custody. He had believed that she should be locked away for her unnatural abilities, but seeing the dragon land and hearing the rumors of her apprentice, he knew that he may never see that happen.

At least not without sacrificing an untold number of soldiers.

But he couldn’t help the joy that came to his heart as he saw the white hair on one of the dragonriders. Yue, the love of his life, was being returned to him.

The dragon fluttered its wings and softly landed in the designated area. Then, he saw Yue and Izumi be lifted off the dragon by Azula’s tentacles. They were gently set on the ground and released. Azula dismounted the dragon and joined them as they walked towards Zuko.

Zuko couldn’t contain himself any longer. He ran to greet his family, his royal guards right on his heels. He saw Azula stop walking as Yue and Izumi ran to him. The relief and happiness that flooded him was one of the most powerful sensations that he had ever experienced.

“Daddy, it was hot and smelly and we had to stay with the modo-rhinoos and it was scary.” Izumi complained in her squeaky little toddler voice. “And then we got to ride a dwagon.”

“I’m sorry they scared you, turtleduckling. But you’re safe now.” Zuko said as he pulled her even tighter into a hug. And he savored the moment as he basked in the love of his family.

“We owe our escape entirely to Azula and her friends, Zuko.” Yue said, looking up at him with those bright blue eyes. “You should talk to her.”

He sighed and looked over to see his sister looking at him with no expression on her face. “Thank you for saving my family, Azula.”

“You’re welcome, Zuko. I’m glad that I was able to intercept the rebels before they smuggled her into the caves. That would have made any rescue much more difficult.”

“Dear one, why don’t you and Izumi go to see the healers. I would feel better knowing that they had looked you both over.” Zuko suggested.

“Okay.” Yue turned and walked back to Azula and gave her a big hug. Then she turned to Izumi. “Izumi, why don’t you come say goodbye to Aunt Azula.”

Zuko’s right eye twitched at those words, but he decided that it was hard to argue with her right to be called an aunt after saving his daughter from rebel kidnappers. Izumi walked over to her mother and hid shyly behind her leg. Azula knelt down so that she was a lot closer to Izumi’s height and a lot less threatening.

She looked up a Azula and finally spoke. “Bye, Aunt ‘Zula.”

“Goodbye, Izumi. It was nice to meet you.” Azula said in a surprisingly gentle voice. It looked like this wasn’t her first time around children. “Be good for your Mother and Father.”

“I will.” Izumi answered in a small voice as Yue took her hand and started walking with her back towards the main camp. Both he and Azula watched them as they walked away. Once they were out of earshot, they turned to face each other.

Zuko decided that this should be private discussion. If she wanted to harm him, her dragon was more than a match for his guards. But he didn’t believe that was her intention. “I would like to speak with Azula alone. Please fall back and give us privacy.”

The guards hesitated but finally began moving away. Once he was sure their conversation would be private. “What do you want for saving my family?”

Azula rolled her eyes and sighed. “I want you to grow up and stop being a jackass Fire Lord that’s trying to upset the balance of the world.”

Zuko felt anger rising in his chest, but Azula held up her hands and began speaking before he did. “My apologies, Zuko, that was uncalled for. But in all seriousness, I don’t want anything. I rescued Yue and Izumi because they are family.”

He looked at her, trying to determine if she was telling the truth or not. To his slight surprise, he determined that she was. “Well, I thank you, no matter why you did it. I’m surprised though, that you haven’t joined with the rebel forces to oppose me.”

“I have washed my hands of the Fire Nation. What I want is for whoever controls the Fire Nation to simply quit starting wars with the rest of the world. I showed you how to keep the peace once, and you ignored me. It should be telling that even Muzai is tired of conflict and wants nothing to do with your civil war.”

“Muzai are cowards and traitors; they vote to stay with the Fire Nation but then refuse to uphold their responsibilities whenever it is inconvenient for them.”

Azula sighed, and it was just like childhood all over again. Azula thinking that she knew better than everyone else. She really hadn’t changed.

“Zuko, enough blood has been shed. If it helps, I hope you win your civil war, but the cycle of violence needs to stop. All I ask is that you learn from your missteps. And get new advisors. Ursa is too superstitious and narrow-minded to help steer the Fire Nation.”

“You don’t get to talk about Mother like that!” Zuko snarled. How dare she?

“It is no wonder that you’ve gone so far astray if even a mild rebuke like that causes you to become upset. Do you behave like that towards everyone that tells you things that you don’t like to hear? If so, then they will learn to not tell you bad news and you won’t be given the whole picture.”

“What the hell do you know? You’ve never had to run a nation. You’re all talk; you don’t have what it takes to be a ruler.”

“Perhaps. Perhaps not. But I can see that this conversation is going nowhere. I was happy to help Yue and Izumi, no matter the state of our relationship, but it is time for me to take my leave. If all goes well, we’ll never see each other again. I will tell you the same thing I told Iroh; as far as I’m concerned, we are no longer family. Goodbye, Zuko.”

Zuko watched as she turned and walked to her dragon. He called out to her. “I will revoke your arrest warrant in Muzai, but you are still not welcome to return to the Fire Nation.”

She climbed onto the back of the black and gold abomination and looked at Zuko. “Thank you, Zuko, I sincerely appreciate that. I wish you luck in your war against the rebels.”

Zuko sighed as he watched her disappear into the morning sky atop her dragon. He didn’t know if he would ever see her again or not, but he felt a sense of loss. She was a pain in the ass and a fire witch.

But it still stung to lose another sister.

Zin Tee was nervous about approaching the Avatar. Things had calmed down a bit after the first day, but there was still a bit of contention about how large a role the Avatar should play in international affairs. But even with those discussions, Zin Tee still felt that the Avatar was the most appropriate person to consult about spirit issues.

The final session had just concluded; this seemed like the best time to approach him. “Excuse me, Avatar Aang, may I have a moment of your time to discuss something?”

Aang gave him a good-natured smile. “Of course, Zin Tee. Do we need privacy?”

“Uhm, not really. This is actually a spiritual issue in nature.”

That seemed to take the Avatar by surprise. “I see. Well, I’m happy to help anyway I can. What is the issue?”

“We’ve received numerous reports of a glowing creatures of various sizes and shapes, roaming the northern passes of the Pin Vao mountains. The creatures have been known to chase and harass travelers and locals, but so far no one has been hurt. It’s almost like the creatures are protecting their territory. Since they are glowing, there is a lot of speculation that the creatures are spirits.” Zin Tee exchanged.

Avatar Aang looked thoughtful. “That does indeed sound like a spirit matter. As you heard during our session today, I am visiting the new nation of Ku Van; they are hosting delegates from Hinva, Omashu and the Central Earth Kingdom for talks about an alliance or even a possible merger. I could easily visit the affected area after the meeting.”

Ku Van was the name chosen by the territory that had seceded from the Fire Colony. It was adapted from the name Kuvan Ik, a strong and prosperous nation that existed in this part of the Earth Continent before the creation of the Earth Kingdom.

“That would be greatly appreciated, Avatar Aang.” Zin Tee decided to make an overture to the Avatar after having such a contentious set of meetings. “I want you to know that you have everyone’s respect; our discussions on the role of the Avatar were framed in terms of larger politics, not you as a person or an Avatar.”

Avatar Aang looked at him for a moment before sighing. “I understand that. But you have to understand that my role as the Avatar is something that I take very seriously. I am willing to work with all of the nations to determine how to best fulfill my role, but my role to bring the world into balance is not open for discussion.”

“And we understand that is your view. But we all agree that you are the best person to balance the material and spirit worlds.” Zin Tee answered with as much grace as he could.

“Of course, Zin Tee. I’ll follow up on the sightings once my next mission is completed.”

Chapter Text

Navisi could see the Lu Yang mountains in the distance. Azula had been enigmatic about exactly why Navisi was traveling here; all that her dramatic friend said was that she would thank her for the experience.

Well, she would find out soon enough. Kiva was making great time and said that they would reach the designated location in about twenty minutes. The Lu Yang mountains were considered to be the most spiritual place on Atla. It was the home of the spiritual city of Savan; based on their trajectory, they were heading just to the northwest of the city.

She could read the excitement in Azula’s aura when she told Navisi to travel here, so she believed that it would be a great experience. Azula had never led her astray before and she doubted that she would now. But it was still a little annoying being sent into the unknown.

But she decided to just enjoy the incredible view as Kiva approached the island and began her descent towards one of the lower mountain peaks.

There! She spotted their destination; there were a series of small huts built into the side of rocky mountainside. It looked like there were about six thousand steps you had to climb to hike up there. She thanked Gnolos the Benevolent that Azula let her ride Kiva instead of making her hike up that steep and narrow staircase.

Then she noticed that there were actually several sets of huts built into the mountainside. She was drawn out of her observations by Kiva speaking into her mind. “There is not enough room for me to land here, Mistress Navisi. You will need to levitate down to the highest grouping of huts.”

“Of course, Kiva. Thanks for bringing me this far.” She answered as she activated her gauntlets; the glow covered her and her travel bag as she levitated off of Kiva’s back. Once she was clear of Kiva, she created a lightboard and began airsurfing. The dragon glided down and away, giving a small roar of farewell as she disappeared, recalled back to Azula’s amulet. Magical companions were awesome.

She glided down to the highest set of huts; she saw a few people in the lower groupings pointing up at her as she approached. The rings of glowing light and lightboard certainly created quite the spectacle. Perhaps someday she would figure out how to use her chi without shining like a glowworm-snake.

She gently landed on the rocky cliff face and looked around, both with her eyes and her chi sense. And she was absolutely astounded by what she saw. A dark-skinned man in the simple tunic was bald with a bushy white beard was standing outside one of the huts, smiling at her. That wasn’t what amazed her though. Nor was it the powerful chi that set him apart from everyone else that she had ever met. It was the white aura that glowed with the purity of enlightenment. Now she understood why Azula had made her study those scrolls regarding chi control and chakra theory.

“Greetings, Mistress Navisi. That was an absolutely amazing display of chi manipulation. Mistress Azula said that you were an extremely talented young woman, and I am happy that I had the opportunity to see your skills in action.” The man said, a pleasant smile on his face. “But where are my manners? I am Guru Pathik, and I am ecstatic to meet you.”

Mistress Azula was truly a wonderful friend and mentor. “The honor is all mine, Guru Pathik. Mistress Azula told me of her training with you. It is truly a pleasure to meet a man of your incredible spiritual advancement.”

Guru Pathik’s smile widened and she felt a warmth fill her. She could feel the peace and serenity that just seemed to emanate from the great man. “I look forward to sharing my teachings with you, Mistress Navisi. My time here in this world is coming to an end soon, and I would be happy to pass on whatever I can to you. You will be my last student, and I can see why Mistress Azula sent you to me.”

“Thank you, Guru Pathik, for granting me the opportunity to study with you. I promise to work diligently and learn all that I can from you.”

“I’m sure that you will do great! But first, come and join me. I just prepared a new batch of onion and banana juice to celebrate your arrival.”

“Yes, onion and banana juice. Azula told me about that too.” Navisi said to the grinning man, trying to keep the disgust from her voice. She knew that if nothing else, this was going to be a very interesting experience.

Aang was very pleased with the way the talks between the two newly formed nations were going. Ku Van was very interested in creating a political and economic confederacy with Bin Fong Ha, the name taken by the region formerly known as the Central Earth Kingdom. They had been inspired by Ku Van and selected a name associated with a nation that existed before the creation of the Earth Kingdom.

But their enthusiasm for creating nations home to only earthbenders did have him a little concerned. Aang had argued for nations to be established based on bending types, but he wanted the process to be natural and organic, with the people voluntarily agreeing to relocate to the nations of their bending type.

Some mingling was to be expected, of course, but the majority of benders should be with their own kind. It would take time for everyone to segregate voluntarily. He worried that the two new nations may decide to use more aggressive measures to ensure that their slices of the Earth Continent contained only earthbenders. So far, however, no real violence had been reported; he sincerely hoped that it stayed that way.

But now he and his furry companions were making their way to the village of Loo Ta; Zin Tee had said that they could provide guides to take him to the mountain passes where the spirit manifestations have been taking place.

He was very curious what was causing the spirits to be disturbed and interact with the material world. He had even talked to his previous incarnations, but they could only speculate about the source of the disturbance. The only way to solve the mystery was to investigate in person.

The sun was getting low in the sky when Appa landed just outside the village. He saw a small group of people approach. He jumped down to the ground and walked towards the group; he smiled as Momo landed on his shoulder.

He saw that the group consisted of about eight people, with an older woman clearly leading the way. She was the first to speak once the group had approached within about twenty feet of Aang.

“Greetings, Avatar Aang. Welcome to Loo Ta. Thank you for coming to investigate the spirits that are visiting our humble mountain passes.” The woman said, with a polite bow. “I am Mayor Lifu. Please come into our village and rest after your journey.”

Aang gave the woman a polite bow of his own. “Thank you, Mayor Lifu. It is the Avatar’s duty to maintain peace and balance between the material and spiritual worlds. I would be honored to visit your village.”

She told him a bit about the history of their village and they were famous in the region for their vicuna-goats. He saw the animals all around the town; he guessed that the livestock outnumbered the people by about twenty to one. The mayor offered him the chance to feel a coat made from their wool; he had to admit that it was probably the softest thing that he had ever touched.

But once the group was seated in the town hall, he knew it was time to get down to business. Aang decided to start with the basics. “Let’s start at the beginning; when did you first start seeing the spirits?”

“It started about four months ago. I remember because Lobun came running to us the night before we heard Gerva had freed itself from our watertribe overseers.” Lifu answered, leaning on her cane as she spoke. “We were concerned when two extraordinary things happened at once. It was probably another week or so before the next sighting occurred. The frequency has been increasing, so now we have seen them every day for several weeks.”

“Have they been aggressive?”

Lifu looked thoughtful. “Not exactly. If we try to go along certain passes, they block the way. A few intrepid souls tried to force their way through but were pushed back with enough vigor to discourage them but not actually hurt anyone.”

Aang considered. “Have they tried to communicate in any way? Many times, spirits try to share the reasons why they are angry or disgruntled.”

“Not that anyone can tell. They simply block the pass and stare at the people. They look like giant floating platypus bears.”

“Well, perhaps it would be best if I traveled to see the spirits for myself.” Aang suggested.

“That may be for the best. We don’t really have any additional information to share with you.” Lifu answered with a small smile. “We’re simple folk that like to commune with nature. Spirit beings are a bit outside our comfort zone.”

“I understand. I promise that I’ll get to the bottom of this.”

“My nephews, Jom Su and Jom Pu, can lead you to the passes where we see them.” Lifu pointed to two sturdy looking young men; twins based on their identical appearances. Both were short, squat, with bushy black hair and very vigorous mustaches.

“We can fly on Appa to the pass and then I’ll approach on foot.” Aang nodded to the two men. “I appreciate you guiding me.”

“It is our pleasure, Avatar.” The two men said in unison.

Twenty minutes later Appa landed just outside a pass between two imposing mountains. The path was steep but clearly marked. Aang could feel the spirit energy in the air. He turned to the two young men.

“I’m going to walk the path and see if I can contact the spirit. I feel the energy, so I know that they are close.” The two men just nodded. Seeing that they weren’t going to answer, he continued speaking. “Perhaps you two should stay here and keep Appa and Momo company.”

The two men nodded again. With that settled, Aang made his way up the mountain pass. With each step, he felt the energy increasing. It wasn’t oppressive or threatening in any way, but it was powerful.

He had climbed over the crest of a small hill and was making his way across the winding path when the very air around him shifted. And then he saw it floating up ahead, nestled between the two mountains. He couldn’t believe his eyes.

It was a four-hundred-foot-tall purple platypus bear with pink horns and silver wings.

As he watched it began shrinking, and in a matter of ten seconds it was down to only about twelve feet tall. Aang watched the spirit as it continued to watch him. Then, it jerked its head towards the mountain pass and began floating away.

Aang took that to be an invitation and used airbending to enhance his speed to catch up with the purple floating platypus bear. It bobbed its way along the path, neither looking to the left nor to the right. Just straight ahead.

Aang followed as it began veering off the path down a small chasm; he easily jumped along the high rocks as he followed the spirit. It appeared to be heading towards an opening in the side of the mountain; it was easy to spot the cave since it was glowing with a rather intense purple light.

The platypus bear spirit shrunk again in order to enter the opening to the cave. Aang followed closely behind; there was nothing threatening about this experience. Weird, yes. Threatening, no.

Aang continued following the spirit animal deeper into the cave. The spirit energy that he felt in the cave was almost unlike anything that he had felt before. He felt something like this only one time before, when he found Azula meditating on the pillar in Omashu all those years ago.

The time she said she had been communing with Yotforbu.

“Greetings, Avatar Aang. It is a pleasure to make your acquaintance. I am Xi Yan the Seer, but you may just call me Xi Yan.” A mellow male voice called out. And a short, elderly looking man appeared from behind the floating platypus bear spirit.

“It is an honor to meet you, Xi Yan.” Aang answered with a polite bow.

“To answer the question you wish to ask, I have blocked the pass in this region to draw your attention to my existence.” Xi Yan said, smiling at Aang. “As I age, my vision remains excellent, but my reach is now lacking.”

“May I ask why you wish to speak with me? Have the people here done something to disturb you?”

“Not at all, Avatar. I have come to discuss an impending crisis.” Xi Yan said, looking sad.

“What sort of crisis?” Aang asked.

“The veil between spirit world and material world has been compromised. The boundary holds, but it is thin and can be broken under the right circumstances.”

“As Avatar, I am responsible for maintaining balance between the material and spirit realms. How can I help?” Aang asked.

“Indeed, you are. But the spirit realm is more complicated than you realize. The spirits you normally deal with are bound to the material realm by something called spatial resonance; as the material world shifts, the spirits shift with it. This means that as new timelines are created in the multiverse, the spirits branch off with the new worlds.” Xi Yan looked at Aang. Probably trying to determine whether he understands or not.

“I have heard of the multiverse from Mistresses Azula and Navisi. But I admit that I don’t understand how it works.” Aang decided that being truthful and admitting his ignorance would be the best way to go here.

“The mistresses of the Arts Esoteric are closely tied the compromising of the veil. Without their timely intervention, the veil would have been completely torn asunder.”

“How did they prevent this?” Aang asked. He knew that Azula and Navisi had been on a wild ride, but he never imagined that they were involved in something like saving the multiverse.

“The multiverse is created when significant events play out in the history of the world. The actual mechanism behind it is far beyond human comprehension, so you’ll have to take my word for it. But the multiverses are collected in spheres of existence; they are something like a large family of multiverses.”

“Well, a demon from another sphere of existence, closely related to this one but different, invaded worlds of your multiverse with terrible artifacts and teachings. These events caused the veil between the material and spirit worlds to weaken. Azula and Navisi were able to minimize the impact of these events by recovering the artifacts and making sure that the dangerous teaching was suppressed.”

“I see.” Aang said. “They never told us that they saved the multiverse.”

“They didn’t understand exactly how important their missions were. They are strong and competent young women, but that was too much pressure to put on even their capable shoulders. But they succeeded, although just barely. The battle to contain the Five Dragons of the Apocalypse nearly killed them. Had the dragons been unleashed by anyone other than Mistress Azula, their immense and uncontrolled power would have shredded the veil, causing the spirit and material worlds to be connected. This would result in the Great Spirits intervening, to the detriment of many.”

“What do you mean, by anyone other than Azula?”

“She alone in this sphere of existence has the skills and training needed to control the Five Dragons of the Apocalypse; although even under her control they would have inflicted great damage on the veil. But while the spirits tied to the material realm through spatial resonance would cause a lot of problems for your people, it is the extraplanar spirits that would threaten to destroy all life on the mortal realm.”

Aang froze at the thought of anything threatening his world like that. “What do you mean by extraplanar?”

“These are spirits and beings that exist across the multiverse. The Great Spirits and their intermediaries are the ones that you are familiar with. But there are numerous others that are lesser in power but are still powerful. And not all of them are benevolent. As the veil weakens, some can enter the material realm if assisted by mortals from this side of the veil. And some have already crossed into your world.”

“What? Where are they?” Aang asked frantically.

“There is no need to panic, Avatar. You are fortunate that the first ones to enter your world are benevolent and helpful. They are named Telmaha, and they have brought stability to the Earth Kingdom nation now called Zenthru.”

“The Jade Magisters?” Aang asked incredulously.

“Indeed. They have been avoiding you and the mistresses of the Arts Esoteric on purpose. But they will be valuable allies in the upcoming effort to reseal the veil.” Xi Yan said, smiling at Aang. “You will need a team in order to save the multiverse. My reach is not what it used to be, but I’ve exerted it to my fullest extent to give you and your allies a chance to stave off disaster. But alas, I can no longer exert my will in your sphere of existence and the tearing of the veil is skewing my vision, so I cannot see the future far enough to tell how this battle ends. All that I can say is that you must give your all.”

“How do we reseal the veil?” Aang asked, daunted by what he was being asked to do.

“As unusual as it may seem, you must wait for the tears to become more extensive before you reseal them. As of now, the tears are relatively small and unconnected; fixing a small one won’t fix any of the ones not connected to it. You need to fix them when they are connected.”

“How do we know when they are connected? And what do we do until then?”

“That is where I used my influence. I contrived to have Azula visit a world where she learned to make spirit contraptions. Then I brought her and Navisi to an opportunity where they would learn energy bending. It took all of my manipulation skills, but I was able to arrange for the artifacts to be put in worlds where Azula and Navisi would learn the skills they needed to fight this battle. You need to work with them and Telmaha to develop the tools and strategies needed to save the multiverse.”

Aang stared at him silently, trying to collect his thoughts. “This is a lot to take in. Where do I start?”

“You need to bring in Azula and Navisi and their allies in the Arts Esoteric. Make your way to Yun Zhi; arrangements are being made for Navisi to come and join you there. The two of you should then travel to Ba Sing Se to meet with Telmaha. I will share more information in the future; sharing it now will muddy the waters of my visions.”

“I will meet Navisi and then go to Ba Sing Se and speak with Telmaha..”

“And Avatar, I know that you and Azula have conflicts over your role in the material world, but you both must put aside these differences to face the coming threat.” Xi Yan said, looking very solemn.

Aang sighed. “Of course, Xi Yan.”

“This is a strong team with a wider range of experience than any group in all the multiversal worlds of your sphere of existence. And there will be more allies to recruit in the future. I have faith in you, Avatar. But my time here is complete for now. I will visit one more time when the appropriate opportunity arises.”

“Thank you for your warning and assistance, Xi Yan. We will do what we can to reseal the veil.” Aang gave another bow to the spirit. Was he a spirit? “But at the risk of sounding rude, may I ask what you are?”

“I am the younger half-brother of the one you call Yotforbu. I know it surprising, since we don’t look much alike.” Xi Yan said with a smile. “I never shared her fascination for extra appendages and body parts.”

And with that the figure disappeared and the cave went dark. Aang used his firebending to create a light and made his way out of the cave. He could feel the residue of Xi Yan’s spirit power, but it was quickly fading.

One thing was sure, though. Xi Yan had given him a lot to think about.

Navisi couldn’t help the wide smile that it caused her face muscles to actually hurt. Her chi flowed so smoothly now; it was amazing how just these small adjustments significantly improved her ability to wield the light sigils. And just as importantly, her meditation sessions were more productive; it seemed like she could actually feel her mind progressing after each session. It was amazing how much progress she had made in just five short days.

It had been a gut-wrenching experience opening her chakras; the guilt for abandoning her people had weighed heavily on her mind ever since she began traveling with Azula. She had known intellectually that it had been the right decision, but now she truly had made peace with the experience emotionally. She would always love her people, but the opportunity and mission were greater than any one world.

“Your progression has been spectacular, Navisi. I have great hopes for the Arts Esoteric with two intelligent and talented women like you and Azula leading the revival.” Guru Pathik said with a wide smile, passing the bowl of onion and banana juice to Navisi. She gladly took it and finished off the wonderful concoction.

“Thank you, Guru Pathik. We hope to live up to the standard you have created.” Navisi answered.

“I trust that you will raise the standard for generations to come. But come now, it is time to meditate and learn to optimize your chi flow through your unblocked chakras.”

“Of course, Guru. I am ready.”

Navisi and Guru Pathik sat on a narrow ledge overlooking the mountain passes that led up to the small monastery where Guru Pathik was staying. She had invited him to visit Palathia but he had declined; his health was fading and he did not wish to travel. His time was short and he was preparing for his final days before ascending to enlightenment.

She closed her eyes and focused her mind, reciting the mantras that moved her consciousness up through the planes of existence. Someday, she hoped to be able to accomplish this feat unassisted, but for now she used the meditation aid that had been engraved in her jevalda. It was such a wonderful feeling as she progressed.

But suddenly she felt herself gripped by a powerful force and the vision around her changed. She was back on the moon of the ringed planet. But she wasn’t faced with OrkaHaalu.

“Greetings, Mistress Navisi. Your spiritual progression has been astounding and we wished to congratulate you.” Terrathusi said from his seat on a rocky ledge. “We pulled this location from your memories and we wanted to enjoy it with you.”

“Thank you for your praise, but I know that I have so much more to learn.” Navisi answered with a bow.

“We respect your modesty, but I believe that training with Mistress Azula has skewed your perception of yourself. You are far stronger than any member of your sect that has ever lived, bar Azula. And you are every bit as impressive as she is.” Methus said, radiating good will.

Navisi blushed and all four of the intermediaries laughed good-naturedly. Denuskya was the first to speak again. “You are certainly humbler than Mistress Azula. But we have not called you here just to praise you. We also come bearing news.”

“The multiverse again needs your help to prevent disaster. We wish you to travel to Ba Sing Se to meet new allies. The Avatar is already making his way there.” Mukaati said, looking serious.

“Of course, intermediaries. Will Azula be joining me?”

“No, you will be able to inform her of the proceedings, but she needs to begin thinking and planning from Palathia. As strong as Azula is, she cannot do this alone. You must grow and stand independently of Azula; you are a great woman of your own accord.” Terrathusi explained.

“Azula will be the lynchpin to this effort, but you and the Avatar are strong and capable in your own rights and must be able to carry much of the load.” Mukaati chimed in.

“Of course, intermediaries. I will do whatever is needed to face this challenge.”

“Of that we are sure.” Terrathusi agreed. “You will need to work with Aang to recruit new allies. The veil between the spirit and material worlds is tearing, and the skills that you and Azula learned during your multiversal travels will be the key to solving the issue.”

“But there is another challenge that you must surmount in order to become the Mistress of the Arts Esoteric you were always meant to be; you must open the Scroll of Penathranaah and pass the challenges within.” Methus said, sending a shiver of fear through Navisi. “The reward of attaining your own copy of the magical interface is worth the risk.”

Azula had told her of the terrible ordeals she had to face to pass the test of the scroll. It was not something that she was looking forward too.

“You are wise to fear the tests before you, but we would not press you to take this test if we were not confident in the abilities that you have cultivated.” Denuskya said, smiling kindly at Navisi. That made her feel a little better.

“The new allies that we wish you and Aang to recruit are benevolent spirits that have already passed from the spirit realm to the material world. We believe that by working together, the people of this multiverse can fix the tearing and prevent disaster from befalling all of the multiverses.” Mukaati said. “Everyone must put aside their differences to solve this problem.”

“I understand, Mukaati. We will do whatever it takes to close the tear.”

“We have faith in the people of your world. We will have Azula send Kivathrystan to ferry you to Yun Zhi to join the Avatar as he travels to Ba Sing Se. And Azula will be put her to work in the meantime.” Denuskya said with an impish smile. “She doesn’t get to loaf and rest on her laurels.”

Navisi had to laugh. Loafing and Azula are two things that definitely don’t go together.

“It is best to return to your body and prepare. Good luck, Mistress Navisi.” Methus said.

Navisi opened her eyes to see Guru Pathik looking at her with a raised eyebrow. “I’m sorry to say that I must leave, Guru Pathik. I have been recruited.”

“I could sense their energy. Go, young mistress. Do your duty to the world and the intermediaries.” Guru Pathik smiled at her and for a moment her worries disappeared. Someday she hoped to have that kind of inner peace.

But today was not that day.

Chapter Text

The meditation hall was going to be a boon for the Order of the Arts Esoteric going forward. With the ability to work with so many chi reservoirs, she would be able to train young acolytes ever more quickly. It was a shame that the ability to make these was lost for so long. But Azula had every intention of making up for lost time.

She settled onto the meditation mat that she placed atop the raised platform; she was still able to access the power of the chi reservoirs through the mat. The mantras were recited and she felt herself move up through the planes of consciousness. It was such a wonderful feeling; her mind expanded and she could feel and see things in a way that just wasn’t possible for her normal mind. It was both a humbling and exhilarating experience.

But then she felt herself pulled and she was at a new location. This had happened so often that she wasn’t even startled by it anymore. The three moons and spiral galaxy were a breathtaking sight; even after spending months on this world it inspired her with its majestic beauty.

“As always, it is wonderful to see you, little one.” Orka said. And as expected, Haalu chimed in next. “We wish that we could have let you and your world progress unbothered, but that is not to be.”

Azula sighed. “I take it that you have another mission for me? Where are you sending me now?”

She had tried to keep the disgruntlement out of her voice, but she knew that she hadn’t succeeded. It was nice to be needed and she was glad that she had been able to help save people that couldn’t save themselves, but she had grown tired of that life and wanted to rebuild her order and spend time with the people she loved.

“We are not sending you anywhere, young one. But the multiverse is again in trouble. Trouble that will come to your world too.” “It is your own world that holds the key to saving the multiverse. We have come to recruit you and your wonderful allies to our cause.”

Azula instantly felt her resolve harden; she would do nearly anything to protect her world. “What is the threat and how do I neutralize it?”

“The artifacts and teachings of Ginhaphous have weakened the veil between the spirit and material realms.” “You and your allies must reseal the veil to prevent catastrophe.”

“How do I reseal the veil?”

“You must create and attune spirit augmentors to detect the weaknesses in the veil.” “You must wait for the tears to all be connected before you repair them.”

“Based on the limited reading I’ve done about the veil, it is a blend of spirit and material energy woven together. If I reconfigure the design for the augmentor I created to track Nikothan, I should be able to detect where the strands are weakened or frayed.” Azula began thinking how to do this.

She was drawn from her musing by OrkaHaalu clapping. “Yes, yes, this is why you are asked to help save the multiverse!” “But you cannot do this alone. You have many talented and brilliant allies to recruit.”

“Navisi, obviously. Novae and Li Nu will be needed to help design and configure the device. Toph’s metalbending will speed up production. I…”

“Yes, yes, they and others will be needed.” “But the Avatar is integral to this mission.”

Azula sighed. “I understand. We had a little disagreement but he is a good man and has the spiritual abilities needed to power any device used to repair the veil.”

“We will need to recruit an Avatar from another multiverse world also.” “We will send your allies to the appropriate place when the time comes.”

“Let me guess, I need to create devices for the other Avatar to use also.”

“Yes! You understand. Two Avatars. Two teams.” “Your team must enhance their spiritual awareness also.”

Azula was already going through the scenarios in her mind. Allies, devices, resources, skills, and numerous other things that need to be mapped out.

“You are the lynchpin but you need allies to overcome this enormous threat.” “Navisi must go to Ba Sing Se with the Avatar to recruit new allies.”

“New allies?”

“A benevolent spirit has crossed over to your world through the veil. The Avatar is recruiting them to the cause.” “You must send Kiva to take Navisi to Yun Zhi to meet the Avatar. Together they will travel to Ba Sing Se to meet the Jade Ministers.”

Azula pinched her nose. “Of course, OrkaHaalu. I should have known that it would take supernatural interference for dumbasses to no longer be in charge of the Earth Kingdom.”

“It is sad, but bigger issues are at play.” “You must work with them to save the multiverse.”

“I will send Kiva as soon as I’m awake. Have you talked to her? What about Aang?”

“They have been contacted.” “We must put the plan together.”

“How long do we have to create a plan? Weeks? Months? Years?”

“The tears are spreading at a consistent speed, but will become worse as more spirit beings cross over.” “They require help to cross over from people in the material world calling upon them and performing rites.”

“And let me guess, there are plenty of desperate people in the multiverse with just enough spiritual training to call upon forces they don’t understand.”

“Once again you are wise beyond your years. But even so, it will be at least a year before the tears connect.” “You have time to prepare your gear and train your allies. We believe that you will be able to predict when the tears will connect months ahead of time.”

“That is good to know. I should get to work, shouldn’t I?”

“Indeed, young one. We are sorry to call upon you again.” “But you and Navisi are the only two that can save the multiverse. Good luck.”

“Is there anything else that I should know?” Azula asked.

“Your Yotforbu form will allow you to wield more complicated augmentors; both of your standard variety and the ones that control the light sigils.” “You will need to master chi control with this form to maximize your power. This is a talent that only you can use in defense of your people.”

Azula instantly awoke and found herself back on her meditation mat. Ivaku and Hun Ro were getting married in two short weeks. She would allow nearly everyone to enjoy their ceremony and honeymoon before she burdened them with the troubles of the multiverse. But there were two allies that she needed bring aboard right away.

Min Kai watched as the Avatar’s air bison descended into the palace courtyard. The messenger hawk had arrived hours ago saying the Avatar and Mistress Navisi would be visiting the palace. It had been a declaration, not a request. A private scroll had been sent to the Jade Ministers; whatever message the scroll contained appeared to visibly frighten Magister Ten Vi.

Min Kai prayed to Gnolos and any other Great Spirits that would listen to not allow the Avatar to overthrow the Jade Ministers. In a few short months they had brought peace and stability to her poor, downtrodden people; hope was growing that Zenthru would again be a prosperous and stable nation. People were tired of strife and discord. Everyone wanted the Spike to become a relic of history.

She smiled as the Avatar and the young woman, who she assumed was Mistress Navisi, made their way off Appa. Aang seemed to float down with air bending while Mistress Navisi’s arms were surrounded by golden rings of rotating light and she gracefully glided to the ground. Min Kai had heard that Azula’s disciple was an exceptionally talented girl.

“It is a pleasure to see you again, Minister. Please allow me to introduce you Mistress Navisi of the Arts Esoteric.” Avatar Aang gestured to the girl, who gave a polite bow and a beaming smile. Min Kai found herself instinctively liking her.

“It is a pleasure to meet you, Minister. I’ve heard tales of the Little Hammer making the Fire Nation delegates nearly cry during negotiations.” Navisi answered.

Min Kai laughed. “I’m not sure that is exactly what happened, but it is good for a politician to have their exploits exaggerated a little bit. And I’ve heard tales of the Glowing Girl of Gold and her magic panther bird.”

“From what I’ve seen, you’re both talented ladies. Thank you for meeting us, Minister. I’m glad to finally make my way back to Ba Sing Se. It is unfortunate that history has been so unkind to your people the past few years.” Aang said, looking a bit sad.

“Indeed, it has been, Avatar. But with the Jade Magisters in charge, my people have been revitalized and the future is looking good.” Min Kai responded, letting the Avatar know exactly where she stands on the subject of her rulers. Jade Ministers and stability are good. Chaos and the Spike are bad.

“And I’m happy to see that your country stabilized. The Jade Ministers have done a wonderful job and should be congratulated for the great things they’ve done for your people.” Aang responded with a smile. It didn’t quite reach his eyes, though.

But it still made her feel a bit better; it didn’t seem that Aang was coming to overthrow her government. “Magister Ten Vi is waiting inside to meet with you both. Please follow me and I’ll take you to him.”

As Min Kai turned and began leading her esteemed guests into the palace, she made small talk with her guests. “So tell me, Mistress Navisi, is this your first time in Ba Sing Se?”

Navisi’s face went blank for a moment before a small, sad smile graced her face. “No, I was actually born and raised in the outer ring of Ba Sing Se.”

That seemed to catch Aang offguard. “I didn’t know that Navisi. You’ve never talked much about your past.”

“That’s because it is not a happy tale. My parents abandoned me when I was a child and lived on the streets, earning enough money to buy food by being a street performer. But then I was discovered by a mistress of the Arts Esoteric. But that is the past.” Navisi answered.

“I’m sorry to hear that, Mistress Navisi. Ba Sing Se can be a callous and cruel place.” Min Kai answered quietly. She had heard tales like this before. Her parents had their flaws, but she knew that they had always loved her and done their best to care for her.

“It can be. But it can be a wonderful and inspiring place too.” Navisi responded in a soft voice of her own.

Aang turned the conversation to lighter topics as they approached the Jade Room. It was the meeting room where most of the important meetings were held. Min Kai considered meeting the Avatar to be pretty damn important.

The guards opened the door and the small group was led inside, where they found Magister Ten Vi waiting. He smiled and greeted the two guests. “Welcome to Ba Sing Se. It is a pleasure to have two esteemed visitors such as the Avatar and a Mistress of the Arts Esoteric visit our humble nation.”

Min Kai could see that he was still nervous as Aang spoke. “Thank you for meeting with us, Magister. It is an honor to meet you.”

“Indeed. Bringing peace and stability to a troubled country is something to be celebrated.” Navisi said with a bow.

“Thank you for your kind words. I understand that you wish to have a private conversation to discuss a delicate issue.” Aang and Navisi nodded at the statement. Min Kai could only ask herself what the hell was going on. Butterfly-moths were again forming in her stomach.

Ten Vi turned to the guards. “I appreciate your efforts to guard me, but I wish to speak with our two guests and Minister Min Kai in private.”

Min Kai was caught off guard by the request for her to stay. The head guard gave a respectful bow as he answered. “Of course, Magister Ten Vi. We live to serve.”

Ten Vi gestured for everyone to have a seat as the guards left the room and closed the doors behind them. Once they were alone, Ten Vi spoke again. “I assume you have come to remove me from power?”

Min Kai bolted upright and prepared to come to the Jade Magister’s defense, but the Avatar spoke first. “Not at all, Magister Ten Vi. We have come to recruit you.”

Min Kai’s mouth snapped shut so hard she swears it was audible. Ten Vi looked at his guests for a few moments before speaking. “Would you care to elaborate? I have included Minister Min Kai in this conversation since I considered her to be the best person to take over once I was removed. Is her participation still appropriate?”

Both the Avatar and Navisi turned to look at her and consider. Finally, Navisi spoke. “Yes, I think that it would be best for someone trustworthy in your government be aware of the situation.”

Aang considered for a moment before he spoke. “I agree. But Min Kai, you must understand that what is about to be spoken here is for your ears only and must never be shared with others that aren’t already in the know. You will understand why this is the case as the conversation unfolds.”

Min Kai’s throat and mouth were dry and the potential implications of this discussion. She finally found her voice. “I understand, Avatar. I vow to keep everything discussed here in confidence.”

“Thank you, Min Kai. The things you hear may be shocking and disturbing, but please listen to the entire story before judging.” Aang said and then turned back to Ten Vi. “Would you like to tell us who you really are and how you came to be here?”

Ten Vi sighed and then looked at Min Kai. “I hope that you understand that I want nothing but the best for Zenthru. Ten Vi is the name of the body that I am using. My name is actually Talmaha and I’m a spirit being that crossed from the extraplanar spirit world to take over this body and sixteen others.”

Min Kai felt her mouth opening and closing without any words forming. What the fuck was he talking about? Navisi spoke as Min Kai was trying to get her brain to form coherent thoughts again. “We know the basics, but we don’t know how you were brought here. And what do you mean, sixteen others? Did other spirits come over with you?”

“I am a Kanthavite, a type of spirit that is able to possess the bodies of mortals on the material plane. There are many spirits that can do this in one form or another; what is different about me and my kind is that I can distribute my consciousness amongst a multitude of minds, creating a hive mind that blends the knowledge and memories of the hosts with my own.”

Once again, Min Kai was at a loss for words. Aang was apparently still able to use his brain and speak, so he asked a question. “How did you come here?”

“The Hirythricastin Ascension of Glorious Illumination was a group of bumbling misfits; how they seized control of a major world power is almost beyond my ability to comprehend. But one thing they had was access to work done under Long Feng called the Joo Dee program. This was a collection of abhorrent techniques which could be used to reprogram the human mind.”

“I met someone who escaped from this program. She told me that they could brainwash people and make them forget who they were.” Min Kai was finally able to gain control of her brain enough to speak. “I…I didn’t really believe it, but I was a little afraid that it was true.”

“Unfortunately, it was true. They took seventeen youths and brainwashed them, believing that they could call upon Hirythricase to join their ranks and allow the Ascended of their order to wield his tremendous power for their benefit. They performed a spirit conjuring ritual. And it was me that answered the call.” Ten Vi answered.

“What is your goal here?” Navisi asked.

“Respite from war. Have you heard of the Wishing Stones that my government has erected around Ba Sing Se?” Ten Vi asked.

“No, I haven’t,” Aang answered.

“Everyone in Ba Sing Se is required to visit a Wishing Stone and offer a wish of good will and prosperity to the Jade Ministers while chanting.” Ten Vi looked among the three. “This ritual actually allows the Wishing Stone to pull a miniscule amount of spirit energy from the visitor.”

Ten Vi holds up his hands defensively. “The amount of energy taken is so small that the person can barely feel it. Each amount is small, but by having thousands upon thousands of donors, the amount adds up over time. I use this energy to sustain me and help me grow in power. In return, I have ensured that the nation of Zenthru is well-governed and that peace and stability can be enjoyed by all.”

“Why would you help us?” Min Kai asked. She needed to know why he was here. “Do we mean anything to you?”

“You and your people mean a great deal to me, Min Kai. I gain energy and sustenance from this arrangement, but I truly want to help your people. I am not like humans; I don’t seek power or wealth for their own sake. Power and wealth are merely tools. But I see us as glorious allies that can help each other. Is Zenthru not better off since we took over?”

“It is better,” Min Kai said. “You have truly helped my people. Do you intend to keep helping them?”

“Indeed, I do. I know that this is the driving force behind your entire life, Min Kai, and I greatly respect you for it. But I am very interested to hear to hear about the cause that the Avatar and Mistress Navisi wish to recruit me to join.”

Aang and Navisi looked at each and seemed to reach an agreement, since Aang began speaking. “The veil between the spirit and material worlds is tearing and we have been asked by the Great Spirits and others to repair it. We were told that you may be able to provide information and help?”

Ten Vi sighed. “I suspected as much about the veil; the ritual that the Hirythricastin sect used shouldn’t have been strong enough to reach me. What caused the veil to weaken?”

This time Navisi spoke. “A being from an adjacent sphere of existence brought powerful magical artifacts and teachings to four worlds of our multiverse. Azula and I were able to collect the artifacts and suppress the unnatural teaching, but their presence was enough to weaken the veil.”

“I see how that could weaken the veil. I’m sure that you know about the planar spirit realm associated with your world, but what do you know of the extraplanar spirit realm?” Ten Vi asked solemnly.

“Very little, except that it crosses between the multiversal worlds. Can you tell us more?” Aang responded.

“Of course. It is that. Extraplanar spirits such as myself indeed exist across the multiverse, although we were blocked by the Great Spirits, as you call them, from interacting with the material worlds after the War of the Soul-Siphons began.” Min Kai felt a chill go down her spine at that word. Soul-Siphon.

“What was the War of the Soul-Siphons?” Navisi asked in a strained voice.

“There are numerous types of extraplanar spirits, but there are two main factions vying for control of not only the spirit realms but also the material worlds. It has raged for untold millenia; time works differently on the extraplanar spirit realm, but it is still a damn long time. One faction hopes to assimilate all types of life into a singular hive mind; as you might expect, many of my fellow Kanthavites have joined this group. It has far fewer numbers than the other faction, but they are generally more powerful and organized. You may refer to them as the Assimilators.”

“A second group believes in the pure survival of the fittest; every spirit is not only encouraged, but morally obligated to seize as much power and strength for itself as it can. There are more members in this group but as you might expect, they are not as organized. Let us call them the Survivalists.” Ten Vi explained.

“For those that wish to assimilate others, you can understand that they wish to possess the dominant mind of the hive. And the survivalists are very much about scheming and striving, so alliances and betrayals are standard business. It is more complicated than it sounds, since Assimilators and Survivalists often ally themselves against other groups. Chaos abounds in our realm.”

“Where do you fit in the grand scheme of things?” Aang asked Ten Vi.

“Our group doesn’t have a real name; we are generally referred to as the Abstainers. We seek a life free of strife and war. This is why I was so eager to accept the invitation to the mortal realm. And we must do what we can to protect the material world from the spirits of the extraplanar realm. During the War of the Soul-Siphons, extraplanar spirits would siphon off the spiritual energy of mortals to fuel their own power. It left entire worlds destroyed and barren of life. They also attack and consume planar spirits, although the planar spirits have more natural defenses.”

Min Kai couldn’t believe what she was hearing. This was even more terrifying than the collapse of her country. “What can be done to prevent the veil from tearing?”

The Avatar turned to look at her. “The intermediaries of the Great Spirits themselves, along with other powerful beings, have recruited myself and the Mistresses of the Arts Esoteric to build devices and create a plan to reseal the veil. It is a complicated story, but both Azula and Navisi have unusual skills that have prepared them to help with this task.”

“Oh.” Was Min Kai’s articulate response. “What can Zenthru do to help?”

It was Navisi who spoke first. “We need Telmaha to share as much information about the extraplanar realm as possible. And we may also ask for his assistance in building devices to detect spirit energy and combat hostile spirits. Would one of your forms be able to work with us in Palathia?”

“Palathia is too far for my forms to travel. I would be able to send a form to Rokishe, though.” Ten Vi answered. “And Zenthru will provide as many physical resources as we can to your effort.”

“Thank you, Ten Vi. We are not happy that a spirit is possessing the bodies of people on our world, but considering how much good you’ve done, we will not interfere.” Aang said, a frown on his face.

“I understand, Avatar, but the poor people that were used in the Joo Dee program are so warped and twisted that it will be difficult for them to ever recover their sense of self. This is a terrible situation, but I believe that the current arrangement is for the best going forward.” Ten Vi sighed as he answered.

“Azula is creating a plan to build devices that can help us in this endeavor. We will be in contact again when we have more information. We hope to begin gathering information from you in the near future.” Navisi said. “I would like to introduce you to my magical companion, Omnisae. We can use her for communication in the short term until other arrangements are made.

Suddenly, a giant green and blue eagle-hawk appeared in the room. Min Kai felt its intelligent gaze fall on her, and a small shiver went down her spine. She wanted to give people jobs and clean water and general stability. Dealing with spirit overlords and magic animal companions was far outside her comfort zone.

“I look forward to seeing what you come up with. Rumors of the Mistresses of the Arts Esoteric have flooded the world.” Ten Vi gave Navisi a wide smile.

“No offense, Magister, but the rumors have only scratched the surface.” Navisi answered with a smile of her own.

Chapter Text

The mat was sitting on the chi reservoirs in the meditation hall; she wouldn’t actually be using the chi reservoirs but there was something about the hall that made this seem like the appropriate location to use the Scroll of Pananthranaah.

Navisi was nervous as she held the metal scroll in her hands. The size and shape of a normal scroll, it didn’t look like much except for the fact that it was metal instead of paper. But she knew that it was so much more than a mere scroll. It was a life-or-death struggle.

She looked up at Azula one last time, only to see her smiling back at her. Her aura was filled with anticipation. “Navisi, you are a Mistress of the Arts Esoteric who created a whole new branch of our order. You’ve unlocked your chakras and have become adept in our meditation practices.”

Hearing Azula’s praise helped calm Azula’s nerves. “Thank you, Azula. I’m starting my warm-up meditations.”

“Good luck, Navisi. No matter what you see and experience, remember who you are.”

Navisi began working through the Mnaimonatic meditations that Azula had taught her. She felt her emotions smoothing out as she took control of her mind, enhancing her alertness and emotion regulation. After fifteen minutes of meditation, she knew that she was as ready as she would ever be.

She opened her eyes, took a big breath, and pressed her thumbs onto the indentations near each end of the scroll. No sooner had her thumbs pressed into the scroll, she felt a pulse pass through her body and she was no longer able to move her body. But she had expected this and did not even need her Mnaimonatic meditations to remain calm.

The testing was about to begin. She pushed a small amount of chi into the scroll and her consciousness was immediately taken to a new location. The all-white room was just as Azula had described it; there was neither a door nor window to be seen. But the woman before her was not as Azula had described her.

“Greetings, Mistress Navisi. Welcome to the Panathranaah Magical Interface. My name is Rysa and I will be the graphical interface personality performing your assessment today.” Rysa appeared to be a middle-aged woman whose dark brown hair had streaks of gray. She was pretty but not classically beautiful; her nose was just a bit too small and her eyes a little too large to fit the standards of beauty in the Earth Kingdom. She was considerably taller than Navisi.

“Hello, Rysa. It is a pleasure to meet you. I am honored to be assessed by you.”

“As Mistress Azula explained, you will be given a test to evaluate your discipline, intelligence, and emotional control. Once started, this test cannot be stopped until it is completed. If you succeed, you will have access to information that is currently unavailable to anyone on your world except Mistress Azula. If you fail, your mind will be trapped within the scroll until your body dies. I am offering you one chance to withdraw. You may withdraw on time and one time only. If you withdraw and then reenter, you will not be given another opportunity to leave without completing the test. You may take as much time as you need to answer.”

Navisi knew the rules before she accessed the scroll. There was no room for doubt. “Rysa, I wish to continue.”

Rysa smiled at her. “You entered the scroll with conviction, so I never doubted your resolve. You will be assigned to use your light sigils to telekinetically assemble a three-dimensional chi conductor. Once a part has been lifted, it must be held up and is no longer permitted to touch the ground. There are a total of fifteen complex geometric shapes that must be aligned to create a working chi conductor.” Rysa explained.

“I understand,” Navisi answered.

“Two copies of your mind have been created; each will think that they are you with no knowledge of your test. You will feel what they feel as you work. You have until the completion of the second scenario to assemble the chi conductor.”

Navisi brought all of her training to the forefront of her mind. “I am ready.”

Fifteen shapes appeared on the floor before her. Some were long and skinny and bent, while others were short and stout and blockish. And many shapes and sizes in-between. Ryza gave her final instructions. “The test will begin as soon as you activate your light sigils. Remember, you will feel the emotions that your mental copies feel.”

Navisi took a deep breath and activated her light sigils. And the immense sense of guilt nearly overwhelmed her.

She fled back through the burned-out buildings and the fake Navisi hid her chi as the horde of Turned came running after her. There was nothing left. Everyone was gone. All that she had been able to find was the Turned.

“You! Why have you come back?” The gray skin and white hair sent shivers up and down her spine. But it was the voice that truly froze her in place. “You killed me, Navisi. I lifted the beam off of you and you fled in fear like the ungrateful coward that you are. You killed me, but they got me anyway.”

Tears spilled from Navisi’s eyes as the decrepit figure came closer; the blade that Navisi had used to kill her Mistress Lista was still protruding from the eye of the Turned. And part of her skull was missing where they had clawed her brains out. “But…but how? You’re not a bender.”

“Stupid slut, you don’t know anything about the Spear of Canto. Only benders are turned at first. But eventually the world ran out of benders. And then the nonbenders were Turned.” Mistress Lista’s smile nearly caused Navisi to wet herself. “I’m dead but I will never rest. All thanks to you.”

Navisi jumped sideways and tripped over the remnants of a gate as another voice hissed in her ear. “You let them take me. Do you know that the Rovers keep their sadism and sick sexual desires when they’re Turned? Do you know what they did to me? Again and again, the took their turn with me. I can’t die, so they were free to satisfy every perverted desire.” Jin said, one of her eyes missing, leaving only a blank socket. “If there weren’t enough holes to sate them, they just made more.”

“No, no, that’s not what I wanted to happen. I tried to save you. I tried to save everyone.” Navisi shouted as she scrambled backwards, away from the unholy creatures ahead of her.

“You think yourself a great mistress, but you are a fraud and a pale imitation of what a true Mistress of the Arts Esoteric should be!” A third Turned shouted. “Asundra would have saved us. Asundra would have found a way to win if this had been her world. She wouldn’t have fled like a coward. You’re a fucking coward!”

Navisi covered her ears so that she wouldn’t have to listen to Shur Zi’s vitriol. Her panic took away her ability to move. Frozen in fear and shame, all that she could do is curl up and weep as the monstrosities grew nearer.

“You were always second best. You stand in the shadow of a great woman because you fear to face the world on your own.” Mistress Lista said as the three of them proceeded to beat Navisi, their fists and feet breaking her bones. Her mouth and throat fill with blood and she begins choking until she finally passes out.

The hot tears tickled the real Navisi’s cheeks as she wept for what she had just experienced, but she had aligned eight of the objects and were holding another five telekinetically.

“Brace yourself! They’re coming through the tear!” Navisi shouted as she frantically weaved the spirit energy from the augmentor to repair the frayed veil. But Aang was becoming distracted and the spirit energy was slowing down.

“Aang! Keep pushing the spirit energy into veil!” Navisi shouted with her chi enhanced voice. The roar of the angry spirits made speaking with anyone difficult. He had to keep the energy coming; it worked best if both teams sealed the veil together, but her side was falling behind.

“I can’t. I need to protect my world from the spirits.” Aang released his grip on the spirit augmentor and rose into the sky to meet the oncoming spirits.

“No, Aang! We have to close the veil.” Navisi wailed, but it was too late. Aang had joined the fray.

Her friends and allies tried valiantly to hold off the onslaught, but it was for naught; there were simply too many spirits. The only way to defeat them was to close the veil, so she levitated herself to the augmentor and placed her hands on the device.

It was designed to channel the immense power of the Avatar into a steady stream of energy that could be used to weave the fabric of the veil back together. She couldn’t manage as much as him, but she channeled all of her chi into the augmentor and pushed the energy into the weave. At first it just dissipated into space, but then she felt Azula siphon it off and combine it with the energy she was already controlling.

The pace of the weaving increased with her addition, but her heart clenched in despair as she saw her friends dying around her. Li Nu’s lifeless eyes stared into nothing as she laid next to her broken spirit disc weapon. Ivaku and Izuka were fighting in tandem against a huge flying monstrosity; but they were so focused on the enormous threat that they didn’t see the spider coming from their flank after Toph was decapitated.

She couldn’t let their sacrifices be in vain. Aang was a whirling ball of energy, wielding the spirit lightning and water shields with skill and power. But even the Avatar couldn’t find off their tremendous numbers forever.

The first strike was a small rodent spirit that clasped onto his arm and began stabbing him with some sort of spiky tail. He quickly dispatched it but the hole in his defenses was already being exploited. Two more monstrosities grabbed him and began pulling him down. Then three more attacked and his cry of despair was terrible to hear; the wail of anguish of both Aang and Raava reverberated in his soul.

Raava was forcibly pulled from his body and eviscerated by the horrible wave of spirits. She killed dozens of them but for every one that fell, three more took its place.

Navisi felt the shockwave as Raava’s essence was destroyed. All balance was gone. There was no more light to balance the darkness.

And now Navisi stood alone. Her spirit repulsor shield had kept the weak spirits at bay, but now the truly monstrous ones were coming for her. She screamed in agony as she poured every ounce of her chi energy into the spirit augmentor. Her soul shrieked at the horrible burning pain that racked her body.

But it was better to die by sacrificing her chi to seal the veil than to be torn to bits by the monstrosities. Again and again, the fucking bastards smashed into the spirit repulsor field, not breaking through but draining the energy from the chi reservoir.

It was nearly empty and it would run out of power before she ran out of chi. And then they would take her. And she knew that it wouldn’t be quick like the others. They were angry with her and would take their time. Terror caused her intestines to clench as the spirit repulsor field failed. The tentacles grabbed her and pulled her away and pinned her to the ground, while another took its hook and began to cut into the flesh of her…

The real Navisi gasped as she fell to her knees, the completed chi conductor floating in the air. Despite this only being a vision, the terror had felt so real. She applied her Mnaimonatic techniques and finally quieted her mind enough to get back to her feet.

“Congratulations, Mistress Navisi. Please hold while I download the contents of my neurological interface system into your neural pathways. Your neurological pathways are within the desired parameters. This will only take a few moments.” Rysa said. Navisi felt a flash in her mind and she could feel the chi of her own mind being reconfigured. “Download complete. You now have a functional graphic interface linkage to the Scroll of Penanthranaah and its contents. This interface can be used with your light sigils and jevalda. The functioning of both will be improved.”

“Yes, yes, we are so happy that you passed your test.” Orka said. Haalu chimed in immediately afterwards. “We are proud of what you have achieved.”

“Thank you, OrkaHaalu. That was definitely a trying experience. But it was different than Azula’s testing.”

“Indeed, young one. The test is individualized to push the boundaries of the candidate.” “You are different than Azula. You are both wonderful, but you need to remember that you are your own person.”

“Is that why I only had two tests?”

“In the past, most candidates only received one test. The knowledge was given more freely and the stakes were lower.” “Azula needed to be tested to wield Yotforbu’s power. You needed to be tested to face the stakes with saving the multiverse.”

“Oh, I see. Wielding Yotforbu’s power seems like a terrifying thing.”

“Yes, yes, it is difficult for a mortal of any age, but especially difficult for children such as you and Azula.” “You are not quite ready for Yotforbu’s power, but you could control the Dragons of the Apocalypse if needed.”

That filled Navisi with pride. No one besides Azula could control the dragons before this. Not even the Avatars.

“This first test was to force you to face the guilt and regret you have for leaving your people and to show that you are strong in your own right. You do not live in Azula’s shadow; the two of you are beacons of light that illuminate the darkness around you, showing the way for others.” Orka explained.

“The second test was to see how deep the anchor of your resolve was. You maintained your focus and composure under the most intense circumstance that you can imagine. Your friends were dead and a terrible ordeal was about to befall you, but you remained resolute and devoted to your cause until the bitter end.” Haalu continued.

“That was the most difficult thing that I’ve ever done.” Navisi admitted in a quiet voice.

“Indeed, it is. But you have proven your worthiness to connect with the Scroll of Penanthranaah. With the two greatest Mistresses of the Arts Esoteric connected to the scroll, your gifts will make you a force to be reckoned with.” “The world is counting on the two of you to guide the efforts to close the veil and unify the team that will change the course of the multiverse. We believe in you and we trust that you will do what needs to be done.”

“Thank you. Your words mean a lot to me.”

“Go forth and show the world the wisdom and strength of the Order of the Arts Esoteric.” “Azula is waiting to celebrate your great accomplishment. Go and enjoy your victory.”

“I will, OrkaHaalu. I promise to do my best to save the multiverse.”

“Of that we have no doubt. But Rysa will be able to communicate with Bitok, much in the same way that you can speak with the magical companions.” “It will make it much easier to share information and techniques. Collaboration will make you both stronger. Good luck.”

Navisi’s eyes snapped open to see Azula’s beaming smile. She was enveloped in a tight hug even before she had a chance to uncross her legs. “I knew you could do it!” Azula exclaimed.

“It was the most difficult thing that I’ve ever done; and I’m including fighting the Avatar in that.” Navisi answered with a muted smile of her own. She knows that she did something great, but the aftereffects of the terrible ordeal was still dampening her spirit a bit.

“I understand. The test is designed to probe our psychic weak points and push us to our limits. I wasn’t fully recovered for a few days.” Azula gave a sad smile. “It was a terrible thing to endure but the reward is worth the pain. Bitok is a wonderful assistant.”

“Actually, my interface is named Rysa.”

Azula just laughs. “I guess each interface is unique. I’ll be interested to see how it affects your abilities with the light sigil. Even Aang might be running in fear if you get much stronger.”

“I doubt that, Azula. But I can’t wait to try it out.” Navisi felt a lot better about moving forward. But then a thought struck her. “OrkaHaalu said that we would be able to communicate with each other through Rysa and Bitok.”

Azula raised an eyebrow and her face took on a look of concentration. She heard Rysa speak in her head. ‘Bitok has sent a message in Lincum Arca. Would you like to review?’

‘Yes.’ Navisi answered silently. She smiled as she reviewed the contents. ‘Alone we walk softly, but together we stand proud.’

Navisi asked Rysa to send a return message. She watched as a smile crossed Azula’s face. “I’ve never heard that quote before. ‘Darkness can only take that which is forsaken by the light.’ Where did it come from?”

“I just made it up. OrkaHaalu said that we are beacons of light. I have every intention of driving darkness from our lands.” Navisi answered, staring Azula in the eyes.

“I think it’s time we start collecting your wisdom in scrolls for the children to read.” Azula said with a smile. “I believe that the collected words of ‘The Wise Wielder of Light’ will be read for centuries to come.”

“I doubt that, Azula.” Navisi said with a smirk. “I’m expected the snot-nosed brats to be studying my words for millenia.”

Chapter Text

Novae was equal parts exhilarated and terrified by the recruiting speech that Navisi had given her. Their world was in danger of being overrun by wild and dangerous spirits. But augmentors were the key to saving them all. She had been working like a madwoman for the past week with Azula, Navisi and Li Nu to design augmentors to do the job.

She had been amazed at the creativity that Azula and Navisi had shown in designing and building their augmentors. But they were only talented amateurs. Novae and Li Nu had made so many modifications to their initial designs that they were virtually unrecognizable. And they were significantly more powerful.

Spirit repulsors had been the low hanging fruit. Novae had seen right away how to make them more powerful and versatile. And today was their first test of the new design.

The version designed by Azula fired an unfocused blast that required the spirit to be relatively close in order for it to be effective; the repulsor blast became too dispersed after about fifteen feet to be effective. But this new design overcame that problem.

The Avatar had infused some spirit energy into a small spirit receptacle that Azula had designed. Novae had upgraded the design of the receptacle by making it glow when there was spirit energy present. With the old repulsor design, the user had to stand about relatively close to dissipate the energy. Navisi now stood about fifty feet away.

“Preparing to fire!” Navisi yelled and then proceeded to unleash a blast. The light on the spirit receptacle went out instantly.

“Wow, I felt the difference in power!” Aang shouted. “That is absolutely incredible.”

“Thank the Great Spirits that Li Nu attended your lecture, Novae. The two of you are brilliant and have done so much to change the world.” Azula said, giving Novae and Li Nu a broad smile. Novae couldn’t help but smile back.

“And thank you for bringing this technology to our attention. We would never have been able to do so much without your help.” Li Nu answered.

“I think all of you ladies are pretty dang awesome,” Aang said. “And let’s not forget that we have a great engraver that has to work night and day to keep up with you ladies.”

They all laughed at the startled face on Hanru. He was scared of Azula and absolutely terrified of the Avatar. But Novae’s joy was muted as she thought why Si Har couldn’t be with them. His health has been in steady decline after the stroke. She wasn’t a sentimental person, but he had taken her in and made her feel like part of his family. He had become something of a father to her.

“Having an augmented engraver really helps.” Hanru was finally able to answer. It really did help. Hanru could engrave nearly four times faster using the augmented engraver instead of conventional engraving tools. Novae had hopes to automate the engraving process someday. But they had other fish to fry first.

“I’m glad that it works like you said it would, Novae.” Azula said, looking at Novae. “That’s a great stopping point. Some of us need to make our way up to Omashu for the wedding.”

Novae couldn’t help but smile at the thought of Ivaku and Hun Ro getting married. She wasn’t particularly close to them, but she considered them friends and wanted them to be happy together. But she was happy to stay and keep working with Hanru while the Avatar and the rest of the Azulinati made their way to Omashu.

She couldn’t wait for them to come back though. If Toph was as skilled at metalbending as Azula claimed, it would make building the more complicated augmentors that much faster. Novae had a lot of plans and would need a lot of workers to get them all made.

Ivaku was so nervous and excited that she worried that she would throw up. Li Nu must have noticed her nerves. “It’s going to be okay, Ivaku. You and Hun Ro belong together. And you’re like a sister to me already; I literally can’t think of anyone that I want joining my family more than you.”

“Thank you, Li Nu, you’re like a sister to me too.” The two women shared a hug and then waited for the ceremony to start. They had decided to have a small, private wedding with just their closest friends. And it would be so much more special since Azula was officiating it. She meant so much to Ivaku and she knew that her life would still be a living hell if not for Azula. And it meant a lot to her that Aang had agreed to escort her to the altar.

She was pulled from her thoughts by Li Nu’s soft voice. “It’s time, Ivaku.”

Ivaku gave her friend’s hand a gentle squeeze as they made their way to small temple. The temple had been blessed by both Earth Gnostics and a Water Priest in preparation for the ceremony. Aang was waiting for her outside the temple.

“You look beautiful, Ivaku. Hun Ro is a lucky man to be marrying a beautiful and talented woman like you.” Aang said, a wide smile on his face. Ivaku felt herself blushing.

“I’m the lucky one, Aang. He’s such a great man and I love him so much.”

“I think that we can agree that you’re both lucky. But let’s get you inside before Azula gets worried and sends Kiva to come find us.”

Li Nu nodded and let them know the plan. “I’ll let them know that you’re ready. Sokka says that he’s been practicing on the drums.”

Li Nu disappeared and moments later, she heard the rhythmic beating of the drum. That was their cue to enter. Aang offered her arm and she gladly took it. The doors were opened by the ushers and they entered the temple, walking in rhythm with the drums.

And Ivaku’s heart jumped with joy when she saw Hun Ro waiting for her at the altar. And she was so happy that so many of her friends and loved ones were here. Li Nu, of course, was waiting for her at the altar. King Bumi was giving her a mad grin from his place next to Hun Ro. And she could see others. Vinda. Minvu. Rajeen. Katara. Izuka.

Aang patted her hand and gave her a quick kiss on her cheek when they reached the altar before going to take his place next to Ty Lee. Ivaku took her place and smiled up at Hun Ro. And she had to laugh because he looked every bit as nervous as she felt.

She was drawn from her thoughts as Azula’s powerful voice called out. “Today we are gathered to celebrate the impending union of Ivaku and Hun Ro. Love has brought these wonderful souls together and today we will rejoice as they pledge their hearts to each other and swear to live out their days in marital bliss.”

Azula turned to Hun Ro. “Hun Ro, you have presented Ivaku with her betrothment necklace, declaring to all that you wish her to be your wife. Do you vow to love, honor and respect Ivaku for the rest of your days, no matter the trials and tribulations of life, swearing to never forsake her?”

“I accept the vow.” Tears started to form in Ivaku’s eyes when she heard the words that he would accept her.

Azula now turned to Ivaku. “Ivaku, you have received a betrothment necklace from Hun Ro, declaring that you wish for him to be your husband. Do you vow to love, honor and respect Hun Ro for the rest of your days, no matter the trials and tribulations of life, swearing to never forsake him?”

“I accept the vow.” She couldn’t stop the tears that flowed down her cheeks.

“Then I hereby declare that Hun Ro and Ivaku are married in the eyes of the Great Spirits. Hun Ro, you may kiss the bride!” Azula announced to the clapping and cheering of the assembled crowd. This was the greatest moment of Ivaku’s life.

Azula was so happy for Ivaku and Hun Ro. They were both such wonderful people and deserved to find happiness together. She would let them enjoy themselves on their honeymoon before she troubled them with the danger the world faced. Right now though, she wanted to celebrate the union of her two wonderful friends. The reception was small but everyone seemed to be having a good time.

It was nice to catch up with so many of her friends. Several of whom were coming back to Gir Mirath to stay. Toph, Vinda and Izuka were coming back immediately after the wedding. Ivaku and Hun Ro would be moving shortly after their honeymoon. But it was great to catch up with the others as well.

She had danced with her friends and laughed and exchanged stories about the goings on of the world. Everyone was doing such exciting things. If not for the threat of the spirit veil tearing, she would truly believe that the world was moving towards a better future. There were issues, of course, but there were a lot of good things too.

Azula decided to take a break from the festivities and go out to a balcony overlooking the plains outside Omashu. She could see the Senskal Mountains in the distance; the great peaks looking so small across the plains.

She felt another person approaching. Azula wasn’t exactly seeking solitude, just a quieter setting for a few minutes. But she enjoyed the company of her guest.

“It really is a beautiful sight.” Vinda said as she joined Azula at the railing.

“Yes, it is. This is a great city and great people. I worry about the direction they’re going, but I believe that they will not turn down the wrong path.”

“I do not know the people here very well, but I trust your judgement.” Vinda answered quietly. “Many of us trust your judgement and believe that you will guide us towards a better future.”

Azula felt a small jolt as Vinda turned and put a hand on Azula’s arm. She turned to see Vinda looking at her with a soft smile. Azula turned to face her, their faces only a few inches apart.

“I will share my vision with the world, but my goal is to help the world create institutions that people can use to create a better world for themselves.” Azula answered. She held her ground as Vinda stepped just a little closer.

“I understand. But some of us have been waiting for you to return on a more personal note.” Vinda said, her voice soft and raspy.

The pleasant scent of Vinda’s perfume filled her nostrils and she felt her body flush with excitement at how close she was standing. She gently raised her hand and cupped Vinda’s cheek, smiling at the contented sigh that escaped Vinda’s mouth.

“Were you one of those people, Vinda?” Azula asked in a low voice, leaning forward so that their noses were almost touching.

“Yes.” Came the simple response as Vinda closed the small distance between them and their lips met. Azula felt Vinda’s strong hands pull her in closer. The soft, gentle kiss filled Azula with a lust that she had never felt before.

“I missed you, Vinda.” Azula said as they finally pulled apart.

“And I missed you, Azula. I was so strongly attracted to you when you stayed with us in Rokishe, but you were a princess destined to do great things.” Vinda looked into her eyes. “And you are still destined to do great things. But perhaps there might be a chance for us to be more than before.”

“I…I would like that, Vinda. But there is so much to do; I just don’t know if there is time to build a relationship.” She stopped speaking as Vinda put a finger to Azula’s lips.

“I told you once that you needed to find time for companionship, no matter how much responsibility you have. Even if…even if that companion isn’t me, you should try to find time for someone to love and be loved by.” Vinda removed her finger from Azula’s lips.

“I want companionship, Vinda. And I would love to see if we could be a couple, but I’m afraid that I won’t have the time to treat you right.”

“I understand, Azula, and I accept that risk. We are both going to be busy, but I meant what I said. Perhaps we’ll find that we aren’t compatible, but I’m willing to put my heart on the line to find out.

Azula looked down as she thought about Vinda’s words. She loved being around Vinda; they had reestablished their rapport as soon as they had reunited. The first time they met all those years ago, they had been heading in different directions, but now there was a chance to build something real.

“I would like to take that chance, too.” Azula finally answered in a husky voice.

“Well, you know that the party is winding down. You’re welcome to join me for the evening if you like.” Vinda purred.

“I…I don’t know, Vinda. I’ve been through a lot and my body…my body isn’t like it used to be. There are scars.” Azula said quietly. It was one thing to show her scars off to the general world. It was something different to share them with someone intimately.

“You’re a beautiful woman, Azula. I know that you’ve had a difficult time during your travels. But scars don’t matter to me; if anything, they add character to your already sensuous body.” Vinda pulled Azula in for another gentle kiss.

Azula still feared that Vinda would be turned off by her scars, but she decided not to let fear rule her. It was better to find out now rather than later.

“My room has a very large and cushy bed.” Azula said. And she couldn’t help but smile at the feral grin that crossed Vinda’s face.

“Alright, Mistress Lightshow, I’m ready to move up and out!” Toph exclaimed, giving Navisi a solid punch to the shoulder.

Navisi couldn’t help but smile; she enjoyed hanging around with Toph. But things were going to get a lot more serious.

“I’m going to miss you, Toph. I need you to promise to keep these young mistresses out of trouble. Snort!” Bumi said, his voice hoarse and much weaker than usual. Navisi held her sigh in; she could see that his health was steadily declining. His chi was still strong but his physical vitality was weakening; from the reading she had done, it seems like this happens a lot to people with very powerful chi’s. Azula said that it happened with Mistress Corvylyn. Now it was happening to both King Bumi and Guru Pathik.

Navis assumed that someday it would happen to her and Azula also. Assuming that evil extraplanar spirits didn’t kill them first.

“I’m going to miss you too, your Buminess. You’re a great guy.” Toph went over and gave him a big hug. Navisi could see the real affection that they held for each other.

“We’re all going to miss you, King Bumi.” Azula said as she too went and gave him a hug. Navisi knew that this may well be the last time they get to see him. With the work that needs to be done to reseal the spirit veil, as well as continue teaching the Air Acolytes, they were going to be really busy.

Of course, Azula seemed a little distracted today. That was to be expected after sneaking off from the party last night in the company of a certain Vinda; Azula seems to have finally found someone that lights a romantic spark for her.

Navisi had watched their auras glow when they had first reunited back in Rokishe. And she saw how excited Azula was that Vinda was going to move to Gir Mirath and help administer the growing city. If they can share a little bit of happiness in the craziness of their life right now, Navisi was all for the relationship. Vinda definitely seemed like Azula’s type. Pretty, intelligent, witty.

At last, all of their goodbyes were said and the Gir Mirath crowd were all climbing into the small airship; Azula had bought the little airship to help ferry people and supplies back and forth between Palathia and Gir Mirath. But it worked well for trips like this also. Especially since it allowed them to transport the Distance Printer in Omashu back to Palathia.

Toph wasn’t happy about the situation, but she preferred it to riding open saddle on Appa. Ty Lee’s morning sickness was better now that she was well into her second trimester, but she still felt more comfortable riding in the airship also. Aang needed to visit Ba Sing Se before meeting the rest of the team in Rokishe anyway.

Azula had allowed the newlyweds to ride Kiva to a lovely chateau that she had reserved for them on Kyoshi Island. It had its own private beach and was within walking distance of a small resort town. But Navisi didn’t expect them to leave the chateau very often.

So now Navisi was sharing a ride back to Palathia with the crew they were hoping to recruit. Izuka, Toph, and Katara. Ty Lee and Vinda were allowed to listen in, and of course Li Nu already knew the situation. Azula had asked the pilots to stay up front for a while she gave the spiel to the group.

“I’m sorry to call you together after such a joyous occasion, but the world is in need of your help. Avatar Aang, Navisi and I were approached by powerful supernatural entities and the intermediaries of the Great Spirits to combat a great threat.” Azula said, pausing to look at her audience. Everyone was staring at her with rapt attention.

“The veil between the spirit world and the material world is tearing. But I believe that we can repair and keep the spirit world sealed away; however, it will take all of us, and many more, to fix the veil.”

The crowd sat silently for a few moments before Katara spoke. “Why is it tearing?”

“As some of you know, Navisi and I traveled to other worlds, ones like ours but things were just a bit different. As a matter of fact, Navisi was born on one of those worlds.” Navisi felt most of the eyes in the room snap to her; that wasn’t a fact that everyone knew.

“A malevolent being traveled to these worlds and offered the people dangerous artifacts and teachings. Navisi and I were sent to these worlds to recover these items and suppress the dangerous teachings. Even though we successfully achieved our missions, these gifts destabilized the veil.” Azula explained.

“Disaster is not imminent, so we have time to solve the problem and implement a solution,” Navisi chimed in, sensing the fear in the crowd. “It will take a lot of effort and creative applications of augmentors, but we believe that the veil can be fixed.”

“But it is larger than any one person, even the Avatar, can solve alone. Navisi and I have developed a plan to move forward. We will essentially attack the problem from two angles. The first approach is to create the spirit augmentors that can be used to seal the veil. I will work closely with Master Novae to design two devices to reinforce the veil and then seal it shut. Each device will require an Avatar and a wielder of the light sigils to working in tandem to seal the veil.” Azula explained.

Which of course inspired more questions than answers. Izuka voiced her thoughts first. “There’s only one Avatar! Who will work the other device?”

Navisi told about her role in the plan. “There’s only one Avatar on each world. My team will travel to another world to work with their Avatar. We don’t know which world yet.”

This, of course, left everyone completely dumbfounded. So Azula continued speaking. “Put that aside for now. While I’m working with Novae in Rokishe, Navisi and Li Nu will work in Gir Mirath with the waterbenders and other allies to create weapons to defend ourselves from the spirits. When we begin repairing the veil, we expect a horde of spirits to be attracted to the energy of our augmentors and try to stop us from sealing the veil. We need to be able to defend ourselves.”

“Why waterbenders in particular?” Katara asked.

That was a sensible question. Navisi was happy to explain. “Having studied healing with you, Katara, I have a theory that water bending can be used to control or at least redirect spirits. Li Nu and I want to work with you and Ivaku to see if we can better understand how this might work and hopefully develop augmentors to better defend ourselves. I fully expect this research to improve our understanding of healing also.”

Everyone was quiet for a few moments. Azula took advantage of that silence. “Navisi and Aang have explained the situation to Matron Asitva and she will allow the team that had been working with Novae and Li Nu to help us. And we also have a special ally in Ba Sing Se; a benevolent spirit has crossed through the veil and is willing to help us with our work.”

“The spirit has a limited range of movement; Gir Mirath is too far but Rokishe is in range. The spirit augmentor work will primarily be done there while the spirit defense work will be done out of Palathia and Gir Mirath.” Navisi explained.

“Navisi’s team will be Li Nu, Katara, Ivaku, Izuka, and Master Hanru to engrave. Several other augmentor specialists will also move from Rokishe to Gir Mirath.” Azula said. “My team will be Novae, Toph, and the remainder of the augmentor specialists.”

“What role am I to play, Azula?” Izuka asked, a small frown on her face. “I don’t really fit into any of those categories.”

“Izuka, my dear, Navisi and I have developed a theory that spiritually attuned lightning may be a great weapon against spirits. Navisi has some great ideas to test that theory out. If it works, we may also draft Iroh at a later date.”

Navisi couldn’t help but smile. She couldn’t wait to test her ideas about spirit lightning. But she sensed the dread and fear in her friends, so she decided to help reassure them. “I know that this sounds like a daunting task, but we have faith in ourselves and in you. It will take time and effort, but we believe that it can be done.”

“Well said, Navisi. It goes without saying that we could never accomplish this without your help and support.” Azula smiled at the worried faces and Navisi could feel the slight change of their auras to the positive. It just goes to show how much this world loves and respects Azula.

As well they should.

Chapter Text

“Maybe if you spoke like a normal person instead of a cheetah-gazelle, I would be able to understand what the hell you were saying and make the piece to your ever so exact standards!” Toph yelled, throwing up her hands in exasperation.

“Maybe having your finger up your nose all the time is interfering with your ability to hear. Pay. Attention. To. Me. I am all that should matter to you. Increase the curvature of the crossbar by eight percent and the piece will be ready.” Novae shouted back.

“How the hell do I measure eight percent?” Toph asked, frustration filling her voice.

“Here, let me show you a simple trick for measuring curvature with flexible objects.” Novae said, her voice lowering to instructor voice. And like that the two were once again calm and productively cranking out new pieces needed to build the spirit augmentor.

Azula and Ten Vi just exchanged a glance. They had thought the two women were going to blow up the entire workshop the first time they started arguing. But after half a dozen arguments, Azula realized that this is just a way for them to vent their frustrations and that they didn’t mean anything by it. Despite the loud volume, the two worked very well together.

“I’ve reviewed Novae’s math and tested her prototype design; it will need to be tweaked but it should do the job. You were right about her. She is a first-rate genius.” Ten Vi said as Toph gently set the freshly adjusted curved tuning rod into the designated slot.

“Indeed. It’s amazing what she can do when she puts her mind to it. Using the Engraved Thinker to mathematically model the design is a wonderful luxury also.” Azula responded. Li Nu’s intellect wasn’t at Novae’s level, but she had a remarkable talent for augmentor chi composing, especially when it came to modeling mechanical designs.

“Once this device is complete, we should be able to observe the state of the veil and determine the energy outputs needed to reweave the veil. Your input would definitely be appreciated.” Azula continued.

“Of course, Azula. My energy senses are different than yours, but between your device and my skills, I don’t doubt that we’ll be able to get the augmentor energy outputs modulated correctly.” Ten Vi explained. “The majority of the energy output will be needed in the early phase of the resealing process. Once the reweaving of the veil has begun, the energy need will decrease. The veil’s tear doesn’t have to be completely rewoven; small imperfections in the veil will heal naturally over time. The veil’s not alive, but it has a will of its own, so to speak.”

Azula didn’t know exactly what to make of that, so she decided to skip over it for now. “That may be the case, but it will still be a draining process. We’ll need to make sure that the energy withdrawal works like you say it should.”

“I understand your concern, but this will not be as big an issue as you believe. If I thought there was going to be an issue, I would make sure to let you and your talented friends know.” Ten Vi’s smile made Azula feel a little better.

Not as much as she would like though. Since he was a spirit possessing a human, he had no aura. It felt a little weird to not be able to see someone’s aura. No wonder the Ty Lee’s were always creeped out whenever she blocks them from seeing her aura.

“Well, we’re making good time here. I’m sure that Navisi and her crew are doing fine too.” Azula answered as they turned back to Novae and Toph again. They were arguing again and making suggestions to each other that are anatomically impossible. “What was your life like in your world? If you don’t mind me asking.”

Ten Vi sighed. “Before the war, it was like a paradise. Glorious communion with the energy of the universe. Many of my people, myself included, hoped to ascend to an even higher plane of existence. It pains me to think of what we had and lost.”

“I’m sorry, Ten Vi. I don’t mean to pry.”

“It’s alright. But as in your world, no matter how good things are, there will be those that wish to have more than they have now. The first one to truly bring the matter to a head was an Iuvanik name Jylventhia. They were a type of assimilator; they had grown in size by the willing assimilation of numerous members of their species. But soon the willing participants ran out. The thrill of expansion overwhelmed their self-control and they turned to unwilling participants.”

“Peace had reigned for so long that the collective didn’t know how to deal with the aggressor. But soon a pack of those that felt threatened banded together and violently tried to put a stop to the assimilation. They inflicted a lot of damage on Jylventhia, but they were eventually assimilated. Fear and aggression spread through the collective. A second pack attacked and this time Jylventhia was extinguished, their essentially energy released into the collective. But it turns out that the peace we held for so long was nothing more than a convenient fiction.”

“Assimilators began grouping together out of fear and the more powerful spirits of all types began to form coalitions. At first, it was for defense. But later it was for aggression. Small skirmishes became heated battles. Battles became wars. Wars became the way of life. I don’t know who the first spirits that raided the material realm were, but they changed the scope of the entire conflict by siphoning the spirit energy from material beings and planar spirits for their own use.”

“It was then that the Great Spirits and their intermediaries intervened. They pulled all of the extraplanar spirits back to our realm and sealed us behind the veil. The war raged on but some of us tried to hide and live our own lives, desperately trying to ascend to a higher plane of existence. Some succeeded, but there are still many of us left. It’s a sign of my desperation that I was willing to forsake ascension to come to your world.”

“That’s terrible, Ten Vi. For what it’s worth, I’m glad that you came to our world. You’ve been a big help in designing the spirit augmentor and what you’ve done for Zenthru and other parts of the Earth Kingdom is nothing short of miraculours. I truly feared it was going to collapse into a handful of warring states.” Azula said quietly.

“I am able to access the learnings and memories of all the people that my consciousness inhabits. They were all extremely well educated and knowledgeable about the world for their age and experience. It’s truly a shame that they were taken into the Joo Dee program. But their knowledge and combined intellect, as well as my own skills, allowed me to determine how the government should be ran to stop the collapse.”

“It is terrible what was done to them. But as much as it pains me to say this, thousands of lives have been saved and we may yet save millions more with your help. It was worth the sacrifice.” It was a harsh truth, but it was unfortunately the situation they were faced with.

They were distracted from their discussion by Toph’s boisterous voice. “Yo, we need you test our design. I obviously did a great job, but there’s always a chance that Egghead here screwed something up.”

Ten Vi and Azula exchanged a glance as they started walking over the once again squabbling pair. They were loud and chaotic, but Novae and Toph were definitely a dynamic pair.

The jevaldas were absolutely astounding. Aang had been able to detect spirit energy before, but with the jevalda and Navisi’s training, he could see subtlety and nuances that he had never noticed before. And it made his attempts at spirit bending much more practical.

“Alright, let’s try this, Aang. Remember, slow and methodical. We need to be able to see what you’re doing.” Li Nu said as Aang made his way to the augmentor he had infused with the spirit energy. He saw Katara, Ivaku and Li Nu all watching him; they were all wearing jevaldas with the same basic design. Navisi and Li Nu had made augmentors out of them that would allow the other jevaldas to be attuned to the spirit energy that his jevalda was detecting.

He had made the mistake of asking Li Nu how they worked and had been given a complicated explanation with words like resonance and frequency modulation. But they had all been able to track his manifestations of previous Avatars, even when they had remained intangible. And now they said that they could see the spirit energy he had infused in the augmentor. If everything worked according to plan, they would be able to see him waterbend and then spiritbend.

“Here goes.” Aang pulled the water out of the container and began making swirling motions with his arms, guiding the water to gently swirl in the air around the spirit augmentor. He slowly changed the energy he was pushing into the swirling water, causing it to glow in a way reminiscent of healing. But so far there had been no change to the spirit energy.

He changed the frequency and intensity of the spirit energy in the water until he finally saw the spirit energy react to his bending.

“You’re doing it, Aang!” He heard Katara shout. He felt good that she could see the change.

Now that he had a basic idea of what affected the spirit energy, he made smaller, more incremental changes, until he finally felt like his water was in tune with the spirit energy. With a strong motion, he used the water forcibly pull the spirit energy out of the augmentor and manipulated it in the air. It sort of felt like bending mud; water was definitely there but mixed with something else.

At last he forced it back into the augmentor. Unfortunately, that didn’t go as well and only about half of the energy ended up back in the augmentor. But it was a great start.

“That was incredible, Aang. I can’t wait to try it.” Ivaku exclaimed, a wide smile spread across her face.

“That’s a great idea. Let’s get out the spare spirit receptacles and get started while the observation is fresh.” Li Nu said excitedly as she ran over the holder containing the other receptacles. She quickly set them up on separate tables around the hall.

“I would like Katara and Ivaku to try manipulating the spirit energy again while I monitor and record your progress. I can’t wait to see what kind of augmentors we can build for this.” Li Nu all but shouted as everyone situated themselves in front of a receptacle. “Aang, can you help me watch and give guidance if needed?”

“Of course, Li Nu.” Aang couldn’t help but smile at her enthusiasm. He couldn’t help but be enthusiastic too. Novae and the ladies of the Arts Esoteric had accomplished some absolutely incredible feats with augmentors and he couldn’t wait to see what they came up with next.

Aang and Li Nu watched as both Katara and Ivaku pulled water out of the barrels and began the same swirling motions that Aang had used. The water glowed and they adjusted the energy; Aang could see them closing in on the right frequency and intensity very quickly. Katara began manipulating the spirit energy of her augmentor just a few seconds before Ivaku. Aang was impressed with how quickly they both had figured this out.

He had a lot of faith in his comrades and a lot of hope that they would be able to save their world.

Izuka wasn’t sure how this was supposed to work, but she certainly felt excited by Navisi’s enthusiasm. Navisi was certainly an impressive person. Izuka guessed that she would have to in order to be accepted by Azula to be first her disciple and then fellow Mistress of the Arts Esoteric.

Although Izuka considered herself to be a brave and confident person, she had to admit that she was a bit afraid of the task ahead of them. Resealing the veil that kept out evil spirits was far outside the things that she had trained for her entire life. Granted, her life had turned out anything like she had expected. Had thirteen-year-old Izuka been told what her life would look like five years later, she would have laughed them out of the room and possibly set the informant on fire.

“Okay, so here’s how I think we should go about this.” Navisi began, snapping Izuka out of her musings. “You create lightning by using your firebending chi to separate the spirit poles in your body. That’s one reason why lightning generation can only be done by the strongest firebenders with extraordinary control; it could easily get out of control and corrupt the chi of the wielder.”

“Thanks, Navisi. You’re doing a great job of making me feel great about this process.” Izuka grumbled.

But Navisi just laughed. “What I hope that we can do is adjust the energy output of the lightning when it is released. In theory, it shouldn’t be more dangerous than normal lightning, but there is no way to know until we try.”

Izuka just stared at the girl. “Great. I’m being taught to infuse lightning with spirit energy by a precocious nonbending thirteen-year-old girl.”

“Yep, so suck it up. Let’s get started.” Navisi answered with a wide grin, causing Izuka to roll her eyes. She really hoped this girl knew what she was doing. “I want you to charge up your lightning but push a little fire into if you can.”

Izuka sighed. This girl was going to get her killed. “A little firebending into my lightning?”

“Yep.” Navisi made sure to aggressively pop the p.

“Alright. If this kills me, I want you to tell Azula that it was your fault and then inform Zuko that he’s still an asshole.” Izuka centered herself as she carefully went through the motions, feeling the poles separate. She felt the power swell within her as she channeled the lightning through her chi pathways and up her arm and towards her fingertips. Just as the lightning reached her right hand, she pushed a bit of firebending into the motion.

Her arm jerked and she screamed in agony as the bolt of red lightning arced into the sky. She fell to her knees and grabbed her right arm. The burning sensation had subsided but it felt like her entire arm had been dipped in acid.

“Oh shit, I’m so sorry, Izuka. I saw what happened.” Navisi ran to her. “Lay down and let me heal you. I know what went wrong and I can fix this.”

Izuka just gritted her teeth and laid down; she didn’t trust herself not to rip Navisi a new asshole right now if she tried to speak. Navisi set the healing stones on Izuka and started doing her swirly light sigil thing. And Izuka immediately felt the pain subside.

“I’m really sorry, Izuka. I didn’t think that the lightning would do that. I know how to correct the problem, but I understand if you don’t want to try again right now.” Navisi said in a small voice.

Izuka bit back her angry words. They were trying to save the multiverse. Risks were going to have to be taken. “We can try again. What went wrong?”

“When you infused the lighting with firebending chi, it disrupted the chi pathways that you were using to conduct the lightning. Only a very tiny fraction of the lightning leaked out into your nervous system. That’s what caused your arm to jerk. But I can teach you how to keep your chi pathways sealed.” Navisi said, her eyes glistening with unshed tears.

“Tell me what to do. When you fall off the ostrich-horse, it’s best to climb back on as quickly as possible.” Izuka got to her feet.

“Okay. When you channel lightning through your chi pathways, you’re used to using your firebending chi to control the flow. Your maximum lightning output is determined by how much firebending chi you can use to control the flow. I want you to reduce your lightning output by a little while only infusing a smaller amount of firebending into the lightning.”

“Okay. But keep those damn stones handy.” Izuka went through the motions again, but she made sure to separate fewer poles. Once again the lightning was channeled to her right hand; she infused less firebending chi into the lightning this time.

Her arm became uncomfortably warm as the much weaker bolt of red lightning shot into the sky. But the warmness faded quickly and there didn’t seem to be any negative side effects. “That felt a lot better.”

Navisi gave her a big smile. “It’s going to be a matter of practice. As you refine your technique, you should be able to use larger bolts of lightning infused with more firebending chi. And we’ll have to test how effective the technique is against spirit energy sometime.”

Izuka smiled at Navisi. “We’ll get there. That lightning was pretty wicked, but I can do it better.”

“If you’re up to it, we can do a couple more attempts. It will take time and discipline, but I have no doubt that you’ll get there.”

“Damn straight, Lightshow. Let’s get to work.” Izuka looked forward to mastering this skill.

Lu Ten was excited and nervous about meeting Father. It had been over three years since he had last laid eyes on him; he kept tabs on him to ensure that he wasn’t in danger, but otherwise he had washed his hands of him.

But Lu Ten had to admit to himself that Azula had been right; it was a mistake made of love. Lu Ten’s love of Azula had blinded himself to the fact that Father had undoubtedly made this choice out of his love for his only son.

And if Azula said that he should no longer punish Father for it, well, perhaps he could find it in his heart to forgive him. And when the steward announced that Father’s carriage had arrived, he couldn’t help but want to see him.

Lu Ten waited in the main living area, nervously bouncing on his toes in anticipation. He felt himself freeze as the main doors opened and the steward led Iroh into the room.

Father was much as he remembered him. He had lost a little weight but otherwise not much had outwardly changed. Lu Ten took a deep breath before speaking. “Hello, Father. I’m glad that you could join me today.”

“It is a pleasure to be here, Lu Ten. I know that you are probably still angry with me, but thank you for agreeing to see me.” Father said, sighing.

“I was, but Azula told me of her conversation with you. She made me realize that perhaps we should discuss the matter now that she has returned. Both Azula and Sinlao asked me to speak with you, to understand your point of view.” Lu Ten sighed, tried to keep his anger bottled up. “Azula said that since we didn’t have children yet, perhaps it was difficult for us to understand what motivated you to take the action you did.”

“Azula left as a talented and precocious child, but she returned as a wise and intimidating young woman. I did what I did because I love you more than anything; I love Azula too, but not as much as you.” Father admitted.

“And that makes it alright to lock her away in a gilded cage for her entire life?” Lu Ten asked, his voice growing louder. He took a deep breath the calm himself. His voice was calmer as he continued. “She was a fourteen-year-old girl that had done more to bring peace and stability to the world than anyone of her time. Including the Avatar.”

“Yes, she was all that. But look at the deal from a neutral perspective, Son, please. Just try to understand. Not as my son and Azula’s cousin. Or brother.” Iroh pleaded. Lu Ten watched and waited. Iroh took that as his cue to continue. “I’ve suspected for many years that you see her more as a sister than a cousin.”

“You were blind and crippled. I was willing to abdicate and spend my entire life to restore your health. I know that in time you would have adapted, but I saw all the great things in life that I expected you to enjoy slipping away. But they offered a way to make you whole. At the cost of Azula being held in a comfortable castle. To me the choice was clear; lifelong injury with little hope of recovery for you versus a gilded cage for Azula. A cage that probably couldn’t even hold her. And even if it could, politics and events change. In three, five, maybe ten years she probably could have been freed. You’ve heard how the people chanted for the People’s Princess the past few years. Do you think that the White Lotus could have kept her hidden all that time?"

Lu Ten truly tried to consider the situation dispassionately. Permanent disability versus a temporary incarceration in a comfortable castle. He understood why Father would do it, but dammit. Azula had done nothing to deserve this.

He was still considering the situation when Father began speaking again. “What if it had been Azula that was blind and crippled? Would you be willing to send me to a gilded cage to get her healed? I know what I did was wrong. She did nothing to deserve this except inspire fear in superstitious fools.”

Lu Ten paused at the thought. What would he have done to save Azula? She had already admitted that she would have done a lot to save him. Navisi and Ivaku also. He felt his resolve crumbling.

“I understand. I would have done a lot to help Azula. I would have done just as much to save you. I’m not sure I’m ready to forgive you just yet, but I want you back in my life. Azula made me realize that you shouldn’t be forever punished for a mistake of love, as she called it.” Lu Ten softly answered. And he watched as Father began crying.

And Lu Ten stepped forward and embraced his Father for the first time in over three years. He couldn’t stop the tears from rolling down his cheeks also. For three years, he had been adrift without his family. Shur Zi had been killed. Zuko effectively banished him and had actually banished Izuka. Father was pushed away. Azula had disappeared without a trace. But in less than six months, his family was being reforged.

“We will need time to reforge our bond, but the process starts today.” Lu Ten said as he finally released his grip on his father. “But I would very much like to introduce you to the light of my life, Lady Sinlao.”

Father gave him a beaming smile. “I would like nothing more than to meet the wonderful woman that has captured your heart.”

Chapter Text

Min Kai truly hopes that this summit goes better than the last one. Watching the Avatar and Azula get into a shouting match using their terrifying voices had been one of the most frightening non-war related events of her life. But since neither of them would be attending this economics meeting, hopefully there would be fewer negative interactions.

It had been organized by Azula, but considering that she has to prepare to save the fucking multiverse by building magic items to use in a process that requires multiple Avatars, it was expected that she would be too busy to attend.

But she had tapped Minister Horzun of the Muzai to lead the summit; the fact that he had Azula’s blessing and even Soon thought he was a great choice made Min Kai feel better about the matter. Soon would be the main economics representative for Zenthru. Min Kai would be one of the mediators to help negotiate any treaty drafts. Several mediators were selected; none were to be involved in negotiations that involved their nation or Regional Economic Committee. The point was for every negotiation to have a neutral and disinterested mediator to help resolve issues.

Min Kai was excited to see how Horzun and the others went about organizing this; she knew that Azula and Horzun had worked together to set up the overall scope of the summit. With any luck this would be something to help all of the people of the world. Just raising a lot of people out of poverty would do wonders to improving the state of most nations, Zenthru included. Social issues like bending purity, bender-nonbender relations and the role of women would probably be avoided like the plague.

These issues were simply too divisive and needed their own summit to be resolved. And everyone wanted to stay the hell away from any discussion regarding the role of the Avatar in world affairs.

The summit was being held in the town of Naotsu, in the recently formed nation of Bing Ha. Min Kai was still a little bitter that they had broken away from Zenthru, but she resolved not to allow that disappointment skew her judgement. She understood their reasons even if she didn’t like them.

“I’m excited to see how the trade report manifests reflect the changing hierarchy of economic throughput through the regional routes. This is very exciting; there is so much that we can learn from quantifying and properly interpreting the data.” Soon gushed as they walked into the meeting hall.

Min Kai smiled at Soon’s eagerness. She and Kiv La had continued working with Soon and it seemed to be paying dividends; she was much less prone to snap at people and start calling them rude names. And she had brought two advisors to assist her with the prep work, take notes and just gain general experience. Slowly but surely, they would rebuild the ranks of competent people in Zenthru.

“Everything that you learn can be used to improve the condition of our nation, so I hope that the information is as useful as you believe.” Min Kai answered as they walked into the meeting room. “Good luck, Soon. I have no doubt that you will represent Zenthru well.”

“Thank you, Min Kai. We’ll catch up with you after the introductory session.” Soon said as she and her two advisors went to their assigned table. Min Kai took a seat in the observer section; she was competent in economic theory and implementation, but she had no doubt that the specifics of many of the discussions would be a little too technical for her to completely follow. But this was a great opportunity to learn more.

“May I join you, Minister Hammer?” Min Kai looked over to see Hun Ro’s towering over her. By Gnolos, she swears that the boy is at least seven feet tall now.

“Of course, Hun Ro.” Min Kai responded with a smile. “But Min Kai or Little Hammer is fine; Minister Hammer makes me sound like I’m the head of the Carpenter’s Guild.”

Hun Ro laughed and took a seat next to her. “I’m really excited to see how this works out. People want jobs and trade and stability. Now that everyone except the Fire Nation is at peace, I really think that the world is ready to grow and become prosperous.”

Min Kai suppressed her giggle as Hun Ro’s voice kept rising in volume. “I certainly hope so, Hun Ro. I know that they’re not your nations anymore, but Zenthru and Bing Ha really could use trade and stability to help the people reestablish some sort of order.”

Hun Ro looked sad for a moment. Min Kai thought the look very unnatural on his normally cheerful and expressive face. “I will always love Ba Sing Se, but Li Nu and I were afraid that we wouldn’t be welcome after the Fire Nation was driven off. I have no doubt that the people think we were traitors and bootlickers.”

Min Kai sighed. “A few perhaps, but most understood that her marriage was arranged to help Ba Sing Se. And it is better than you left for other reasons; the regimes after Long Feng targeted everyone with royal ties. You and Li Nu would have been at the top of the list.”

“Well, I hope that the Jade Magisters are able to lift Zenthru up. From what I’ve heard, they are very unorthodox leaders.” Hun Ro gave her a knowing look.

“Yes, they are. But had they not taken over, I would be dead and Gnolos knows how many others would have been put to the Spike.”

“Then I’m glad they took over too.” Hun Ro said. He looked to be about to say more when Minister Horzun’s voice could be heard calling for everyone’s attention.

“May I have everyone’s attention.” Horzun paused for a few moments to let the room settle down before speaking again. “Thank you for attending the Pan-Earth Continent Economic Summit. As the name implies, our focus will be on the finding ways to improve the economic prospects for the people on the earth continent. However, we have invited representatives from other regions as well to listen, and possibly participate, if the opportunity arises.”

“I will be leading the summit, but I am ably assisted by several others. And now I would like to ask Successor Rajeen to address the assembled party. Hopefully, her words will inspire greater cooperation in the summit that we have planned.

That was a strange way to introduce Successor Rajeen. Min Kai had the feeling that Rajeen was going to be an interesting speaker.

“Thank you, Minister Horzun. I know that many of you are here to seek out opportunities to help your people prosper and improve their standard of living. But I also know that many of you have doubts about the utility of a larger economic council; the Regional Economic councils have worked so well, why do we need anything else? I hope to persuade all of you that it is very much in your best interest to join.” Rajeen spoke passionately and Min Kai could hear the conviction in her voice.

“The SDC was assembled from a group of small and unimposing nations after the Phoenix Sage Insurrection, but in three short years we have retooled our economies and militaries to become a world power. This was done thanks to wonderful inventions known as augmentors.”

Min Kai sat forward now. She knew of augmentors thanks to the discussions the Jade Ministers had with the Avatar and Navisi, but most people were ignorant of what they were and how they worked. Even Min Kai didn’t know much about them.

“These incredible devices were developed by a collaboration between Mistress Azula, a brilliant mathematician and logician named Master Novae, and several others shortly before the Phoenix Sage Insurrection. Matron Jannir, blessed with incredible foresight, agreed to fund further research into this technology, and her investment has paid many dividends. And for those that are willing to participate in the Pan-Earth Continent council, the SDC will share some of the techniques for creating augmentors.”

Min Kai sat stunned at the offer. From what she heard, augmentors had an incredible array of potential uses. Rajeen continued. “However, to be able to participate in our program, your nation must agree to become active members of the Pan-Earth Continent council and meet other guidelines. The specifics will be covered in detail with your chief delegates and their associates later in the summit, after everyone has had the opportunity to hear the benefits and expectations that come with being a member of the council.”

Min Kai looked over at Hun Ro, who was just grinning devilishly back at her. “The SDC is serious about bringing people together to improve everyone’s lives.”

Azula watched Aang, Navisi and the acolytes chant and perform the ritual dances of the Air Nomads. The Festival of Enlightened Detachment was a mid-tier festival, but it was something of a spectacle and would undoubtedly bring attention the acolytes.

She smiled at the profound joy that emanated from Aang’s aura; she knew that it had been tough for him to lose all of his people. But she and Navisi had made it their mission to bring as much of it back as possible. Some things were probably gone forever. Even Aang couldn’t know the rites and rituals for every single Air Nomad festival.

Azula just assumed that meant they had the freedom to create new ones.

“It’s amazing to see the Air Nomad traditions again.” Vinda said, giving her hand a squeeze. “You and Navisi are changing the world with everything you do.”

“The traditions of the Air Nomads deserve to be recovered. Every time we lose something from our past, we all become a bit poorer because of it. I’m just glad that so many people came to celebrate with us.” Azula answered, looking around.

And come they had. Nearly a thousand people from around the SDC had swarmed Gir Mirath to attend the festival. A veritable tent city had sprung up on the cleared lots where construction on new buildings hadn’t yet been started. And there were nearly a hundred ships anchored in the harbor and just outside.

She truly hadn’t understood how much the people wanted to see the return of the Air Nomads. In hindsight, it made sense; this area had always had a strong tradition of trade and exchange with the Eastern Air Temple.

But she knew in a way that it was bringing hope that the future would be better than the past. Like small seedlings that grow from the ashes of a great forest fire, the people knew that from these humble beginnings a great revival would come. Azula truly felt that the future was looking better and better.

And she swore that she would do anything and everything that it took to make sure that her world survived to rebuild and prosper.

“And it looks like everyone is enamored with Wiggy. I never realized that young air bison are so damn cute.” Vinda said with a smile as they both looked over at the fenced off area where Appa and Navisi’s newly minted air bison were resting.

Well, Appa was resting. Wiggy was galloping around and frolicking with the dozen or so children that had climbed into her enclosure to play. Appa, Omnisae and Momo were all keeping a watchful eye on the proceedings to make sure that everyone played nice, but so far there had been absolutely no problems. Because they were so intelligent, air bison actually had auras that could be read.

And Appa’s aura showed a contentment that warmed Azula’s heart.

Azula and Vinda walked through the crowd, holding hands and mingling with the people. Food tents had been set up and numerous other vendors were selling their wares. Aang had been amazed that some of the artisans still used some to the same techniques to make toys and pottery and jewelry that he had seen as a kid.

Azula looked to see if there were any trinkets that might be suitable for her niece and nephew; she had been pleased to hear that Yue had delivered a healthy baby boy a week ago. It appeared that he was going to be a waterbender, so he was given a traditional water tribe name. Yanook had a nice ring to it. Even though Arnook was no longer chief, he was Yue’s father and had always treated Yue well, so Azula didn’t mind her honoring him.

The night wore on and the party started winding down. Aang, Navisi and the acolytes were going to spend the night in Gir Mirath so that they could continue mingling with the people and talk about Air Nomad traditions.

But Azula had a different plan in mind for her and Vinda. “Now that the party is winding down, I’d like to make you an offer.”

Vinda raised an eyebrow and gave Azula a leer. “Really? Well, you have my undivided attention.”

“Since I’ve been in Rokishe for the past month and you’ve been working so hard getting this wonderful city up and running, I realized that you’ve never had a tour of Palathia.”

Vinda blinked at her a few times for a moment. “That sounds like a wonderful idea. I’ve heard that it is a wonderful place.”

“Indeed, it is. And you’ll finally get to ride my awesome dragon.” Azula said, enjoying the mild look of discomfort on Vinda’s face. She decided to sweeten the pot. “She’s very comfortable to ride on and I promise to make the trip worth your while.”

“I know that’s a promise that you’re more than capable of keeping.” Vinda purred.

Azula had been happy when she realized that reading the chi of others had physical applications outside combat. And Vinda had been very appreciative when Azula figured out how to push just a bit of chi into the tip of her tongue.

They giggle and walk up the short path leading away from the festivities; it had taken a little effort to detach themselves from the party, but eventually they managed. Kiva raised her head and looked at the couple as they approached, a smug dragon smirk on her snout.

“Kiva, I’d like to introduce you to my girlfriend, Vinda.” Azula said. Kiva stretched her neck so that her large head was only two feet away from Vinda. Azula had made sure to keep a tight grip on Vinda to make sure that she didn’t try to make a run for it. She spoke softly to comfort her lover; Kiva could be a little intimidating. “She wants you to put your hand out and touch her snout.”

Vinda looked between Azula and Kiva for a few moments before slowly putting her hand out and gently touching Kiva’s nose. Kiva’s gold eyes flashed briefly and then she slowly withdrew her head.

“She likes you.” Azula reassured her friend. “Let’s saddle up and enjoy this beautiful night from the air.”

Vinda reluctantly climbed onto Kiva’s back with Azula; they shared a seat and Azula made sure to hold Vinda tight to make her feel safe. She knew that the first time riding a dragon could be scary.

Azula couldn’t help but laugh as Vinda squeaked in alarm when Kiva took to the air, but her alarm changed to wonder as they ascended. It was a cloudless night and the stars twinkled brightly as the crescent moon was still low in the sky. But there was still enough moonlight to illuminate the mountain peaks as Kiva wound her way through the range.

Azula nuzzled Vinda and planted a kiss on her neck, taking a little pleasure in the hungry moan that came from Vinda. The landscape looked surreal in the pale moonlight as their eyes adjusted to dark. They flew in silence, just enjoying the ride as they reveled in the warmth they shared.

Azula spotted the courtyard as Kiva began her descent. It was easy to miss during the day and nearly impossible to see in the evening unless you knew exactly where to look. Kiva beat her wings to slow her descent and gently landed. Azula jumped down first and then helped Vinda down from Kiva’s back.

“It feels like a whole different world here,” Vinda said as she looked out across the peaks around them, the moonlight illuminating the peaks.

“And there’s a lot more to see inside.” Azula said as they held hands and looked out at the beautiful panoramic view.

“I’d love to see your home.”

“Then come with me.” Azula gently pulled her to the entry and reluctantly released her hand in order to operate the light sigils to open the door.

“I’m not sure that I’ll ever get used to that.” Vinda giggled as Azula shut down the light sigils.

“I’m not nearly as skilled with them as Navisi, but it is a useful talent.” They entered the hall as the light sconces slowly ramped up in illumination. They were tied into the stone door and provided light to whoever moved the stone aside.

And Azula couldn’t help but grin as Vinda gasped at the towering statue of Azula in her war form. Vinda had questions, of course. “Azula, why is there a giant statue of you with four eyes, four arms and four breasts?”

Vinda quickly crossed the room to get a better look at it. “That was the form that I took to battle an incredibly powerful foe. I channeled the power of a literal goddess and took her form; you can see her form on the statue to the right. Four eyes, four arms, four breasts.”

Azula had told her that she went off-world to fight and gave the basics of the multiverse and the spheres of existence. But she didn’t share all the intimate details with her.

Vinda managed to take her eyes off Azula’s staute long enough to look at Yotforbu. “She has all those things, but I have to admit that those aren’t what draw the eye.” Vinda turned and gave her an appraising look. “Did you get an elephant-hippo cock too?”

“Yes.” Azula answered quietly. Vinda was open minded, but Azula wasn’t quite sure how she would handle this information.

“It’s a shame that it’s not on display, it would have made your statue even more eye-catching.” Vinda said with a smile. “I imagine you naked like that would be a very erotic sight.”

Azula decided to just lay it all out there and admit who she was. “I can still take that form.”

Vinda’s eyes went wide and she stared into Azula’s eyes. “Are you joking?”

“No, I can still do it. When I actually channeled the power of Yotforbu, I would grow to be over eight feet tall. But now I just get a few inches taller as my torso lengthens to handle my extra breasts.” Azula admitted.

“Does it hurt to change like that?”

“It did at first, but now that my body is acclimated to the change, it’s a seamless transition. I actually have been using it a lot as I train with the light sigils. The extra arms are actually much better attuned to the light sigils than my regular arms.”

Vinda went to speak, then closed her mouth. Azula sensed her curiosity but guessed that she didn’t seem to know whether it was appropriate to ask. She decided that they should clear the air and satisfy her curiosity. So far, at least, Vinda didn’t seem disturbed by the information.

“You can ask anything you want. I’m not embarrassed about it; it’s just that it makes me different than everyone else.” Azula admitted.

Vinda reached up and cupped Azula’s cheek with her right hand. “It’s okay to be different Azula. You’re special and wonderful. But I admit that I’m curious.” She paused for a moment to collect her thoughts. “What’s it like to have a cock? Have you done anything naughty with it?”

They both giggled at Vinda’s question, breaking the tension that Azula was feeling. “It’s large and heavy, so I have to keep it strapped away while I’m doing my practice. And no, I have done anything naughty with it.” Azula admitted. Then she decided to modify her answer. “Yet.”

“Mmmmm,” Vinda hummed as she leaned close. “I understand if it’s not something you want to do, but I for one would very much like to try naughty things with it if you’re interested.”

Vinda was so close and so warm. Azula felt her own body flush with excitement at the thought of sharing this experience with Vinda. But she decided to be coy about it. “I don’t know Vinda. A soft little girl like you may not be ready for my cock. You might have to prove yourself worthy.”

A wicked grin spread across Vinda’s face. “Oh, don’t you worry, I have no doubt that I’m more than worthy. I can’t wait to explore yet another facet of your extraordinary body.” She may have wanted to say more, but Azula pulled her in for a hungry kiss.

“Come on then, little girl.” Azula quickly bent and easily scooped up Vinda into a bridal carry. “Let’s take you up to my room and test your worthiness.” They quickly shared another kiss and then Azula quickly carried Vinda up to her room and placed her on the bed. Azula untied her robes and let them fall to the floor and then quickly removed her underclothes.

She turned away to close the door and then, with her back to Vinda, shifted her form. The extra eyes, arms and boobs appeared as always. But for the first time, her yotzu formed fully erect. She closed the door and couldn’t help but smirk at the gasp of shock and surprise as Vinda’s hungry eyes took in her form.

With all the work and uncertainty that the future held, Azula felt that she deserved a special night with Vinda. And she was going to make sure that this was would be a night neither of them would forget.

Chapter Text

The tear is nearly unified. There are only three segments now and they are nearly touching. And everyone had made the past seventeen months count for as much as they could. The full complement of the most advanced augmentors they could design had been created. Spirit repulsors. Weave energy analyzers. Spirit lightning enhancers. Waterbending energy magnifiers. And many more.

Dozens of elite benders and skilled augmentor wielders had been trained in their most advanced methods. They were as ready as could be.

And Azula had made sure that the rest of the world didn’t come to a stop though. The Pan-Earth Continent council had been a resounding success; there were still lots of deep-seeded social issues to address, but the world economy was absolutely booming. Thanks in no small part to the augmentor designs that had been shared with the world.

Improvements in metallurgy, small tool manufacturing and healing had been shared with the world. And non-augmentor improvements had been passed along too. Improved irrigation systems, airship design and numerous small-scale loans to entrepreneurs had significantly improved farming output and trade.

And Aang had made a great a start to refounding the Air Nomads; six of the seven children he fathered were Air Benders, including the triplets of Bumi, Gyatso and Tenzin. The Successor candidate that mothered the nonbending child was happy to raise the child in Gir Mirath, where she intended to hold Azula and Navisi to their promise to help raise and educate Aang’s offspring of every bending type. And Aang wasn’t done yet. Ty Lee was pregnant again; this time with twins.

And Yue was pregnant again too. Zuko undoubtedly felt it was better to have two firebending successors if at all possible. Azula could understand the logic. And she was sure Yue was a great mother, so she had great hopes that the kids would turn out alright.

And the Fire Nation rebellion was on its last legs. The loyalist army had all but wiped the rebels from the map; all that they held was a small sliver of land in the far north of the main Fire Nation island. It’s doubtful that they would hold anything by the time Yue pops out kid number three.

With everything that seemed to be going right in the material world, there was hope for the future if they could just seal the tear. Azula, Navisi and Aang were reviewing the state of preparations with the main actors.

“Alright, guys, let do a final check-in before we start preparing for the big day. Novae, what is the status of the primary augmentors?” Azula asked.

“Both the energy directors and weave guides are fully assembled and calibrated to the best of our abilities.” Novae answered. “Aang is fully trained on the directors and you and Navisi are experts in the weave mechanism.”

“Great job, Novae. We couldn’t have done this without you.” Azula said, giving Novae a wide smile. The woman was truly a gift from the Great Spirits. She turned her attention to the next person on her list. “Li Nu, are the standard and disc spirit repulsors ready?”

“Yes, we’ve created thirty pairs of the most advanced spirit repulsor gloves and six disc launchers. We have eight people trained to use the disc launchers and forty people ready to use the gloves.” Li Nu answered with a smile.

“That’s great. We need every arrow in our quiver. How about the spirit lighting enhancers?” Azula looked to her two lightning wielders.

“Iroh and I are ready to go. We can both generate spirit lightning at full capacity.” Ivaku said. Iroh nodded and gave a small smile.

Azula had been glad that she hadn’t had to kill him when she returned to this world. “That’s great. But do we have extras? The other Avatar team may have lightning benders.”

“Yes, we have two extra pairs.” Li Nu answered. “And the full complement of waterbending energy magnifiers is ready too. Katara and Ivaku are the main wielders, but we have twelve additional pairs ready, with sixteen trained users.”

“That’s great news, Li Nu. I feel that we are about as ready as we’re ever going to be.” Azula smiled at the assembled group.

“That does indeed seem to be the case, Mistress Azula.” Azula turned with her chi enhanced reflexes and had the knife ready to throw. At least until she noticed the supernatural aura radiating from the ancient man.

“Xi Yan!” Aang exclaimed. Ah, the Seer that had recruited the Avatar.

“It is a pleasure to see you again, Avatar. And it is a pleasure to meet your extraordinary companions. You don’t know how long I’ve waited to for this day.” The old man, Xi Yan, said.

“And why is that?” Azula asked.

“Because I am reaching the edge of my vision; the impeding tearing of the veil obscures my future vision.” Xi Yan said, smiling. “I’ve been preparing for this day ever since I blocked the bending of you and Navisi from kindling.”

Azula felt her blood run cold, and she saw the shock and dismay written on Navisi’s face and swirling throughout her aura.

“What do you mean, you blocked our bending from kindling?” Navisi asked in a small voice.

“I promise to answer your question, but it would be better for me to introduce myself first. I am Xi Yan the Seer, half-brother of Yotforbu and Ashgennerog and uncle of OrkaHaalu. My otherworld talents allow me to look through the very fabric of time and make small changes. I do not have the cosmic worldbending power of my better known siblings, but I can reach through time and align things to arrange a certain course of action.”

“Ginhaphous, better known as the Traveler to the people of your sphere of existence, was going to unleash his artifacts and teachings here. His supernatural origins mean that I couldn’t change that. But I searched through all the possible futures and I found the one path that gave this multiverse a chance for survival. And the key to that was the cultivation of skills used by the Order of the Arts Esoteric.”

Azula tried to find words, but she was still coming to terms with what Xi Yan was saying. “Occasionally, bending doesn’t manifest itself as it should. Of all the people that I scanned where this was a feasible outcome, Mistresses Azula and Navisi were the best candidates to rebuild the order and develop the skills to reseal the veil. The changes I made were so subtle that even Yotforbu and the Great Spirits themselves didn’t detect it.”

“If this is true,” Azula said, finally finding her voice. “Then I thank you with all my heart. I’ve seen the monster that I became in every other world.”

“You are welcome, Mistess Azula. I set this course so that you could channel Yotforbu’s power to defeat the Scourge and then return home to reseal the veil. It took every ounce of skill and finesse that I possess, but I have brought you to the point where success is a realistic outcome.” Xi Yan smiled at Azula and Navisi.

“You said that you would return when the time was appropriate.” Aang said. “Are you here to help us?”

“I am too old and weak to help you directly, anymore, but I will tell you of the path that you must take. It is time for Navisi’s team to join the second Avatar and bring them up to speed.” Xi Yan smiled even wider. “You gave her the energybending skills to recover her bending, so I have no doubt that she will be able to operate your augmentor with some training.”

“Korra!” Azula and Navisi exclaimed together. They grinned at each other; the energybending skills that they taught her were perfect for operating the energy director.

“Who is Korra?” Aang asked. “Did you meet her when you dealt with the Five Dragons of the Apocalypse?”

Azula and Navisi just looked at each other and then at Xi Yan. “You may tell the team as many of the details of your travels as you wish. The Great Spirits will release you of your vows of secrecy so that you can provide this team with all the information they need.”

Navisi began speaking. “Korra is the next Avatar in the cycle in a different multiversal world; she is a waterbender and when we visited her, it was about seventy years in the future from now.”

Azula couldn’t help but laugh as she picked up the narrative. “And no, she didn’t help with the Dragons of the Apocalypse. We taught her energybending so that she could unblock her bending that had been locked away by a bloodbender. We left her to deal with the Bending Thief; a woman who could take and gift bending.”

“Bending Thief! How is such a thing possible?” Izuka asked, her mouth open in shock.

“It was a forbidden technique taught by the Traveler. I don’t know how it works and I truly hope that the technique is lost forever.” Azula answered. She turned to Xi Yan. “Was Korra able to find the Bending Thief?”

“Yes, she found the Bending Thief and she committed suicide rather than be taken into custody.” Xi Yan answered. “And it is her world that Navisi’s team must visit.”

“Of course, Xi Yan. Is there anything else that we should know before we travel there?” Navisi asked.

“Just that a group known as the Red Lotus is harassing Korra and her allies. They have spiritual knowledge and have unwittingly weakened the veil in their world, so Korra is also dealing with extraplanar spirits.” Xi Yan said, smiling at Navisi. “The Red Lotus isn’t your problem, but I’m sure that they would love to have your help with the spirits.”

“Of course, Xi Yan.”

“It is nearly time for me to go. I wish all of you luck; I truly believe that you are ready to face this challenge.” Xi Yan reached into the pocket of his clothes and pulled out and item. Azula’s eyes went wide. A Transit Compass. “Gather your forces and when you are ready, use the Transit Compass to call to OrkaHaalu for transport.”

“Thank you, Xi Yan. We all appreciate what you have done for us.” Azula said, bowing to Xi Yan after taking the Transit Compass.

“You are welcome. Good luck.” And with that Xi Yan faded into nothing.

Azula handed the Transit Compass to Navisi, who put it around her neck and turned to face the shellshocked crowd. “Alright, it looks like my team needs to get ready to head out.”

The group seemed to collect themselves and came back to life. Aang came up to Azula and Navisi. “Are you ever going to tell me about the Dragons of the Apocalypse?”

Azula and Navisi locked eyes for a moment before they answered in unison. “No.”

Since Wiggy was only about two-thirds the size of Appa, her saddle had to be scaled down in size. But an air bison and three small airships would be able to handle all of the people and equipment that they planned on transporting.

Navisi and Hun Ro would travel on Wiggy’s saddle while the rest of the team would travel in the airships. Li Nu was traveling with the main augmentors in Airship 1 while Ivaku traveled with the main defense team on Airship 2. Ivaku commanded Airship 3.

“Alright, listen up guys!” Navisi shouted as the teams finished securing their cargo. “Our departure time is ten minutes. Finish up and get ready for transit!”

Azula, Aang, Iroh and Katara watched from the sidelines. They knew that this was Navisi’s show; she had preparing for this moment for what felt like her entire life. She spotted Novae and Li Nu with their heads together, so she decided to check in and make sure that everything was ready.

“Ladies, are the augmentors loaded and secured?” Navisi asked. She wasn’t going to let Novae’s fussiness get in the way of their departure.”

“Of course, Navisi. I was just wishing Li Nu luck.” Novae said, unusually meek. “Traveling to another world is kind of a large undertaking.”

Navisi gave her what she hoped was a reassuring smile. “I’ve been to this world and the Avatar and her friends are friendly and accommodating. We are ready to do what needs to be done.”

“We know you have, Navisi. But I don’t think you understand how terrifying all this is for those of us that haven’t had offworld adventures with the Mistress of Mayhem.” Li Nu answered, looking nervous.

Navisi couldn’t help but smile. “Mistress of Mayhem. I may have to keep that one in my pocket to use in the future. The first time I traveled between worlds, Azula assured me that if I wasn’t at least a little afraid, she would be worried about my sanity. Those same words apply here.”

Novae and Li Nu gave a little laugh. “But it is time to say goodbye and prepare to travel.”

Everyone went and hugged the half of the team that was staying here. They had all worked together for over a year and felt a comradery that is forged in times of great stress. Navisi was the overall team lead, with Izuka her designated second in command. Li Nu was in charge of the spirit repulsor defense team while Ivaku commanded the waterbender defense squadron.

“Everyone, to your stations. Hun Ro! Get your lanky butt on Wiggy so that we can roll.” Navisi commanded.

“Yes, oh great leader of mine!” Hun Ro shouted with a mock salute. Navisi just rolled her eyes as everyone took their stations. Once everyone was loaded, she levitated onto Wiggy’s back and looked over the assembled team that was defending her adopted world. “I’ll see you on the other side, Azula.”

“They’ll be singing songs of this mission for millenia to come, Navisi.” Azula responded with a wave.

“Indeed, they will.” Navisi responded before she turned back to the task at hand. “Yip, yip.”

Wiggy took off as the airships rose behind her. Once the group had risen to a comfortable traveling speed, Navisi silently communicated with the Transit Compass. ‘We are ready to travel.’

‘As you command, Mistress Navisi.’ A voice answered in her head as a large golden cloud appeared before her.

“Hang on Hun Ro. We’re heading off world.” Navisi yelled as Wiggy flew into the golden cloud and her adopted home disappeared.

Fire witches and infidels had caused the world to veer from Agni’s path. Everywhere he turned, he encountered fools that were out of balance and had forsaken Agni’s path. Zuko and his weakness. Azula and her heresy. The Avatar and his cowardice. The Sun Warriors and their isolation. This could have all been avoided had his people been willing to share their teachings with the world.

Agni had blessed the Sun Warriors with knowledge and skills that could have brought the Fire Nation to the peak of spiritual awareness. They had turned their backs on Fire Lord Sozin and his great march to spread the glory of Agni throughout the world. Instead of living in a paradise illuminated by the lifegiving flame of Agni himself, the true believers had been reduced to a pathetic and pitiful army that occupied only a tiny sliver of the Fire Nation.

But Sor Yun would not allow the weak-willed Fire Lord and his bootlickers slow the progress of Agni’s flame. For forty years he had studied the most sacred texts of the Sun Warriors. Wisdom and arcane knowledge had been at his fingertips. But those hidebound fools refused to use the sacred knowledge to reshape the world for Agni’s glory.

Instead, they had stripped him of his rank and exiled him from his home. They took his scrolls and forbade him to ever chant from the sacred scripts, claiming that he had been cut off from Agni’s guiding light.

But they could take neither his knowledge nor his will. He saw now that there was only one way to salvage this most dire situation. Everything was prepared. The nameless bootlicker should be proud that Sor Yun had chosen him to be the sacrifice; his blood had been purified by the sacred rituals of his people and been used to meticulously draw the intricate geometric shape that would allow Sor Yun to call upon Agni’s intermediaries.

The Summoning of A’laazinth would give him the power to drive the pretender Zuko from the field and impose his will on the Fire Nation. He had fasted and purified himself before initiating the rituals and carefully prepared the rites for the most sacred of evocations. Now it was time.

He lit the sacred candle and chanted the Spell of Binding as he touched the flame to the blood wick; he watched in glee as the fire spread out from the wick and the entire shape burned. He continued to chant as he performed the sacred dragon dance as instructed by Ran and Shaw. The color of the flames turned from orange to purple as the entire design began to glow with glorious light.

He watched as the spirit emerged from the portal and began to greet his savior. “Welcome…”.

But the words died on his lips as the abomination turned its dozens of eyes on him. The creature looked like a spider-scorpion except that it had two dozen legs and four clawlike arms. At least twenty feet long, it shimmered and changed color in the light. Bronze and gold and silver colors drew his eye as it undulated and crawled into his world.

But Sor Yun was no coward. He knew that this monstrosity was evil and he called upon Agni’s gift to defend his people. He struck it with the full force of his fire and he was thrilled when he heard it screeching in agony. His flames fell away as he stopped to survey the death he had surely handed the monstrosity.

It writhed but he watched in horror as it began to repair itself. He called upon his flames to finish off the creature but his attention was drawn to the portal as four more monsters climbed out, each more freakish than the last. He turned his fire to strike them down; his fire burned one but he was swarmed by the others.

The creature held him down and he screamed in terror as the beast stabbed him through the eyes. His world burned in pain; it was like a pool of molten lead was trying to burn its way out of his skull. But then the pain subsided and he felt a bliss, a joy the likes of which he had never known.

He could see much more clearly now; his eyes had only hidden the truth from him. These wonderful and blessed beings were Kotsurya the Amalgamated. Before, he had been alone, desperately seeking truth but finding only lies. But now he was part of the greater whole. Unity is tranquility and only the Amalgamated knew true peace. A peace that he would share with the world.

He would bring them tranquility, whether they wanted it or not.

Azula’s jevalda pulsed, drawing her attention away from the group. “An incursion is underway. We need to find where.” Iroh and Katara looked at her in concern.

Novae’s brilliance seemingly knew no bounds. She had designed a special set of augmentors that could detect ripples in the weave, alerting Azula and the others if a spirit entity had crossed into their world. They had place five of the augmentors across the earth continent, each connected to a main augmentor here in Palathia. An augmentor that could take the information and triangulate the point of entry.

They ran to the room it shared with the Distance Printer; the augmentor was also connected to the printer station used by the Distance Printer. The technician in the room could operate both devices, and he had the printout ready by the time Azula arrived.

She read the coordinates and compared it to the map. The northern part of the main Fire Island. She turned to Iroh and Katara. “We need to go. If we push Kiva as hard as we can, we’ll be there in seven hours. We can sleep on the way.” Azula turned to the technician. “Send the warning and coordinates to the Avatar.”

Zuko spun and the firekick pierced the unholy abomination screamed in agony as it was consumed by the flames. But there was no time to rest. His forces were being pushed back.

The only thing that saved his army were the rebels that had been able to flee the monstrosities. They had made their way to the Fire Nation camp and babbled about spirit monsters. And the swarm had come only minutes afterwards. Fire and steel weapons had slowed them down, but the creatures always rose again.

Ever more terrifying was that they tried to take soldiers alive so that they could convert them to Agni forsaken demon-men. They would arise with their eyes missing; the empty orbs with shine with an ethereal purple light that disgusted and repulsed everyone that gazed upon them.

The men had all taken to killing themselves rather than be taken. And if they couldn’t do it themselves, the other soldiers would strike down those that had been captured.

The creatures were fast but could be pushed back with fire and steel. The men quickly learned to fight in squads of ten to twenty, back-to-back so that they couldn’t be taken from behind. And they figured out that they needed to watch the skies because some of them could fly.

The battle had raged for six hours and Zuko and his men were fighting on fumes. But fear overrode fatigue and men would simply drop to the ground from exhaustion when they could fight no more. And anyone that fell like that was killed so that they couldn’t be possessed.

Zuko conjured flamewhips and harassed a long-bodied creature with dozens of legs and what looked like a stinging tail. The whips wrapped around the torso of the creature and he heated his flames to the highest temperature he could muster. He grinned when he burned it in half.

But the grin was knocked off his face as something struck him in the back. He rolled and tried to get up, but his tired muscles were too slow and the ant-wasp thing was on him. He was able to keep it from touching his eyes with a fist of flame, but it stabbed him in the stomach with some sort of stinger. He screamed in agony and he saw it enveloped in flames. The creature tried to flee but was cut down but his guards.

He felt hands under his armpits and he was being pulled across the ground. That was about all that he could tell as he became hoarse from his screaming; he tried to stop but it felt like his someone had stuck a redhot poker in his abdomen and then tried to scramble his intestines with it.

“I’m sorry, my Lord, but I’m going to try and burn the stinger off.” The guard said. And Zuko screamed louder as the smell of burning human flesh and the putrid scent of whatever he had been impaled with filled his nostrils.

“I think I got it, my Lord.” The guard held Zuko up as a ring of soldiers surrounded them. The pain was better and at least he had stopped screaming. But he could see the swarm of spirit relentlessly moving forward.

“There! Look in the sky!” A call caught his eye and Zuko began scanning the sky.

It was a true sign of his desperation that he smiled and felt a sense of hope at the arrival of a fire witch and her pet dragon.

Chapter Text

Azula had faced an army of sentient ever adapting robots with a wide range of unnatural powers. She had fought the Avatar in his full glory. Both of those things were only slightly more terrifying than the swarm of unholy abominations that were overwhelming the people of her home nation.

But fear or not, she would drive them from her world. She commanded Kiva to fly over the frontlines where her brother’s army was trying their best to hold back the swarm. “Iroh, take Kiva and see if your spirit lighting can give the soldiers a little breathing room while I take Katara to get her fill of water.”

“Of course, Azula.” Iroh said, his face a mask of concentration. She was glad to see that the heart of the Dragon of the West still beat in his chest.

Azula wrapped her two back tentacles around Katara and jumped off Kiva, pulling Katara along behind her. Once they were clear of the magic dragon, Azula used her arm tentacles in conjunction with her light sigil anchors to swing towards a small pond about a quarter click behind the ever-retreating frontline.

Seventeen months had given them a lot of time to work out battle tactics for a wide variety of scenarios. Thanks to Telmaha, they had a good idea of the kinds of spirits they might potentially encounter. This seemed to be some sort of assimilator.

They were nearly to the pond when Azula saw the flashes of red light, followed by thunder. Iroh unleashed two more blasts by the time she dropped Katara into the pond. Azula had already turned her attention to the battle as she felt Katara grab a huge wave of water and follow in her wake towards the swarm.

Katara couldn’t match Azula’s speed but she knew the girl was a one woman wrecking ball with her spirit water augmentors. But it was time for Azula to pull her weight in this battle. She switched to using her back tentacles for maneuvering as she switched to her spirit augmentor gauntlets on her arms.

Novae deserved every blessing that the Great Spirits could give her, for the concentrated blasts from the spirit repulsors shredded the monstrosities, unraveling them in a matter of seconds. And with her jevalda’s guidance system, she never missed.

She came to the assistance of the army groups most in danger of being overwhelmed; giving them breathing room to fight. She needed to get the soldiers to fight as a cohesive whole. But first she had to give them time to reset.

And she felt the tide turning. Iroh continued firing his red lightning into the larger creatures while Azula made the smaller beasts pay for their aggression. The entrance of the two new combatants also seemed to inspire the soldiers, because their resistance solidified and they were no longer being pushed back.

And then Katara appeared with her tidal wave of water. Her skill was truly amazing. A dozen tentacles of water shot out and held creatures of varying size in place. And the water began glowing as she manipulated the spirit energy of the abominations; in a matter of seconds they began breaking apart into small balls of light that floated into the air and just faded.

Azula enhanced her voice with her chi as she commanded the soldiers. “Fire Nation soldiers, steady retreat to camp lines with every living comrade. Regroup into teams of ten to fifteen soldiers.”

She continued tearing into the spirits as the soldiers fell back. It didn’t affect Azula much since her spirit repulsors had no effect on humans, but clearing the field allowed Katara to go full tilt. Azula took the air with her back tentacles as Katara used dozens of glowing water whips to tear into the spirit creatures.

Azula fought in tandem with Katara, her spirit repulsor blasts covering any holes in Katara’s attacks. Not that there were many. They fought together like a well-oiled machine; Azula’s chi sense let her see where Katara was moving and she used this knowledge to good effect. No creature could pass through their attack.

But they were starting to go around, so Azula order the soldiers back into the fray. “Fire Nation soldiers! Form two battalions. Right flank, protect the waterbender. Left flank, you’re with me!”

Katara and Azula spread out to try and keep the swarm contained. The soldiers had regrouped and with Azula and Katara making sure that they weren’t overwhelmed, they were able to use their fire and arrows to slow down and harass the creatures.

But even the combined effort of Azula’s team and the Fire Nation soldiers could only slow down the swarm, not push them back. They needed to block whatever portal they were coming through. She knew where it was, but she was in no position to do anything about right now.

She communicated with Kiva to see if she could get a visual on the portal. ‘Yes, Mistress. And it seems to be getting smaller over time and fewer spirits are coming through.’ Kiva answered in her mind, filling Azula with a sense of hope.

And her hope skyrocketed when she felt a powerful chi soaring through the air at high speed.

The Avatar had arrived on the scene.

“Soldiers! Pull back to the camp. Now!” Azula ordered. The Avatars power was tremendous and it was better if he ample room to unleash his might. She ordered Kiva to get Iroh to safety also.

Novae claimed that it was the most sophisticated augmentor that she had ever created. But as Azula watched Aang unleash his power on the swarm she knew that it was worth its weight in gold a thousand times over.

His special augmented gloves allowed him to infuse spirit energy into the very air he bent.

Azula and the solidiers instinctively ducked low as a huge gust of air swept over the camp, causing dozens of the spirit beings to disintegrate into small glowing balls of energy that were immediately swept away.

And then Aang moved into the clearing between the army and the swarm. Without allies to worry about, he showed the true power of the Avatar as he moved with the grace born of untold lives as an airbender. The wind swirled and howled as Aang cut down every creature in the area.

They tried to turn and flee but most were cut down, but some escaped his wrath. They could run, but with her team’s augmentors attuned to their spirit energy, there was nowhere they could hide to escape. She told Kiva to pursue the escapees as she started to do the same. She felt Katara move in the opposite direction for the same reason.

It would take time, but it was imperative that none of the creatures escape to continue assimilating. She knew in her heart though that they had held this incursion at bay.

The sun had just set as Iroh finally stepped foot on solid earth again. Riding a magic dragon was an exhilarating experience and had allowed his old bones to hunt down and destroy all of the spirit creatures they could find. But he was going to have saddlesores.

He smiled as the camp cheered at his arrival. He waved to the assembled soldiers; they had fought a great battle today and possible kept the world from being overrun. Iroh’s smile shrunk as he saw Aang and Azula waiting for him, dark looks on their faces.

“That was great work, Iroh. All traces of the spirits are gone and I was able to seal the portal. But we need to prepare.” Aang said as Iroh joined them. “It is doubtful that Zuko will survive the night.”

Iroh’s heart skipped a bit as the implication of the words sank in. His nephew had made mistakes, but he still loved him and was disturbed that his life would be cut short. But he feared for his nation too.

“I’m taking Kiva to retrieve Yue to say her final goodbyes. I…I don’t want his children to see him like this.” Azula said, her voice soft and filled with regret.

“I trust your judgement, Azula. Bring Yue to say goodbye. I would like to go and be with him.” Iroh said.

Azula put a hand on his arm and gave a gentle squeeze and then she walked to Kiva and was airborne. Iroh turned to the Avatar. “Where is my nephew?”

“He’s in the main medic tent. He’s unconscious now. His injuries are unlike anything that we’ve ever seen and are too severe for even Katara to heal.”

Neither of them spoke as they made their way to the tent. Iroh saw Katara’s glowing water helping a soldier at the back of the tent. But Iroh’s heart shattered to see what had become of his nephew.

Aang’s soft voice brought him out of his thoughts. “We…we think he was injected with some sort of spirit venom. We had to amputate his left arm and leg; Katara was able to neutralize the spirit nature of the venom but the damage had already been done. His organs are slowly shutting down.”

“I see.” Iroh said as he went to his nephew and took a seat next to him.

“I don’t wish to be disrespectful, but we need to make arrangements to raise a new Fire Lord.” Aang said.

Iroh sighed. “I will assume command until Lu Ten is able to travel from Muzai and be raised to Fire Lord. He is the Crown Prince and I still have my duties to assist with the closing of the veils.”

“Thank you, Iroh. Lu Ten will make a great Fire Lord.”

“Yes, he will.” Iroh said, reaching out and taking Zuko’s hand. “May I have a few moments with Zuko.”

“Of course.” Aang patted Iroh’s soldier and walked off.

Iroh looked at the poor broken man before him. And the tears fell from his eyes as he wept for the loss of his nephew.

His vision was blurry as he opened his eyes, the light from the lanterns hurting his eyes at first. He feels the dull ache throughout his body, although he happily accepted that instead of the fiery agony he had endured on the battlefield.

“Here, Zuko. This is a soothing medicinal wine that Katara says will help soothe your pain.” Uncle said, holding a cup before him. “I can help you drink if you would like some.”

“Yes, please.” Zuko answered, realizing just how parched he was. Iroh gently lifted the cup to Zuko’s lips and he slowly drank the wine, the burning sensation in his throat easing.

“Thank you, Uncle.” Zuko said. “What happened? I saw Azula’s dragon arrive just before I passed out.”

“Azula, Katara, and I arrived on the dragon and we were able to fortify your lines and hold the swarm back until the Avatar arrived and turned the course of the battle. After the battle, we hunted down every spirit creature and destroyed them. The danger has passed.”

Zuko smiled to hear that those creatures were no longer a threat to his people. “Thank you, Uncle. I truly feared the worst fighting those monstrosities.” Zuko took a moment to look around. “Where is Azula and the others?”

“Aang and Katara and doing what they can to heal the injured soldiers.” Iroh paused for a moment, a look of concern on his face. “And Azula took her dragon to bring Yue here.”

“I’m dying, aren’t I?” Zuko asked in a quiet voice. His question was answered as tears fell from Iroh’s eyes and he became too choked up to speak.

“It’s okay, Uncle. I was a failure as a Fire Lord. I’m sure that Lu Ten will do great.” Zuko burned with shame to say the words out loud, but he knew how history would see him. The man who lost all that they Fire Nation had gained in the One-Hundred’s-Year War.

“No, Nephew, you’re not a failure. Mistakes were made but they were necessary for the world to return to balance. I failed both you and the Fire Nation when I made that wicked deal with the White Lotus. You were so young and needed more guidance than Ursa could provide. Your mother is a good woman, but she doesn’t have the right temperament to run the Fire Nation.”

Zuko went to speak but stopped when Iroh held up his hand. “I don’t wish to argue with you. You were saddled with the legacy of a terrible war, and there was no way to keep what the Fire Nation had claimed without resorting to violence and barbarism. It was wrong for the Fire Nation to try to subjugate the world, and I’m ashamed for the part I played in the war.”

“But, Uncle, you’re Dragon of the West. You won the war!” Zuko protested.

“Zuko, I love the Fire Nation, but living in the colonies opened my eyes to how much damage the Fire Nation has caused. The world will never heal so long as the Fire Nation continued subjugating other people. The world is tired of fighting, Nephew.”

“Perhaps. But I really did want to make the world a better place. If only the people would have understood that.”

“I know you did, Nephew, and I respect you for that. But what most people want more than anything is to have control of their own destiny. And the Fire Nation took that choice from a great many people. If the Phoenix Sage Insurrection hadn’t weakened us, perhaps we could have brought peace and stability to the world. But once the people found hope to cast off the shackles of their oppressors, there was little that we could do to peacefully keep them in the fold.”

A spasm of pain swept through him and he couldn’t help but grimace. Iroh squeezed his hand. “Hear, drink some more of the wine.”

Zuko took a couple more sips from the cup and felt a little better. He decided that it was time to deal with the most pressing issue. “Uncle, I want you to assume power once I die. You can raise Lu Ten when he arrives, but I don’t want to leave even the semblance of a power vacuum. The people need leadership.”

“Of course, Zuko. I promise to keep the peace until Lu Ten is raised as Fire Lord.”

“Did any of the generals survive? It is best to transfer power before my health becomes any worse.” Zuko asked.

“Yes, Generals Yinzao and Kirzul survived with only minor injuries. I will send for them.” Iroh turned and flagged down one of the orderlies. He left Zuko’s side for a few moments and spoke with the young man, who promptly left.

Iroh returned to his side and again took his hand. “They will be her momentarily. I am sorry that things ended this way, Zuko. And history will know that you died fighting a terrible enemy that may well have overwhelmed the entire world if not stopped. You were the man who led the forces that held them at bay until the Avatar arrived.”

“Thank you, Uncle.” They continued talking quietly for a few minutes before the Avatar and the generals entered the tent.

“Hello, Avatar. Thank you for destroying the spirit monsters. They were a terrible foe.” Zuko said as they approached.

“It was my duty and honor to do so, Zuko. I owe much to you and your soldiers for holding them in check long enough for me to arrive.”

“It was our duty, Avatar, to protect my nation from those monsters. And now it is my duty to transfer power before I pass.” Zuko said, trying to sound as much like a Fire Lord as he could. “Generals, I wish for you to witness my willing transfer of the rights and responsibilities as Fire Lord to General Iroh.” Zuko turned to Iroh. “General Iroh, Son of Azulon, do you accept the sacred duties and obligations that come with being Fire Lord, supreme ruler of Agni’s people?”

“Yes, Fire Lord Zuko, I accept the sacred duties and obligation of the Fire Lord.”

“Then, I hereby grant you the title of Fire Lord, ruler of Agni’s people. May the flame never grow dim under your care.” Zuko intoned before turning to the two generals. “Generals, do you accept Fire Lord Iroh as the ruler of Agni’s people?”

Both men immediately kneeled before Iroh. “We do.”

“May Agni’s favor continue to shine on our people.” Zuko intoned.

“May Agni’s favor continue to shine on our people.” Iroh responded. He turned to the others. “Thank you for your acceptance, Generals. But I would like to spend a little more time with my nephew if I may.”

“Of course, Fire Lord.” General Yinzao answered, bowing to Iroh.

Once the Avatar and generals had left, Iroh again sat at Zuko’s side. They talked of the hopes and dreams that Zuko had for his children and how he hopes that they grow up in a world better than his. Iroh swore to protect and cherish Yue and his children. They shared their dreams for a better world and regrets for past actions.

Zuko felt himself being overcome with fatigue when he suddenly felt a tremor. Iroh smiled at him. “It sounds like Azula has returned.”

And Zuko felt his body fill with hope. He desperately wanted to see Yue and his children one last time, but he agreed with Azula’s assessment that he didn’t want Izumi to see him like this. She was too young to be faced with what he had become.

He couldn’t keep the tears of joy from coming to his eyes as the tent flap opened the love of his life swept into the room.

“Oh, Zuko.” She exclaimed as she ran to him and hugged him; he felt her hot tears on his face and neck as she wept.

“It’s okay, Yue. I’m at peace with what has happened. Iroh has promised me that you will be watched over and that Izumi and Yanook and your unborn baby will be protected and cherished as part of the royal family.”

“Azula told me how you protected the world from a spirit invasion and saved everyone.” Yue said in-between sobs. “You are the best thing that ever happened to me. I love you, Zuko.”

“And I love you and our children more than I can ever express.” Zuko answered in a soft voice. He felt his energy draining away.

“And Zuko, Azula has promised to help us too. Please, say goodbye to her too. I know that your relationship is complicated, but she’s your sister.” Yue said in a quiet voice, cupping his left cheek in her right hand.

Complicated was probably the best word for their relationship. But he couldn’t deny Yue this last request. “Okay.”

And he was blessed with a wide smile from his beloved. “Let me get her.”

Yue quickly moved to the entrance and stuck her head outside. She came back in and moments later, Azula came through the flaps also. “Hello, Zuko. Thank you for seeing me. I know that we don’t act like it, but you’re my brother and I wanted to say goodbye.”

Zuko gave a little laugh. “No, we don’t act like it, but I wish that we did. I wanted to say goodbye also. I’ve never admitted it before, but I do love you in my own way.”

Azula came close and gave his hand a gentle squeeze. “And I love you in my own way also. I really do wish that things had been different and that we could have been like real siblings.”

“Me too, Azula. And tell Izuka that I love her too and that I’m sorry for what happened. I see that banishing her was a mistake.”

“I’ll tell her, Zuko. She’ll understand.”

“And tell Mother that I’m sorry that I couldn’t see her before I died.” Zuko tried to speak more but he was overtaken with a coughing fit. Yue brought a cup to his lips after he stopped and he drank greedily.

“I will tell her, Zuko. Do you want to spend your time with Yue or should I call in Iroh also?” Azula asked softly.

“Please ask Iroh to come in. I want to spend my final moments with all the family that I can.” Azula smiled and walked out of the tent.

“I’m glad that you spoke with her, Zuko. I know that you have strong opinions about her, but she is family.” Yue said in the motherly voice that she uses to keep Izumi and Yanook in line.

“Me too, Yue. I wish Mother and Lu Ten and Izuka were here, but I’m glad that you made it in time. You are the song in my heart and I love you with all my soul.” He said.

“And you are the same to me, beloved.” Yue answered, kissing him gently on the lips. She was so soft and warm.

Iroh and Azula came in moments later. They talked for a while but eventually Zuko’s strength faded and he had a hard time forming his words. His time was nearly gone, but at least he got to say goodbye to Yue. He wished to hold his children one last time, but he knew that they wouldn’t understand. He wanted them to remember him when he had been strong and proud.

The last thing he saw was Yue crying over him as his vision dimmed. In that moment he saw the wonders of his life flash before his eyes. Playing with Izuka and Azula as children. Professing his love to Yue as they danced at their wedding reception. Holding his children for the first time. It hadn’t been a long life, but it had been wonderful at times.

Chapter Text

Korra was having a hard time meditating. There was so much going on that it was difficult to keep it all straight. The assassination of the Earth Queen by the Red Lotus had created a power vacuum and the entire continent was in a free for all. It amazed her that the only thing that had kept peace on the earth continent was the idea of the Earth Kingdom. Take away that illusion and there was no support structure in place to keep the nations functioning.

But nearly as worrying had been the increase in the number of spirit monsters, for lack of a better word, that had appeared all over the globe. She didn’t know what was causing them, but she suspected it had something to do with Zaheer also. He had prided himself on being able to travel to the Spirit World; perhaps he had invoked a spirit invasion. He had denied this, but she knew that he was full of shit and was probably lying to promote anarchy.

But she put that aside as she concentrated on her breathing, trying to use her mindfulness training to focus her concentration. It took nearly ten minutes, but eventually she felt herself falling into the peaceful state of mind that comes with a successful meditation session.

At least until it felt like she was being pulled and was blinded by an all-encompassing white light. It didn’t hurt her eyes, but it did prevent her from seeing. Slowly the light faded, and she saw that she in a small clearing next to the ocean. There was a mountainside to her left with a high waterfall cascading down its rocky face. A gentle breeze blew in off the ocean, causing the flames in the small stone pit to dance. It was a very peaceful setting.

“We find it to be a very soothing location, both for ourselves and for the young humans that we are introducing ourselves to.” A massive man said. He was at least twelve feet tall and appeared to be a human-kraken hybrid. Instead of a human face, he had a rounded head with two exceptionally large eyes and a beak for a mouth. And he had eight shorter tentacles and two longer ones instead of arms. She was still trying to find her words as he continued speaking. “I am Methus, intermediary of Tui and La and Protector of the Deep Ocean.”

She finally collected herself enough to answer. “It is an honor to meet you, sir. May I ask why you’ve brought me here?”

“Indeed, you may. I am here to tell you that a task of great importance lies in your future, with the fate of your entire world, and many others, riding on your success.” Methus said. “We are sending an old friend to recruit you. This task will require a huge effort from a large group. It is important that you accept these allies and agree to work with them. The spirit veil is tearing, allowing the dangerous spirits that you have been battling to escape from the extraplanar spirit realm. Closing the veil will stop these incursions.”

“I see. Who is this ally?” Korra asked. Why do spirits have to beat around the bush and be all enigmatic?

“You will know when the time comes. Your new allies are bringing the weapons, equipment and skills needed to close the veil. They will explain the situation to you and your team here. But for now, you should prepare for your upcoming endeavor. The spirit you are pursuing is nearby. Good luck, Avatar.”

Korra opened her eyes to see Asami approaching. “You have impeccable timing. I was just coming to tell you that we’re approaching the spirit.”

Korra nodded and got to her feet. “Let’s go and take care of this monstrosity.”

“That’s a great idea, Korra!” Varrick said, popping out from behind a chair. “The Despiritification Cannon is ready to be tried.”

Korra couldn’t help but smile at his enthusiasm. The man was eccentric, but he was undoubtedly brilliant.

She turned her attention away from Varrick and extended her spirit senses; she immediately felt the creature. It was powerful and large but wasn’t moving particularly fast.

“Alright, I’m going out to deal with it. Bring around the cannon and take the shot if you get it sighted.” Korra told Varrick.

She made her way to the exit and called upon the Avatar State. She felt the power of Raava as she reached out and summoned the skills she needed to defeat this foe. With a single step she begins falling towards the earth, but she has no fear as she conjures the ball of air around her and begins moving towards the creature.

It was about the size of a small airship. It steadily crept across the landscape at a slow and ponderous speed. As she came up behind it, the creature finally turned and proceeded to uproot an entire tree and throw it at her with unexpected speed.

But she easily brushed it aside with an airblast and proceeded to launch three blasts of fire at the creature, channeling them through air tunnels to improve the speed and focus of the flame. The giant beast was able to jump aside at great speed and avoid two of the three columns. But it wailed in agony as the third one struck.

Suddenly, a blast of pink energy fell from the sky and struck the beast. The Despiritification Cannon. However, it didn’t seem to have much effect on the creature. And Korra was irritated to see it begin healing from her fire attack.

She quickly dodged to the side as the creature leapt into the air and attempted to strike her with some sort of appendage. Its form seemed to oscillate as new limbs formed and were retracted; the blob took whatever shape seemed to be needed at the moment.

Korra launched more fire attacks, but the creature just morphed around them. The battle continued with Korra slowly driving it back, her attacks hurting it but never putting it down long enough to be decisive.

But both combatants halted their battle when they felt the strange energy. Korra quickly looked up to see a giant gold cloud forming. And she was even more shocked when an air bison and three airships emerged from the cloud before it dissipated.

And she watched as a figure jumped off the air bison and began glowing, rings of light appearing around their arms as a board of light appeared. The figure was too far away to make out the features yet, but there was only one person that she had ever met who could produce rings of light around their arms.

Disciple Navisi.

Navisi glided towards the creature and raised her arms and Korra saw a brief flash of light moments before she heard the screech of agony from the creature. Part of it had been destroyed and turned to the little spheres of light that faded into nothing. The creature turned and tried to flee but another burst by Navisi knocked it down.

And suddenly a bolt of red lightning arced through the sky and struck the creature, causing it too wail again. But there wasn’t much of the creature left. The three attacks had left it only a shell of its former self. So Korra decided to finish the job. She sent a huge wave of her hottest fire down onto the creature, causing the remaining parts to turn into glowing balls of light that quickly disappeared. The creature was gone.

Korra turned to the glowing figure that came to hover about fifteen feet in front of her, and she couldn’t help but match the smile plastered on the face of the other girl.

“Greetings, Korra. It looks like you’ve been busy. Do you have a few moments to talk to an old friend?” Navisi said, grinning from ear to ear.

“I will always make time for you, Disciple Navisi.” Korra replied.

“It’s actually Mistress Navisi, now. But let’s go to your airship and talk.”

“I would love to.”

“Asami! It’s great to see you again.” Navisi cheered as she gave Asami a big hug.

“Navisi, it’s wonderful to see you too. But where did you go? And why do you keep appearing out of gold clouds?” Asami asked with a laugh.

“Well, there’s actually a good story behind that. I’ve been sent by the intermediaries to recruit Korra to help us close a tear in the spirit veil.” Navisi declared, causing Asami’s mouth to open and close in a good approximation of a dying fish.

“Spirit veil! That sounds like a wonderful addition to next year’s fashion line. Zhu Li, add that to my list of moneymaking ideas!” Some strange, fast-talking man said. He looked kind of shady to Navisi.

“Yes, sir.” A woman, presumably Zhu Li, said, while writing something down in a notepad.

“Mistress Navisi, let me introduce you to Varrick. He’s a genius.” Korra said, gesturing to the shady man. “And this is his assistant Zhu Li.”

“It’s nice to meet both of you.” Navisi answered, trying to be polite.

“You’re a mistress now! That’s great, Navisi.” Asami said, smiling at her. “Is Mistress Asundra on one of the other airships?”

“Thank you, Asami. No, Asundra’s not on the airships, but well, her sister is. There’s a lot of things that we need to clear up about my last visit.” Navisi said, not feeling good about the upcoming conversation. “Well, we didn’t really tell the truth about Asundra.”

“We know that you two were being mysterious. Especially after the way you just showed up and then disappeared. Is Asundra’s sister a firebender? Is she after Izumi’s throne?” Asami asked in a stern voice.

“She is a firebender but she isn’t after Izumi’s throne. I would rather tell the whole story only one time, but I’ll give you guys the short version. Is there somewhere you need to be; it’s going to take a little time to explain why the intermediaries sent us?” Navisi asked.

“I trust you, Navisi. Methus, intermediary of Tui and La, spoke to me as we were traveling here and told me that he was sending an old friend to recruit me. He said that I should trust you. Now that the spirit creature is dead we were getting ready to return to Republic City.” Korra said.

“That’s great. I only met him twice, but Methus seemed like a really good guy. All the intermediaries seemed pretty cool.” Navisi answered. “But they are quite dramatic. However, I’ve been given permission to share the whole story with you and the others. There’s a lot of work to be done. I’m hoping to recruit you too, Asami. I’d like to have you start working with our technical expert, Li Nu, to see if there are any engineering upgrades you might be able to suggest.”

“That sounds great.” Asami’s smile looked genuine; she always seemed very helpful.

“Great! Let me send a message to the airships and air bison to follow you back to Republic City.” Navisi smiled as she prepared for their reaction. “Her name is Omnisae and she’s magic but there’s no cause for alarm.”

She silently summoned Omnisae and watched her eagle-hawk form materialize on the deck of the airship. Everyone just stared, stunned, until shadyman spoke.

“By Tui and La, that’s a great trick. Zhu Li, make a note to begin developing ideas for magic parrot-bats.” Varrick shouted.

Navisi ignored him as she wrote a note for Omnisae to take to Izuka; she’d message the others. She attached the note to Omnisae’s leg and stepped back as she teleported.

“Wh…where did she go?” Korra asked, eyes wide and mouth hanging open in shock.

“She teleported to the Airship 3 to let Asundra’s sister, Izuka, know to follow us to Republic City.” Seeing the questioning look on their faces, she decided to keep explaining. “Teleportation means that she is able to go immediately from one point to another without going through any of the point in between.”

“When did you find Omnisae? You didn’t have her when you were staying on Air Temple Island, did you?” Korra asked.

“I got her shortly after I left you guys. I’ll tell the whole story when we get back to Air Temple Island. Although, I guess I can tell you a little more about Asundra. It will be nice to have you as back up when Tenzin’s head starts exploding.” Navisi said.

“And what are you going to tell us about Asundra?” The look of trepidation on Korra’s face said that she wasn’t expecting the answer to be good.

“Well, you see, Asundra is actually Princess Azula, sister of Zuko. Wait!” Navisi shouted as Korra and Asami both started exclaiming in disbelief. “She’s not the Azula from your world. She was born on a different Atla; one where she was born a nonbender. I was born on a different Atla also, as is every ally that I’ve brought to assist you. For the love of Gnolos let me explain the multiverse before your brains melt.”

So Navisi told them how there are many, many different Atla’s; each one differing from the others. Some were very similar, while others were very different. She told of how Azula was born without her bending and was recruited to travel the multiverse to help worlds in need. How she came to Navisi’s world and recruited her to travel by her side.

“The demon Ginhaphous, known to the most as the Traveler, brought teachings and artifacts that are causing the spirit veil to tear. But the Order of the Arts Esoteric has the skills needed to close the tear, but it requires two Avatars in two different worlds working together with Azula and me to repair the damage.” Navisi concluded.

“I see why Methus asked me to trust you. This would be very hard to believe if he hadn’t warned me ahead of time.” Korra said, her face pensive.

“I’m glad he did too. This is hard to believe and I’ve even visited other worlds.” Navisi laughs at the thought.

“How many have you visited?” Zhu Li asked.

Navisi didn’t see any reason not to answer. “Including the world I was born on, five. But I think I’ve blown your mind enough for now. Why don’t you tell me what you guys have been up to since I left?”

Korra explained how she was able to track down the Bending Thief; she was actually a nonbending activist who wanted to take bending from those that she deemed unworthy and give it to professionals that she thought could better use them. She committed suicide before she allowed herself to be captured. Luckily, everyone that had their bending stolen had it restored during Harmonic Convergence.”

“What happened to those that were given bending? Did it go away during Harmonic Convergence?” Navisi asked. She was happy with the skills that she had developed as part of the Arts Esoteric, but sometimes she wondered what it would be like to be given bending.

“No, they kept their bending. They have been locked away so that they aren’t a danger to society.” Korra exclaimed. Navisi noticed the anger filling Korra’s aura. And she didn’t miss the regret and disapproval in the auras of Korra’s three nonbending friends.

“I don’t think that’s right, Korra. I agree that some punishment may be in order, but what laws did they violate? What were they charged with? Were they hardened criminals with a long list of evil deeds?” Navisi didn’t want to start a fight, but she did want to understand. Benders sometimes but too much emphasis on bending.

“What they did is evil! You don’t know what it’s like to lose your bending, to go from being something special to a nobody.” Korra snarled in anger.

Navisi struggled to keep her own anger in check. “A nobody? Is that really how you want to describe nonbenders?”

Korra deflated before her eyes. “I didn’t mean it like that, Navisi. But when you are used to being a certain way, to lose it is a terrible thing to endure. Blind people aren’t lesser than people that can see, but it would still difficult to adjust to the loss of your sight.”

“I understand your logic. I’ve heard that bending is basically a part of your person, your very being. But you can’t let your outrage over what was done to you skew what is right and wrong. I’m not opposed to you punishing these people, but the punishment must fit the crime. All that I ask is that you consider my words.” Navisi answered. She took a deep breath and decided to change the subject. “What else happened after you caught the Bending Thief?”

Korra looked like she wanted to keep arguing, but she finally decided to accept the change in topic. “Well, the Northern Water Tribe tried to invade the Southern Water Tribe, and it turns out that my uncle wanted to become the Dark Avatar by merging with Vaatu, Raava’s evil counterpart. But thanks to the energy bending skills that you and Asundra helped me develop, I was able to kick his ass and reseal Vaatu.”

“And Harmonic Convergence created a lot of new airbenders. Unfortunately, one of the new airbenders by the name of Zaheer was part of terrorist organization called the Red Lotus. They were anarchists and wanted to kill me in the Avatar state to end the cycle. They obviously didn’t succeed with that, but they did kill the Earth Queen, causing most of the Earth Continent to devolve and break into numerous small warring states.”

Navisi sighed. She wouldn’t say it out loud to Korra, but this was just another example of what Azula was trying to avoid. If there were systems in place to handle bad events like the assassination of leaders, society wouldn’t constantly break down and have to be fixed by the Avatar.

Navisi believed that the Avatars were addicted to the thrill and rush of solving the world’s problems; they thrived on being needed.

She turned her attention back to Korra as she continued speaking. “We were able to take down the Red Lotus, but I’ve been so distracted by all the spirit incursions that I haven’t had enough time to deal with the earth continent situation. I asked Suyin, Lin’s sister, to help bring the people together, but she didn’t want to. But luckily, one of her lieutenants, Kuvira, stepped up and is going around and dealing with all the rebel groups. Bolin actually joined her group to help.”

This is exactly the kind of situations that Azula wanted to avoid. It should never be one person trying to solve the problems. If that person is stretched too thin, things don’t get resolved. If that person dies, chaos ensues because there is no one to do the job until the next Avatar is found and trained. A lot can happen in twenty or thirty years.

She was glad that at least this Kuvira person stepped up to help. And it sounds like Bolin is maturing and taking responsibility also. Good for him.

Chapter Text

The sight of the futuristic city from the airship’s viewing platform was absolutely magnificent as it was illuminated with the light of the setting sun, the buildings seeming to shimmer in the orange light. Hun Ro’s view was probably even more glorious from Wiggy. Azula and Navisi had told them that these people were more advanced technologically than her world, but it still amazed her that things had changed this much in only seventy years.

The small island was beautiful also, with a tower of classic design rising high above the rest of the island. It seemed out of place when juxtaposed against the glass and steel buildings of Republic City. The future and the past, existing together.

And now they were descending towards the island. Navisi had sent notice via Omnisae that Korra’s airship had radioed ahead to let everyone know that we were friends and not an invading army. Radios sounded like a wonderful invention; like Distance Printers that you could talk through.

She was excited to meet people that Azula and Navisi had met on their adventures. This made it seem much more real. It was one thing when they talked about going out and doing wild things and saving all these worlds, but it felt much different to actually follow in their footsteps and walk on another world. She contained a little giggle as she thought of herself as some great multiversal explorer.

It was going to be weird how things were somewhat similar but different. Aang and Katara were a thing here and had kids. Zuko and Mai had a daughter. Toph even has kids. That’s one of the most shocking revelations she had heard about Azula and Navisi’s travels. With the possible exception of Novae, Toph was the least maternal woman she had ever met.

She wondered what the life of her counterpart had been like. Had she been a slave too? Did she have children? Was she happy? She had decided not to try and find out; the heartache of hearing that her other self had lived and died a slave was too sad for her to risk.

The airships landed without any issues. She would lead the contingent from her airship to the introduction ceremony; she smiled when the note said that Hun Ro would be joining her. Everything was better with him by her side. Izuka and Li Nu would lead the other contingents.

Ivaku couldn’t contain her smile when she saw the big lunk waiting for her at the bottom of the loading ramp. “Are you ready to meet the future, WaterBear?”

“Yes, I am. I’m hoping they have some salacious stories about Azula that they’re willing to share. I doubt that she just worked all the time without going dancing and showing off her sultry moves.”

“Maybe they’ll let us go dancing in the fancy city when the job is done.” Hun Ro said with a wide smile on his face.

“Maybe, but let’s go meet the fine people of the future.” Hun Ro stepped alongside her as she led the fourteen people of her airship towards the central plaza. Navisi had drawn a map telling them where to go.

She had gotten used to seeing the orange and red robes on Aang and the acolytes but she wasn’t ready to see it on so many others at one time. And to see the arrows on anyone besides Aang and the overzealous acolyte seemed weird. Navisi said that there were four airbenders when she was here, with a fifth potentially on the way.

It was clear that the tall bald man with the beard and airbending tattoos must be Master Tenzin. And based on what Navisi and Azula had said, the young airbending master was probably Jinora. That meant that the other two young kids are probably Ikki and Meelo. She was willing to bet money that the stern-looking woman in the uniform with a lot of metal was Lin. She wasn’t quite ready to bet money on it, but she was confident that the two good looking older teenagers were Asami and Mako.

And it was easy to pick out Korra. Muscular, good-looking and wearing a water tribe outfit while excitedly conversing with Navisi.

All three of the airship crews stopped when Navisi raised a hand. She then proceeded to turn and address the assembled crowd. “Ladies and gentlemen, let me introduce myself and the wonderful crews that are traveling with me. I am Mistress Navisi of the Order of the Arts Esoteric. I know many of you and I look forward to meeting those that I don’t.”

Navisi turned and gestured to the airship crews. “First, allow me to introduce Princess Izuka, commander of Airship 3. Next up is Master Ivaku, commander of Airship 2, and her husband, Hun Ro. Last, and most definitely not least, is Master Li Nu, commander of Airship 1. There are many other wonderful and talented people in all three crews that you’ll have the opportunity to meet.”

The members of all three crews bowed respectfully towards Master Tenzin. He spoke once everyone had risen from their bows. “Thank you, Mistress Navisi, for that introduction. I am Master Tenzin, keeper of Air Temple Island. This is my wife, Pema, and my children. Master Jinora, Ikki, Meelo and Rohan. This is Chief Lin Beifong of the Republic City Police Department and her sister, Suyin Beifong, founder and leader of the metal city of Zaofu. And this is Asami Sato and Officer Mako. As with your team, there are too many others to be introduced all at once.”

“Thank you, Master Tenzin. I’m very excited to see that Jinora earned her Master’s tattoos.” Navisi said with a smile as she pulled something out of her pocket. “And it looks like Mako finally got a badge like me. Maybe we can go on patrol together!”

Navisi held up a small badge towards the young man as many of the future people started laughing.

The laughing stopped as Lin voiced a question. “I hope that it’s not rude to ask, but why didn’t Asundra join you?”

Navisi let out a very audible sigh. “That’s a complicated question that I would like to discuss with a smaller group. But fear not, Mistress Asundra is doing well and sends her regards.” Navisi said with an easy smile. “Master Tenzin, I’ve informed the Avatar of our mission. I would like to meet with you and others of your choosing to discuss the ramifications of our arrival.”

“I am, of course, happy to see you and your friends, and I would very much like to hear about this mission.” Tenzin replied. “I’ve prepared the main room for a discussion. You may lead your team there if you remember the way.”

“Thank you, Tenzin.” Navisi nodded to the three airship commanders and Hun Ro; as per the plan, the rest of the crew went back to their assigned airship. Logistics and such needed to be worked out, so nothing would be prepared until the important decisions had been made.

The four fell in line behind Navisi, who led them into the large building. Once inside the main hall, Navisi turned right and proceeded to enter a spacious living area with enough seating for about fifteen people. Ivaku wondered just how many people Korra was bringing.

“Air Temple Island is a nice starting point for introducing you to this world. It still has a feel from our time. It was built by Aang and Katara about forty or so years ago.” Navisi explained. “It’s nice to be back. Tenzin practically kicked me out the last time I was here.” Navisi said in a loud voice.

“I did no such thing! You scurried off like a thief in the night.” Tenzin answered in a loud voice of his own.

“Don’t worry, Tenzin, I’m not holding a grudge. No offense, but Asami has a beautiful home and it was a very comfortable stay.” Navisi said with a smirk.

“She’s just trying to get your goat-sheep, Tenzin. Lighten up.” Lin said, turning a stern look on Navisi. “Although, it was pretty rude of you to run off without saying goodbye.”

“Unfortunately, Asundra and I didn’t control our schedule. And I’m guessing that our exit was sped up to keep you from arresting us and making us wards of the state.” Navisi raised an eyebrow at the policewoman. “Korra told us that we are wanted criminals. Are you going to revoke my badge?”

“We are sorry that things developed that way.” Tenzin said, holding up his hands in appeasement. “We can discuss that later though. We are interested in learning why you have returned.”

As the conversation had been going, the room had slowly filled up and the doors were closed. Ivaku guessed that this was the whole group.

Besides Tenzin and Lin, six others had joined them. Korra, Asami, Mako, Suyin, a man of medium height with a thin mustache in a fancy suit, and a pretty woman with glasses and long brown hair.

“She already told us some of it, Tenzin, and it is a very important mission. Methus, intermediary of Tui and La, contacted me before her arrival and told me to trust her.” Korra said.

That caused all of the future people to take notice. Lin broke the silence. “I didn’t actually think that the intermediaries were real.”

“They are actively involved in this mission. Well, as actively involved as they ever get. Methus, Denuskya, Mukaati and Terrathusi are the only ones that we’ve dealt with.” Navisi chimed in. “But the point is that we’ve come to ask for your assistance. The veil between the spirit and material world is tearing and we need your help closing it. Specifically, Korra’s help, but we would accept from others amongst you if you were so inclined.”

“I understand why Korra was approached, but what does this have to do with the rest of you. The Avatar is supposed to be the one to balance matters with the spirits. She already beat down Vaatu.” Mako said.

“We were approached because we have the skills and equipment to close the tear in the veil. We came to you because it will require two Avatars to close it.” Navisi said.

“And what the hell do you mean by two Avatars. There is only one Avatar.” Suyin exclaimed.

“Everyone, let her explain. It will be hard to wrap your heads around, but let her tell her story.” Korra yelled, getting everyone to be quiet.

“Please let me finish the story before you judge me. I need to explain how there are untold thousands of different Atla’s; some very similar to yours while others are very different. On one’s like yours, Avatar Aang defeated the Phoenix King and Lord Zuko defeated Azula. On others, Aang and Zuko both died in the battle. But on one world in particular, Princess Azula, daughter of Ozai and Ursa, was born without the ability to firebend.”

Ivaku saw that they were all paying attention now. “And that one change made all the difference. Princess Azula was trained in the Arts Esoteric and became the most powerful member of that order that has ever existed in the multiverse. And she was called upon by gods and the Great Spirits to help worlds that were in danger. Such as yours.”

“Mistress Asundra. She’s the Princess Azula that didn’t get her firebending, isn’t she?” Lin asked, staring at Navisi.

“Yes. The name Azula is feared and hated on nearly every world that we visited.” Navisi said with a sigh.

“She told us of visions that she had of the firebending Azula’s; visions that were shared by a goddess of knowledge and wisdom. But Azula, my sister, is not evil or destructive like so many of the others. Like yours.” Izuka said, speaking for the first time.

Everyone just stared at her, mouths open. “Your Asundra’s sister?” Tenzin asked.

“Yes. My older brother, Zuko, was considered a weak bender as a child and when Azula was born a nonbender, our parents tried for another child. I was born ten months after Azula.” Izuka explained.

“As you can imagine, their childhoods were complicated. But let me tell you about Azula’s travels and what led us to come to you now.” Navisi proceeded to explain how Azula was recruited to channel the power of a goddess to defeat a horrible enemy, resulting in the destruction of her original body and her trip through the multiverse. She concluded by sharing how the artifacts and illicit teachings gifted by the Traveler weakened the veil.

“So, in order to repair the veil, we will need two teams working together. The Avatars will provide the spirit energy that Azula and I will weave into the veil. And the rest of the teams will be needed to deal with any of the extraplanar spirits that are able to come through the veil while we’re repairing it.” Navisi explained to the stunned audience. “I know that you have a lot of questions, but please take a couple of minutes and think about what I’ve just shared.”

“You spin a mighty fine yarn, young miss. But can you tell us more about the weapons you’ve built to fight the spirit thingies?” Thin mustache man said.

“Of course, Varrick. There are three basic approaches. Masters Li Nu and Novae have built several types of augmentors that can inflict serious damage on spirits. Li Nu designed a device that launches spirit repulsor discs. Azula designed spirit repulsor gloves that were further improved by Master Novae. We have many trained users and we have extra equipment if anyone on your world is willing to be trained.” Navisi said. Li Nu smiled and gave a reassuring nod.

“Master Ivaku is an expert with waterbending gauntlets that can infuse water with spririt repulsing energy. It is akin to the spirit energy training that we gave Korra, but specifically attuned for destroying spirits. Once again, we have extra gloves.”

“Princess Izuka wields spirit lightning. We have special training gloves; once a user is proficient enough, they’re not really needed. I know that lightning bending is much more common here.”

“And we also have special gauntlets that can infuse spirit repulsor energy into air. These are the most difficult to make and use. We only brought one pair since I only thought there was one airbending master. If any of your airbenders would be willing to travel back to our world to assist with defense using the air gauntlets, that would be greatly appreciated.” Navisi said.

That would greatly boost defense in their home world. The greater the versatility and flexibility of their defense, the greater the likelihood of success.

“I must say that I’m a bit overwhelmed by what you’ve told us. The fact that an actual intermediary of the Great Spirits spoke on your behalf is a powerful testament to the importance of your mission.” Tenzin said.

“We’re sorry to drop this on you, but we literally only found out that it was your world we would be visiting two days ago. Well, two days ago on our world.” Navisi answered. “But I would like to contact Azula now to let her know that we’ve made contact. Ivaku, could you and Hun Ro let Azula know that all is well on our end.”

“Of course, Navisi.” Ivaku stood and grabbed Hun Ro’s hand. “Come on, we can look at the beautiful city while we message Azula.”

They made their way back to the airships, where they took a few moments to reassure the assembled crews that all was going well. Once they were back in Airship 2, they had the technician send a message through the special Distance Printer that they had made contact with Avatar Korra and her allies and that they were in negotiations.

They stood outside and marveled at the lit city across the bay. It was another thing that Azula and Navisi had told them about. Controlled lightning called electricity. Their sense of wonder was broken when Ivaku heard the technician calling out to her.

“Master Ivaku. Mistress Azula has acknowledged our message and sent a response. You’re going to want to see this right away, ma’am.” Ivaku heard the discomfort in the woman’s voice, so she hurried over to read the message.

And her heart sank at the news. “Thank you, Ihsan. I’ll let the others know.”

Breaking this news to Izuka wasn’t how she wanted to spend her first night on Air Temple Island.

“We’ll need to scan the state of the tear on your world and set-up in the best location. We have room to maneuver; we don’t want to set up in urban areas or places that will make it difficult to use our defensive augmentors efficiently.” Izuka explained.

“We can begin setting up the equipment and laying out the training protocols tomorrow.” Navisi looked around at the crowd. “Korra and Mako have already signed up to learn to use the augmentors for their particular skill sets. I will give the rest of you time to think.”

“I am willing to be trained to use the air augmentors. Unfortunately, Jinora is the only other airbending master. Ikki and Meelo are strong benders but they still need much more training. And the rest only got their airbending a few months ago.” Tenzin said solemnly. Izuka couldn’t believe that this stiff dude was Aang’s kid. Maybe his siblings were a little more free-spirited.

“I understand, Tenzin. I know that Jinora is young and that you’re not comfortable sending her to our world to fight.” Navisi sighed. “But I do need to point out that the fate of the multiverse is riding on our success.”

Tenzin looked pensive as he thought over the implications of Navisi’s words. While he was thinking, Lin spoke up.

“Is there anything that earthbenders or metalbenders can do.” She asked. “Hell, we can get Bolin’s lavabending ass over here if we need to.”

“Bolin can lavabend!” Navisi exclaimed. “Korra! Why didn’t you share that awesome fact?”

“Sorry, Navisi, but my mind was melting from all the crazy stuff you were telling me.” Korra said, looking a little sheepish.

Izuka decided to enter the fray to keep everyone on task. “Unfortunately, conventional earthbending and lavabending aren’t very useful in fighting spirits, but Azula said that the metalbenders here were very agile and that as Toph’s kid, you were exceptionally skilled. I’m hoping to get you trained to use spirit repulsors.”

She was met with silence for a few moments, making her wonder if something was wrong. Lin finally spoke. “You know our mother on your world?”

Ah. Izuka forgot that this might take them a little while to get used to. “Yes, I do. I don’t work with her as much as Navisi; those two are thick as thieves. I…I know it’s strange. Believe me, it’s strange for us too.”

Izuka addressed Ivaku and Hun Ro as they walked in. “Hey, Ivaku, we should see if you and Hun Ro have kids here. Hell, you might already have grandkids your age.”

Izuka frowned as Ivaku and Hun Ro didn’t so much as crack a smile. Ivaku finally spoke. “Azula acknowledged our message and passed on some information of their own. Can I speak with you outside, Izuka? In private.”

The entire room became silent as they all felt the seriousness in Ivaku’s voice and demeanor. Izuka finally found her voice. “Do you need anyone else?”

“No, just you. Hun Ro will stay and brief the others while we talk.”

Izuka turned to Tenzin. “Is there a good place to hold a private conversation?”

But Navisi spoke first. “There’s a quiet portion on the southeast corner of the island. Omnisae is waiting at the front door to lead you there.”

Izuka felt like she was walking to the gallows as she followed Ivaku out the door. As promised, Omnisae was waiting in panther form and began walking as they exited the building. Two minutes later they were at an isolated area and Omnisae disappeared into thin air.

“What the hell is this about, Ivaku. You’re killing me here.”

“The message Azula sent back had bad news. There was an incursion in the Fire Nation; it’s unclear how it started but it appears that the rebels called upon a spirit and an assimilator came through. The Fire Nation army was able to hold it back long enough for Azula, Iroh, Katara and Aang to arrive and defeat them. But,” Ivaku looked at her with misty eyes. “Fire Lord Zuko died from the wounds he sustained in the battle.”

The news hit a lot harder than she had expected it too. They had obviously not been close in any meaningful way for years, but there had been a time when they had become friends if not really close siblings. She still felt tears coming to her eyes.

And the hug from Ivaku was a bit unexpected, but not unwelcome. “I’m sorry, Izuka. I know that you weren’t very close, but he was still your brother.”

“Yes, he was. Thank you for being here.” Izuka wiped her eyes. “But I’d like to be alone for a few minutes.”

“Of course, Izuka. I’ll make sure no one bothers you until you’re ready.” Ivaku released Izuka and headed back to the tower.

She sat on a rock and looked out over the water. He was a stubborn mule-ox that refused to learn from his mistakes, but he had always been a good man. His misguided sense of honor had been at the root of a lot of his issues. And having their shrew-hamster of a mother as his main advisor had undoubtedly contributed to a lot of the bad decisions made.

But she had always held out hope that he would come to his senses and figure out that the real world isn’t cut and dry. But now he would never get that chance. And she would never get the chance to make up with him. Having regained Azula as a sister had given her hope that she could reclaim a brother. But now the opportunity was gone forever.

She quietly wept for the terrible situation of her family. And she laid the blame entirely at the feet of Ozai and Ursa.

Chapter Text

“That was perfect, Jinora. You really are a prodigy.” Li Nu said with a laugh. “Considering how talented your father and grandfather are, I guess that shouldn’t be much of a surprise.”

“Thanks, Li Nu. You’ve been a great teacher.” Jinora said. And Li Nu was not just an expert on the augmentor; she had a way with people too. Jinora had found herself liking her immediately.

“Yes, Li Nu, you truly are a wonderful teacher. And a brilliant mind, if even half of what Navisi said is true about your assistance in designing the augmentors is true.” Father chimed in.

Jinora had to suppress a smile at the blush that came to Li Nu’s cheeks. Having worked with Korra, Azula and Navisi, it was nice to deal with someone with a little more modesty.

“I’m just doing what I love. And you two are extraordinary students. It’s a shame that none of the others are ready to use the air gloves yet.” Li Nu quickly regained her equilibrium.

“So with Aang using his Avatar powers to close the rift, there aren’t any airbenders there to use the gloves?” Jinora asked. They had talked about this the day after the newcomers had arrived.

“No, there are six baby airbenders and potentially two more on the way, but there’s not anybody ready to wield the gloves.” Li Nu smiled at the two airbenders. “But my world is armed to the teeth and ready to deal with any invasion.

“What is your world like?” Jinora found herself asking. “It seems so different than our worlds. The intermediaries said that you could share some things with us, didn’t they?”

“Yes, they did. The big difference is undoubtedly Azula, but the other major difference from what Azula told me is that Lu Ten survived in our world. She said…she said that he was killed in the siege of Ba Sing Se in all the worlds that she visited or saw in visions. With his survival, General Iroh was able to take Ba Sing Se and then assumed the position of Fire Lord upon the death of Azulon. The Fire Nation won the war before Aang was awoken.”

Jinora pondered that. The survival of one man completely changed the course of history. But Li Nu wasn’t done. “Ozai never took over, Zuko was never banished, and Azula started building the international economics groups that would go on to tie the world together. And Master Novae was able to figure out the mathematics and logistics of augmentors. When the Fire Nation betrayed Azula they decided not to fund Novae’s Mechanical Thinker. But luckily, the Matrons of Rokishe decided to fund her work. Apparently, neither Novae nor the Matrons survived the attacks of the Fire Nation in this world.”

“In my youth, I heard tales of the wisdom of the Matrons. Are they as wise as the legends say?” Tenzin asked.

“Each and every Matron in recorded history was competent and capable. And because they knew that they would be succeeded by a competent successor, they could afford to invest in long term projects. And with augmentors at their disposal, they formed a coalition with many other smaller nations for defense. The city states of Savan and Lenth. Kyoshi Island. The rebuilt Southern Water Tribe. And when Omashu joined, they become a powerful force. They became known as the Southern Defense Coalition and have grown to be a powerful political and military force on Atla.”

“It sounds like your world recovered faster than ours. It took years and years for balance to be restored.” Jinora said.

“Much of that has to do with the Regional Economic Councils that Azula helped build; trade and commerce raised the living standard of nearly everyone. But there has been a lot of strife too. The Fire Nation has been fighting a civil war for the past year and a half. The purity movements have become very strong in the western portions of the earth continent, and is even a considerable force in the eastern nation of Zenthru.” Li Nu said with an audible sigh.

“What will happen with Zuko’s death?” Tenzin asked. “Will Izuka have to return to take over?”

“I doubt it. My guess is that power will be transferred to Lu Ten; he’s the Crown Prince and both Iroh and Izuka are needed to help close the veil. And besides, well, Izuka was technically banished by Zuko for criticizing some of his policies.” Li Nu’s gave them both a rather mischievous smirk. “The condition for returning home was to bring Azula back in chains.”

Jinora just stared at Li Nu, and she noticed that Father looked just as dumbfounded. When no one said anything, Jinora decided now was the time to make her voice heard. “I would like to visit your world. You need someone to use the air gloves.”

“Jinora! You’re just a child.” Father exclaimed.

“So were Grandfather and Grandmother when they fought in the Hundred’s Year War. Not to mention Toph. And Azula and Navisi were traveling through multiple worlds facing incredible dangers at about my age. The multiverse is at stake, not just our world.” Jinora said as calmly as she could.

Father’s face turned bright red and he seemed to be having a difficult time speaking, so she decided to continue. “And not only that, but I’d be fighting alongside them now. As well as Iroh and a bunch of others. What’s the point in trying to keep me safe when the entire world is at stake? We need every advantage we can get.”

“I know that you’re strong and capable, Jinora, but you’re asking to go to another universe.” Father sighs and gets that defeated look. “I…I don’t want to let you go, but I’ll leave up to you. And you have to explain it to your mother.”

Jinora flinched a little bit at that. She didn’t want to have to explain leaving this world to Mother, but she knows what she needs to do.

“I will, Father. The intermediaries themselves are invested in this fight.”

Jinora stepped in to give her father a hug. She knows that he loves her and means well. Li Nu finally spoke. “The team on my world is very strong and will look out for her. We’ve been training for over a year to fight this battle.”

“Thank you, Li Nu. Your team does seem very competent.” Father looked around at all the training groups actively working on the island.

Jinora looked around too and was impressed with the progress being made. Mako was firing bolts of red lightning in the air; they weren’t as strong as Izuka’s but according to Navisi, Izuka was an incredibly strong firebender.

And Kya and a few of other waterbenders were becoming very proficient using the waterbending gauntlets. And quite a few metalbenders were skilled in using the spirit repulsors. To the relief of all, Korra was actually doing well with the main augmentor; she was able to channel energy for Navisi to weave. They still needed to increase the total amount of energy that she was able to harness though. But according to Navisi, it was just a matter of practice.

“I’ll talk to Navisi about arranging for transportation to our world; she controls the Transit Compass. I know that Azula will be happy to see you again.” Li Nu said as they continued watching the others train.

As expected, the conversation with Mother didn’t go well, but in the end, she gave Jinora her blessing. With tearful exhortations to be careful as well. Li Nu said that Navisi had apprised Azula of the situation. She said that the transit would be done once the logistics were set up.

Korra and the others were actually a little jealous that Jinora was going to get to travel to the other world. Grandfather and the others were living legends here, and even though they weren’t the same people, Jinora felt honored to meet them while they were still young and vigorous.

“You should take a camera with you so you can get some photographs to commemorate the event.” Asami said as they were having dinner.

“That’s actually a great idea. Navisi, do you think the intermediaries would be offended by that?” Korra asked. “From what you’ve said, they’re a bit adamant about keeping the timelines separated.”

“I don’t think it’ll be a problem, but I’ll run it by Azula. If they’re opposed, the camera probably just won’t travel with us.” Navisi answered with a smile. Suddenly her head snapped to the side and she stared off into space. After a few moments, she gave a dramatic sigh. “This isn’t a conversation that I’ve been looking forward too. Druk will be landing in a matter of moments.”

And just as predicted, they all felt the tremor as the giant beast landed. At least this time it wasn’t a surprise. Tenzin had contacted the leaders of several nations to bring them up to speed on the situation. And apparently Zuko wasn’t to be denied the opportunity to meet family from another world.

But Jinora felt very uncomfortable about the situation. The death of the other Zuko had been relayed to the group the night of their arrival, and Izuka had been given space to grieve. She had seemed fine over the past ten days, but as Jinora watched her, she looked more annoyed than anything.

“I know that you didn’t part on good terms, but he has been apprised of the situation and has promised to behave appropriately.” Father said. “I hope that you will give him the same benefit.”

“I promise to behave, Tenzin.” Navisi looked over at Izuka, who just looked back with a neutral situation. “But this is awkward given the recent developments on our world. But let’s go greet him.”

Father, Navisi, and Izuka all stood and made their way to the door. Jinora stayed seated as they went. This wasn’t a conversation that she wanted to be a part of.

Izuka swears that Zuko was going to cause her to go gray before her time. He banished her on her world and then proceeded to nearly run the Fire Nation into the ground. And then he had the nerve to get himself killed without her having a chance to say goodbye and make peace. And now, while the wound to her heart was still healing, she had to meet another Zuko. Granted, according to Navisi he was old and decrepit, but it was still a situation she would rather not have to deal with.

But this is her life now. The first thing that caught her eye as she stepped outside was the giant dragon that took up a good portion of the courtyard; with all the airships, there hadn’t been enough room for the dragon to land in the normal spot.

Druk was considerably longer and thicker than Kiva; as a matter of fact it seemed to be an entirely different kind of dragon. But it was still an impressive and magnificent being.

She had been warned by both Azula and Navisi, but her heart still ached when she saw the burn scar on Zuko’s left eye. Her father really was an asshole. But otherwise, Zuko seemed to be in good health besides being, as Navisi said, of advanced ancientness.

“It is a pleasure to see you again, Lord Zuko. I’m sorry that you weren’t able to land in your normal spot, but as you can see, the island is pretty much at full capacity.” Tenzin said with a gracious bow.

“That is quite alright, Tenzin. I appreciate you allowing my visit.” Zuko answered, looking over at Navisi, who just raised an eyebrow in response. “Especially given how my last visit went.”

“That is in the past, Lord Zuko. Mistress Navisi assured me that she holds no ill will.” Tenzin looked over at Navisi with a discerning look.

“Of course not, Tenzin. It’s unfortunate that the situation last time forced us to be in opposition; I hold no personal animosity to you or your family.” Navisi answered with a smile. Izuka suppressed a smirk; she knew that Navisi was lying through her teeth. She really disliked this world’s Izumi.

“That is good to hear.” Zuko said as his eyes turned towards Izuka. They hadn’t told him that she would be here. She could almost hear the gears turning in his head.

She decided to get in a little teasing. “It is nice to meet you, Lord Zuko. In case you were wondering, I am Mistress Asundra’s sister, Izuka.”

His mouth opened in shock as he turned to Tenzin, who had just released a world weary sigh that was actually quite impressive. “The situation is complicated and I believe that we should sit down and discuss. Izuka’s statement, while entirely accurate, is also misleading.”

“Has anyone ever told you that you’re a spoilsport, Tenzin.” Izuka answered, sharing a smirk with Navisi, who seemed to be enjoying this as much as Izuka.

“Yes.” Came the stiff reply, causing both Navisi and Izuka to openly smile. “Be that as it may, let’s go inside so that we can brief Lord Zuko on the circumstances of your visit. And clear up your identity, Izuka.”

“Lead the way, Tenzin.” Izuka replied. So far this was going better than she had expected. He was so old and different in appearance that he felt like a distant relative rather than her brother.

Tenzin and Zuko made conversation as they went inside, Navisi and Zuko following silently behind them. The small group was soon in Tenzin’s private study; he closed the door behind them so that the conversation could be held in private.

“Lord Zuko, as you know, Navisi and her team arrived in their airships ten days ago and told us of a great mission to close the tear in the veil separating the spirit realm from the material world. What I didn’t share is, well, Navisi’s team is from a different Atla than ours.”

Zuko just stared at him, so Tenzin continued speaking. “According to Navisi, there are actually many different Atla’s that exist, each one different than the others. A small change can lead to a vastly different world.”

Zuko went to speak, but Tenzin raised a hand and spoke over him. “And before you ask if we’re mistaken, Methus, an intermediary of Tui and La, contacted Korra and told her that Navisi would be arriving and that she was to trust her and help her with this endeavor.”

Zuko continued looking at Tenzin for a few more moments before his gaze turned to Izuka and Navisi. “And what does this have to do with the two of you? And where is Asundra?”

Izuka shared a glance with Navisi, silently debating who should speak. They decided for Izuka to answer. “We were both born on different Atla’s. On my world, I was born Princess Izuka, youngest daughter of Ozai and Ursa, sibling of Zuko and Azula.”

The way that Zuko’s face went pale, Izuka feared that the old geezer was going to have a heart attack and drop dead. Navisi decided to be proactive and keep explaining. “This is why Mistress Asundra avoided you when she was here; she is actually Azula. The others might accept that she was Azula’s granddaughter, but she suspected that you would know that she was a version of Azula. And for the record, she’s not your sister from this world; she really isn’t a bender. We truly don’t know what happened to your Azula.”

“I know that you were lying about her being Azula’s granddaughter. I found my real sister after our last encounter.” Zuko gave a small smile. “She had lived a quiet life as a Fire Healer and an artist. She openly laughed at me when I said that I had met her granddaughter. Apparently, my Azula found a woman to share her life with; she had never lain with a man, much less had a child. Although she was as startled as I was when I showed the picture of Asundra.”

“Yes, our Azula prefers women also. But in other worlds she has taken men as lovers. On one such world, she had a rather torrid romance with Avatar Aang.” Navisi said matter of factly, causing Izuka to just stare at her with an incredulous expression.

Zuko apparently started choking on his own spit, because he began coughing rather vigorously. Poor Tenzin’s head had turned bright red and Izuka had a minor fear that his eyes were actually going to pop out of his head.

Navisi decided to rub salt in the wounds. “You should have seen the looks of shock and outrage on the faces of everyone when Aang told them.” Navisi gave everyone in the room a smirk. “Oh, yeah, you really don’t have too. They were a lot like the looks on the faces of the three of you.”

Navisi laughed and smacked her knee. Izuka found her voice first. “Aang is a great guy, but I have a hard time picturing those two together.”

“That’s because you are all used to seeing the one version of a person. Once you start seeing how people change in different circumstances, you become more accepting of behavior that is outside the norm. Aang and Azula were actually a good pair in that circumstance.” Navisi answered. “On the worlds that I’ve traveled, Aang has been with three different women. And according to Azula, Zuko has also had three different Fire Ladies. Azula was beginning to think that you had a water tribe fetish.”

As much as Izuka was enjoying Zuko’s discomfort, it was time to bring the conversation back on track. “As interesting as the love lives of you and Aang are, I think that we should discuss how to move forward. No offense, but given your age, I’m not sure how helpful you’ll be in active combat. But Druk could be very useful.”

“I’m definitely past my prime on the battlefield. But I am willing to allow Druk to help with the battle if he is willing.” Zuko answered. Izuka was glad to see that he had finally pulled himself together.

The four of them discussed the arrangement and how she wanted to use Druk as an agile medium for a lightningbender such as herself or Mako, since lightningbender was the most effective bending attack against spirits.

“You seem to have a very detailed strategy established for using Druk; were you counting on me allowing you to ride him?” Zuko asked after Izuka had gone over the plan.

“No, we didn’t know if you or Druk was going to be involved in this battle. The protocols were established so that Iroh could ride Azula’s dragon in battle. He’s a powerful bender but not exactly spry anymore. Not to be rude, but he’s too heavy to really fly like me.” Izuka answered, considering the best options. She thought it still made more sense for her, rather than Mako, to ride Druk; Mako couldn’t fly either but her lightning was significantly more powerful than his and Druk could fly significantly faster than she could. Plus, she could generate more powerful lightning when she wasn’t flying.

It was only after a few moments of uncomfortable silence that she looked up to see Zuko staring at her. “Uncle Iroh is on your world?” Izuka nodded, wondering what the point is. “And you can fly?”

“Yes, it’s something that I’ve been working on with Azula; she taught me how to focus the flames out of my hands and feet to keep myself airborne. I can’t generate blue flames, but I can make white ones which are hot enough and focused enough to fly comfortably. I can’t fly from here to the Fire Nation but I could easily cross the bay to the city.” Izuka guesses that no one here could fly.

“That’s amazing!” Tenzin said. “I’ve heard that the Azula here could fly short distances but nothing like that.”

“Well, I don’t seem to be quite as strong a bender as your Azula, but my Azula is an incredibly talented person who worked with me to maximize my talents. Navisi was quite helpful too.” Izuka gave Navisi a smile, thinking of all the time the three of them had worked together to make Izuka the powerful bender that she is now.

She noticed the frown on Zuko’s face. “I wish I could have met your Azula while she was here.”

“Our circumstances were much different the first time we were here. She didn’t want to hurt you, but you could potentially compromise our mission.” Navisi said in a soft voice.

“I see now why you did it. But she sounds so different than my Azula. At least my Azula when she was young. My Azula was actually quite calm. Although she doesn’t want anything to do with me or the Fire Nation.” Zuko looked crestfallen.

“Well, I’m glad that at least you got to meet and speak with her.” Navisi said.

“Yes, that is good to hear.” Tenzin chimed in. “Perhaps we should retire to the dining area. It would be good to introduce you to the others on Navisi and Izuka’s team.”

“That sounds like a good plan.” Zuko answered, looking a little more upbeat. Izuka felt a bit bad for him, but there wasn’t too much to be done.

Jinora was both excited and scared to meet the people on the other side of the golden cloud. Navisi and the others all told her that it was quick and easy. Knowing that Azula was waiting for her on the other side made it easier.

All of the goodbyes were said and now everyone was waiting for Navisi to activate the Transit Compass. Navisi turned to the waiting crowd. “Is everyone excited to see the golden cloud?”

There were a lot of cheers from Korra’s team, but she noticed that more than a few of Navisi’s team cheered also. Suddenly, a small golden cloud appeared. Jinora turned to Navisi one last time. “Thank you for this opportunity, Navisi.”

“You’re welcome, Jinora. Say hi to everyone for us. And make sure to take lots of pictures.” Navisi answered with a smile.

Jinora laughed and waved to everyone again before she started walking forward, carrying her bag and wheeling the small cart with all the photography supplies into the cloud.

It was just like Navisi said. One moment she was on Air Temple Island and the next she was in the courtyard of some sort of temple. This must be the temple for the Arts Esoteric. Palathia.

She couldn’t help but smile as she looked at the woman before her. “Hello, Jinora. Welcome to the past.” Azula gave her a big hug.

“Hello, Azula. It’s great to see you again.” Jinora said as she gave Azula an extra squeeze.

“I’m glad to have you here. Let me introduce to everyone. This is Avatar Aang, Master Katara, General Iroh, Mayor Vinda, Ty Lee, Master Novae and Toph. There will be others to introduce you too, but I thought it best to keep it small for the first meeting.”

“Thanks, Azula. It is a pleasure to meet everyone.” Jinora felt a little awkward looking at Aang and Katara. Especially Katara. She was used to seeing her as a kind and elderly grandmother, not this young and fit warrior before her.

She sensed that they were a little nervous too. Aang spoke first. “It is nice to meet you, Jinora. I…I haven’t met another airbender in a long time. And Azula said that you are my granddaughter?”

“Yes, I am. My father, Tenzin, was the only airbender of your three children. I’m sorry to say that I never got to meet you; you passed away before I was born. But I’m good friends with the next Avatar.” Jinora smiled to try and make this conversation less weird. It wasn’t helping.

It was Katara’s turn now. “Azula says that I am, was, your grandmother.”

“Yes. You always liked to pinch our cheeks when my siblings and I come to visit. No offense, but you’re really old in my world.” Jinora answered, shuffling back and forth on her feet. But she felt better when everyone laughed.

“Well, that’s a fate that we all hope to endure someday.” Azula said. “Let’s get you and your stuff set up. Aang’s been dying to see your airbending in action, so maybe you can try using the air gloves later.”

“That would be great. Maybe we can have an airscooter race too.” Jinora said, smiling at Aang. And she immediately became concerned when he started crying.

“I’m sorry,” Aang said, wiping his tears away with his sleeve. “But it’s been over a hundred years since I’ve met someone that I could have an airscooter race with.”

At that moment, Jinora realized just how terrible Aang’s life must have been. To be torn away from your people and learn that they had all been killed and the way of life that you loved had been destroyed. She walked over and gave him a hug, which he accepted.

“I’m happy to have that race with you, Aang. But don’t think I’m going to let you win just because you’re a crybaby.” Jinora said, causing everyone to laugh.

Toph was braying like a donkey-ox. “She’s got you pegged, Twinkletoes!”

Chapter Text

Lu Ten was nervous as he looked at himself in the mirror. The robes looked good on him, but his heart was still broken that this is how he had become Fire Lord. Zuko, for all his flaws, was a good man who had tried to do the right thing for the Fire Nation. But he had gone astray.

Father’s voice brought him out of his reverie. “You look good, Lu Ten. You will make a wonderful Fire Lord. And with a wonderful Fire Lady like Sinlao at your side, I expect great things for the both of you and the Fire Nation.”

“Thank you, Father. I’ve been training for this my entire life.” Lu Ten smiled at the look of happiness on Father’s face. It was great to have him back in his life.

“Indeed, you have. The world has changed a great deal in the past ten years, and it will undoubtedly change again in the next ten. The world is tired of strife. You can be the one who leads the Fire Nation into a peaceful future.”

“I hope so, Father.” Lu Ten gave his father a sad smile. “The organizations that Azula helped create will undoubtedly make the process easier, but we still need to be diligent and focused on changing the way our people think. I know that they are doing incredible things to keep our world safe right now, but I’m sorry that Azula and Izuka couldn’t be here.”

“They are sorry that they couldn’t make it either, but as you said there is a lot riding on their mission. I’m glad that I was able to be here for you.” Father said, a content look on his face. “Having a magic dragon to ferry one around is a great way to travel.”

Lu Ten laughed. “Indeed, it is. I’m glad that you are here too. It’s wonderful to have family by your side on important days like today.”

Father was about to speak when the door opened and a steward entered. “Pardon my interruption, Fire Lords, but I was asked to inform you that the time for the ceremony is at hand.”

“Of course, Ganha. Thank you for letting me know.” Lu Ten looked to Father. “Are you ready?”

“I’ve been looking forward to you becoming Fire Lord since you were but a tiny babe. I’m sorry that it is under these circumstances, but you are the right man for the job.” Father said, a sad smile on his face.

They followed the Ganha out the door and the royal guards surrounded them as they made their way to the preparation room. And Lu Ten couldn’t help but smile as he saw Sinlao, the light of his life, dressed in her Fire Lady garb. Beautiful and poised, she was everything that a Fire Lady should be.

And he smiled to see the changes that had been made the royal robes. The phoenix crest of Muzai had been woven into the red and black of the traditional robes, showing that the Fire Nation islands and Muzai were one people, forever united.

Muzai had selected the name of their newly formed lands as both a sign of support to the Fire Nation while also subverting the symbology of Ozai and his followers. Muzai had been the phoenix that helped raise the first Fire Lord to his throne; he had been loyal and wise, everything that Ozai and his traitorous movement had not been.

Having spent the past five years in the Fire Colony, he knew the people well. And they knew him. The Fire Nation and Muzai were separated by a sea but were one people. And he would make sure that they remained united. At first he hadn’t liked their neutrality, but he had come to understand that the leaders of Muzai were actually wise and thoughtful people who wanted to end the cycle of violence.

“You look fabulous, husband. Are you ready to take your place as the new Fire Lord?” Sinlao said as he approached.

“Thank you, my dear. But with how beautiful you look in your royal robes, I doubt anyone is going to bother looking at me. And yes, I’m ready for today’s ceremony.” Lu Ten answered as he gave her a quick kiss on her cheek.

And his smile widened as he saw Mai rolling her eyes behind Sinlao. But his smile faded a bit as he caught sight of the other woman with Sinlao.

Lady Yue.

He decided to do what he could to help her on this difficult day. “And you look wonderful too, Yue. Thank you for being here for us; I know that this is a difficult time for you. But you are our family and you’re always welcome in our home.”

Yue’s eyes glistened but she managed to hold her tears back. “Thank you, Lu Ten. I consider you to be my family also, but I don’t think that the Fire Nation is my home anymore. I…I’ve decided to take Izumi and Yanook to Gir Mirath.”

Lu Ten paused before he spoke. “I’m sorry that you don’t feel like the Fire Nation is your home, but I understand why you wish to leave. And from what I hear, Gir Mirath is a wonderful place. There will be lots of little firebenders and waterbenders for your children to play with.”

“Thank you, Lu Ten. I know that you and Sinlao will be wonderful rulers. I really do wish the best for both of you.” Yue said.

“The Fire Sages are ready to perform the ceremony.” Ganha said politely.

“Come, let’s raise the next Fire Lord before the adoring crowds.” Father said as everyone took their position.

Lu Ten stood next to Sinlao as Father his position to Lu Ten’s right and Yue took her position to Sinlao’s left. The four proceeded to walk out the cheering crowds. The past and the future, working together to show the nation that this was a peaceful transfer of power.

Lu Ten hoped that with Sinlao at this side, the Fire Nation would be entering a new era of peace and prosperity.

Min Kai had cheered with the rest of the crowds when the title of Fire Lord had been transferred from Iroh to Lu Ten. She had heard that Iroh was a good man, but in her mind he would forever be linked to the death and destruction that had been inflicted on Ba Sing Se. Hundreds of thousands of voices had been silenced and would never speak again.

But that was in the past and Min Kai was determined to do whatever was needed to bring prosperity and economic development to her poor, downtrodden people. And Lu Ten had selected Minister Horzun, a brilliant economic mind who had worked with Azula, to be in charge of creating the Fire Nation’s economic policy. This showed Min Kai that the Fire Nation was much more serious about change than the previous administrations had been.

She had been asked to join a small introductory session with the royal family and Minister Horzun. Delegates from several other nations had been invited also, including to Min Kai’s shock, Successor Rajeen.

The meeting room was very ornate and radiated Fire Nationness with all the black and red. But at least it didn’t have a bunch of weapons and portraits of Fire Lords in their military garb hanging on the walls like several other rooms did.

Min Kai worked the room as they waited for Lu Ten and Sinlao to arrive. She knew all of the delegates and was talking over many of the trade arrangements that had been made. Zenthru had strong economic ties with Bing Ha that predated their independence, but they had also enhanced trade with the SDC. Talks were in the works with the Northern Water Tribe; they had slowly began opening their city to outsiders and had even begun working with several cities along the northern coast of Zenthru to create manufacturing cooperatives.

A small gong chimed and everyone went silent as they awaited the formal introduction of the Fire Lord and Fire Lady. Minister Horzun spoke to the crowd. “Ladies and gentlemen, it is my great honor to introduce Fire Lord Lu Ten and Fire Lady Sinlao.”

The crowd politely clapped as the duo entered from the side door of the room. In a way it saddened Min Kai to see Sinlao standing at Lu Ten’s side; Shur Zi had been a great woman and could have done much to help the Fire Nation in their dealings with the earth nations. Min Kai had only met her at a couple of dinner parties, but according to all that she had spoken with, Sinlao was also an intelligent and good-hearted woman that would speak to the needs of the earth people.

The couple waved to the assembled crowds. The room again fell silent as it became clear that Lu Ten was going to speak. “I would like to thank everyone that traveled here to attend yesterday’s ceremony; I know that it is a long trip for many of you and I appreciate your attendance. Now that the civil war that has plagued the Fire Nation is over, I look forward to once again having our nation engage with the rest of the world in a peaceful and mutually beneficial fashion.”

“It was nearly ten years ago that I began working with Azula and Horzun to begin implementing their vision for the Regional Economic Committees. I was glad that the Fire Nation had two great minds to set forth this plan. Today, it is a great honor to have Minister Horzun leading our economic development program for the Fire Nation. Mistress Azula has moved on to other activities, but as all of you know, she is still engaged in world affairs. I hope that we can all sit and discuss how we can move forward and improve the world we live in.” Lu Ten looked around the room after he had finished his speech.

“Thank you, Lord Lu Ten, for those words.” Minister Horzun said as the crowd again clapped politely. “Since the scheduled meeting isn’t for another half an hour, let us mingle and get to know one another before then.”

And with that, Lu Ten and Sinlao began to mingle with the crowd. It wasn’t a large party, so Min Kai knew that she would get a chance to meet with both of them at some point. She continued working her way through the different groups, smiling and backslapping and doing on the social things needed to keep the wheels between the delegations greased.

Finally, she encountered Fire Lady Sinlao meeting with Ambassador Linvik of Bing Ha and Ambassador Longah of Lenth. All three smiled at her as she approached. Sinlao spoke first. “It is nice to see you again, Minister Min Kai. It gladdens my heart that Zenthru is developing into a strong and vibrant nation. The Fire Nation looks forward to discussing ways that our nations can work together in the future.”

“Thank you, Fire Lady. The past two years have indeed seen the fortunes of Zenthru improve. We have a wonderful economic relationship with both Bing Ha and the SDC, but there is always room to work with other trade partners. With knowledge of several types of augmentors being spread throughout the world, there are so many more opportunities for different regions to interact and collaborate.” Min Kai responded, smiling at her three conversation partners.

“Indeed. The metallurgy gains alone have done wonders for our small-scale manufacturing. And the new irrigation designs that the Engraved Thinkers have tailored to each specific region will potentially cause our agricultural output to significantly increase,” Linvin said, a wide smile on his face.

“And the improvements in airship design mean that Lenth can trade directly with the more landlocked regions of the earth continent, making trade much more efficient.” Longah added. “We look forward to seeing how these improvements will assist the Fire Nation too. I personally believe that the more secure and prosperous each nation is, the more likely it is that relations between nations will be guided by mutual benefit rather than violence.”

“I too look forward to how these wonderful inventions will improve the living standards of all my people. It feels like a whole new age is dawning on our world. It is my great hope that violence and bigotry will fall by the wayside and we all learn to live and work with each other in peace and harmony.” Sinlao said, her voice ringing with sincerity.

“Hear, hear!” Linvik said, raising his glass in salute. Min Kai and Longah followed suit. The rest of the mingling went well, with even Lu Ten and Rajeen speaking pleasantly together in a small group. Min Kai had been curious about what they were discussing but decided to let the sleeping polarbear-dog lie.

The formal session was full of declarations of hope and decrees by the Fire Lord that the Fire Nation was intent on joining the new world order. Min Kai felt a warmness in her heart at the words. She didn’t have many favorable views of the Fire Nation, but she loved her own people with all her heart. If improving the fortune of the Fire Nation meant that her people could live in peace and prosperity, then she would not begrudge them their gains.

Like Sinlao had said, it does feel like a whole new age is dawning.

Yue looked down on the city she and her children would be calling home and couldn’t help but be impressed. She had seen how bending had made cities like Agna Qel’a and Omashu function. But here was a city that did the same sort of things without bending.

According to what Iroh had told her, the city had been designed to run by mechanical and electrical machinery working in conjunction with augmentors. There were still some benders used, but they weren’t the backbone of the system.

Yue liked that idea. All her life she had been looked down upon by many because she wasn’t a bender. In Agna Qel’a, that wasn’t as much a hindrance as being born a woman, but she was still treated as lesser. Even had she been born a bender, she would only have been allowed to learn healing. It had seemed sensible when she was young and didn’t know any better, but now that she’s traveled to other places and seen how benders are treated, she know that it was backwards and foolish.

For the first time in her life, she felt that she had a chance to build a life for herself. To be the person she wanted to be. She had loved Zuko, but she didn’t love the Fire Nation. They were vicious and brutal and condescending. Of course, there were enlightened and progressive thinkers in the Fire Nation, but they were generally outshouted by the warmongers. And as much as she loved Zuko, she knew that he fell into the second camp. He just couldn’t understand why the oppressed didn’t want to be like their oppressors.

Azula was one of the enlightened ones though. And she had built an enlightened city in an enlightened region. More than for herself, Yue wanted this life for her children. Especially Yanook. He would have been treated well in the Fire Nation by virtue of being a prince, but he would not have been accepted like Izumi. But here, they could both thrive and grow and learn. Azula had said that she would guarantee that her nieces and nephews would receive the best education that could be provided.

Considering that she was going to be in charge of educating the Avatar’s children, Yue knew that was a promise Azula intended to keep.

“Mommy, look at the fancy machines. They look like little toys.” Izumi said, her face pressed up against the glass of the airship. Yue smiled as she leaned over to get a better look at what was fascinating her daughter.

“Yes, they do. That’s because we’re so high up. It is called perspective. The machines look little because we’re so far away.” Yue explained.

“Pespekive?” Izumi asked.

“Perspective,” Yue repeated gently. “It is a big word. It just means that big things look small if you’re far away and small things can look big if you’re up close.”

“Me see! Me see!” Yanook yelled, trying to climb up into Yue’s lap. She gently reached down and helped him onto the seat beside her. His face was instantly pressed against the glass also. Both kids continued shouting as the airship landed just outside the city proper.

She gathered the wild pair and started herding them towards the door that led to landing area. She managed to keep them under control. The six guards that came with them took up their positions. Two were in the front and the remaining four took up spots behind Yue and her family.

At long last the door finally opened and the whole group exited the airship. Yue smiled when she saw the group waiting for her. Azula, Iroh and Katara were all standing outside.

“Welcome to Gir Mirath! It’s great to see you again, Yue. And it’s nice to see the little ones. Do you remember Aunt Azula?” Azula had bent down so she was closer to Izumi’s level and spoke in a calm, easy voice.

Izumi still hid behind Yue’s leg. Finally, she answered though. “You’re the dragon lady.”

Everyone smiled at the description of Azula. Izumi wasn’t necessarily wrong. Azula gave Izumi a wide smile. “Yep. Do you remember my dragon’s name?”

“Kiva,” Izumi answered, getting bolder and stepping out from behind Yue.

“That’s right. I can tell that you’re a smart little girl.” Azula turned to look at her son. “And you must be Yanook.”

“I Yanook.” The boy agreed.

“Hello, Yanook. You can call me Aunt Azula.”

“Aunt ‘Zula?” Yanook answered.

“Yes, Aunt Azula. Let’s get you guys out of the sun and show you your new home.” Azula stood and looked at Yue. “It’s not as big as the palaces you’re used to but there will be enough room for everyone to have their own bedroom. And there’s an adjoining building where the guards can live.” Azula cast a sly look at Yue’s chief guard. “You don’t want Lefit too close; his snoring can cause the windows to rattle.”

Yue smiled as the guard in question gave out a small laugh. “You were always perceptive, Mistress.”

“I’m glad to see that Yue has a good man like you as a guard.” Azula answered with her own laugh. “Let’s go and get everyone settled after their long journey. We can take the Moving Platform into the city.”

Yue was afraid to ask what a moving platform was, so she just followed Azula. Iroh fell in step with her. “The People Mover is simply an augmented carriage on a track that moves people around the city. It is safe and easy to use.”

And it was quick and easy to get everyone loaded onto the carriage, and Yue was amazed at how smoothly the carriage rolled along the tracks. It was only about a ten-minute ride to their destination.

Katara spoke up once the People Mover came to a stop. “It’s only a short walk from here. And if you’re up for it, I’d like to do a quick evaluation once you’re settled.”

“That would be fine, Katara. We’ve been cooped up for a while, so a short walk actually sounds nice.” Yue smiled as Izumi went over and grabbed Azula’s hand when they went to get off the carriage. Azula smiled and gently helped her down the steps.

Just as Katara had promised, it was a short walk. But the city was beautiful. The buildings were in a totally different style than either the Fire Nation or Earth Kingdom used. The architecture flowed and seemed almost organic, like the steel and wood buildings had been grown from the land rather than artificially placed there. The streets were wide and there was lots of room to walk amongst the trees and open green spaces.

She saw other People Movers rolling around the city. And there were all kinds of exotic machines near the docks, moving cargo to and from the ships. There was so much to take in.

“This is the first city of its kind,” Iroh said. He must have noticed Yue looking around. “It was designed by a very talented urban planner to be both efficient and beautiful. There is little need for carriages or ostrich-horses; everything in the city can be reached in a matter of minutes on foot or by using the People Movers. And it is also visually appealing in my humble opinion.”

“It is very lovely. I think that I’m going to like it here.” Yue said, smiling at Iroh. He smiled back as they made their way into her new home.

Her new home was warm and inviting. It was obviously much smaller than she had become used to, but it felt more like her own space rather than just a reflection of the culture she belonged in.

“We went with a general water tribe feel without being overwhelming. And we didn’t try to add all the touches that make a house a home; we felt that you would want to decorate things to your own vision.” Azula said as Yue walked through the house. She loved it already.

“Thank you, Azula. This is already more than I expected.” Yue couldn’t believe how lucky she was to have people like Azula and Iroh in her life.

“We’ve already arranged for staff to help get you settled. We’ll leave it to you to decide how you want to run your household.” Iroh gave her another warm smile.

“Now that you’ve had a look around, would you mind coming in for your check-up? I won’t be available to do much more until after we deal with the veil issue.” Katara looked a little sad about that. “But you’re not due for another six weeks so everything should be dealt with by then.”

“I understand, Katara. There’s a lot going on right now. But I just want to thank all of you for all that you’ve done for us. I…I know that we weren’t really wanted in the Fire Nation, and I don’t think the Northern Water Tribe wants us either. Thank you for giving us a home.”

Azula stepped up and gave Yue a hug. “No matter what, the three, soon to be four, of you are my family and I will do everything that I can to make sure that you feel welcome here.”

“We are all happy that you came here. This is a wonderful place to raise children, especially for mixed bending families.” Iroh assured her.

As Yue followed Katara into one of the bedrooms to do be evaluated, she thanked Tui and La that she had such wonderful friends and family.

Chapter Text

The time of action is upon them. Both worlds had selected a region at the edge of the Si Wong desert to set up their defensive positions. The area was flat and allowed the groups to have clear sight lines for their disc launchers. Earthbenders had created defensive positions to work from.

And if worse came to worse the sites were distant enough from the population centers that warnings could be sent out to prepare for the onslaught. Both worlds had spotters with either radios or Distance Printers. And a secondary team had been held back to ensure that should the main team fall, more augmentors, weapons and trained users could be mustered. Novae and her team of engravers and designers were being sheltered in Rokishe while Asami, Varrick and Li Nu were holed up in Republic City.

But they were only held in reserve for emergencies. Azula had faith that both teams would be able to get the job done. Everyone was in position; the nervous energy emanating from the group was almost palpable. This was the last briefing before they got underway.

“Alright, everyone has been preparing for this day. Stick to the protocols as longs as possible.” Azula looked around at the team to make sure that everyone knew their role. This was going to be a difficult fight, but she knew that they were as ready as they would ever be.

“We’re ready, Azula. Win or lose, we will give our all,” Katara said, a look of determination on her face.

“I know you will. May fortune smile on us today. Let’s wait for the signal.” Azula nodded and everyone turned to walk away. “And Uncle, make sure that Kiva doesn’t get lazy.”

Iroh stood stock still for a moment before turning and smiling at Azula. “I will keep her on the straight and narrow, Niece.”

Aang took his his dedicated spot and closed his eyes, probably meditating about the task ahead. In many ways their job was the easiest; generate energy and weave into the veil. It was those around her that would potentially bear the brunt of the assault.

A spirit repulsor field had been created around the two of them. According to Ten Vi, it was strong enough to hold back anything they would face. At least in the short term. But the most powerful of the spirits would drain the chi from the reservoirs powering the augmentor in a matter of minutes.

She thought back on her life. One Pai Sho game had started the path to this point. Had she not impressed Grandfather, Father probably would have had her married off years ago. She might even have popped out two or three kids by now.

But Pai Sho led to Mistress Corvylyn. Mistress Corvylyn led to Yotforbu. Yotforbu led to the Scourge. The Scourge led to the Great Spirits and OrkaHaalu. And they led her to Navisi and their magical companions.

She had traveled through time and space to save an untold number of other worlds. But today, she was fighting to save her own.

Woe to those that would threaten Azula’s people.

Navisi and Korra were relieved when the mirror flashed in the distance, signaling that it was time to start.

“They will write epic poems and sing songs about today.” Navisi said as she activated her light sigils.

“They better.” Korra said just before her eyes began to glow and the augmentor powered up. Navisi could sense the build-up of energy as Korra pumped more and more chi and spirit energy into the device.

Suddenly, a beam of focused silver light shot into the sky. Navisi rotated her light sigils, adjusting the wavelength and amplitude of the energy as it fed into the veil. She smiled as she felt it resonate with the weave of the veil; she guided it and shaped it and she felt the frayed strands of the veil growing and merging with healthy portions.

They wove together seamlessly, the strands interlocking and repairing the tear. And she felt the energy of the other world reweaving another portion of the veil. It was a thing of beauty to watch the torn and mutilated veil heal before her very senses.

This process continued for nearly half an hour before she sensed the first extraplanar spirit probing at the edges of the energy beam. This was the weak link in the process; the energy beam created a small portal at the edge of the veil; a weak point that spirits might be able to take advantage of and use as a means of entry to the material realm.

She detected them probing, testing, pushing at the boundary. More came. She could tell the different types. Big, small, powerful, ethereal, groups behaving as one. Conflicts arose between some. But nearly an hour and a half after the process had started, the first one figured out how to get through.

It was decimated quickly by Izuka’s lightning; it was of middling size and strength and therefore no match for the prodigious bender. But as she had feared, once one found a way, many others figured out how to follow.

Izuka and the disc weapon cut down the first entries; this protocol had been established early on. Izuka would handle the more agile ones while the disc launchers would try to take down the bigger and slower ones.

There was only so much that could be done against the smaller ones though. The teams on the ground were ready with their repulsor gloves and waterbending as they made their way towards the Navisi and Korra’s augmentors. Mako stood close by also, unleashing his lightning; he wasn’t nearly as powerful as Izuka but he could still inflict significant damage.

Navisi tried to keep her mind focused as she continued weaving the energy to repair the veil. She had to count on her allies to do their job. But she couldn’t help but worry as more and more spirits crossed over through the portal.

The spirits had decided that Izuka and Druk were the defense that needed to get dealt with first. Druk was truly a magnificent and intelligent being, but even his fire and thick hide weren’t enough to protect him from the onslaught. Izuka unleashed wave after wave of lightning sheets to keep the smaller spirits off of them, but there were simply too many. She focused on keeping them off Druk’s wings; damage those enough and the dragon would fall from the sky.

She became desperate as they began latching onto Druk’s hide. She resorted to her hottest white fire to burn them off where she could. Druk screeched in pain but there was nothing else to be done. A shadow fell on her as she was fighting off a trio of smaller creatures.

Izuka turned in horror at the giant flying kraken thing that descended upon them. She was just able to hit it with a powerful blast of spirit lightning, but it was too big to be stopped with only one attack. Her second attack had just escaped her fingers when a spasming tentacle struck her, knocking her from the saddle.

Her tether held her to Druk but now she was hanging upside down desperately fighting to keep the smaller creatures from reaching her. And she screamed in anger as the tentacle creature wrapped itself around Druk, pulling his wings in.

Her stomach jumped into her throat as they all started tumbling towards the ground. They were all spinning and Izuka knew that death was imminent if she didn’t act fast. It pained her to abandon her ally, but there was nothing she could do for Druk now except avenge him.

She burned the leather cables tethering her to Druk and blasted herself away from the falling dragon. The flames coming from her feet hold her airborn as she fires a lighting bolt at the tentacle spirit, striking just moments before the spirit and the dragon it was holding crash to the ground with a sickening thud.

She flies towards the ground and gracefully lands before separating as many poles as she can, reveling in the power as she unleashes her power on the weakened spirit. The creature begins disintegrating, little balls of light float into the air.

Bolt after bolt is shot at the descending monstrosities. As she turns to join her comrades she stops in horror as she hears unholy moans from the dead dragon behind her. Dread fills her as her gaze falls on her dead ally, as it tries to pull its broken body off the ground, eyes glowing with a swirling mix of red and blue light.

Her bolt of lightning strikes its chest and the entire monstrosity spasms and then the lights in its eyes go out and her friend drops to the ground.

She prays that it won’t get up again as she goes to join her allies.

Jinora had heard tales of the greatest earthbender ever. She thought that Toph must have been great, but surely she wasn’t much stronger than Lin or Suyin.

Toph wasn’t a little stronger than her daughters, she was on a whole different level. Young and strong, with the jevalda giving her vision like an aardvark-bat, she was fast and agile and absolutely deadly with her repulsor gloves.

Jinora and Toph had been fighting in tandem, taking down the smaller spirits that the Iroh and the disc launchers had trouble dealing with. They were tearing through the spirits like the were made of wet paper.

All had been going spectacularly until the defenders fighting alongside Katara had been overwhelmed. Her kickass grandmother quickly dispatched the offending spirit, but a hole in their defenses had formed and now Katara was in danger of being overwhelmed.

“Come on, Little Arrow, SugarQueen needs our help.” Toph was already on her way as the words left her mouth. Jinora quickly followed, the repulsor air from her gloves clearing the way before her.

The spirits must really hate the waterbenders as an extraordinary amount of spirits are assaulting them. But Toph and Jinora arrive before any more could fall.

“Pull back with Jinora,” Toph shouts at the waterbenders as she bends a stone block under them and literally slides them back towards the main defensive group.

Jinora easily jumps over them as she makes her way to Toph. But tears filled her eyes as she knew that she wouldn’t get there in time. There were simply too many of them. She sends air blast after air blast at them as Toph fires shot after shot from her repulsors.

But before her friend falls she hears one last scream. “I am the greatest earthbender in the world!”

And the entire pile of spirits are destroyed as Toph uses the suicide function of the gloves to kill as many of the bastards as she can.

A defender with no hope can order the repulsors to pull their entire chi from their body and release it as a repulsor bomb. And Toph had a tremendous amount of chi to be used as fuel for a bomb.

Jinora can only watch as Toph’s dead body collapses, face up and staring blankly into the sky, her larger than life essence gone. But Jinora had to put thoughts of Toph behind her as yet another wave of spirits come for them.

Aang knows that the spirits will win this battle before the tear is repaired if they continue closing the veil at this pace. The only hope for saving his world is to increase the power he is sending to the veil. He pushes more energy into the augmentor, feeling the burning sensation as an unsustainable amount of chi and spirit energy are being pulled from his body.

But it must be done.

He senses Azula begin weaving even faster, the frayed edges of the tear mending faster and faster. Then he feels the energy from Korra increasing also. Faster and faster the tear was being mended. But Aang was still afraid.

But he could sense his energy mixing with Korra’s now. It was like Raava was connecting with Raava.

Then he realized that he could sense her emotions. Fear. Anger. Hate.

As he weakened from the pull of his energy, he sensed even more from her. As his body was dying, he reached out to his counterpart. A single effort to speak with her.

‘Korra, can you hear me? I can feel your energy, your emotions. Can you feel mine?’

Ever so faintly, he heard a reply. ‘Yes, Aang. I can hear you. Win or lose, we will not survive this battle.’

His heart sinks as he realizes she is right. There is no coming back from this; to close the veil, they must give everything that they have. ‘No, we will not survive. It is our duty to bring balance to the material and spirit worlds. Sometimes this means that we must make the ultimate sacrifice.’

‘Yes, that is our duty. I’m sorry that this will be all that I could give, but if we close the veil, the world can continue the fight. We have allies waiting to fight in our stead when we fall. I’m happy that I was able to speak with you, Aang. Only another Avatar understands the burden that we must bear.’

‘Yes, the others think they know, but they are children who haven’t experienced what we have. And I’m happy to have the opportunity to speak with you also. It sounds like you are a great Avatar.’

“As are you, Aang.”

Aang pauses the conversation as he realizes that he has only minutes to live, but he smiles in joy as he sees that it will be enough to close the veil. He won’t live to see the victory, but Azula and Navis will have enough energy to complete the repair even after the Avatars die.

Aang hears a gentle voice in his head. ‘Aang, it has been an honor to bond with you, to have you as my Avatar, but you must release the Avatar state moments before all your energy is drained or the bond will be irrevocably broken.’

‘I understand, Raava. Thank you for all that you have done for me.’

‘You are welcome, Aang.’

Aang continues his battle while he still can.

Ivaku and Suyin fight with all their skill she can to keep the small spirits away from the disc launcher being manned by Hun Ro’s team; he was on the loading squad. Suyin was amazing; fast and agile and graceful. It was no shock to hear that she had been a dancer.

Her heart had broken watching Druk and Izuka fall from the sky, but there had been at least a small miracle that Izuka had survived. Her huge bolts of lightning were still smiting the larger spirits that came too close.

But she knew that they were losing ground. Without air support the spirits were coming in too fast for the disc launchers to deal with and the ground teams were slowly losing cohesion.

She saw the spirit spider-scorpion coming behind Mako but neither her waterwhip nor Suyin’s repulsor blast could reach it before the sharpened claw cut him down, his body nearly cleaved in half from the attack. But the monstrosity’s victory was short lived as both Ivaku’s and Suyin’s attacks struck immediately afterward.

There was no time to grieve for her fallen comrade as even more spirits came for them as the loss of Mako’s lightning opened yet another hole in their defenses to be exploited. She could only hope that the veil could be closed before they were completely overwhelmed.

Kiva was a wonderful companion; fast and strong and apparently completely resistant to spirit attacks. Without having to worry about defending his steed from anything but the largest of the spirits that could drag her from the sky, Iroh was free to unleash his power on any and all spirits that got in his way.

And unleash his power he did. But he wasn’t a young man anymore and he felt his vitality fading. He and Izuka were on par in terms of sheer power, but he knew that his niece had far more endurance than he could ever hope to match.

He hoped that she was doing well on her own dragon steed. It had been a pleasure to work so closely with her; of all the younger generation, she had been the one he rarely interacted with during her childhood. Hidden away by Ozai, she had been sculpted to become a weapon in his image.

But she had shown herself to be a far better person than her father could have ever hoped to be. And watching her fly under the tutelage of Azula and Navisi had brought tears of joy to his eyes. He was glad that he had seen it, for he knew that he would never see her again.

The tightness in his chest and the discomfort in his arm didn’t bode well for his long-term health. “Kiva, I can’t continue much longer. Take me to the portal.”

Kiva didn’t so much as hesitate to follow his order and immediately sailed into the sky, her powerful wingstrokes pushing them forward at an incredible speed. He continued firing lightning while she unleashed her deadly blue fire.

His bolts were becoming weaker as he had trouble breathing. The altitude wasn’t helping but it was the ever-increasing tightness in his chest that was the biggest problem. There was one last thing he could do before his health faded. It was a technique that he and Izuka had developed. It was the one they had sworn to use if they were to be taken from the battle too soon.

He smiled as the light of the portal gave Kiva a purple hue. As he took his final breath, he separated every pole in his body that he could and infused it with his chi. And in that final moment before he gave his all in this epic struggle, his life flashed before his eyes.

His courtship of Illah. The joy that they had shared when he looked down on Lu Ten’s face the first time he held him in his arms. Playing Pai Sho with his precocious niece. Weeping in despair over Lu Ten’s broken body not once, but twice. The reunion with Lu Ten and his nieces and nephew.

He smiled one last time, even as the pain of the uncontrolled lighting tore through his body and fired into the horde of spirits trying to take him down.

He never saw the destruction he wrought as his dead body fell from Kiva’s back. But she was immune to lighting and she caught his falling body in her clawed feet as she dove to assist with her allies down below. She knew there was no time to mourn the fallen.

Navisi sensed Korra release the augmentor as she left the Avatar state, her body falling to the ground. She smiled up at Navisi one last time as she spoke her final words.

“Close the veil, Navisi. Protect my world.”

Tears filled Navisi’s eyes as she whispered her answer to her friend, knowing that she was beyond hearing now. “I will.”

Navisi held her link to the weave and continue guiding the process. Moments later she felt the flow from the other side falter also. Aang had fallen too. But Azula continued weaving and together they kept the flow. It slowed down but the tear was nearly healed.

But without the Avatar to enter the fray, Navisi saw no way to defeat the spirits once the veil was closed. Her allies were being overwhelmed and even though no more spirits could come through, there wasn’t enough fire power to save the day.

She would have to count on Li Nu and Asami to rally the forces and keep the battle going to defend this Atla from the onslaught. Her Mnaimonatic training is all that kept her from flinching as a mid-size spirit creature assaulted her spirit repulsor field. It wasn’t strong enough to break through, but it was draining the chi from the reservoir.

But just as she did during her testing by Rysa, Navisi kept her focus on the task at hand. But she sensed the chi’s being snuffed out by the monsters around her. And now there were four spirits assaulting her repulsor field. It wasn’t enough though.

The veil would be closed in less than a minute and then Navisi would make the spirits pay dearly for coming to the worlds of her friends. She knew that she would fall, but the spirits would come to understand the full power of the Arts Esoteric before her death.

Relief filled her as the final tears in the veil were woven shut. There was not time to celebrate though, her friends need her.

Navisi summoned the light sigils for the specially designed augmentors she wore; her gauntlets could wield more than four times as much spirit repulsor energy as any normal gauntlet.

But before she could move she heard voices in her head.

‘The veil is closed, young ones.’ Orka said, followed by Haalu. ‘So now we can lend you our strength!”

And Navisi felt her body fill with an immense energy unlike anything that she had ever felt before. Her sense expanded and she felt her consciousness ascending as it was filled with the visions of divine sight. The power was overwhelming and it threatened to consume her soul. Her training took over as she anchored herself and fought against it as it tried to control her, to corrupt her. But she took it and bent it to her will, making it bow to her commands.

She understood now. The Scroll of Penanthranah had not been testing her will to control the weave in this dark hour. It was testing whether she had strength of will to channel OrkaHaalu’s divine power.

And the answer was a resounding yes.

Chapter Text

Lin fought with all the rage she could muster to destroy the abominations that had killed her sister and so many of her friends. She and Ivaku fought to protect the last functioning disc launcher, with a few other intrepid souls still fighting at their side. Tenzin was still a force to be reckoned with as he flitted about, but she could see him struggling through fatigue and injury.

The beam of light had stopped shooting into the sky a few minutes ago and the portal had closed. No more monsters could come through. The problem was that there were already too many to deal with now. But the more they killed now, the better the chances that Li Nu and Asami could mount a defense.

It was unclear whether Korra would be in any shape to help with the fight after closing the veil. By Gnolos’s Blistered Bunyons, she certainly hoped so.

She jumps over a small centipede-slug that is quickly dispatched by Ivaku, but they both stared in terror at the tentacled monstrosity clamboring towards them. Lin prepares to attack when suddenly a giant beam of purple energy tears through the beast and it instantly turned into small balls of light.

Lin turns to see what the hell just happened and as is nearly blinded by the immense bursts of purple light that are being launched at the now fleeing spirits. And her heart is filled with more hope and joy than she thought would ever be possible in a terrible situation like this.

Navisi’s light sigils are glowing with an otherworldly purple energy that hurts Lin’s eyes to look at. The spirits try to escape but their path is blocked by a glowing purple dome that suddenly appears around the entire battle zone.

“Spirits of another realm, you dared to invade the home of my friends and now you shall pay the price for your impertinence.” Navisi says in that powerful, terrifying voice of hers, as she again begins firing bursts of purple energy at the cowering spirits.

Lin isn’t about to let her have all the fun as she again uses her repulsors to hunt down and destroy every spirit that she can find. She smiles to see her comrades in arms taking their revenge on the creatures that inflicted so much death and destruction on their friends and family.

Jinora and Katara hug each other after the last of the spirits had been destroyed by the suddenly godlike power of Azula. She had glowed purple and her four arms had launched attack after attack and eviscerated the invading spirits. And she penned in those that would try to escape, ensuring that none had been able to escape her wrath.

Azula’s glowing form floats towards them and she raises her arms and begins glowing more intensely. Jinora and Katara begin glowing a light purple. Jinora sighs in relief as she feels her wounds heal and her energy being restored.

A wide smile crosses her face as she looks around and sees many of her fallen comrades stop glowing and get to their feet, their seemingly fatal wounds healed. Azula finally floated to the ground.

“I am able to heal all those that still lived. But there are too many that are now beyond my reach.” Azula raised her voice as she turned and looked around at the rejuvenated survivors. “Thanks to the bravery of all of you, we have won the day and resealed the veil!”

“Let us celebrate our victory, but also take time to mourn those that gave their lives in our great struggle. They have the thanks of all the people of Atla and the Great Spirits themselves.” She turned back to Jinora and Navisi. “Katara, could you please lead the effort to gather the fallen so that we may honor them for their sacrifice? I’m being called to meet with our supernatural allies.”

“Of course, Azula.” Katara turned and began walking towards the augmentor where Aang and Azula had been working. Jinora followed, tears in her eyes as she began to realize what the victory had cost them. This world had lost their Avatar. And her world had probably lost Korra.

But she would do what she could to help the living cope with this new world order.

Azula sat on the ground and settled into the Lotus position. With the intoxicating power of OrkaHaalu coursing through her, it was easy to ascend to a higher plane of consciousness. And as expected, she felt herself pulled to another location.

She found herself in the clearing between the ocean and the mountainside, just like in her first interaction with the intermediaries. And tears of joy come to her eyes as she sees Navisi appear beside her and they share a huge hug.

“I’m so glad that you’re okay, Navisi.” Azula paused for just a moment before she asked the question she feared most. “How many survived on your side.”

Tears formed in Navisi’s eyes. “I was able to heal nineteen of the forty-six that fought with us. You had to sense Korra die. And Druk died too. But Izuka, Ivaku, Hun Ro, Lin and Tenzin survived.”

Azula’s heart broke thinking of so many others that fell. “Aang, Toph and Iroh fell in battle here. I was able to heal twenty-two of the forty-one.”

“Yes, it is a terrible thing that so many of your comrades fell in battle, but they will be remembered forever by the Great Spirits and the karma for these deeds will ensure that they are all born into a good life upon reincarnation.” Mukaati said, her face grim.

“We are sorry to place such a burden on you, young ones.” Despite his kraken features, Methus radiated sadness and regret. “But you were our only hope in this dark hour.”

“Had the Great Spirits been forced to intervene again and reseal the veil with their awesome power, it would have been necessary to prune hundreds of worlds from the multiverse, killing untold millions of lives. Lives that would cut out of the wheel of reincarnation forever.” Denuskya floated to them and landed on the ground. “We cannot thank you enough for what you have done.”

“And we owe a great thanks to OrkaHaalu, too. Without her offering her power to the two of you once the tear in the veil was sealed, you too would have died.” Terrathusi sighed deeply at that pronouncement. “And it would have saddened us beyond explanation to lose two wonderful mistresses such as you.”

“It was our honor to help. We have watched you grow and struggle.” Orka said, her voice uncharacteristically soft. Haalu, of course, spoke next. “It was our honor to share our power with you this one time.”

“Thank you for your gift. We would have lost without it.” Navisi bowed to the goddesses and Azula quickly bowed too.

“Our power is much like Ginhaphous’s though, so it was a danger to the veil.” “Only once the tear in the veil was sealed was it safe to share our strength.”

“But like Ginhaphous, they are now a danger to the veil and our multiverse.” Mukaati said. “So they asked to see you one last time before they leave forever.”

Azula couldn’t stop the tears from rolling down her cheeks. They were strange but wonderful and had changed her life so much for the better. “Do you really have to leave forever?”

“We are sorry, young ones, but what Mukaati said is true.” “To visit again is to risk corrupting the veil.”

“We will miss both of you.” Navisi was crying too. “But we will show your statue to everyone that comes to Palathia and they will know the wonder of OrkaHaalu.

Azula and Navisi couldn’t help but laugh as the goddesses started dancing and waving their arms and jiggling their three breasts. “Yes, yes, tell them that we are great.” “Remember us as fondly as we will remember you.”

“It is time for you to return to your people. Go, celebrate your victory and mourn the fallen. But remain vigilant, for there is one more world that you must go and rescue after you and your allies have recovered.” Denuskya gave a small smile.

“And we will leave the Transit Compass with you. It is attuned to Korra’s world and the world that requires your help.” “Yes, yes. Remember us every time you use it. Let your worlds remain friends.”

“Thank you, OrkaHaalu.” Azula quickly stepped to them and gave them a hug, laughing as their large breasts laid on top of her head. Navisi quickly followed suit.

“Goodbye, young ones.” “We will miss you.” And OrkaHaalu’s dancing form faded into nothing.

“We are sorry to see them go, but we are happy that they provided you the power to defend your world.” Methus smiled down at them. “But let us tell you of the mission that we wish for you to take once the affairs of your world are set in order.”

Azula awoke in the same position that she had been in when she started meditating, but the sun was low in the sky.

“We were starting to get a little worried about you.” Katara said with a small smile. But her eyes were red and swollen; she had no doubt shed many tears for the loved ones that had fallen in this great battle.

“Navisi and I had to say our goodbyes to great friends. But let us mourn the dead and prepare to deal with the world. Once things are arranged, we’ll send Jinora back to her world and retrieve the survivors to bring home.” Azula stood up.

“Of course.” Jinora paused, a concerned look on her face. “How bad was it on my Atla?”

“Your father is fine, but Korra, Suyin, and Mako didn’t make it. I’m sorry, Jinora. I doubt it helps right now, but the intermediaries told me that everyone who died defending Atla against the spirits will be blessed in the reincarnation cycle.”

Jinora stepped up and Azula pulled her in for a hug. “I’m glad to hear that, but it still hurts. I’ll never get to see them again.”

“It does hurt. But they died heroes.” Azula said softly. She released Jinora and wiped the tears from her eyes. “Come on. Let’s get things settled so you can go home.”

Lin had never considered herself an emotional person, but it had broken her heart to tell Suyin’s family that she had died defending our world. And it was even worse when the Chief appeared from Gnolos knows where and was crying with the rest of the family.

Asami was trying to console Bolin while Izumi and Katara spoke with a broken and dejected Zuko. Izuka had told him what an honor it was for her to fight with such a magnificent dragon and that without out his support, the forces may not have survived long enough to close the tear in the veil.

Lin had to sigh though as Izumi seemed to be sizing up Izuka as a challenger to her throne. Although she was right to be worried; Lin had seen that girl fight and Izumi’s defeat would be quick and humiliating should there ever be an Agni Kai. But luckily for Izumi, Izuka was intent on going home.

Everyone was gathered in the courtyard of Air Temple Island as Navisi prepared to use the Transit Compass to bring Jinora home. Lin had been glad to hear that she had survived the battle. It sounds like the onslaught had not been as deadly on the other Atla.

“Everyone, prepare yourselves. Jinora is about to make her triumphant return.” Navisi called out in that booming voice of hers. Everyone became quiet as a gold cloud appeared and not one, but two figures walked out.

Lin couldn’t help but smile at the sight of Mistress Azula, although the scar on her left cheek was something new. Maybe they could be scar buddies.

“Greetings, everyone! I am honored to see so many of my friends gathered together in one place. I know it was a terrible battle, but our worlds are safe from the monstrosities on the other side of the veil once again.” A good portion of the crowd cheered her words. “And, of course, I’m happy that Jinora was able to return home to her family and friends.”

Jinora had run to her family, who in turn were flocking to her, enveloping her in a group hug that looks like it may very well result in a broken rib or two. But the girl sure didn’t look to be complaining.

And friends of both worlds flocked to Azula. She cried tears of joy to see her sister and the Azulinati. And she cried tears of sorrow with Bolin and Asami over the deaths of Mako and Korra. Lin sighed that Suyin had never got to meet Azula; she had no doubt that they would have been thick as thieves.

However, Lin didn’t miss the looks that the old-timers and Izumi were giving Azula. Navisi had explained the situation to them, but the memory of this world’s Azula still had hooks into their psyche. She was keeping an eye on them, especially Katara. From what Lin has heard, the four of them would probably get their collective asses handed to them by this Azula even if they were all in their primes.

Lin couldn’t help but smile when Azula finally approached her. “I’m sorry to hear about your sister, Lin. I never got a chance to meet her, but Navisi and Ivaku told me that she was a fierce warrior and a wonderful person.”

“Yes, she was. We didn’t get along for quite a while, but I’m glad we made up before she passed.”

Azula sighed wearily. “I understand entirely. You have my condolences. But I’m happy to see that you came through intact. Had you perished, Navisi might be tempted to become the new Chief of Police just so she can show off her badge more.”

Lin couldn’t help but laugh. Navisi really did love her badge. “She’s a talented young lady. I’d offer her a job if I wasn’t afraid to invoke your wrath.”

“You’re right to be afraid. I won’t accept you poaching my fellow mistress without a fight.” They shared a laugh but Lin quickly sobered up as she saw Izumi and the old-timers coming their way. Azula put her hand on Lin’s arm before she could say anything. “Don’t worry, Lin. I promise that I’ll make sure the conversation remains civil.”

That put Lin at ease. She loved her mother and she liked and respected the others, so she didn’t want to see their demise today. Lin excused herself so that Azula could face the fearsome foursome on her own.

Azula smiled at the four as they approached and decided to be proactive. “It’s good to see you again, Izumi. I hope that all is well in the Fire Nation?”

Izumi kept a polite smile on her face as her aura roiled. A healthy dose of mistrust. A little anger. A smidge of fear. “All is well in the Fire Nation. I hear that much of that is due to you rallying the defenses of two Atla’s.”

“I was one of many. I’m glad that we were able to drive back the spirits and reseal the veil.”

Azula waited as Zuko struggled to find his words. Having met a total of four different young Zuko’s, she was interested to see how an old one presented himself.

Finally, he found his words. “It’s good to see you, Azula. I know that you’re not my Azula, but I’m still happy to meet you.”

She could work with that. “It’s nice to meet you too, Zuko. If you’d like to relive any old memories, let me know and I’ll start calling you Zuzu and belittle your eternal quest for honor.”

He actually laughed at that. “Do you call your Zuko by that nickname?”

Azula gave a small smile. “Not really; that was more Izuka’s nickname. I preferred to call him a dunderhead.”

“Is he one of the ones that called you a fire witch?” Zuko asked in a small voice. He was obviously afraid of the answer.

“Yes, but I understand why he did it. We were not close, and I don’t want to cause an argument by defaming Ursa, so let’s just say that we had a complicated relationship. Perhaps not as complicated as the one you had with your Azula, though.”

“I met her, you know. I met my sister after you left. She lived as an artist and healer in Savan with her wife.” Zuko looked at her askance. “She was quite intrigued by the photograph of you.”

“Who can blame her? She probably hasn’t looked this good in sixty years.” Azula boasted, getting a smile out of Zuko and a guffawing laugh out of Toph.

“I think I like you, Azula. I need a nickname for you!” Toph bellowed, causing quite a few heads to turn in their direction.

“Well, my Toph called me Mistress Deathblades.” Azula answered with a huff. The loss of Toph still stung.

“Yeah, I heard that she died like a boss beating the stuffing out of a bunch of spirits.” Old Toph answered. “She sounds pretty bad-ass. Why did she call you Mistress Deathbla…?”

Azula had been hoping that she would ask that. She rushed forward and had the knife at Toph’s throat before she had finished enunciating the last syllable of her question. “She was impressed with my knife skills.”

Azula removed the knife from Toph’s throat and the earthbender started hooting even louder. “Man, I wish I knew you when I was younger. I bet you’re a blast to hang out with!”

“Indeed, I am. I have no doubt that you were a blast too.” She turned attention to the fourth member of the group. “But I bet you were too busy keeping Twinkletoes in line to get into any trouble, SugarQueen.”

“Between Aang and the children, I stayed pretty busy.” Katara still eyed her suspiciously, but her aura had mellowed out a bit.

“I know that I look like your Azula. I’ve walked six worlds and met multiple versions of many people. But one thing to remember is that no matter how much the different versions look like each other, they are shaped by their specific circumstances. On my world, I taught Katara waterbending and we’ve grown to be friends.”

“From what everyone says, you truly are different. I hope that you are able to bring balance to your world.” Katara answered.

“I hope so too. And I wish all of you well too.” Azula looks at Izumi, who stares back. “And I want to know I’m not holding a grudge, Izumi. I truly hope that the Fire Nation continues to prosper under your watch. But I’m afraid that it is nearly time for us to return to my world. But fear not; the intermediaries are allowing our worlds to remain in contact after we leave. I look forward to collaborating with you.”

“We wish you well too, Azula.” Izumi answered. And both her voice and aura suggested that she might actually meant it.

“Thank you.” Azula turned and made her way to Navisi. She had Bitok contact Rysa to intiate the return home.

“Alright, weary travelers! It’s time to go home. Everybody into their airship or air bison.” Navisi called out.

Final goodbyes were said and promises of continued exchanges were given. There was so much that the two worlds could learn from each other. And they had so much to share with the third world, Azula thought as she and Navisi took Wiggy into the air, followed by three airships. And in just a few short minutes they were through the golden cloud and on their way home.

Chapter Text

Azula’s soul had ached in the aftermath of The Closing, as the battle to reseal the veil had come to be called. So many friends, loved ones and allies had fallen that she had a hard time coming to terms with the losses. But the wounds that had barely begun to heal were being torn open as she had to go and speak with the families and friends of the fallen and share the terrible news.

And now she was holding Ty Lee in her arms as she sobbed over the loss of Aang, the man that she loved and the father of her children. Not to mention the father of four others. Azula thanked the Great Spirits and their intermediaries for allowing her world to remain in contact with Tenzin’s Atla.

Azula and Navisi would be able to help the children learn the basics of airbending techniques and culture, but there were certain things that only bending masters can pass on. And it will mean so much for them to have older, more experienced airbenders to learn from and practice with.

But right now her concern was comforting Ty Lee. “I’m so sorry that this happened, Ty Lee, but Aang was a great hero who saved untold millions of lives. He and Korra will go down as the greatest Avatars in history for what they did.”

“I know, but I loved him so much. And his children won’t have a father. We were supposed to spend our lives together. We were going to rebuild the Air Nomad culture from the ground up.” Ty Lee couldn’t say any more as she started sobbing.

Azula couldn’t help but sob too as she felt the sense of loss. Ty Lee was such a good soul and didn’t deserve this heartache. Frankly, none of the loved ones of the fallen deserved this. But there was nothing to be done except mourn their losses and remember the great sacrifice that each and every one of the fallen made to save not only this world, but hundreds of others if what the intermediaries told her was right.

But that didn’t heal Ty Lee’s pain. Only time could put her broken heart back together.

Lu Ten had cheered when he received the notice via Omnisae that the veil had been repaired and their world was safe from the spirit incursion. But that was all the message said. Azula said that the royals would be arriving via Kiva. Lu Ten had made sure that she knew that Izuka was once again in good royal standing. Her exile had been lifted and she was once again the Crown Princess.

Sinlao gasped and pointed up at the dark shape approaching the palace from the southeast; he couldn’t help but smile as he saw the magnificent dragon approaching. It gracefully flew closer, its wings angling up and giving gentle reverse beats as it approached the designated landing zone.

But his heart jumped into his throat when he saw only two petite riders on the dragon’s back. The crowd of onlookers noticed too, unsure what the arrival of only two royals meant.

Lu Ten knew in a heartbeat that it wasn’t good as he saw the serious looks adorning his cousins’ faces. He felt Sinlao gently grab his arm; her warmth providing a little relief from the icy chill filling him.

Azula spoke first. “Hello, Lu Ten. I believe that we should retire to your private study to discuss an important issue.”

“Of…of course, Azula.” Lu Ten stammered, barely able to hear his own thoughts over the pounding of his heart.

He turned and led the procession to his private study. The guards opened the doors but waited outside upon receiving his hand signal. Once Lu Ten and Sinlao were alone with his cousins, he turned to face them, tears already forming in his eyes.

“I’m sorry, Lu Ten, but Iroh gave his life fighting the spirits that came through the portal. Kiva sensed that he was on the verge of having a heart attack from the strain of the battle, so he ordered her to take him to the portal where he singlehandedly killed dozens of spirits that were trying to invade our home.” Azula explained, tears in her eyes also.

And Lu Ten couldn’t hold his own tears back any longer. He felt Sinlao’s arms go around him, holding him as he sobbed. After a few minutes, he was finally able to control his tears.

There was a terrible question that he had to ask. “Did Father suffer?”

“No, he died quickly as he channeled all of his chi into his lightning.” Izuka answered. “He died a hero and potentially saved untold lives.”

“I am glad that the Dragon of the West roared one last time.” Lu Ten choked up again.

“He is being brought here on my airship and should arrive late tomorrow.” Azula stepped forward and gave him a hug, which he gladly returned. Izuka pulled him in for one as soon as Azula had let him go.

“He will be given the full rites according to Agni. If he has done even half as much as you say, he deserves every bit of it.” Lu Ten wipes the tears away as he tries to compose himself.

“Yes, he does. He was a great man.” Azula answered.

They sat and talked about the battles and how everything went down. The terrible spirits, the death of Aang and Toph, and the heartbreak of losing so many others.

“I was glad that I reconnected with him. He was wrong to do what he did to you, but I really missed him. I’m…I’m not sure I could have recovered had something happened to him before we mended our fences.” Lu Ten smiled at the three ladies.

“I’m glad that you did too, Lu Ten. I obviously didn’t know him as well as the three of you, but he seemed so vibrant and intelligent, while still being able to put people at ease.” Sinlao said, placing her hand on Lu Ten’s forearms.

“I didn’t know him that well growing up, but I was glad that I got to spend so much time with him over the past year and a half. He was a great man and a great father.” Izuka said. And Lu Ten couldn’t help but notice the eerily similar looks of regret on the faces of both the young women.

They were probably comparing his father to theirs. He sighed as he realized just how terrible a comparison that was.

“He was proud of both of you. And now that you’re exile has been lifted, Izuka, I’d like to ask you to return and resume your position of Crown Princess. The Fire Nation needs all the good people that it can find to help us make our way in this new world.”

Izuka gave him a smile. “I think I’d like that. I enjoyed my time in the SDC, and the experience truly expanded my horizons and made me a better person, but I’d like to come back to my people.”

“Muzai is going to need strong leadership, and I can’t think of a better person than you to go there and help them. Mai has grown quite fond of the colony and I’m sure that she could be persuaded to join your office.” Lu Ten smiled as something popped into his mind. “And rumor has it that she has a young suitor in pursuit of her, so she may actually smile once, possibly twice a week.”

All four of them laughed at the thought of a lovestruck Mai. Izuka found her words first. “Either that or I’ll have to help her hide the body. I’m sure we’ll make it work either way.”

Lu Ten knew it was hopeless, but he felt obligated to try anyway. “And you know, Azula, Horzun would love to have you return to the Fire Nation to help forge economic policies for our people.”

Azula laughed but shook her head, just as he expected. “I’m sorry, Lu Ten, I will always have a soft spot for the Fire Nation but I have a different calling. A calling to help the entire world.”

“I understand, Azula. But I may very well be removed from office by the angry citizens of the Fire Nation if I didn’t at least ask for you to come back.”

They spent the next two hours discussing the state of the Fire Nation and reminiscing about Father’s life. He hadn’t been perfect, but he had been a good man and a good father. Lu Ten felt that the Fire Nation was a better place for having him sit on the throne for even a little while.

Ivaku was drained from the experience fighting the spirits, but at last they were home. Gir Mirath was everything that she wanted in a city. And she looked forward to building her life here with Hun Ro. Tears come to her eyes as she thought how close she had come to losing him. He had been struck down by a spirit, bleeding out and on the verge of dying when Navisi had gone full goddess mode and struck down the spirits. And she had healed Hun Ro just in time.

He swears that he felt his soul trying to leave his body when Navisi used her purple juju magic to heal everyone. And not only did it heal the wounds he had just suffered, but it healed his old injuries as well. He had wept tears of joy when he realized his left eye was whole again and his left arm was as good as new.

It had been the only bright spot in an otherwise miserable day. Everyone was happy to have won, but the cost was terrible. But now they were home and they could focus on living their best lives together. Hun Ro was ecstatic to be working with Mayor Vinda full-time again and Ivaku was excited to put her healing skills to work.

Which is where she was headed right now. Yue was going into labor! Ivaku and Katara would be there to hold her hand and make sure that everything went smoothly. This wasn’t Yue’s first time, of course, but the two previous labors had been long but no other real complications.

The door to Yue’s house opened as Ivaku approached; she smiled at the governess that watched over Izumi and Yanook. “Good afternoon, Ubla.”

“Good afternoon, Master Ivaku. Lady Yue and Master Katara are in the main bedchamber.” Ubla answered with a warm smile.

Ivaku quickly made her way up to Yue’s bedchamber. Yue was propped up in the bed while Katara screened the amniotic sack with waterbending, making sure that the orientation was appropriate and that the umbilical cord wasn’t going to interfere with the birth.

Katara smiled at Ivaku and she knew that things were going well; she couldn’t help but smile back at Katara and the expectant mother.

“Alright, Yue, let’s get you ready to have another baby.” Ivaku smiled at her friend and got busy getting things set up.

“With the threat of the torn veil no longer hanging over our head, we can move forward now with the full development plan. Most of the nations are on board. Social issues are going to be an issue that will divide our people, but economic progress is something all of the nations seem to favor.” Azula said. “At least for now.”

“I can’t wait for the world to blossom!” Hun Ro nearly shouted, causing nearly all of the other patrons in the tea shop to turn and stare at him. But he just kept talking loudly in his charming yet oblivious fashion. “And if we can start bringing in technology from Tenzin’s Atla, think of all the great things we can do.”

Navisi couldn’t help but laugh at the big lug. “Yes, it will be awesome to bring in their technology. But we need to be careful to introduce change in such a way that we don’t overwhelm the fragile peace that has been cobbled together.”

“Indeed, in my travels I was able to talk with some brilliant people from very technologically advanced worlds. And they all told me the same thing; technology is great but the benefits are often unevenly distributed in society if things aren’t handled carefully.” Azula said with a sigh.

“We’re putting together a committee with representatives from all the major players to work out a plan how to bring this technology in.” Vinda answered.

“Yes, we need to have a plan. Successor Rajeen will be the lead here. Li Nu and Asami really hit it off and they will be the lead technical liasons for the two worlds.” Azula smirked at the others. “Although, I would have loved to see what would have happened had Novae and Varrick been put in charge.”

“We know that you’re going to be busy, Azula. Rebuilding your order and raising the next generation of airbenders is a big task.” Hun Ro said, keeping his voice to just low enough that the windows of the shop weren’t vibrating.

“Indeed. There is a lot to do here. Especially, since Navisi is going to be offworld for a while.” Azula smiled at Navisi, who couldn’t help but smile back.

“I know that you guys are putting together a huge airship fleet and gathering all kinds of specialists and supplies from both worlds. Are you going to tell us what is going on?” Vinda pleaded, making polarbear-puppy eyes at Azula.

Azula and Navisi exchanged a glance before answering. “No.”

They laughed at their friends dismay but Navisi turned her head away from them as she received a message from Omnisae.

She smiled as she addressed her friends. “Yue just had a healthy baby girl. She’s ready for visitors.”

Wide grins spread across everyone’s faces as they finished their drinks and began making the short walk over to Yue’s house.

The door opened before they could even knock. Ubla gave everyone a wide smile. “The lady will see you; she and the baby are in the main bedchamber.”

“Thank you, Ubla.” Azula answered as they all rushed up the stairs to go see the newest member of the royal family.

Katara was smiling at them as they approached. “Mother and baby are both doing great. There’s enough room for everyone, but just be quiet and respectful while they are bonding.”

“Of course, Katara.” Navisi said. She hadn’t worked her way up to delivering babies yet. But they had developed a bunch of new ideas for healing augmentors based on what they had learned building better waterbending augmentors for fighting spirits.

They all walked through the door but poor Hun Ro and Vinda ran into the backs of Azula and Navisi, who had come to a screeching halt at the sight before them.

Yue smiled at them, her face flushed with maternal joy. “Come and meet my new bundle of joy, Yuka. Ivaku and Katara say that she is a waterbender.”

Yuka.

Navisi thought that was a nice name for the newborn Avatar.

Epilogue

Jin watched over the other cooks as the evening meal was prepared. The stews were simmering properly and the breads were browning nicely. This was going to be a good meal.

She was so excited. The Harvest Celebration was the first real community festival since the city of Yun Zhi had been refounded.

With the agricultural heartland to the northwest and the abundant fishing of Full Moon Bay, they had been able to build a real civic center. But it was a constant struggle to hold out against the various warlords that appeared in the countryside.

It had been three years since the Turned had gone berserk and died out. But two-legged monsters still walked among them.

There were far fewer benders than before, but many of them lorded their powers over those around them whenever possible. But no one had a bender on par with Toph. She was a one woman wrecking crew that kept the worst of the bandits at bay.

This had been the first real harvest they had managed to achieve. They had enough to feed everyone in the community and put some aside for leaner times. And they had plenty of starter seed for next year’s crops.

And to top it all off, they were planning a wedding! It had taken a while, but Longshot finally worked up the courage to ask Smellerbee to marry him. And she had asked Jin to be the Maid of Honor! It was all so exciting.

“Come on ladies and gents! Let’s get the food delivered to the tables outside so we can prepare for the customers.” Jin shouted, getting everyone’s attention.

The booths had different styles of food and drink, but there was something for everyone. It was shaping up to be a beautiful day.

“What is that?!” A voice shouted. Jin looked around and saw people looking up into the sky.

And she put a hand over her mouth in fear and shock as a large golden cloud appeared in the sky over the waters of Full Moon Bay. And to her utter astonishment, an air bison appeared from the cloud. And it was soon followed by more than a dozen airships.

She didn’t know what to make of the situation as the air bison gracefully descended towards the city. The crowds pulled back in alarm as the great beast landed. Her eyes went wild with shock as she recognized one of the two girls that climbed down from the air bison’s saddle.

She heard a gasp next to her; Jin turned to see Shur Zi looking at the approaching figures with her hand over her mouth.

“Greetings and salutations! My name is Mistress Navisi of the Arts Esoteric. It is good to see some familiar faces in the crowd.” Tears came to Jin’s eyes as Navisi smiled at her. She ran forward and gave Navisi a big hug. Smellerbee came running up a moment later and joined in on the hug.

“It’s great to see you, Navisi. Where did you go? What did you do to the Turned? Who came with you?” Jin started spouting questions as quickly as she could.

“Jin, let the poor girl answer before you ask more.” Shur Zi said, approaching in a more calm and dignified manner.

“It’s alright, Shur Zi. I expected my return to cause a stir.” Navisi answered with a laugh. She paused for a moment as two more figures approached. Mai and Toph.

Mai was the first to speak. “We have heard great things about you, Mistress Navisi. Is this title new?”

“I received it after I left the pod but I’ve had it for a while. And to answer a few of Jin’s questions. We removed the Spear of Canto from the Avatar’s body to prevent any more of the Turned being created; although you can imagine our surprise when the Turned around us all went wild.”

“But most importantly, I’ve been tasked by the intermediaries of the Great Spirits themselves to come and help my people recover from the terrible ordeal that has afflicted you. My friends have brought food, medicine, and general supplies to help you rebuild. And I’ve brought some people that would like to meet you.”

Navisi turned to the water tribe woman next to her. “Master Ivaku, why don’t you invite your husband and sister-in-law to come meet my friends.”

Ivaku gave a wide smile. “I think that would be a great idea.”

“Mistress Asundra sends her regards. She may come to visit once the circumstances of my return have been explained and I get a better understanding of your situation and needs. Toph can verify that everything I just said was true.” Navisi explained, looking over at Toph.

“Every word of it.” Toph smiled at Navisi. “We owe you a big thanks for getting rid of the gray goblins for us.”

“It was my pleasure, Toph.”

Jin couldn’t help the smile that spread across her face. Things had been going well but life was hard and all it took was one bad harvest or a powerful attack and things could go south.

But now Navisi had returned with friends that would help them. Things were finally going to get better for her world.